The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutBelle Terrace Swim Center Augusta Richmond GA DOCUMENT NAME: be. II e.- T-ffo;u:e ~'M CeV\-t-ey DOCUMENT TYPE: L Of) .fr{A.C ~ ;001 \C) BOX NUMBER: cJ. YEAR: FILE NUMBER: l?- q 5 0 /~}.. ~ NUMBER OF PAGES: \.Y' div#/cfl9~9 . COt\TRACT DOCUMENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE ~~ "f~ BELLE TERRA,CE SWIM CENTER OWNER AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION-COUNCIL Richmond County, Georgia . Prepared by: PREClSION PLANNING, INC, Consulting P/annars, engineers, Architects, & Surveyors 400 Pike Boulev2rd p, O. Box 2210 Lawrcnce'/ille, Georgia 30246 (770) 338-8000 P.ugusl, 1996 ",c . ~ {>o, i.....' , -~. -<.,. -,- ( ~ ~ ill o ~ o u ~ ~ g U ~ ~ ~ o ill ~ ~ o PRODUCER A.cORL?':.,.,.li:I:;~I;lm!ig!.!ilil.g!:llilillllg"III.!..~I:II,!'!!ilil:~.g:mll'~:I:i!.!!,~~~.i::.. ",'.'.. DA;;7;;;~ THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER, THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND. EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW, COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE Grah~-Naylor Agency, Inc, 1355 Terrell Mill Rd Bldg 1464 Marietta GA 30067 ei Phone No, INSURED Fax No, COMPANY A Northern Insurance/Maryland COMPANY B Maryland Casualty COMPANY C THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES INDICA TED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REO EMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTA . THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS. EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLlC S, LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS, CO LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POUCY EFFECTIVE POUCY EXPIRATION DATE IMMJDD/yYI DATE (MM/DDIYY) UMlTS GENERAL UABlUTY A COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE [!] OCCUR OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PAOT AUTOMOBILE UABIUTY A X ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS X HIRED AUTOS NON,OWNED AUTOS EC 86061017 GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 12/31/96 12/31/97 PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1,000,000 " EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone fire' 50,000 MED EXP IAny one person) 5,000 12/31/97 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person I BODILY INJURY (Per eccident} PROPERTY DAMAGE AUTO ONLY, EA ACCIDENT OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT $ AGGREGATE A X UMBRELLA FORM OBA 69574680 OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' UABIUTY A THE PROPRIETOR/ INCL TC7 91972332 PARTNERS/EXECUTIVE OFFICERS ARE: EXCL OTHER A Lease/Rented Eqpt EPA 27589713 A Installation l"ltr EPA 27589713 12/31/96 EACH OCCURRENCE AGGREGATE $12,000,000 $12,000,000 12/31/96 12/31/96 12/31/96 $1000 Ded $1000 Ded $300,000 $250,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATlONS/LOCATlONSNEHIClESISPEClAL ITEMS Certificate holder is additional insured for General Liability with re to the following project: Belle Terrace Swim Center, Augusta, GA AUGUS-6 . Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council 505 City-County Building Augusta GA 30911 ACOff!) 25-5(j'/95))::) . ........ .... ............ ...... ..........",..... .......... ..................... .......... .... ........ .....". .. , , . . . Addendum No, One (1) ADDENDUM Date: September 13. 1996 Architect's Project No, 96-099 Project: Belle Terrace Swim Center CLIENT: Augusta-Richmond County Commission Council Contract for: General Contracting This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and Construction Drawings and modifies the original Bid Documents for the above referenced project. CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A, SPECIFICATIONS 1. Section 13152 Swimming Pools and Equipment (as prepared by Paddock Pool Company), A,09 Bonds, first paragraph - replace the word "Owner" with "General Contractor." 2, Manufacturers of products submitted "as equal" and approved (pending compliance with project technical specifications): Section 03300 13152 15100 Manufacturers/Product, Model or Series Meadows - Seal tight CS-309 Teledyne Laars - Commercial Pool Heaters NCA FD Series - Automatic Fire Dampers NCA Model MBD-57 - Rectangular Manual Dampers Model PBD-20RS - Round Manual Dampers Arrow Type 1770 - Rectangular Manual Dampers Type 200VCRD - Round Manual Dampers 3, Pool subcontractors and suppliers submitted "as equal" and approved (pending compliance with project technical specifications): . Augusta Pool Company Page I . . . B. CLARIFICATIONS 1, All materials and labor for the complete pool package as described in the drawings and specifications prepared by Paddock Pool Company, as well as all associated bonding, shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor, as part of this Contract. 2. Locations of concrete paving as shown on Sheets Cl and C2 of the Drawings shall take precedence over paving locations indicated on other drawing sheets, END OF ADDENDUM NO, ONE (1) Page 2 . . . Addendum No, Two (2) ADDENDUM Date: SelJtember 19. 1996 Architect's Project No, 96-099 Project: Belle Terrace Swim Center CLIENT: Augusta-Richmond County Commission Council Contract for: General Contracting This Addendum forms a pan of the Contract Documents and Construction Drawings and modifies the original Bid Documents for the above referenced project. CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A, SPECIFICATIONS 1. SECTION 00300, Bid Form; See attached Bid Form with revision to Alternate No, 3. 2, SECTION 01023, Article 1.02, Paragraph B; Revise to read: Section 00300 - Bid Form: The undersigned proposes to furnish all services, labor, and materials required by them for the entire work and to include the contingency amount noted below within the Lump Sum Base Bid in accord with said documents, 3, SECTION 01023, Article 1.03, Paragraph A; Revise to read: Allow the lump sum of $7,500.00 for disbursal at Owners instructions, 4, SECTION 01030, Article 3,01, Paragraph A; Revise Alternate No, 3 to read: Provide slip resistant floor finish (as specified in Section 09900 "Paint" for swim area floor) in men's and women's shower areas and vestibules in lieu of ceramic floor tile, Page 1 . 5, SECTION 03300, Article 3,03, Paragraph A, Subparagraph 3; Revise to read: 3. Joints shall be constructed with keyed plastic forms by W.R, Meadows Sealtight or Architect approved equal. 6. SECTION 04200, Article 2,03, Paragraph D; Delete in its entirety. 7, SECTION 04200, Article 2,05, Paragraph B, Subparagraph 1; Revise to read: 1. Ladder design with continuous perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o,c. 8, SECTION 04200, Article 2,05, Paragraph C, Subparagraph 1; Revise to read: 1. Ladder design with continuous perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o,c, 9, SECTION 04200, Article 3,04, Paragraph J; . Revise to read: J, Build non-rated, non-load bearing interior partitions to one masonry course above finish ceiling elevation, Build one-hour fire rated non-load bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of roof structure above and as follows: 10. Manufacturers of products submitted as-equal and approved (pending compliance with technical specifications) : Section Manufacturer/Product. Model or Series 10165/ 10170 Designrite, Solid Phenolic Shower and Toilet Compartments 10420 Henry Graphics, Signage 13122 Ceco, Metal Building Systems Gulf States, Metal Building Systems 15200 Precision Plumbing Products, "SC" Series Water Hammer Arrestors MCC Powers Process Controls, Model P902H-K-I P-5 Shower Trim . MCC Powers Process Controls, Model P902H-8-W P-5H Shower Trim Page 2 . B, DRAWINGS 1, SHEET C3: No washed gravel is to be provided under sidewalks. Refer to concrete paving details on this sheet. Disregard gravel under sidewalks on Details 71 AS ,1 and SI A4 ,1. 2, SHEET A2,I: Revise Plan Key Notes 11 and 12 to read: "Lockers - See Specifications" and "Locker Room Bench - See Specifications," 3, SHEET AS,I: Detail 4/AS,1 should indicate split-face block as "El" (not "Fl "). 4. SHEET AS ,1: Eliminate the words "pre-engineered aluminum" from Symbol "E4" on the Exterior Finish Legend on Sheet AS ,1, S, SHEET A6.1: Refer to Section Detail of canopy steel connection to concrete block wall (see attached Exhibit No, 1), 6, Disregard indication of 4" high veneer brick shown on drawings, All veneer brick on building shall be modular size as specified in Specification Section 04200. 7, SHEET A9,1: Finish reference symbols shall be revised as follows: 8, . 9, 10, 11. 12. 13, Room 101 - WA/FA Room 102 - W AIFE Room 103 - W AlFE SHEET S2: Disregard reference to steel columns as 1/4" thick, Cl shall be TS 4 x 4 x 3/16 as specified on column schedule, SHEET S3: Wave radii on 2/S3 shall be as detailed on 61 AS ,1. SHEET S3: Disregard reference to tube wave as TS 6 x 6. Tube wave should be TS 8 x 3 x 3/16, SHEET S3: Refer to Structural Detail for TS 8 x 3 x 3/16 strut connection to wall (see attached Exhibit No.2), SHEET S3: Details I/S3 and 2/S3 scale should be 1/8" = l' - 0" rather than 3/4" = l' - 0", Provide control joints at column lines FS, DS and BS in interior masonry wall (see Structural Detail on attached Exhibit No, 3), C. CLARIFICATIONS . 1. Veneer brick size shall be as indicated in SECTION 04200, Article 2,03, Paragraph C, Subparagraph S, Item a, 2, Split face masonry units to match specifications for concrete masonry units in SECTION 04200, Select units from available manufacturers listed under Part 2,01, Select masonry to match Blue Circle/Williams Brothers "Spanish White 32H," 3. Colored mortar in SECTION 04200 to match Coosa "Coosa Gray" masonry cement. Page 3 . 4. The masonry side wall flashing will be attached to the eave strut as indicated on Detail 6/ A6.l. The metal building manufacturer will provide additional information on the fastening system in the shop drawings. 5. The gutters will be attached with gutter clips as indicated on Detail 6/ A6.l. The metal building manufacturer will provide additional information on the fastening system in the shop drawings. 6. Per Alternate #4, the entire canopy including the tube steel wave, the column system, and the canopy framing system as shown in Details 4/ A4.1 and 5/ A4.1 will be replaced by the metal building manufacturer's standard metal canopy system (19' - 2" wide by 8' - 0" deep to match area shown on 1/ A4.1). 7. Concrete stain specified on Sheet A9.1 shall match Behr Plus 10 colors (available at Home Depot). 8. Exterior building signage letters noted on Sheet A5.l as E16 and E17 shall be Helvetica font. 9. Per Sheet Sl General Conditions, Item G., the roof design load of 24 Ib/sf is intended to identify the load carried by the steel bar joist system only, and not the metal roof system. The design loads for the metal roof panel and purl in system are to be determined by the metal building manufacturer. END OF ADDENDUM NO. TWO (2) . . Page 4 Section 00300 . BID FORM Proposal for General Contracting for the Belle Terrace Swim Center Proposal submitted by ,(hereinafter referred to as "BIDDER"). (Name of Contractor) Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council (Hereinafter referred to as "OWNER") Room 605, City-County Municipal Building II Augusta, Georgia 30911 Gentlemen: The BIDDER by making a bid represents that the following have taken place: The BIDDER has read and understands the bidding documents and the bid is made in accordance therewith. The BIDDER has read and understands the bidding or contract documents to the extent that such documentation relates to the work for which the bid is submitted and to other portions of the project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. . The BIDDER has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and has correlated the BIDDER'S personal observations with the requirements of the proposed contract documents. The BID is based upon the materials, equipment, and systems required by the bidding documents without exception. The BIDDER has studied and compared the bidding documents with each other and has reported to the architect any errors, inconsistencies, or ambiguities discovered. The BIDDER hereby agrees to commence work under this contract on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of OWNER and to fully complete the project within the time frame as described in Section 00030 Advertisement for Bids. The BIDDER acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: ADDENDUM NO. DATE RECEIVED . 96-099/8-96 BID FORM 00300-1 . . . The BIDDER understands that the OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities in the bidding. The BIDDER agrees that his bid shall be binding and may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The BIDDER agrees that the bid security attached in the sum of ten (10%) percent of the total bid is to become the property of the OWNER in the event the Contract and bonds are not executed within the time set forth, as liquidated damages for the delay and additional expense to the OWNER caused thereby. The BIDDER proposes to furnish all services, labor, and materials required by them for the entire work and to include a construction contingency amount of $7,500 within the Lump Sum Base Bid in accord with said documents for the sum of: LUMP SUM BASE BID $ (Dollars) ($ ) Which sum is hereinafter called the "Base Bid". The undersigned further proposes that should any of the following alternates (See Section 01030 for description) be accepted and be incorporated in the Contract, the Base Bid will be altered in each case as follows: (Circle either Add or Deduct, To or From Base Bid, whichever applies). Alternate No. I: Provide V.C.T. (per Specification Section 09660) in men's and women's locker areas in lieu of ceramic floor tile. ADDfDEDUCT $ ($ ) Dollars Alternate No.2: Provide epoxy painted C.M. U. (per Specification Section 09900) in men's and women's shower areas in lieu of ceramic wall tile. ADDfDEDUCT $ ($ ) Dollars 96-099/8-96 BID FORM 00300-2 . Alternate No.3: Provide slip resistant floor finish (as specified in Section 09900 "Paint" for swim area floor) in men's and women's shower areas and vestibules in lieu of ceramic floor tile. ADDfDEDUCT $ ($ ) Dollars Alternate No.4: Replace entry canopy and column system at north elevation with metal building manufacturer's standard metal canopy system (19'-2" wide by 8'-0" deep to match area shown on lIA4.1). Nautical light fixtures to be mounted to metal building at same elevation as shown on drawings. ADD/DEDUCT $ ($ ) Dollars Alternate No.5: Replace all indicated split face concrete block with smooth face concrete block. See drawing 2/A6.1 and plan for extents. ADDfDEDUCT $ . ($ ) Dollars Alternate No.6: Omit lockers and benches as indicated on Drawings and Specification Section 10505. ADDfDEDUCT $ ($ ) Dollars Alternate No.7: Omit racing equipment, excluding anchor bolts, as indicated on Pool Manufacturer's Drawings. Anchor bolts will remain as part of the Construction Documents with or without the equipment. ADDfDEDUCT $ ($ ) Dollars . 96-099/8-96 BID FORM 00300-3 . . . A TrEST: Respectfully Submitted: By: (Signature) Title: Business Address: Federal I.D. or Social Security No.: Name: NOTE: (Please Type) Altesrfor a corporation must be by the corporate secretary; for a partnership by another panner; for an individual by a Notary. END OF SECTION 00300 96-099/8-96 BID FORM 00300-4 . GROUT CELLS SOLID FOR TUBE STEEL AND CONNECTION TO C.M.U., SEE STRUCTURAL . EXI-HBIT NO.2 CONTINUOUS CLOSED CELL BACKER ROD AND SEALANT (TYPICAL ALL SIDES OF TUBE STEEL) 12" LONG SECTION OF TI-lRU-WALL FLASI-lING Section Detail SCALE I In" . 1'-"''' SHEET A61 96 II JOB NUMBER : 9609911 DESCRIPTION ADDENDUM f/2 I DATE: 27 AUG. . DA TE NO. 09/19/96 ADDENDUM NO. 2 EXHIBIT NO.1 lBEllE 1I1ERMCE SWl[M[ CJEN11ER AUGUSTA, GEORGIA I) ~!~.s~~~~eTr~~~~p~U!~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE, GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822-5990 . . ~ --- I TS8)(3)(3/16 (CURVEO) I ~ ROOLFRAMING PLAN SCAlE: 1 Iff '"' 1 '-Q'" J/16 J I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3/16 :Y'8~ END PlATE- TSBll3x3/16 (~lIRvEO) PLAN DETAIL SCALE: 3/4- = 1'-r:f' I DATE: 27 AUG. 96 II JOB NUMBER, 9609911 DESCRIPTION ADDENDUM #2 ADDENDUM NO. 2 EXHIBIT NO. 2 DA TE NO. 09/19/96 It 1/2x12x12 WITH (4) 3/4 DIA. WEDGE ANCHORS TO GROUT FILLED eMU TS8lC3xJ/16 (f;) BELLE 11ERAACE SWJIM CIEN11EJR AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~.sI~~~~!~t~~~&G~u~: 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822 5990 ~~'''.''''._..__'..''...''''H....._''''.______'..''''''___...'.''............................................................._.........._.........n..............._........__...........__........U....__...__.......__...__...__.____..U...................__.........____............... . (2)-14 VERT. IN GROUT FILLED CELL 1/~"0 ROO ANCHOR WELDED TO COLUMN r . PLAN DETAIL SCALE: 3/4- : "-0" I DATE: 27 AUG. 96 II JOB NUMBER: 9609911 DA TE NO. DESCRIPnON 09/19/96 ADDENDUM #2 '1. - 4 0 TRIANGULAR TIE AT 15' o.c. VERT. WELDED TO COLUMN CONTROL JOINT SEE ARCH OWGS. FOR LOCATION No. 9 GA. HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING ftf5' o.c. aD S4 ADDENDUM NO. 2 EXlDBIT NO. 3 . BEllE 1rlERAACE SW1IM ClENllER AUGUSTA, GEORGIA . ~~~5sI~~~~eT~~~~~&G~U~~; 400 PIKE BOULEVARD P.O. BOX 2210 PHONE: (770) 338-8000 LAWRENCEVlLLE. GEORGIA 30246 FAX: (770) 822 5990 . BELLE TERRACE SWIM CENTER T ABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLES '/~E~O' ~ I. BIDDING REQUIREMENTS: &)',ro. -'~' f'~ .;:AED p...?'v SECTION 00030 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS .................... -1 to 00030-3 SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (AIA A701) . . . . . . . . . .. 00100-1 to 00100-7 SECTION 00101 - SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .............. 00101-1 SECTION 00300 - BID FORM .................................. 00300-1 to 00300-4 SECTION 00310 - PARTNERSHIP CERTIFICATE................ . ....... .. .. . 00310-1 SECTION 00320 - CORPORATE CERTIFICATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00320-1 SECTION 00321 - INDIVIDUAL CERTIFICATE .............................. 00321-1 SECTION 00410 - BID BOND (AlA A3lO) .......................... 00410-1 to 00410-2 SECTION 00420 - CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT (AlA A305) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 00420-1 to 00420-7 SECTION 00430 - SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (AlA G805) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00430-1 to 00430-3 SECTION 00480 - NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER ........... 00480-1 SECTION 00481 - NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR ........ 00481-1 . II. CONTRACT FORMS: SECTION 00500 - AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER & CONTRACTOR (AIA AlOl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00500-1 to 00500-7 SECTION 00520 - CERTIFICATE OF COUNTY ATrORNEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00520-1 SECTION 00530 - NOTICE OF AWARD .......................... 00530-1 to 00530-2 SECTION 00540 - NOTICE TO PROCEED ................................. 00540-1 SECTION 00610 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND (AlA 312) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 00610-1 to 00610-7 III. CONTRACT CONDITIONS: SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (AlA A201) ............. 00700-1 to 00700-25 SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ................. 00800-1 to 00800-8 SECTION 00840 - ADMINISTRATIVE & PROCEDURAL ITEMS .......... 00840-1 to 00840-5 IV. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: DIVISION 1 SECTION 01023 - CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE. ........................... 01023-1 SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01027-1 to 01027-5 SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01030-1 to 01030-2 SECTION 01035 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ................... 01035-1 to 01035-3 SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01040-1 to 01040-3 SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01050-1 to 01050-3 SECTION 01055 - CONSTRUCTION STAKING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01055-1 to 01055-2 SECTION 01095 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS ....... 01095-1 to 01095-22 SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS ........................... 01200-1 to 01200-4 SECTION 01300 - SUBMITIALS ................................. 01300-1 to 01300-8 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01400-1 to 01400-4 . 96-099/8-96 Table of Contents .f :*: \"l TECHNICAL SPECIFICA TIO~S (Continued) ~ ~ '. \ . . +, 'Y--.' , _' ~ 0, ); . ~ If' :""SEe~'00N'D.ITLES PAGES . .. .::;.-. ..::{.~" ,;:.'., SECTION 01500 - CONSTRriCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS ............ 01500-1 to 01500-11 SECTION 01600 _ MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ................... 01600-1 to 01600-5 SECTION 01631 _ SUBSTITUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01631-1 to 01631-3 SECTION 01700 _ CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . .. 01700-1 to 01700-10 SECTION 01710 - FINAL CLEANING ............................. 01710-1 to 01710-3 SECTION 01720 _ PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS .................. 01720-1 to 01720-3 SECTION 01730 _ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . 01730-1 to 01730-4 SECTION 01740 _ WARRANTIES ................................ 01740-1 to 01740-3 . DIVISION 2 SECTION 02110 _ SITE CLEARING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02110-1 to 02110-3 SECTION 02200 _ EARTHWORK .............................. 02200-1 to 02200-11 SECTION 02281 _ TERMITE CONTROL .......................... 02281-1 to 02281-2 SECTION 02520 _ PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING. . . . . . . . .. 02520-1 to 02520-12 SECTION 02665 - WATER SYSTEMS ............................ 02665-1 to 02665-21 SECTION 02700 _ SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02700-1 to 02700-23 SECTION 02831 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02831-1 to 02831-7 DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03300-1 to 03300-15 . DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 _ UNIT MASONRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 04200-1 to 04200-20 DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 _ STRUCTURAL STEEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05120-1 to 05120-5 SECTION 05200 - OPEN WEB JOISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05200-1 to 05200-2 DIVISION 6 SECTION 06105 _ MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY ................... 06105-1 to 06105-4 SECTION 06402 _ INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK .......... 06402-1 to 06402-6 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07160 _ BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING .................... 07160-1 to 07160-3 SECTION 07210 _ BUILDING INSULATION ....................... 07210-1 to 07210-5 SECTION 07901 _ JOINT SEALANTS ........................... 07901-1 to 07901-12 DIVISION 8 SECTION 08111 _ STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.......... 08111-1 to 08111-5 SECTION 08510 _ STEEL WINDOWS. ., ..... ... . . .... ....... . . .. .. 08510-1 to 08510-5 SECTION 08710 _ FINISH HARDWARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08710-1 to 08710-7 SECTION 08800 _ GLAZING .................................. 08800-1 to 08800-5 DIVISION 9 SECTION 09310 _ CERAMIC TILE... . .... . .. ... . . . ..... .. ., . . . ., 09310-1 to 09310-10 96-099/8-96 11 Table of Contents . SECTION TITLES . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 09510- SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING ........................ 09650-1 to 09650-4 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING ................................. 09900-1 to 09900-11 DIVISION 10 SECTION 10165 - SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS. . . . . . . . . SECTION 10170 - SOLID PHENOLIC SHOWER DIVIDERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 10420 - SIGNAGE .................................... SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS ............:................ SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES ... SECTION 10800 - TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES ................. 10165-1 to 10165-4 I 0 I 70-1 to I 0 I 70-4 10420-1 to 10420-2 10505- I to 10505-6 10522-1 to 10522-2 10800-1 to 10800-4 DIVISION 11 NOT USED DIVISION 12 NOT USED . DIVISION 13 SECTION 13122 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 13122-1 to 13122-10 DIVISION 14 NOT USED DIVISION 15 SECTION 15100 - AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, VENTILATION...... 15100-1 to 15100-11 SECTION 15200 - PLUMBING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15200-1 to 15200-5 DIVISION 16 SECTION 16050 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL ....................... 16050-1 to 16050-4 SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS ................................. 16110-1 to 16110-7 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS .............................. 16120-1 to 16120-5 SECTION 16130 - BOXES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 16130-1 to 16130-5 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES ............................ 16140-1 to 16140-4 SECTION 16170 - MOTOR & EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 16170-1 SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ........................... 16195-1 SECTION 16420 - SERVICE ENTRANCE .......................... 16420-1 to 16420-2 SECTION 16440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16440-1 to 16440-2 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING. ................................ 16450-1 to 16450-4 SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS. .............................. 16470-1 to 16470-3 SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION. ................... 16475-1 to 16475-4 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING ................................... 16500-1 to 16500-2 SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONElCOMPUTERlCA TV RACEWAY SYSTEM ... 16740-1 to 16740-2 SECTION 16748 - UFE SAFETY SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16748-1 to 16748-9 . 96-099/8-96 III Table of Contents . SECTION 00030 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS PROJECT: Belle Terrace Swim Center OWNER: Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council Sealed bids will be received by the Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council of Richmond County, Georgia for a General Contract to furnish and install all materials, labor and equipment, necessary for the construction of the Belle Terrace Swim Center located in Richmond County, Georgia. Bids will be received by the Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council at Room 605, City-County Municipal Building II, Augusta, Georgia 30911, no later than 2:00 p.m. on Tuesday, September 24, 1996. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at this location. Any bid received after 2:00 p.m. on bid opening date will not be considered by the Owner. Bids will be evaluated by the Owner and the project award is anticipated upon completion of this evaluation. BASE BID: Materials, labor, tools, equipment and all other miscellaneous and/or necessary items for the construction of an approximate 11,143 square foot Swim Center. The Center is located in Richmond County, Georgia. Alternates: Alternate No.1: Provide V.C.T. (per Specification Section 09660) in Men's and Women's Locker Areas in lieu of ceramic floor tile. . Alternate No.2: Provide epoxy painted C.M.U. (per Specification Section 09900) in Men's and Women's Shower Areas in lieu of ceramic wall tile. Alternate No.3: Provide slip resistant floor finish (as specified in Section 09900 "Paint" for swim area floor) in Men's and Women's Shower Areas in lieu of ceramic floor tile. Alternate No.4: Replace entry canopy and column system at north elevation with metal building manufacturer's standard metal canopy system (19'-2" wide by 8'-0" deep to match area shown on 11 A4.1). Nautical light fixtures to be mounted to metal building at same elevation as shown on drawings. Alternate No.5: Replace all indicated split face concrete block with smooth face concrete block. See drawing 21 A6.1 and plan for extents. Alternate No.6: Omit lockers and benches as indicated on Drawings and Specification Section 10505. Alternate No.7: Omit racing equipment, excluding anchor bolts, as indicated on Pool Manufacturer's Drawings. Anchor bolts will remain as part of the Construction Documents with or without the equipment. The required time of completion is one hundred eighty (180) consecutive calendar days from the date of the written Notice to Proceed. . 96-099/8-96 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00030-1 Copies of Bidding Documents may be obtained at the office of Precision Planning, Inc., 400 Pike Boulevard, P. O. Box 2210, Lawrenceville, Georgia 30246 upon payment of a non-refundable cost of $75.00. Checks shall be made payable to Precision Planning, Inc. Bid Documents may be examined at the following locations: Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council Room 605, City-County Municipal Building II Augusta, GA 30911 (706) 821-2400 F. W. Dodge Room 4170 Ashford-Dunwoody Road Suite 200 Atlanta, GA 30319 (404) 255-2565 AGC Builders Exchange 312 Bradford Street, N.W. Gainesville, GA 30501 (770) 536-5047 Atlanta Builders Exchange 1575 Northside Drive, Suite 120 Atlanta, GA 30318 (404) 355-1091 Precision Planning, Inc. 400 Pike Boulevard P. O. Box 2210 Lawrenceville, GA 30246 (770) 962-8000 Construction Market Data 4126 Pleasantdale Road Suite B-102 Atlanta, GA 30340 (770) 447-0601 F.W. Dodge Room Oglethorpe Office Park 400 Mall Blvd. Savannah, GA 3 1406 (912) 354-6696 . F. W. Dodge Room New South Building, Suite 110 360 Bay Street Augusta, GA 30901 (706) 722-3939 F. W. Dodge Room Executive Park North, Suite 110 . 2710 Sheraton Drive . Macon, GA 31204 (912) 746-3313 Augusta Builder's Exchange 304 - 14th Street Augusta, GA 30901 (706) 724-1846 . OWNER requires a bid bond issued by a Surety listed on the Treasury as licensed in the State of Georgia, or a cashier's check in the amount of ten percent (10%) of your total bid to be enclosed with your bid at the time of bid opening to be made payable to OWNER. No other form of security will be acceptable. Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope, addressed to OWNER. Each sealed envelope containing a Bid must be plainly marked on the outside as, "Bid for Belle Terrace Swim Center Project". If bid is forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the Bid must be enclosed in another envelope to the attention of OWNER at the address previously given. Any and all Bids received without the aforementioned criteria enclosed, will be returned to BIDDER. All Bids must be made out on the bid form of the type bound in the Contract Documents, in accordance with the instructions in the Information for BIDDERS. No interlineations, additions, or deletions shall be made in the proposal form by BIDDER. No conditional Bids will be acceptable. Contract will be awarded on a stipulated sum to the most responsive BIDDER presenting the lowest acceptable Bid, based on the Lump Sum Base Bid plus any combination of Alternates (if appropriate) acceptable to Owner. 96-099/8-96 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00030-2 . . OWNER reserves the rights to waive any informalities or to reject any or all Bids, to evaluate Bids, and to accept any Bid which in its opinion may be in the best interest of OWNER. No Bid will be rejected without just cause. No BIDDER may withdraw his bid within the time limit specified in the Instructions to Bidders Section 00100. AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION-COUNCIL . . 96-099/8-96 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00030-3 . Section 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AlA Document A701 . . 96-099/8-96 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100-1 . . . Instructions to Bidders AI1/3DS AlA Document A701 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. DEFINITIONS 2. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3. BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4. BIDDING PROCEDURES 5. CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6. POST-BID INFORMATION 7. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PA YMENT BOND 8. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR THIS DOCU~IDlT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS CO~IPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA DOCUMENT ~IA Y BE ~IADE BY USING AlA DOCUMENT D40 I. Copyright 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 by The American Institute of Architects, 173 5 New York Avenue, N. W.. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AlA DOCUME~T A:OI . l:-<STRUCTIO:-<S TO BIDDERS. FOURTH EDITIO:-<. AlA. COPYRIGHT 1981. TIlE AMERIC.\N INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. IllS NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W.. WASHlNOTOS. 0 c.. :0006.~:9:. WARS1NO. Unlicensed pholocopyins: violates U.S. copyriAht II""" anlJ i. subject 10 legll prOHI:ulion. Thii document wu clcctronll:"l.lly produced tinder license numbel 119c)t,)l)"~I.l: .nJ can be rcpro..succtJ wltbout violation until ll/H/96. Electronic Document St:rvict: ^ 701-1987 1 00100-2 . I INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AlA Document AlO I, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid. 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: 2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents and the Bid is made in accordance therewith. 2.1.2 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or contract documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. . ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 COPIES 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The clepo3it ,viII be refunded to Didder3 ',,'ho 3ubmit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Doeument3 ill. good eonditiBn Hi thin tell. daY3 after receipt of Bid3. The e03t of replaeement of mi33ing er damaged doeument3 ",ill be dedueted from the depo3i t. A Bidder reeei ling a Ccmtraet aVlard may retain the Bidding Doeument3 and the Bidder'3 depo3it will be refunded. 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders or others unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders. 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. . AlA DOCUMEST A:OI . ISSTRt:CTIOSS TO BIDDERS. FOURTH EDITION. AlA. COPYRIGHT 1987. THE A~'ERICAS ISSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 17J~ NEW YORK AVESUE. s.w.. WASHINGTON. D.C. :0006.):9:. WARSISG: t:nl"'nlC~ pholoeopyi"s violll<l U.S. ,0pyriShl I,w. .n~ i. ,ubj,"10 les.1 pro",u'ion. Thi, ~oeumenl wu c1eWo"ICllly pro~ucc~ un~" litemc number 11~6J()l)..aO: ,nJ ':'HI be reproJuccd wlthoul viohtion unlillll:!/96. Electronic Document Scrvicc A 701-1987 2 00100-3 . 3.1.4 In making copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant permission for any other use of the Bidding Documents. 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. ' 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least ~four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. . 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipmerit or other portions of the Work including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. . 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 ADDENDA 3.4.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. 3.4.3 No Addenda will be issued later than futttthree days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. . 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to the form included with the Bidding Documents. 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. 4.1.3 Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and figures, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words shall govern. 4.1.4 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change." 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of the Bidder and a statement that the Bidder is a sole proprietor, partnership, corporation or other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of license number I I 96IJOI,UlJ: IO\J on be rc.prolJuccJ Without violation untilll/::SJ96, AlA DOCUMENT AlGI. Il<STRUCTlONS TO BIDDERS. FOURTH EDITION. AlA. COPYRIGHT 19" . THE A~tERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. Ill] NEW YORl( AVENUE. N.W.. WASIIISOTOS. 0 C . :0006.5:9:, WARSISO: UaliccnlcJ pholocopyinJ Vlol,te' U.S. copyrist'll l,wl and it: 1:ubJCCl (0 le3.1 prosc,ution. Thi. d,ocumcnt was c:Icclronically pr\.'lduccJ under Electronic Document St:rvice A 701-1987 3 00100-4 incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. 4.2 BID SECURITY 4.2.1 If 30 3tiIJ1:llated in the: Ad.e:rti3ement or In',itatiofl to Did, or 3t1pple:mentary ifi3trtle:tiofl3 to bidder3, each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required, pledging that the Bidder will enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfei ted to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Subparagraph 6.2.1. 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AlA Document A310, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents, and the attorney-in- fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all Bids have been rejected. 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. . 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and- time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 4.4.4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS . 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS 5.1.1 Unless stated otherwise in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids will be made available to Bidders. When it has been stated that Bids will be opened privately, an abstract of the same information may, at the discretion of the Owner, be made available to the Bidders within a reasonable time. 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS 5.2.1 The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids, reject a Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or reject a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder who is able to provide evidence of successful experience with proiects of a similar scope and complexitv and provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of . AlA DOCUMENT A701 . INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. FOURTH EDITION. -,I.' . COPYRIGHT 19~7 . THE A~tERICAN INSTITUTE Of ARCHITECTS. 17ll NEW YOR>: AVENUE. N.W. WASHINGTON. D.C.. :0006.\:9:. WARNING: U"li"nlC~ pho.ocopyi"S viol.." US. copyriS"' I".. ,,,J i. .ubje" '0 "S,I pro"cu"u". Thi. Ju<ument ,... "ec"oniolly pro~u,,~ UU~" licen.$( number I I 960..;lIHIl: .nd. can be rcproJl.IccoJ Wllhout vIolation unlilll/~llJ96. Electronic Document Savice A 701-1987 -1 00100-5 . . . the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests. 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 6 . 1 CON T R ACT 0 R ' S a U A L I r I CAT I 0 PJ STATCMENT 6.1.1 Bidden to ,.hom award af a Cantraet is \:Il1<ler consideration shall submit te the Arehitect, upon request, a properly executed AlA Decument 1\305, Centraetor's Qualification Statement, unless sueh a Statement has been previol:isly required and s\:l6mitted as a prerequisite to the i33uanee of Bidding Doeuments. 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY 6.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 6.3 SUBMITTALS 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers, products and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; and .3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work. 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. 6.3.3 Prior to the award of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option, (I) withdraw the Bid, or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security :vill not be forfeited. 6.3.4 Pe~sons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. 7.1.2 If the f\:lfnishing of3ueh bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Doeuments, thc eost shall bc induded in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources, changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three ~days following the dale or cxceutien of the Contract. issuance of the Notice of Award. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Subparagraph 7.2.1. Iacense: numbrr IloJo\lOO.lO: lnJ nn be rc:proJucc:J WIthout Ylolation unlilll/::S/96. AlA DOCU~IEST .\001. ISSTRCCTlO:<S TO BIDDERS. FOURTH EDITION. AlA. COPYRIOHT 19"'. TIlE AMERICAS INSTITUTE OF ARCIIITECTS. 11JJ SEW YORK AVENUE. N.W.. W^SltlNOTO~. 0 Co. :Ul,)06.j:9:. W^R~ISG: Vnlicc:nscd photocopyinS violates U.S. copyriShl law! and is lubJcCI 10 le!;ll prosecution, Thl~ Jot;ument was electronically produ('eJ under Ekctronic Document Service A 701-1937 5 00100-6 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AlA Document A3l2, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 8.1 FORM TO BE USED 8.1.1 Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AlA Document A 101, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum. AlA DOCUMENT A'OI . INSTRL"CTIONS TO BIDDERS. FOURTH EDITION. AlA. COPYRIGIIT 1987. TilE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF .\RCIIITECTS. 1711 NEW YOR~ AVENUE. N.W. WASIIINGTON. D.C. :0006.l:~: W.\KNING: ~nl"'n"J pho'ocopyins violll" U.s. copyright I".. .nJ i. .ubjectto liS.1 pro"cu"on. Thi. Jo<um,nt wu "wroninlly proJuceJ u"Jer IlccnH number Il-hilJl,)"~l,): 1nJ ';Ul ~c rcpruJuI:,J wllhllUI vil,)ll.tion untilll/~SiQc. Electronic D0.::um.:nt S.:rvic.: A 701-1987 6 00100-7 . . . . Section 00 101 SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. PREPARATION OF BID Documents required in the Bid Package: A. Section 00300 - Bid Form and Bid Schedule B. Section 00410 - Bid Bond (AlA A310) C. Section 00420 - Contractors Qualification Statement (AlA A305) Each Bid must be submitted on the prescribed Bid Form and accompanied by the Bid Bond issued by a Surety listed on the most current Treasury list as licensed in the State of Georgia (or Cashier's Check), and include the Contractors Qualification Statement. All blank spaces for lump sum price and alternate prices (if any) must be filled in, in ink or typewritten, in both words and figures (In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern), and the foregoing items must be fully completed and executed when submitted. Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside, the name of the Bidder, his address, and the name of the project for which the Bid is submitted. Prior to bid opening date and hour, errors may be stricken or revisions may be made and corrections entered on the Bid Form, provided that any such strike-over or revision is signed in ink by the person signing the bid or his agent. Any revision made on the outside of the envelope will not be accepted. . 2. SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION A. Notice of Award is anticipated to be issued within 3 days of Bid opening. B. Notice to Proceed shall be issued upon receipt of Contractor's Performance and Payment Bonds. C. Contractor must commence work no later than 10 days after receipt of a Written Notice to Proceed. 3. MATERIALS TESTING The following materials shall be tested according to the procedures outlined in their respective specification sections or as described on the drawings. All costs for the Testing shall be paid for by the General Contractor. A. Cast-in-place concrete (footings and slabs) B. Soils bearing (for trenches, slabs, footings, utility trenches - etc.) 4. PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS General Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for all required permits, fees and inspections required by State, Federal and Local laws, ordinances, etc. General Contractor shall also be responsible for securing all Local licenses for Subcontractors. END OF SECTION 00101 . 96-099/8-96 SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00101-1 Section 00300 . BID FORM Proposal for General Contracting for the Belle Terrace Swim Center Proposalsubmittedby Two State Construction Co.tIne. ,(hereinafter referred to as "BIDDER"). (Name of Contractor) Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council (Hereinafter referred to as .OWNER") Room 605, City-County Municipal Building II Augusta, Georgia 30911 Gentlemen: The BIDDER by making a bid represents that the following have taken place: The BIDDER has read and understands the bidding documents and the bid is made in accordance therewith. The BIDDER has read and understands the bidding or contract documents to the extent that such documentation relates to the work for which the bid is submitted and to other portions of the project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. . The BIDDER has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and has correlated the BIDDER'S personal observations with the requirements of the proposed contract documents. The BID is based upon the materials, equipment, and systems required by the bidding documents without exception. The BIDDER has studied and compared the bidding documents with each other and has reported to the architect any errors, inconsistencies, or ambiguities discovered. The BIDDER hereby agrees to commence work under this contract on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of OWNER and to fully complete the project within the time frame as described in Section 00030 Advertisement for Bids. The BIDDER acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: I ADDENDUM NO. I DATE RECEIVED I One (1) 9/17/96 T..,,.., (?, 9/19/96 . 96-099/8-96 BID FORM 00300-1 . . . The BIDDER understands that the OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities in the bidding. . The BIDDER agrees that his bid shall be binding and may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The BIDDER agrees that the bid security attached in the sum of ten (10%) percent of the total bid is to become the property of the OWNER in the event the Contract and bonds are not executed within the time set forth, as liquidated damages for the delay and additional expense to the OWNER caused thereby. . The BIDDER proposes to furnish all services, labor, and materials required by them for the entire work and to include a construction contingency amount of $7,500 within the Lump Sum Base Bid in accord with said documents for the sum of: LUMP SUM BASE BID $ 193. ~15: ~ I ) Which sum is hereinafter called the "Base Bid". The undersigned further proposes that should any of the following alternates (See Section 01030 for description) be accepted and be incorporated in the Contract, "the Base Bid will be altered in each case as follows: (Circle either Add or Deduct, To or Prom Base Bid, whichever applies). Alternate No. I: Provide V.C.T. (per Specification Section 09660) in men's and women's locker areas in lieu of ceramic floor tile. AOO~$ :LOO.~ nn ~ V ($ #~~~ L ) Dollars Alternate No.2: Provide epoxy painted C.M. U. (per Specification Section 09900) in men's and women's shower areas in lieu of ceramic wall tile. AOo(fEDU0 $ e. tftJ() '!1l ($ /~ ,vyJ u~ , /t1~ ) Dollars 96-099/8-96 BID FORM 00300-2 . Alternate No.3: Provide slip resistant floor finish (as specified in Section 09900 "Paint" for swim area floor) in men's and women's shower areas and vestibules in lieu of ceramic floor tile. AD~UCry ($ ~:;~~_j}PA~ U~DolI,rn Alternate No.4: Replace entry canopy and column system at north elevation with metal building manufacturer's standard metal canopy system (19'-2" wide by 8'-0" deep to match area shown on 11 A4.1). Nautical light fixtures to be mounted to metal building at same elevation as shown on drawings. AD~EDUSY:$ ~~~2~~.iJ ~ LL~DOII",' Alternate No.5: Replace all indicated split face concrete block with smooth face concrete block. See drawing 2/A6.1 and plan for extents. . ADD~$ 1500'l J t ~ ($ ('),u A ''C' - -7 J-J2- , Doll"" Alternate No.6: Omit lockers and benches as indicated on Drawings and Specification Section 10505. AD~DUCb$ ~ ~~ ~ 112 ($ ~--""'<J~A.!l ~ L _ ) Dolla" Alternate No.7: Omit racing equipment, excluding anchor bolts, as indicated on Pool Manufacturer's Drawings. Anchor bolts will remain as part of the Construction Documents with or without the equipment. ADo@EDUgJ$ $'"S-OO'~I /J U ($ -y/re :;J,,~J j?!" - ~DOII",' . 96-099/8-96 BID FORM 00300-3 . . . ATTES~~ Name: Mark Wickham (Please Type) Respectfully Submitted: Title: Clifford C. Poston, President Business Address: Post Off; r:p nrrlwpr ?iq 2292 Washington Roan Thomson. Georgia 30R?4 Federal I.D. or Social Security No.: 58-1088734 NOTE: Altestfor a corporarion must be by the corporate secretary; for a pannership by another panner; for all illdividual by a Notary. 96-099/8-96 END OF SECTION 00300 BID FORM 00300-4 . Section 00310 PARTNERSHIP CERTIFICATE STATE OF ) )SS COUNTY OF ) On this _ day of , 19_, before me personally appeared known to me to be the person who executed the above instrument, who, being by first duly sworn, did depose and say that he is a general partner in the firm of and that firm consists of himself and and that he executed the foregoing instrument on behalf of said firm for the uses and purposes stated therein, and that no one except the above named members of the firm have any financial interest whatsoever in said proposed contract. PARTNER PARTNER . PARTNER PARTNER Subscribed and sworn to before me, this _ day of ,19_. NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: (Date) NOTE: If only one partner signs. a power of attorney executed by all other partners authorizing him to act in the name of the Company must be attached, otherwise, all partners must sign. . END OF SECTION 00310 96-099/8-96 PARTNERSHIP CERTIFICATE 003 10-1 . . ~ r f r , .. t- e I I " . Section 00320 CORPORATE CERTIFICATE I, Mark Wickham named as Contractor in the foregoing bid; that , certify that I am the Secretary of the Corporation Clifford C. Poston President , who signed said bid in behalf of the Contractor was then of said Corporation; that said authority was duly signed for and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its Board of Directors, and is within the scope of its corporate powers; that said Corporation is organized under the laws of the State of Georqi a This 24th day of September, 19-2.L. END OF SECTION 00320 96-099/8-96 7Y;~ ~~J CORPORATE SECRETARY (SEAL) CORPORA TE CERTIFICATE 00320-1 . Section 00321 INDIVIDUAL CERTIFICATE STATE OF ) )SS ) CITY OF On this day of , 19_, before me personally came and appeared to me known, and known to me to the person described in and who executed the foregoing instrument and acknowledged that he executed the same. . NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires (SEAL) END OF SECTION 00321 . 96-099/8-96 INDIVIDUAL CERTIFICATE 00321-1 . Section 00410 BID BOND AlA Document A310 . . 96-099/8-96 BID BOND 00410-1 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS . AlA Document A310 Bid Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we Two State Construction Company, Inc. as Principal. hereinafter called the Principal. and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company a corporation duly organized under the laws of the state of Minnesota as Surety. hereinafter called the Surety. are held and firmly bound unto Augusta-Richmond County Commission, Council of Richmond County, GA as Obligee. hereinafter called the Obligee. in the sum of Ten Percent (10%) of Bidn Dollars ($ ). for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made. the said Principal and the said Surety. bind ourselves. our heirs. executors. administrators. successors and assigns. jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS. the Principal has submitted a bid for Belle Terrrace Swim Center, Richmond County, GA . NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid. then this obligation shall be null and void. otherwise to remain in full force and effect. is 24th Day of September, 1996. Inc. (Seal) St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company (Surety) (SeaL) r:;k;a~iUl t? 11 1l1L~ (Title) Susanne H. McCardle, Attorney-in-fact . AlA DOCUMENT A310 - BID BOND - AIA~ - FEBRUARY 1970 ED - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECfS, 1735 N.Y. AVE., N.W., WASHINGIDN, DC 20006 1 lheSt_ul Surety CERTIFIED COPY NO. ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY 385 Washington Street, St. Paul, Minnesota 55102 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORITY NO. For verification of the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, you may telephone toll free 1-800-421-3880 and ask for the Power of Attorney Clerk. Please refer to the Certificate of Authority No. and the named individual(s). ~L 91131 0 F-13301 GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY. CERTIFIED COpy a (Original on File at Home Office of Company. See Certification.) ~OW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Minnesota, having Its principal office in the City of SI. Paul, Minnesota, does hereby constitute and appollt: Richard W. Naylor, Wn. John Graham, III, F. Anderson Philips, Robert M. Seyrrour, Ella G. Collins, Celeste Stewart, Vicki T. Smith, Susanne H. McCardle, individually, Marietta, Georgia its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, which are or may be allowed, required or permitted by law, statute, rule, regulation, contract or othelWise, Nor 'IO EXCEED IN PENALTY THE SUM OF FIFI'Y MilLION OOLIJ\RS ($50,000,000) FACH and the execution of all such instrument(s) in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by its regularly elected officers at its principal office. This Power of Attorney is executed, and may be certified to and may be revoked. pursuant to and by authority of Article V,-Section 6(C), of the By-Laws adopted by the Shareholders of ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting called and held on the 28th day of April, 1978, of which the following is a true transcript of said Section 6 (C): 'The President or any Vice President, Assistant Vice President. Secretary or Service Center General Manager shall have power and authority (I) To appoint Attorneys-in-fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and (2) To appoint special Attorneys-in-fact, who are hereby authorized to certify to copies of any power-of-attorney issued in pursuance of this section and/or any of the By-Laws of the Company, and (3) To remove, at any time, any such Attorney-in-fact or Special Attorney-in-fact and revoke the authority given him." Further. this Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile pursuant to resolution of the Board of Directors of said Company adopted at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May, 1959, of which the following is a true excerpt: "Now therefore the signatures of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." . IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company has caused this instrument to be signed and its corporate seal to be affixed by its authorized officer, this 30th day of November, A.D. 1990. ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY ~ KENNETH J. RYAN, Secretary STATE OF NEW JERSEY }ss. County of Somerset On this 26th day of April , 19 95 , before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument, to me personally known. and, being by me duly sworn, said that he/she is the therein described and authorized officer of St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company; that the seal affixed to said instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company; that the said Corporate Seal and hislher signature were duly affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Company. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, ] have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal, at the township of Bedminster, New Jersey, the day and year first above written. CERTIFICATION r, the undersigned officer of St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, do hereby certify that] have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit, and the copy of the Section of the By-Laws of said Company as set forth in said Power of Attorney, with the ORIGINALS ON FILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID COMPANY, and that the same are correct transcripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and that the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full force and effect. ~ .~ IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this ~, W '(, 1. ~. 1 Qb LL ~ q. 'f-'fA-dayof \:f..f-f.)1)h~, 19 L. MICHAEL W. ANDERSON, Secretary Only a certified copy of Power of Attorney bearing the Certificate of Authority No. printed in red on the upper right comer is binding. Photocopies, carbon copies or other reproductions of this document are invalid and not binding upon the Company. ANY INSTRUMENT ISSUED IN EXCESS OF THE PENALTY AMOUNT STATED ABOVE IS TOTALLY VOID AND WITHOUT ANY VALIDITY. 29550 Rev. 1-96 Printed in U.S.A. . Section 00420 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT AlA Document A305 . . 96-099/8-96 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 00420-1 THE . . . AMERICAN o F INSTITUTE ARCHITECTS AlA Document A305 Contractor's Qualification Statement 1986 EDITION This form is approved and recommended by The American Institute of Architects (AlA) and The Associated General Contractors of America (AGC}for use in evaluat- ing the qualifications of contractors. No endorsement of the submitting party or verification of the information is made by the AlA or AGe. The Undersigned certifies under oath that the information provided herein is true and suffi- ciently complete so as not to be misleading. SUBMITTED TO: ADDRESS: Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council Room 605, City-County Municipal Building II Augusta, Georgia 30911 SUBMITTED BY: TWO STATE CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. Corporation [l NAME: Partnership 0 ADDRESS: Post Office Drawer 239 Individual 0 PRINCIPAL OFFICE: 2292 Washington Road Joint Venture 0 Thomson, Georgia 30824 Other 0 NAME OF PROJECT (if applicable): BELLE TERRACE SWIM CENTER TYPE OF WORK (file separate form for each Classification of Work): x General Construction HVAC Plurnbing Other Electrical (please specify) Copyright 1964. 1969, 1979, @1986 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washing- ton, D.C. 20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AlA DOCUMENT A305. CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT. 19R6 EDITION. AlAI!> . @19H6 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 17:15 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 A305-1986 1 . . . 1. ORGANIZATION 1.1 How rnany years has your organization been in business as a Contractor? Established June, 1970 Established June, 1970 1.2 How rnany years has your organization been in business under its present business name? 1.2.1 Under what other or former names has your organization operated? NONE 1.3 If your organization is a corporation, answer the following: 1.3. 1 Date of incorporation: 1.3.2 State of incorporation: 1.3.3 President's name: 1.3.4 Vice-president's name(s): 1.3.5 1.3.6 Secretary's name: Treasurer's name: 1.4 If your organization is a partnership, answer the following: 1.4.1 Date of organization: 1.4.2 Type of partnership (if applicable): 1.4.3 Name(s) of general partner(s): 1.5 If your organization is individually owned, answer the following: 1.5.1 Date of organization: 1.5.2 Narne of owner: June, 1970 Georgia Clifford C. Poston James L. Poston, Sr. Mark Wi ckham Mark Wickham AlA DOCUMENT A30S . CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT. 1986 EDITION. AIA<!J . @1986 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 17~S NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 21xm6 A305-1986 2 . . . 1.6 If the form of your organization is other than those listed above, describe it and name the principals: 2. LICENSING 2.1 List jurisdictions and trade categories in which your organization is legally qualified to do business, and indicate registration or license numbers, if applicable. SEE ATTACHED 2.2 List jurisdictions in which your organization's partnership or trade name is filed. N/A 3. EXPERIENCE 3.1 List the categories of work that your organization normally perforrns with its own forces. Concrete work Carpentry Masonry Roofing Painting General Maintenance Excavation Sheetmet a 1 El ectri ca 1 Hard & Soft Tiles Structural Steel Drywa 11 3.2 Claims and Suits. (If the answer to any of the questions below is yes, please attach details.) 3.2.1 Has your organization ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? 3.3 NO 3.2.2 Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your organization or its officers? NO 3.2.3 Has your organization filed any law suits or requested arbitration with regard to construc- tion contracts within the last five years? NO Within the last five years, has any officer or principal of your organization ever been an officer or principal of another organization when it failed to cornplete a construction contract? (If the answer is yes, please attach details.) NO AlA DOCUMENT A305' CONTRACTOR'S QCALlFICATlON STATEMENT' 19H6 EDITION' AIA<!> . @19H6 THE AMERICAN INSTITl'TE OF ARCHITECTS. 17~S NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 A305-1986 3 . . . 3.4 On a separate sheet, list rnajor construction projects your organization has in progress, giving the name of project, owner, architect, contract amount, percent cornplete and scheduled completion date. ATTACHED 3.4.1 State total worth of work in progress and under contract: 6 mill ion 3.5 On a separate sheet, list the major projects your organization has completed in the past five years, giving the name of project, owner, architect, contract amount, date of completion and percentage of the cost of the work performed with your own forces. ATTACHED 3.5.1 State average annual amount of construction work performed during the past five years: 18 million 3.6 On a separate sheet, list the construction experience and present commitments of the key individ- uals of your organization. ATTACHED 4. REFERENCES 4.1 Trade References: SEE ATTACHED 4.2 Bank References: Allied Bank of Georgia Post Office Box 1020 Thomson, Georgia 30824 4.3 Surety: 4.3.1 Name of bonding company: St. Paul Fire and Marine 4.3.2 Name and address of agent: Vicki Smith Graham Naylor Agency Marietta, Georgia AlA DOCUMENT A30S. CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT. 1986 EDITION. AIA~ . @19H6 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 17:\5 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 A305-1986 4 TWO STATE CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. P. O. DRAWER 239 THOMSON, GEORGIA 30824 PHONE 706-595-2863 595-2864 724-1605 FAX NO. 706-595-7134 ATTACHMENT TO AIA-CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT ITEM 2. LICENSING State of Georgia State of South Carol ina State of North Carolina State of Tennessee State of Florida State of Mississippi State of Alabama . . As a resident general contractor's licensing not required General Contractor's License Unlimited Building Bidder's License General Contractor's License Building - Unlimited Building Contractor's License Unlimited Certified Building Contractor Building Construction Industrial Plant Maintenance General Contractor Certificate of Authority . 3. MAJOR PROJECTS IN PROGRESS Project: Owner: Architect: McDuffie County Law Enforcement Center Thomson, McDuffie County, Georgia McDuffie County Board of Commissioners Precision Planning, Inc. Lawrenceville, Georgia Contract Amount: $ 6,391,335 Scheduled Completion: September, 1996 Project: Owner: Architect: McDuffie County Satellite Center for Augusta Technical Institute Thomson, McDuffie County, Georgia Georgia State Financing and Investment Commission Lord, Aeck & Sargent, Inc. Atlanta, Georgia Contract Amount: $ 5,488,588 Scheduled Completion: June, 1997 Project: Owner: Architect: Columbia County Sheriff's Pistol Range Tower Appling, Georgi"a Columbia County Board of Commissioners TSDG, Architects Thomson, Georgia Contract Amount: $ 91,718 Scheduled Completon: Completed May, 1996 . Project: Owner: Architect: Le Creuset of America National Distribution Center Yemassee, South Carolina Lowcountry Council of Governments TSDG, Architects Thomson, Georgia Contract Amount: $ 2,301 ,422 Scheduled Completion: October, 1996 Project: Renovations to Human Services Building Thomson, Georgia Owner: McDuffie County Board of Commissioners Architect: Erskin P. Rhoades, AlA Thomson, Georgia Contract Amount: $ 104,511.00 Scheduled Completion: July, 1996 . . . . 3.5 MAJOR PROJECTS OF PAST 5 YEARS NOTE: PROJECT MANAGER FOR EACH OF THE LISTED PROJECTS WAS TOM GOODYEAR Project: First United Methodist Church Family Life Center Thomson, Georgia Owner: First United Methodist Church Thomson, Georgia Architect: Stan Woodhurst, Jr. Augusta, Georgia Contract Amount: $ 1,397,849 Completed: May, 1993 Project Superintendent: Harrison Rowland % of work performed with Two State forces: 50 % Project: Soldier Service Center Fort Gordon, Georgia Owner: Department of the Army Corps of Engineers Savannah, Georgia Architect: Owner Contract Amount: $ 8.5 million Completed: October, 1994 Project Superintendent: Bob Soncrant % of work performed with Two State forces: 30 % Project: Additions and Renovations to Columbia County Government Complex Evans, Georgia Owner: Columbia County Board of Commissioners Evans, Georgia Architect: Erskin P. Rhoades, AlA Thomson, Georgia Contract Amount: $ 1 ,257,057 Completed: January, 1994 Project Superintendent: Bob Soncrant % of work performed with Two State forces: 50 % Project: Aiken Cooperative Research Center Aiken, South Carolina Owner: Aiken County, South Carolina Architect: Hayes, Seay, Mattern & Mattern, Inc. Charlotte, North Carolina Contract Amount: $ 4,755,561.41 Completed: March, 1995 Project Superintendent: Craig Butler % of work performed with Two State forces: 30 % Project: E911 Facility Augusta, Georgia Owner: Richmond County Board of Commissioners Augusta, Georgia Architect: Erskin P. Rhoades, AlA Thomson, Georgia Contract Amount: $ 1 ,005,182.26 Completed: January, 1996 Project Superintendent: Craig Butler % of work performed with Two State forces: 30 % . . . Page # 2 3.5 Major Projects of Past 5 years continued... Project: Burke County Hospital Alterations and Additions Waynesboro, Georgia Owner: Burke County Hospital Waynesboro, Georgia Architect: Wood, Morris & Associates Macon, Georgia Contract Amount: $ 351,903.50 Completed: January, 1996 Project Superintendent: Roy Hinton % of work performed with Two State forces: 50 % Project: Memorial Hospital Washington County Wellness Center Sandersville, Georgia Owner: Memorial Hospital of Washington County Sandersville, Georgia Architect: Wood, Morris & Associates Macon, Georgiaf~ l~n c..J5'- 4'1 ~ 5" Contract Amount: $ 446,298 "\ ") · Completed: January, 1996 Project Superintendent: Mike Hendricks % of work performed with Two State forces: 50 % Project: Renovations and Additions to Aiken County Welcome Center at 1-20 Aiken, South Carolina Owner: South Carolina Department of Transportation Columbia, South Carolina Architect: Wilbur Smith & Associates Columbia, South Carolina Contract Amount: $ 849,142.39 Completed: March, 1996 Project Superintendent: Dave Perkins % of work performed with Two State forces: 30 % TWO STATE CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. P. O. DRAWER 239 THOMSON, GEORGIA 30824 PHONE 706-595-2863 595-2864 724-1605 FAX NO. 706-595-7134 ATTACHMENT TO AlA CONTRACTORIS QUALIFICATION STATEMENT ITEM 3.6 CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE KEY INDIVIDUALS w. C. POSTON, JR. CEO, CHAIRMAN OF THE BOARD Clemson University B. S. Vocational Agriculture Began in construction in 1953, founder of Two State Construction 1970 Experience gained through various positions as a superintendent, partner with his father, estimator, project manager, and vice president; prior to founding Two State Construction Company, Inc. in 1970. CLIFFORD C. POSTON PRESIDENT Presbyterian College B. S. During college summer breaks worked in construction field for Two State Construction learning the business from the ground up. Upon college graduation returned to Two State Construction holding various positions including office manager, project manager/ estimator; becoming president in June of 1987. JAMES L. POSTON, SR. VICE PRESIDENT .Newberry College Upon graduation went to work for an Augusta, Georgia construction firm in various capacities as a carpenter, foreman, superintendent, estimator, and project manager. Joined Two State Construction in 1973 as Vice President. In 1976 formed Thomson Roofing and Metal Company, a roofing division of Two State Construction; recognized as a Firestone Building Products Master Contractor. TOM GOODYEAR VICE PRESIDENT COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION Southern Technical Institute Bachelor of Architectural Engineering Technology Associate of Architectural Engineering Technology Middle Georgia College Business Administration Upon graduation went to work for the Medical College of Georgia Architectural Section des i gn i ng and deve 1 opi ng work i ng drawi ngs. I n September of 1986 came to Two State Construction performing estimating with promotion to Vice President of Commercial Construction in 1987. DAVID B. KITCHENS, JR. VICE PRESIDENT INDUSTRIAL CONSTRUCTION Thomson High School Field experience began in 1971 working for various companies in the positions of carpenter, carpenter foreman, general foreman, project superi ntendent. Joi ned Two State Construction in 1980 in the position of Job Superintendent, moving up to industrial project manager and was promoted to Vice President Industrial Construction in 1986. .These individuals form the core of a highly skilled professional management team and field staff comprised of approximately 200 personnel. ATTACHMENT TO AlA CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Item 4. References TWO STATE CONSTRUCTION CO, INC. P.O. DRAWER 239 .2292 WASHINGTON ROAD THOMSON, GA 30824 Incorporated: July 6, 1970 State: GA INC #: 7505548 Federal 10 # 58-1088734 Dunn and Bradstreet # 04-870-9968 Bonding Agency: St. Paul Fire and Marine Banking Information: Allied Bank of Georgia P.O. Box 1020 Thomson, GA 30824 POC: Ken Usry Phone # 595-1100 Fax # 706-595-1196 Account # 0010718 MPC # BB 5122313 Tax Exempt State of Mississippi .CORPORATE POLICY SPECIFICALLY PRECLUDES PERSONAL GUARANTEES OF CORPORATE INDEBTEDNESS. Ins Agent Vickie Smith Graham Naylor 404-952-1096 PO Box 6818 Marietta, GA 30065 REFERENCES: Tull Metals p.o. box 102196-68 Atlanta, GA 30368 POC Sue Murphy P# 404-368-4200 F# 404-368-4282 Metal Building Compo P..O. Box 44729'.... Atlanta, GA 30336 P# 404-948-7568 F# 404-948-0305 Culpepper Lumber P. O. Box 1016 Thomson, GA 30824 POC Barbara P# 706-595-3512 F# 706-595- Lowes Of Thomson P.O. Box 125 Thomson, GA 30824 POC Sue Griswell P# 706-595-1556 F# 706-595-8079 . Augusta Ready Mix P.O. Box 20408 Augusta, GA 30917 P# 706-738-1413 F# 706- Prime Equip Co. P.O. Box 1625 Augusta, GA 30903 POC Judy P# 706-722-3335 F# 706- AUTO REPAIRS . -' CULPEPPER MOTffi CO. . PRECISION AUTO CENTER THOMSON AUTO PARTS THRIFTY AUTO PARTS CONCRETE AMERICAN CONCRETE INC. AUGUSTA CONCRETE BLOCK AUGUSTA READY MIX CLAUSSEN CONCRETE CO. THOMSON CONSTRUCTION P.O. BOX 459 HARLEM, GA 30814 1260 LINCOLNTON ROAD WASHINGTON, GA 30673 .BLACK STREET THOMSON, GA 30824 P.O. BOX 472 THOMSON, GA 30824 706':'556-3482 706-678-3117 706-595-3477 706-595-7082 P.O. BOX 2508 P.O. BOX 514 P.O. BOX 20408 P.O. BOX 204510 P.O. BOX 965 AUGUSTA, GA 30913-2508 706-724-0860 AUGUSTA, GA 30903 803-279-7620 AUGUSTA, GA 30917 706-738-1413 AUGUSTA, GA 30917-4510 THOMSON, GA 30824 706-595-2273 P.O. BOX 2183 P.O.: BOX 118066 P.O. BOX 820-13 P.O. BOX 102149 AUGUSTA, GA 30903. 706-722-0292 CHARLESTON, SC 29423-8006 803-745-2941 AUGUSTA, GA 30913 706-722-6685 ATLANTA, GA 30368 404-736-8422 510 South Main P.O. BOX 1016 P.O. BOX 9 2530 WHISKEY RD P.O. BOX 125 WRENS, GA 30833 THOMSON, GA 30824 THOMSON, GA 30824 AIKEN, SC 29803 THOMSON, GA 30824 706-547-2489 706-595-3512 706-595-2641 803-648-9521 706-595-1556 P.O. BOX 44729 ATLANTA,.GA 30336 P.O. BOX 102196-68. ATLANTA, GA 30368 404-948-7568 404-368-4200 P.O. BOX 100336 ATLANTA, GA 30384 404-738-7491 2709 PEACH ORCHARD RDAUGUSTA, GA 30906-2407 706-796-3865 DAVIS EQUIP. & RENTAL P.O. BOX 2016 AUGUSTA, GA 30903 706-798-1900 FRANK WILSON EQUIP. RENTAL 3613 WALTON WAY EXTAUGUSTA, GA 30909 706-733-8610 HANDYMAN RENTAL CENTER 1024 S HARRIS ST SANDERSVILLE, GA 912-552-5150 PRIME EQUIPMENT CO P.O. BOX 1625 AUGUSTA, GA 30903 706-722-3335 W.C. CAYE & CO. INC. 98 ANNEX 690 ATLANTA, GA 30398-0690 404-688-2177 . . . 5. FINANCING 5.1 Financial Statement. SEE ATTACHED 5.1.1 Attach a financial statement, preferably audited, including your organization's latest balance sheet and income staternent showing the following iterns: Current Assets (e.g., cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable, notes receivable, accrued incorne, deposits, rnaterials inventory and prepaid expenses); Net Fixed Assets; Other Assets; Current Liabilities (e.g., accounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, pro- vision for incorne taxes, advances, accrued salaries and accrued payroll taxes); Other Liabilities (e.g., capital, capital stock, authorized and outstanding shares par values, earned surplus and retained earnings). 5.1.2 Name and address of firm preparing attached financial statement, and clate thereof: Richard G. Swan as of June 30th 5.1.3 IS the attached financial staternent for the identical organization named on page one? Yes 5.1.4 If not, explain the relationship and financial responsibility of the organization whose financial staternent is provided (e.g., parent-subsidiary). 5.2 Will the organization whose financial statement is attached act as guarantor of the contract for con- struction? Yes AlA DOCUMENT A30S. CONTRACTOR"S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT. 19H6 EDITION. AlA'!> . @19R6 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 17~5 NEW YO.'{K AVENUE. N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 2(J()(J6 A305-1986 5 RICHARD M. SWAN, p.e. .. Certified Public Accountant Suite 316 Wheeler Executive Center 3540 Wheeler Road Augusta, Georgia 30909 (706) 737-0794 December 20, 1995 Report of Independent Certified Public Accountant Two State Construction Company, Inc. Thomson, Georgia I have audited the financial statements of Two State Construction Company, Inc. as of June 30, 1995 and June 30, 1994 and for the years then ended. These financial statements are the responsibility of the company I s management. My responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on my audit. .; i I i I conducted my audit in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards. Those standards require that I plan and perfom the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about 'Whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. 1m. audit includes examining, on a test basis', evidence supporting the arrounts and disclosures in the financial statements. 1m. audit also includes assessing accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. . I believe that my audit provides a reasonable basis for my opinion. In my opinion, such financial statements present fairly, in all waterial respects, the financial position of the company at June 30, 1995 and June 30, 1994 and the results of its operations for the years then ended in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles. tJ.J1J1,~rv- Richard M. S\Van, P. C . Certified Public Accountant .. MEMBER AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF CERTIFIED PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS GEORGIA SOCIETY OF CERTIFIED PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS 1\<10 STATE CONSTRUCTION COHP ANY, INC. BAlANCE SHEET . ASSETS ,N. Jillle 30, CURRENT ASSETS 1995 1994 Cash $- 171,235.49 $ .00 Cl Accoilllts receivable trade including retainage of $253,733.05 for 1995 and $ 384,052.00 for .1994 2,958,270.74 2,984,098.64 Inventory 15,287.87 15,185.69 Receivables from employees 21,815.19 42,240.49 Prepaid insurance 139,190.34 361,251.96 Cost and estimated eamings in excess of.bi11ings on uncompleted contracts 508,817.43 987,571. 02 Total Current Assets . 3,814,617.06 4,390,347.80 FIXED ASSETS - At Cost Furniture and fixtures 28,097.66 44,275.22 AutOIIDtive 1,182,807.75 1,032,002.59 Equipment 1,016,562.19 1,168,175.45 Buildings 393,853.57 393,853.57 LC . 2,621,321.17 2,638,306.83 Accumulated depreciation 1. 605 .078.07 ~ 523 . 920 . 15 1,016,243.10 1,114,386.68 D: OTHER ASSETS Due from officers 46,220.78 46,220.78 Cash surrender value of life insurance S' pledged to secure insurance loans payable 516,294.00 408,728.00 Investment - at cost 5,700.00 5,700.00 Advance to Thomson Investment Company (note 4) 293,624.31 103,103.19 861,839.09 563,751. 97 L $5.692.699.25 $6.068.486.45 . See notes to financial statements ) ) ~ j j ) ) ) 1 ) 7 - 2. ) ) LIABILITIES AND . S'lDCKHOLDER IS EQillTI CURRENT LIABILITIES Cash overdraft Accounts payable "and subcontractors payable - includes subcontractors retainage of $121,598.96 for 1995 and $483,344.95 in 1994. Notes payable - current maturities Salaries and payroll taxes payable Profit sharing contributions and other Federal and state income tax payable Deferred income taxes Billings in excess of cost and estimated earnings on uncompleted contracts Total Current Liabilities LDNG-TERM DEBT Installment notes secured by equipment Loan payable - secured by C. S . V: Insurance DEFERRED LIABILITIES Deferred income taxes S'IDCKHOLDER'S EQUITY Common stock - $100 par value, 5,000 shares authorized, issued and outstanding 4,250 Retained earnings Less: Treasury stock at cost 2,000 shares of common Stocl<ho1der's EqUity June 30, 1995 $ .00 1994 $ 98,402.69 953,003.01 148,604.22 94,909.13 371,316.90 553,053.00 53,000.00 314,302.09 .1,827,675.36 511,743.67 104,076.24 150,000.00 272,505.00 50,300.00 373,224.92 2,488,188.35 3,387,927.88 201,629.20 84,811.00 250,408.80 84,811. 00 286,440.20 335,219.80 .00 72,400.00 425,000.00 425,000.00 2,693,070.70 2,047,938.77 3,118,070.70 2,472,938".77 200,000.00 200~000.OO" 2,918,070.70 2,272,938.77 ">(' $5.692.699.25 $6.068.486.45 EXHIBIT t 'A' , . . . 6. SIGNATURE 24th day of Sept. 6.1 Dated at Thomson, this Georgia 1996 Name of Organization: UCTION COMPANY, INC. By: Title: 6.2 Mr. Cl ifford C. Poston being duly sworn deposes and says that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently cornplete so as not to be rnisleading. Notary My Co 24th September day of 96 AlA DOCUMENT A30S . CONTRACTOR.S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT. 1986 EDITION. AlAI!> . @1986 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A30S-1986 6 -- I \ :r. . ; " ..;~~ '-l ,_, ~.. """. . ~ 00 JJ-I OI 00 11~ Z(J) G)O z -. (1) ""C ~ )( """I 5l(1)Q: c: 3 (1) e:"O -. ~ = ~ (Q ~ l>> 3 (1) _. 0.0 =C"C" :E '< :E o l>> (1) ""I -- ~'" 0 a: l>> c: 0 (I) """I ~ "0 9: (1) -. < -. (") _. (I) -(I) c: -. """I 0 (1) ~ 0.(1) l>> ~ C" o < (1) ()-I O~ ZO 001 =i(J) JJ~ c:~ am --I o Z . - ( ,C ~ S-I ,-! L..---- ~ @ G G (II ~II ~ @ ~~ rc G L- c:=- icli \'w c\[ I.C\ \ C (!!j c= o o o ;t~-I Ci9:= "00 ~~ o D) 0 ~ :E (1) (I) -~CJ) ~I\) m CN ---I _ CD :---, CJ1 f) ~ c.o~ CJ1 N :.......J WO....., m l>> m CJ1 - ~~" """1(1)\1 jj~O ~~ I (Q Z ~- mO ~~CJ) . :0 -I ,,0 )>~~ >< . JtJ -:::i -I c: O~ " mO\1 ';; 3 -I c.o~ CJ1~- .:...~ 0 ~C) ~~Z 0'" co_ ~Z o . .' . \" \ \. (> n /J f ! "" ~ \ :l"" ..~. ' " 0), 'i.;~ .- ~ -~ '~.'.' $/ .\/."u~' ,if I ) ,Yi)' 11 I. \. ""'.il., ' ,\ /J t:1~t',/",'O'~.';~"'\"" ~.. f Ii' \ 00; ;' ~ _," ;,l 1~:i!-"..)".'>v':: .'..'.0>....".".,. ~ (/ _.,.'1 .- '...)., .. ~,N,"W It' ~,/ ,; <,,\\: ~ ;,; ~.,. '. : '~l,. /' ~' .;k' " .. . rt $. "~I' ,C/ ':)I / '~~. 10.1 '0 U l ',. 0'I' ..~'lF 'f" ..~) 0 \ ()'. : )\1 ".;. Q I ',~. ' -" / ' ,'~ '~\'...' .."'.. c( or \\. 'tIt I" 'tI; ,/, " c '6~' JI< /' ~:((~/ ,;,'~~;.\,~ : ti . {9 . "'.."< , n (f~: ~;Q' ,. F.d\};\,;..:..:..,,:l:;,......:,~~,.~ i" , IfJ __'Oi ,.Qifii&1YM$" l~~.. ." l'~ ',~'''''- ~~-.!f!t.~ '0 .' . 4 /..' .0.....' ' .. .,4 I]' " .") ; J. ".' . ).~',.~._;'( 011 " )~ '.' It "", q . ~v\);-' o l ,U,(/ ,. 6 " f', ,,_.~(J - n ,; e ~,;~~.,~ ~i'~~~' " ,.," """",. . -,t_ ': (/, "J '\'it'Y C ~. '. ',' -- "'" ~1!'(. -"'''',- o -i1\ 'I . \~ .,Il," ." !i;/-~~ \" ':~m /...,,~,..,...;.,..,.....,. '\, .,.~:" J ~. ~- c.'.. F:;- I V\ ~'\~(""""" i.. .11 \ 'tV' < .;'\. ;, I '1.) ( "-' \ .'J . ~~. E gce Q)C\J.Q- Q)>-u"O >- Q) ::J Q) .!:: > >- > -0000 E 0 c > O-OQ) ~oOen Olf'-. Q) cO ccn_.!:: .- ...... cO . :S:c-u o ._ Cf) c (!J>- ~ ~ ~ ~I- ~ o -0. 0. ~ E E"O 0 Q).8o en".en Q) 0.0. "0>- 00 c015 .!::.!::.!:: "-~ C5(J)(j)C/) ::J"OrJi-(ijQ)Q) OQ)::Jen-cen Q) N .!:: cO Q) .- Q) .".=I-;>E.!::.!:: I:.. cO ;> u_ Q)'- cD 0. - cO .!:: en ~ U 0 ~ E .-::: o 0. '-0- -55 .!:: "0 :s: -en (/)COl "O.!::cc>-cOc al.-::: ~ B 5 0..2 c:S:ccO>.ocO >- en Q) .~ .0 .!::en Q)- ::J >- E >- oQ)o.o"O~en E cO Q) >- >- "0 E-;>o::J ._ 0 -;>;> 0 "Oi:i)cOQ)OZU O::J Q)==- (/) uCtiOO.2 EO . Ol o E C en t5 .~ ~ "'0 :t::: c.r) cO-occ Q) >- "0 0 cO'- 0.- c2a:enE-;:~ o U C c.- > U uQ)oo~~cO _o.en+=U - cO en E cO (,) Ol_ .- Q) >- cO Q) .~ U>-OQ) ->- (j) :>.,.!:: o.(ij 2 i:i) E-f-Occ::J E9cOcB~-g o .!:: f'-. ~ cO U .- U _cnQ)ceno Q) ...... .0 "0 <( .~ cO~C>.Q) .cO >'Q)-cc1:E => cO>-Ol ro :.0 0. ~ 'C ~ EcO Eenc.2 'C 0 0 cO :s: U 0. _ 0 .!:: 0 .!: . "= .,~~,) .~'t~_:~.. ~ .,,,,j!t~ ~ ;"'~;.f,l~ ij L __i? ..Jii,. "0 - C >- '- (/) cO .2 ~~ C -g -rJicrl .2 Q)~Q)u g C c.!: C >- Q) Q)cO{3cO OO.!:: EUcOen 5; Q)OlE~ ocO E .!: Ol cO Q) .!:: cO"Oc.o _Ol U ::J.- cO C -"0 - -.- Q5gQ5~~Cf)o c.-:s: cO Q) 0 0 c~ _Q)-:s:a: Ocen.!::ctlf-c ~Q)Q)enQ) 0 Q)E~rJiE en 0..Q-~. E "O::JU 0 co-cO .!:: cOQ).o _ f- cO "0 E' >- roo cil ::JQ).!::-2c g,Eoen-;;::: ._ _ c I 0 "OQ)~:QB~2 C Q).!:: ,- cO U ;> cOE_::l>Q);> >- >- .0 0 .~ Q) Q) 0 Q) C c 2 c :S:->0lQ)0.- o E 2'00 >- >- 0 o.cOctlQ)=cOen CQ).e"OcO=Q) cO_> EOu E->Een"OcO ~~-o2EcO cEQ)-og- Q)Q)Q)I >-=~ EOlC -_EcO 0. cO ";>..Q) >- ,~ .- C 1:..' E cO += ::JctlQ) ="5'0 gEiU~.gE2 >. en ."!:::: c- - +=05 ~ ~~>..8o- OQ)Q5cj.!:: Q5'5>-c.-::: >->-c-:s: o cOcO -en _Oluc_ >-Q) Oc .- a: ::J .- Q) ;Q .0uE .....:>.::J Q)en _>-Q) ~ (l) Q) +-' .: Q)+=U~::J C~~oo- E ~ 0.0 ~ u......'-Q)lrr..- cOQ)O_::J E - Q) cO 0 -. cO~ EU3 >.~ CL.- ......- EE-OQ)~ o 0 .eQ) :s: Q)E Q) ~u_1- en . . . lIWtJ@ ~lf ~ lf~ ~@~~lf[Rj[lJJ~lf~@~ ~@~~~~W~ ~~~o A Georgia Corporation established in June of 1970, Two State Construction is a General Contractor specializing in commercial and industrial construction, roofing, and design build. W. C. Poston, Jr. , CEO, Clifford C. Poston, President, and James L. Poston, Sr., Vice President and founder of Thomson Roofing and Metal Company, form the core of a highly skilled professional management team and field staff comprised of approximately 200 personnel. Specialized construction can be handled with ease by a fully equipped in-house sheet metal , steel fabrication, machine, and carpentry shops. Also, founded in 1976, Thomson Roofing and Metal Company, the roofing division of Two State, has grown to a highly respected and nationally recognized Firestone Building Products Master Contractor; specializing in commercial and industrial roofing including EPDM and built up roofing. Two State Construction Company, Inc. takes pride in their accomplishments over the past twenty five years and looks forward to a bright future offering quality service to clients throughout the Southeastern United States. "Building a better Southeast..." Two State Construction Company, Inc. . . ~~@~~~lr~ (RELATED EXPERIENCE) . . . . CONSTRUCTION Completed in May of 1993, the First United Methodist Church Family Life Center located in Thomson, Georgia is one of many church facilities constructed by Two State. Architect: The Woodhurst Partnership Square Footage: 20,000 Contract: $ 1,397,849 Capable of processing 400 soldiers in just one day, the three story Soldier Service Center facility for the Department of the Army at Fort Gordon, Georgia was completed by Two State in October of 1994. Square Footage: 107,150 Contract: $ 8,382,731 Providing office space and support for technology for the Savannah River Research Campus, the Aiken Cooperative Research Center was completed in March of 1995 by Two State. Architect: Hayes, Seay, Mattern & Mattern Square Footage: 50,000 Contract: $ 3,989,720 After a devastating fire, Sunbeam Building Products Company turned to Two State's Industrial Division to rebuild their manufacturing warehouse facility Square Footage: 50,000 Contract: $ 850,000 . . . [l@@~~~@ &[H]~&[Q)DDD DESIGN BUILD In our increasing commitment to better serve the forever changing market and clients' needs, in 1994 we added a complete architectural design division enabling our firm to offer top quality design/build services for those new and innovative approaches. With this addition of an architect and intern, Two State Design Group was fonned which offers a wide range of services (design documentation and construction oversight) meeting a variety of clients' needs. The following are projects Two State has undertaken as Design/Build efforts. New Industrial Facility for CAE Plastics Thomson, Georgia Square Footage: 30,000 Construction Cost: $ 700,000.00 Owner: McDuffie County Development Authority Riley Stamey, Chairman 111 Railroad Street Thomson, Georgia 30824 706/595-2863 Emergency 911/EMA Facility Augusta, Georgia Square Footage: 9,800 Construction Cost: $ 1,000,000.00 Owner: Richmond County Board of Commissioners Jim Wall, County Attomey Augusta, Georgia 706/821-2488 Le Creuset of America National Distribution Facility Yemassee, South Carolina Square Footage: 66,750 Construction Cost: $ 2,301,422 Owner: Lowcountry Regional Development Corporation Yemassee, South Carolina . COMMERCIAL Two State's Commercial Division with the company size and diversity continues to lead the industry in quality on-going projects. The following are projects under construction presently: McDuffie County Law Enforcement Center Thomson. Georqia Construction Cost: $ 6,391,335.00 Owner: McDuffie County Board of Commissioners Joyce Blevins, Chair Post Office Box 28 Thomson, Georgia 30824 Phone 706/595-2100 Architect: Precision Planning, Inc. Post Office Box 2210 Lawrenceville, Georgia 30246 Doug Shaw, Project Architect Phone 770/962-8000 . McDuffie County Satellite Center for Auousta Technical Institute Thomson, Georoia Construction Cost: $ 5,488,588.00 Owner: Georgia State Financing and Investment Commission Robert Jones, Project Manager Atlanta, Georgia Phone 404/656-3400 Architect: Lord Aeck & Sargent Russell Molpus, Project Manager Atlanta, Georgia Phone 404/872-0330 Columbia County Sheriff's Pistol Ranoe Tower Applinq, Georqia Construction Cost: $ 91,718.00 Owner: Columbia County Board of Commissioners Appling, Georgia Architect: TSDG, Architects Thomson, Georgia . . . . INDUSTRIAL Our industrial clientele continues to grow with Two State performing industrial plant expansions and maintenance for: Shaw Industries, Thomson, Georgia Plant maintenance averaging $ 600,000 a year plus capital expansions Searle Industries, Augusta, Georgia Plant maintenance, hazardous material disposal averaging + 1 million a year Sunbeam Products Company, Waynesboro, Georgia Plant maintenance averaging $ 300,000 a year ROOFING Continuing a tradition of excellence in the roofing industry, Thomson Roofing and Metal Company has ongoing projects with Westinghouse Savannah River Company, Aiken, South Carolina, and Richmond County Board of Education, Augusta, Georgia along with numerous projects throughout the Georgia and South Carolina area. . Section 00430 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST AlA Document G805 . . 96-099/8-96 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST 00430-1 .- . JAN 6 '97 12: 10 FROM TWO STATE CONST. CO. PAGE.001 ;)0 b') ~ ~] or .. . ~((r (;//t(Q' Sc-J< C~~ . ..1 \ 5>kc.0N-L. - 5~.lb0 L/. Te;,/V\;.i:( ~~~t .- (J4/!t-t/. . 3..:~.i__.M.~~4.::.~.'~ . two .5fcttG.. .. . If.,. L/~-el ?:'.L. 1II11__.,.{ '--t...:; .~.... ._~'~::.... ,I v~~. ..._._~. 0" ., .---. '.. -. .... .._.'.0'.. -- .:. -.-.-.---....- ..... :,,'''''''~ -.' .s:~: Vt:Lfrx- ~... 7u..1u .5fctk . ..' . - .. .. .. .' --- ... .... (;#.~ ~~:c-.1Z(~ -:-. .11?g~.., O~C:O~c;J.l ),.... . -.' .--.... . ..._.-.-. -.' '.. ..-.-....--......- '1 -e..,,,f,';j"" f.e...b"-c..,;f~ . . ..fl.: ,/h;tJ?h.C4. f C~J,Yr) ~ 131 (I ~> . ..q'..,... ~4..L ~.u&.dd:x./(.. ... .....--... JO~Mt:klfv,id,J.- Ceco [{.~. Ffu~b~)_-:'_~' 'It, .&ro;,. i Z:. f-IJ f.K .- - .SLCr (O/{ . ....- ---.. _. . 13;: Ut'd';'C4L ~~4/rkh--... _ '0". . ....... _M.... .... ... _..... ..... oJ, .... ....' .'M'_'__ ,. ."- ............_..._ .._.... ..:.____..__...._ ... .. _ ._"..... ..._... _ ,..,__"'_'M'_'_"'" ...J . _.- . . RU.4: _.7:t.#.$f.i:.~--- ~~q ,.~ .... . . .~__..__.~... ".'. ..... ~fl:-:. _~.t--. . THS PAGE: .ro..............- fAXJ: ~'-~7.-- ~~. _ ~2f63- .:"JJ' ~ ~.....' _.__..;.......~~>_.::::~.. ....... , .... . . ,,_:_. ...._...... H ....._......,.__.~.:.-. -.... . .' ..... ..._' . '_'0' _ . ..... _._._ ... ....,'. ... ~ " ... . - ~.. ',: . '.. -.. : , ... .____.__........ .._ ..0.. ._., '. .0... _.._._........-... --.......... .........-. ,.,.,... . __ .__ .__ .... '__ -0'.. ....' '. - ...- ........ . ,- ...--.... \: .-.....,' --- -.-. .. ," . ... --.-....--.-. . ........' ...' - ". ,.' --...:......:....-.. ...... .... . - .- -.........- .. - .~.__... _...........' .; ...-.-..-....--- ,-- ...' . . ...~',,_. --. '. .-.-,....-',. '. -- .-.,.-.,......-................. . - . .._-:.-.... .... ....... '. ',....- . .e.... ____..__,'-.. ,. ._. . ---. . ."" . '_"__' __. ., ., ..... __..__.......l.. ... , _. .. e. ":"'_' "._-.. .' -'_0" ..... ,-" . .._N............. .~ .. ......-... .'.... .. . - ........... ..... .... .......-- ....- -..... -... -' .'.'" '..- ...._..'. ., .......--..... -. .-. .' .', ." ..... .....:.. .".- . . ..-..-....--....---- _..~:. .... .....-... ...---.....-.--...-... .. .-- ... .. . . . -.......... ... .. - . . .... . ...- ... . -- -.. ... .'.. . ".. . - . .. ...'. '.- ~,......... -". .- .. .." _ ,_.. _ .. . '_' . _. _. _ .. _. .... ,'. ... ... ....1'00 _. ..... . .. . .... .. ... . ... .. -..' '.' ..... ....-...... -. -....... ** TOTAL PAGE.001 ** Representati =l I 1 ~I ~ t' I l- I ~ L I: J . -=:J PAGEl 004 County of State of Section 00480 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER Georgi a ) McDuffi e ~ Clifford C. Poston , being duly sworn, deposes and says that: (1) He is Pres i dent (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative, or Agent) of Two State Con struct ion Co.. I nc. the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid. (2) (3) (4) (5) He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Bid and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid. Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid. Neither the said Bidder, nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other Bidder, firm or person, to fix the price or prices in the attached Bid or of any other Bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the Bid price or the Bid price of any other Bidder, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against Owner (Local Public Agency) or any person interested in the proposed Contract. collusion, its agents, Signature Title Subscribed and Sworn to before me this 24th day of 96-099/8-96 My Co 1/9/98 (SEAL) END OF SECTION 00480 NONCOLLUSlON AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER 00480-1 . Section 00481 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR State of County of , being duly sworn, deposes and says that: (1) He is (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative, or Agent) of hereafter referred to as "Subcontractor" for the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid. (2) He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the Subcontractor's Proposal submitted by the Subcontractor to , the Contractor for certain work in connection with the Contract pertaining to the Project as described in the Advertisement for Bids, Section 00030 of these Contract Documents. (3) Such Subcontractor's Proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Proposal. (4) Neither the Subcontractor, nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Proposal in connection with the Contract or to refrain from submitting a Proposal in connection with such Contract or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful agreement or connivance with and other Bidder, firm or person, to fix the price or prices in said Subcontractor's Proposal, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against Owner (Local Public Agency) or any person interested in the proposed Contract. . (5) The price or prices quoted in the Subcontractor's Proposal are fair and proper and not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. Signature Title Subscribed and Sworn to before me this day of ,19_. Notary Signature My Commission expires (SEAL) END OF SECTION 00481 . 96-099/8-96 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR 00481-1 . Section 00500 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR WHERE THE BASIS OF PAYMENT IS A STIPULATED SUM AlA Document Al 01 . . 96-099/8-96 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 00500-1 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and . Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum AlA Document A101 - Electronic Format THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES: CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFfED AlA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA DOCUMENT D40 I. The 1987 Edition of AlA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified. This document has been approved and endorsed by TIle Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1962, 1967, 1974, 1977, copyright 1987 the American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C., 20006-5292. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AGREEMENT made as ofthe:~ip~ day of}~.WID' in the year of Nineteen Hundred an:':Nw.;tmtH~~y~n BETWEEN the Owner: (Name and address) .~~.~~"~mw;~~~~~r~~1~.:.8B~mi~!B~DS~:~m~' A,Y~8~~~F:@~qfQI~::Bg~n:: and the Contractor: (Name and address) ~P6:.961~~~i~~~pt:iRm:YAmR~;9X ~?~?yv~~himgtPnRP~P. T~~M~9:r:(~:#:9r~!~: ~9~tff The Project is: (Name and location) ~.:~I)~:T~r@8~:AWi:mP~nf~~ Aqg~$~~l:.!f{i:~:b'?998::S.?Mm~y~q~Br:?:i~ The Architect is: (Name and address) ~b,RfmiR~iW8~r;'4~f~:lrR;: PHQ.BoX2210 4~~t~p#.ryi'l~i!:9~Pfq!~:~Pf1~ The Owner and Contractor agree as set forth below. I I , I alA DOCUtvlENT AIOI . OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT' TWELFTH EDITION' AlA' COPYRIGHT 1987. THE AMERICAN INSTI1UTE OF WRCHlTEqrs, 1735 NE.w YORK.A VENUE, N.W., W ASH~GTON, D.C., 20?06-529~. .W ARNING; Unlicensed photocopying v~olates ~.S. ~opyrig~t laws and is, subject to 11gal prosecul1on. This document was electronically produced With permiSSIOn of the AlA and can be reproduced WIthout VIOlatIon until the date ot expiration ~ noted below. I Electronic Fornlat AlGl-I987 Us~r Document: A101 BESW.DOC -- 1/6/1997. AlA License Number 102745, which expires on 8/31/1997 -- Page #1 i I , ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS I ane Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), .rawing~, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agrdement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedcls prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other I than Mod,ifications, appears in Article 9. I I I I I The Contfactor shall execute the entire Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract pocuments to be the responsibility of others, or as follows: fi'.l:~pr~'~;~::ct,~S,8f;~~:~::an~Hm8W.~~~'Y"~~~ir:~p.~~~s,~ ~i~:PW~R~y:i?i9nf'rN.m~~.r:9n~ :..~1)(gm~r9.;~.rI1~m:~8~F~ci.Hty. I ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT I I I i 3.1 The date of conmlencementis the date from which the Contract Time of Paragraph 3.2 is measured, and shall be the date of this Agreement, as fIrst written above, unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceetl issued by the Owner. (Insert the date oj commencement. if it diiJers from the date of this Agreement. or, if applicable, state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) The~dat~bfcommehcemetlLSMllb:e:asstipi.mned'by.the: NdticeJdPrOCeedi ...:...::.:.......:..i..:..:..:.:::.:::::::::::.::.:..:.....:..:::..::::..:.::.:.::.::.:::..:...:..:...:.::..:..::......::..>.....::..::........:.........:....:...:.:.::..:::........:.:.:.:..:.::.::.:....... Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed issued by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing nbt less than five days before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other . .1 secunty l~terests. ..2 ~e Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than (Insert the 4~lendar date or number of calendar days after the date of commencement. Also insert any requiremellfsfor earlier Substantial Completion of certaill portions of't'e Work. ifnot slated elsewhere in the Contract Documellfs.) 8fi~HKi9r~<:I:F!gR~X~q.~8);~qr~~8q"Y~:.s~l~r~~fj~.~X*I~~m:m~;<;l,~'~: Af:{8.9mm~nS~m~rF , subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert provisions, if any. for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete OIl time.) illil~!~~li'iitif~lll~lllt!~!lllllfilfll~i;f~~lillil~1J!I~i'i!i~i~;i~]iw~[;~i .:...:::::::.::.::..r.......::.:....:.::.::..:..........:............. I ARTICLE 4 ! CONTRACT SUM 4.1 he Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract the Contract Sum of ~:~d~~~~m~;~!id~~~~9~g?@b~grI%~~~~~Ml:~ro/f~jg,~l:;d,Al'~~;~q:Th?f,t8?pollars ($7~t;P:f~;88 ), subject to additions and I I ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION I I I I arA DOC~MENT AIOI . OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT. TWELFI1I EDITION. AlA. COPYRIGHT 1987 . THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ~CHlTE TS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N. W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to 1 gal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration noted below. i Electronic Fornlat AlOl-1987 User Document: A101BESW.DOC --1/6/1997. AlA License Number 102745, which expires on 8/31/1997 -- Page #2 I I I I 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are I hereby aocepted by the Owner: (State the ,lumbers or other identification oj accepted altemates. If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the Owner subseque1lt to the executi01l of this Agreeme1l~ lattach a schedule of such other altemates showi1lg the amoullfjor each and the date until which that amoullf is valid.) ~!~~~~kAi:1~ ~gl~ii~i! .............. I ..................,.......... I ~11~~~~~i~~~I~~~~I~~~~~~H~W~t~'jm~~~~r~~~irn~~~~J~~~~ I Unit prices, if any, are as follows: I I I I I I 5.1 ,ased upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Archi~ect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. I 4.3 ARTICLE 5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS , 5.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows. I . I I I 5.3 ~rovided an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the tw~ntY:rw/(f..s1:li) day of a month, the Owner s~a1l make payment to the Contractor not later than the JM( day of the fi:lUpWiiig mOlifiL'ii"iiilAppllc.ation for Payment is received ~y the Architect after the application date fixed above, paYlnent shall be:mad:e:b)' the Owner not later thanf()11yi{49) days ~~;i~piii~iili~~i~~i.~iii;~;~i$iI'l~\\tf~tlii~~I~~~r~~~w~~1ir8r;:~~n~~1~[,rn~~. I 5.4 !tach Application for Payment shall be based upon the Schedule of Values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contr~ct Documents. The Schedule of Values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum anlOng the various portions of the Work and be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected tb by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. E~G!l:Api?h()htiQIjjJQ( I I 5.5 1}pp1ications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered bty the Application for Payment. I 5.6 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: I 5.6.1. Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as deternuned by multiplying the percentage completio;n of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the Schedule of Values, leSs retainage oO~~ percent (W: %) . Pending fmal deternlination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute may be included as providecfin Subparagraph 7.3.7 of the General Conditions even though the Contract Sum has 110t yet been adjusted by Change Order; 5.6.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage o{}~~ percentqO %); 5.6.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and AlA DOCUMENT AlOl . OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT. TWELFTII EDITION' AlA. COPYRIGHT 1987. TIlE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF WRCHITECTS, 1735 NE:V YORK.A VENUE, N.W., W ASH~GTON, D.C., 20?06-529~. .W ARNING; Unlicensed photocopying vi.olates ~.S. ~opyright laws and is. subject to legal prosecution. TIus document was electrOnically produced With pemllSSlOn of the AlA and can be reproduced Without VIOlatIOn until the date ot expiration as noted below. ElectrOluc Fonnat A101-1987 User Document: A101BESW.DOC --1/6/1997. AlA License Number 102745, which expires on 8/31/1997 -- Page #3 5.6.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of the General Conditions. .:7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Paragraph 5.6 shall be further modified under the following CIrcumstances: 5.7.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a Sunl sufficient to increase the total payments t(8h(:r4r~te,d percent. ~QO %) of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall deternline for incomplete Work and uns.ettled.diiirns; and 5.7.2 Add, if fmal completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance \vith Subparagraph 9.10.3 of the General Conditions. 5.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shaH be as foHows: (Ifit is intended, prior to Substantial Completion o/the entire Work, to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inset1ed in Subparagraphs 5.6.1 and 5. 6.2 above. and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents. insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.) ~A: :*if:i8~N: :~t\*!l: :P~..f~~~jrN~q.9ti /PF99t~~~::p~Yrn~ti~:r~y:e,~W.~Y~:if:iit~ $qU~f(~t: TIf;!Y::P~t9~Dt {9Q,!'(9))A1:Jne,:W.9 r~ :ha~. .p~eo. li~f~G~~ii~{~~[il~~II;~III~t~lilllllt'~~~I~\\~iil';'jlil'111~i~"r~w~i~~dI~~' p~rq~tJV: (?qf!qr:AtJb~/ .VM9rk: :Wt\i.qn::Wjl!Us9ti~iry~Hp:.q~.Wjt~Q~@.~9:. :~:i1~Y n~::*~m~f~qV?iYr P9mt)l~ti9i1/9t: Iq~ :W()r.~;:... If,: :~:f(er. ARTICLE 6 FINAL PAYMENT Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shaH be made by the Owner to the Contractor when (1) the Contract has been fully performed by the Contractor except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct nonconfonning Work as Arovided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of the General Conditions and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final ~ayment; and (2) a fma1 Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect; such fmal payment shall be made by the Owner not more than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as foHows: ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of the General Conditions or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 7.2 PaymeNts due-aOO~-tiHElef-tRe Ccmtmct shall-geaf: iNterest froRl-tRe-OOte paYNleNt is~-ffi-tRe-ffite-state€l balo'?:, or-ffi- the abseNce thereof, at the legal Fate }:1revailing fmm. time te time at the place where the Project is 10cateEl. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon. if allY.) (USlIry laws alld requiremellts under the Federal Truth ill Lelldillg Act. similar state and local cOllsumer credit laws alld other regulatiolls at the Owner's and Collfractor's principal places of business. the locatioll of the Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provisioll. Legal advice should be obtained with respect to deletions or modificatiolls, and also regarding requiremellts such as written disclosures or waivers.) 7.3 Other provisions: ARTICLE 8 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. eIA DOCUMENT AlOI . OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT. TWELFTII EDITION. AlA' COPYRIGHT 1987. TIlE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF RCHlTECTS, 1735 NE~ YORK.A VENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20?06-529~. .W ARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates ~.s. ~opyrigl.lt laws and is, subject to legal prosecutton. ThIs document was electronically produced WIth penmsslon of the AlA and can be reproduced Without VIOlatIOn until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Fornlat A101-1987 User Document: A101 BESW.DOC -- 1/6/1997. AlA License Number 102745, which expires on 8/31/1997 -- Page #4 8.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. . ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of tIlis Agreement, are enumerated as follows: 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, AlA Document AlO1, 1987 Edition. 9.1.2 The General Conditions are the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AlA Document A20 1, 1987 Edition. 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in tile Project Manual datedA\1k4st;r99,6., and are as follows: ....... ..... ...... ... Document Title Pages y~ptjpm::qw~qq BPppl~mffim~'Y8pq:9W8Q~: ~: 9.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Subparagraph 9.1.3, and are as follows: (Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agrcement.) Document Title Pages $,~~::~t'~9n~R: :pX~;i;9IT:r'A:nor~p:1,~:9LPq:n,~~~1~{~P~~ ~~) 9.1.5 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated N?K~P;ft,~fi:}gg~? unless a different date is shown below: &ither list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) ~umber Date Pages 9~~:A~~sl)~q:~mM::;l?TPr~irg::lTIg~* .......,.......... ......-........-.........."...,.. ".............. 9.1.6 The addenda, if any, are as follows: Number NMm9~t:9r~:(1) NMTP~tJ1Yr9:~f) Date ~~Pl$"mq$.tJ?;i1:~9.9i ~~p(~mm~f;1~;:1:~:~;~: Pages ~F Portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9. 9.1.7 Other documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: (List here any additional documents which are intended to fonn part of the Contract Documents. I1le General Conditions provide that bidding rcqlliremcnts slIch as advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders. sample fonns and the Contractor's bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless elll/lllCrated ill this Agreement. I1leY should be listed here only ifintended to be part of the Colttract Documents.) AIA DOCUMENT AlOl . OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT, TWELFTH EDITION' AlA' COPYRIGHT 1987' THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF WRCHlTECTS, 1735 NE:V YORK.A VENUE, N.W., W ASH~GTON, D.C., 20?06-529~. .W ARNING; Unlicensed photocopying vi.olates ~.S. ~opyrig~t laws and is, subject to legal prosecution. 11us document was electronically produced With perrmsslOn of the AlA and can be reproduced without violation until the date 01 expiration as noted below. Electronic Fornlat AlOl-1987 User Document: A101BESW.DOC -- 1/6/1997. AlA License Number 102745, which expires on 8/31/1997 -- Page #5 This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least three original copies of which one is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner. (Signature) rJ;C1_j (S;,,, ~ eWNER '!Pf'l ff~!}?f~W~~I1]: ~~WW~~: .!Yf. (printed name and title) 9lft.;6~4:9H~W~tpTh:~i:~~i~~t (printed name and title) . _~A DOCUMENT A101 . OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT' TWELFTH EDITION' AlA' COPYRIGHT 1987 . THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ~CHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Fornlat AlOl-1987 User Document: A1018ESW.DOC -- 1/6/1997. AlA License Number 102745, which expires on 8/31/1997 -- Page #6 . EXHIBIT "A" BELLE TERRACE SWIM CENTER TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLES PAGES I. BIDDING REQUIREMENTS: SECTION 00030 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS .................... 00030-1 to 00030-3 SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (AlA A701) . . . . . . . . . .. 00100-1 to 00100-7 SECTION 00101 - SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .............. 00101-1 SECTION 00300 - BID FORM .................................. 00300-1 to 00300-4 SECTION 00310 - PARTNERSHIP CERTIFICATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00310-1 SECTION 00320 - CORPORATE CERTIFICATE .............................. 00320-1 SECTION 00321 - INDIVIDUAL CERTIFICATE .............................. 00321-1 SECTION 00410 - BID BOND (AlA A31O) .......................... 00410-1 to 00410-2 SECTION 00420 - CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT (AlA A305) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 00420-1 to 00420-7 SECTION 00430 - SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (AlA G805) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00430-1 to 00430-3 SECTION 00480 - NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER ........... 00480-1 SECTION 00481 - NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR ........ 00481-1 . U. CONTRACT FORMS: SECTION 00500 - AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER & CONTRACTOR (AlA A101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00500-1 to 00500-7 SECTION 00520 - CERTIFICATE OF COUNTY ATTORNEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00520-1 SECTION 00530 - NOTICE OF A WARD .......................... 00530-1 to 00530-2 SECTION 00540 - NOTICE TO PROCEED ................................. 00540-1 SECTION 00610 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND (AlA 312) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 00610-1 to 00610-7 ill. CONTRACT CONDITIONS: SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (AlA A201) ............. 00700-1 to 00700-25 SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ................. 00800-1 to 00800-8 SECTION 00840 - ADMINISTRATIVE & PROCEDURAL ITEMS ...... . . . . 00840-1 to 00840-5 IV. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: DIVISION 1 SECTION 01023 - CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE. ........................... 01023-1 SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT............. .. . . .. 01027-1 to 01027-5 SECTION 01030 - AL TERNA TES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01030-1 to 01030-2 SECTION 01035 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ................... 01035-1 to 01035-3 SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01040-1 to 01040-3 SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01050-1 to 01050-3 SECTION 01055 - CONSTRUCTION STAKING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01055-1 to 01055-2 SECTION 01095 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS ....... 01095-1 to 01095-22 SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS ........................... 01200-1 to 01200-4 SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01300-1 to 01300-8 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01400-1 to 01400-4 . 96-099/8-96 Table of Contents . . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) SECTION TITLES PAGES SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS ............ 01500-1 to 01500-11 SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ................... 01600-1 to 01600-5 SECTION 01631 - SUBSTITUTIONS............ ..... .. ...... ...... 01631-1 to 01631-3 SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . .. 01700-1 to 01700-10 SECTION 01710 - FINAL CLEANING ............................. 01710-1 to 01710-3 SECTION 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS .................. 01720-1 to 01720-3 SECTION 01730 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . 01730-1 to 01730-4 SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES ................................ 01740-1 to 01740-3 DIVISION 2 SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02110-1 to 02110-3 SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK .............................. 02200-1 to 02200-11 SECTION 02281 - TERMITE CONTROL .......................... 02281-1 to 02281-2 SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING. . . . . . . . .. 02520-1 to 02520-12 SECTION 02665 - WATER SYSTEMS ............................ 02665-1 to 02665-21 SECTION 02700 - SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 02700-1 to 02700-23 SECTION 02831 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02831-1 to 02831-7 DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 to 03300-15 DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 04200-1 to 04200-20 DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05120-1 to 05120-5 SECTION 05200 - OPEN WEB JOISTS ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05200-1 to 05200-2 DIVISION 6 SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06105-1 to 06105-4 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK .......... 06402-1 to 06402-6 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING .................... 07160-1 to 07160-3 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION ....................... 07210-1 to 07210-5 SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS ........................... 07901-1 to 07901-12 DIVISION 8 SECTION 08111 - STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.......... 08111-1 to 08111-5 SECTION 08510 - STEEL WINDOWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08510-1 to 08510-5 SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08710-1 to 08710-7 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING .................................. 08800-1 to 08800-5 96-099/8-96 Table of Contents 11 . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued) SECTION TITLES PAGES DIVISION 9 SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING ........................ SECTION 09900 - PAINTING ................................. 09310-1 to 09310-10 095]0-1 to 095]0-6 09650-1 to 09650-4 09900-1 to 09900-] I DIVISION 10 SECTION 10165 - SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS. . . . . . . . . SECTION 10170 - SOLID PHENOLIC SHOWER DIVIDERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 10420 - SIGNAGE .................................... SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS ............................. SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES ... SECTION 10800 - TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES ................. 10165-1 to 10165-4 10170-1 to 10170-4 10420-1 to 10420-2 10505-1 to 10505-6 10522-1 to ] 0522-2 10800-1 to ] 0800-4 DIVISION 11 NOT USED DIVISION 12 NOT USED . DIVISION 13 SECTION 13122 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 13122-1 to 13122-10 DIVISION 14 NOT USED DIVISION 15 SECTION 15100 - AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, VENTILATION ...... 15100-1 to 15100-11 SECTION 15200 - PLUMBING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15200-1 to 15200-5 DIVISION 16 SECTION 16050 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL ....................... ] 6050-] to ] 6050-4 SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS ................................. 16110-] to 16110-7 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS .............................. ]6120-] to ]6]20-5 SECTION 16130 - BOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16130-1 to ]6130-5 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES ............................ 16140-1 to 16140-4 SECTION 16170 - MOTOR & EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16170-1 SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ........................... 16195-1 SECTION 16420 - SERVICE ENTRANCE .......................... ]6420-1 to 16420-2 SECTION 16440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16440-1 to ]6440-2 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING. ................................ 16450-1 to ]6450-4 SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS. .............................. 16470-1 to ]6470-3 SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION. ................... 16475-1 to ]6475-4 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING ................................... 16500-1 to ]6500-2 SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONEICOMPUTERlCA TV RACEWAY SYSTEM . .. 16740-1 to 16740-2 SECTION 16748 - LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16748-1 to 16748-9 . 96-099/8-96 iii Table of Contents . . . "EXHIBIT B" BELLE TERRACE SWIM CENTER DRAWING INDEX CS COVER SHEET CIVIL C I SITE PLAN C2 SITE GRADING, DRAINAGE, UTILITY PLAN C3 DETAILS ARCHITECTURAL A2.1 FLOOR PLAN AND ENLARGED PLANS A2.2 PLAN DETAILS A4.1 RCP/ROOF PLAN AND DETAILS A5.1 EXTERIOR ELEV. AND DETAILS A6.1 WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS A9.1 FINISH PLAN AND DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS STRUCTURAL Sl S2 GENERAL NOTES GENERAL NOTES, COLUMN AND FOOTING SCHEDULES ROOF FRAMING PLAN - SECTIONS AND DETAILS SECTIONS AND DETAILS SECTIONS AND DETAILS S3 S4 S5 MECHANICAL MI M2 FLOOR PLAN - HV AC SCHEDULES, NOTES - HV AC PLUMBING PI FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING P2 PARTIAL PLANS, RISERS - WASTE AND VENT P3 PARTIAL PLANS - WATER AND GAS ELECTRICAL El.l SYMBOLS AND DETAILS E2.1 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN E2.2 LIGHTING FLOOR PLAN E2.3 POOL GROUNDING PLAN E3.1 RISER DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULES POOL SEE MANUFACTURER'S DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICA TIONS FOR POOL AND RELATED INFORMA TION . Section 00520 CERTIFICATE OF COUNTY ATTORNEY I, the undersigned James B. Wall, County Attorney, the duly authorized and acting legal representative of the Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council, Richmond County, Georgia, do hereby certify as follows: "I have reviewed the bid, payment and performance, labor and material sureties to ascertain that the same are sufficient and solvent to the extent that the same is required by any Georgia statute, and I have reviewed the bonds and powers of attorney offered to ascertain that the same have been taken in the proper form and manner. I have ascertained that the surety is authorized to do business as a surety in the State of Georgia or is excused from satisfying this requirement." . Dated at ~ Geo'g;a. th;s 9'" day of 19U END OF SECTION 00520 . 96-099/8-96 CERTIFICATE OF COUNTY ATrORNEY 00520-1 ~: ~ ." . . . \ Section 00530 NOTICE OF AWARD TO: Two State Construction Company P. O. Drawer 239 - 2292 Washington Road Thomson, Georgia 30824 PROJECT DESCRIPTION: The site of the proposed work is in Richmond County, Augusta, Georgia. The project consists of the following: BASE BID: Seven hundred thirty-three thousand four hundred seventy-five dollars and no/100 ($733,475.00) - As described in Section 00030 Advertisement for Bids. REVISION NO. ONE (l). (Enlargement to Facility): As described and noted on the revised Drawings and Specifications dated November 12, 1996 and in accordance with the Proposal dated December 10, 1996, copy attached - Add: Fifty-eight thousand eight hundred sixty-three dollars and no/lOO ($58,863.00). REVISED BASE BID: Seven hundred ninety-two thousand three hundred thirty-eight dollars and no/100 ($792,338.00). Contractor agrees to commence work on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of Owner for the project. Contractor shall fully complete work within one hundred eighty (180) consecutive calendar days upon "Notice to Proceed". Owner has considered the Bid submitted by you for the above described Work in response to its Advertisement for Bids. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded the Contract for the above described project. You are hereby notified that your Bid has been accepted for the Total Contract Price of Seven hundred ninety-two thousand three hundred thirty-eight dollars and no/lOO ($792,338.00), which is based on the sum of the lump sum Base Bid price given as listed in the Bid Proposal Summary (Section 003(0) and Revision No. One (1) dated November 12, 1996. You are required by the Information for Bidders, A701 (Section 00100) to execute the Agreement and furnish the required Contractor's Performance and Payment Bonds, Certificates of Insurance, Project Schedule, List of Subcontractor's and Non-Collusion Affidavits, within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this Notice to you. If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said Bonds within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this Notice, said Owner will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the Owner's acceptance of your Bid as abandoned and as a forfeiture as may be granted by law. You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this Notice of Award to Owner. Dated this day of 19L. 96-099/8-96 ~ l . . . .. Receipt of the above Notice of Award is hereby acknowledged by Two State Construction Co.. Inc. this the 7 c.. day of 'D~. ,199_. 96-099/8-96 END OF SECTION 00530 NOTICE OF A WARD 00530-2 ,. 12/10/1995 12:25 .-r 17055957134 TWOSTATE PAGE 02 , . TWO STATE THOMSON, GEORGIA Phone 706-595-2863 706- 724-1605 Fax 706-595-7134 December 10, 1996 Precision Planning Attn: Liz Hudson P.O. Box 2210 Lawrenceville, GA 30246 R~' Relle Terrace Swim Center New Proposed Base Bid . Dear Ms. Hudson, We propose to provide alllabor, material, equipment, supervision, and insurance necessary to complete the proposed swim center project per plans, specifications, addendums, proposal request (dated 11/13/96), and the value engineering of the exposed building Insulation. The following breakdown shows the calculation of the new base bid: Original Base Bid $733,475.00 Proposal Request $ 73,787.00 Value Eng. Insulation . S 14.924.00 New 6ase Bid (12/10196) $792,336.00 If you have any questions please feel free to contact Jeff Cowart or myself at the office anytime. Sincerely, ~!Jt-__ Charlie Toburen Cwr/~ . C :\Corel\Ornce 7\WPWln 7\Files\BeUe T errace.wpd 2292 Washington Road I P. O. Drawer 239 I Thomson. Georgia 30824 :!::......~,.~.9RDTM ...li~iml!liJil"I:jI~.:I:.:III.lii~~.~~.~i~I:II::::::11:I~~:IIIB.E: :::~iii~il:.:::::. ........ DA;~7;;;;; THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND. EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE PRODUCER Graham-Naylor Agency, Inc. 1355 Terrell Mill Rd Bldg 1464 Marietta GA 30067 Vicki T. Smith Phone No. 770 - 952 -1096 Fa No. INSURED COMPANY A Northern Insurance/Maryland COMPANY B Maryland Casualty Two State Construction Company, Inc. P.O. Drawer 239 Thomson GA 30824 COMPANY C COMPANY o THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS. EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REOUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POUCY NUMBER POUCY EFFECTIVE POUCY EXPIRATION UMITS LTR DATE IMMJDDIYYI DATE (MMJDDIYYj GENERAl UABJUTY GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABiliTY EPA 27589713 12/31/96 12/31/97 PRODUCTS. COMP/OP AGG .$. 2 , 00 0 , 00 0 CLAIMS MADE ~ OCCUR PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1,000,000 OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone fire) $ 50,000 M ED EXP (Anyone person) 5,000 AUTOMOBILE L1ABIUTY 12/31/96 12/31/97 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT sl,OOO,OOO A X ANY AUTO EC 86061017 ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY X NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per eccldent! PROPERTY DAMAGE GARAGE UABIUTY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT ANY AUTO OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT $ AGGREGATE EXCESS UABIUTY EACH OCCURRENCE $12,000,000 A X UMBRELLA FORM UBA 69574680 12/31/96 12/31/97 AGGREGATE $12,000,000 OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' UABIUTY $1,000,000 EL EACH ACCIDENT A THE PROPRIETORI INCL TC7 91972332 12/31/96 12/31/97 EL DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 PARTNERS/EXECUTIVE OFFICERS ARE: EXCL EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE sl,OOO,OOO OTHER A Lease/Rented Eqpt EPA 27589713 12/31/96 12/31/97 $1000 Ded $300,000 A Installation Fltr EPA 27589713 12/31/96 12/31/97 $1000 Ded $250,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERA TlONS/LOCA TIONSNEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS Certificate holder is additional insured for General Liability with respect to the following project: Belle Terrace Swim Center, Augusta, GA AUGUS-6 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POUCIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF. THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL ~ DAYS WRmEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT. BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBUGATION OR UABIUTY R REPRESENTATIVES. Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council 605 City-County Building Augusta GA 30911 Vicki .AQORD '?5~S)"/95). :t:~:.~Q!!~~:::i:i~'.:~~W:.:~lms.i.l:g:~::I~:liP'i:'ii.'i.i. ..........................."........ P" ............". ... ::~:::::::::::::::::::::;::::::;:::::::::::;:::.:.::::::;.:::~.::::: :-:.;.:;;:;:;:: .. .,. '.:.:.' '.:." . . ;.' '. '.: .::.,....... .:.,:.:.....;:..:.:...... :::'. ": N:.'... '.,., TG$.W::::ijijij::\\'ii\ DAOTE1IM/MOID2 D/N9Y7) ::: ::;:;:;::::::::: ;:::;: ;:;:::::::':0 ~~~u~~rrt~::~:~:~::::::::::::::;:~:::~::::::::::::::::::::. . . . . ............. ,..........................................:.;.:-:.;.;.:.;.;.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.: ;':':',..... .....'...................... ...,..... THIS BINDER IS A TEMPORARY INSURANCE CONTRACT. SUBJECT TO THE CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE REVERSE SIDE OF THIS FORM. PRODUCER rAlC~ No, Extl: 770 - 952 -1096 COMPANY BINDER # 791 ~, " Ext): Fideli t Graham-Naylor Agency, Inc. 1355 Terrell Mill Rd Bldg 1464 Marietta GA 30067 Vicki T. Smith CODE: 44 9 9 SUB CODE: ~uf.:m:'ERID: TWOST-1 INSURED Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council 605 City-Council Municipal B1g Augusta GA 30911 DATE 01/02/97 AM PM 03/02/97 TIME 12:01 AM NOON THIS BINDER IS ISSUED TO EXTEND COVERAGE IN THE ABOVE NAMED COMPANY PER EXPIRING POLICY N: TBD DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSNEHICLES/PROPERTY (Including LocatIonl Belle Terrace Swim Center Augusta, Richmond Co., GA TYPE OF INSURANCE PROPERTY CAUSES OF LOSS BASIC 0 BROAD D SPEC COVERAGE/FORMS AMOUNT DEDUCTIBLE COINS '*' RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: GENERAL AGGREGATE s 2 , 000, 000 PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG s NIL PERSONAL & ADV INJURY sNIL EACH OCCURRENCE s 1, 000 , 000 FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone firel s NIL MED EXP (Anyone personl sNIL COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT BODILY INJURY (Per person I BODILY INJURY {Per eccldent} PROPERTY DAMAGE MEDICAL PAYMENTS PERSONAL INJURY PROT UNINSURED MOTORIST GENERAl UABlUTY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE 0 OCCUR X OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT AUTOMOBILE UABIUTY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON-DWNED AUTOS AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE DEDUCTIBLE ALL VEHICLES SCHEDULED VEHICLES ACTUAL CASH VALUE STATED AMOUNT OTHER COLLISION: OTHER THAN COL: GARAGE UABIUTY ANY AUTO UMBRELLA FORM OTHER THAN UM.BRELLA FORM RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT S AGGREGATE EACH OCCURRENCE AGGREGATE SELF.INSURED RETENTION STATUTORY LIMITS EACH ACCIDENT DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE EXCESS UABIUTY WORKER'S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S UABIUTY SPECIAL CONDITIONS/ OTHER COVERAGES :~~M~:Ik:A9.9.~~:~~::> .. ADDITIONAL INSURED AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE . ;CtOR~~R~'$$3 ACORD 75-5 (12193) vicki T. Smith NOTE: IMPORTANT 5T A TE INFORMATION ON ATTACHED PAGE A CORD ::'I:N:SLJ_N..jE::'BIIIE>EB:::,..::"::;p.. ....:::...:;:;:;:!:i:,:::?};::::::::" ..?,'::.::::/::CSR)$#)::.. ......... . :.: :.:..... ...~, ::.....;.:' ';';..':;.. ..:: ::: :::::;;';:::0:.:: :.:::;:: ::':.:::':;.:;'::: ::':':.:.:/::;:::.:;::;::::::.:':::::::,:,{::::.,:,::::::::::.,::.:,::::'.,.::::):.:::,:"",,:,:::::::::)/::;:::::::::,::<::{:::,::::,::j):::::,:,:::,::,):,{,,~;::::,:::::,:::::,::",:::,:., .......:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:...:.:. ,:::,::,:::::,:::::::::::,::::::: .... ........ 01/02 /97 THIS BINDER IS A TEMPORARY INSURANCE CONTRACT. SUBJECT TO THE CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE REVERSE SIDE OF THIS FORM. PRODUCER (AlC~ No. Ext): 770 - 952 -1096 COMPANY BINDER # 790 DATE (MM/DDIYY) X AM 03/02/97 TIME 12:01 AM NOON DATE oeit CO. , O. Ext): Fidelit Graham-Naylor Agency, Inc. 1355 Terrell Mill Rd Bldg 1464 Marietta GA 30067 Vicki T. Smith CODE: 44 9 9 SUB CODE: ~3w.:OX.ER 10: TWOST-1 INSURED Two State Construction Company, Inc. P.O. Drawer 239 Thomson GA 30824 TIME 01/02/97 12:01 PM THIS BINDER IS ISSUED TO EXTEND COVERAGE IN THE ABOVE NAMED COMPANY PER EXPIRING POLICY #: TBD DESCRIPTION OF OPERATlONSNEHICLES/PROPERTY (Including location) Belle Terrace Sw~ Center Augusta, Richmond Co., GA TYPE OF INSURANCE PROPERTY CAUSES OF LOSS BASIC 0 BROAD [!] SPEC COVERAGElFORMS Builder's Risk/Special AMOUNT OEDUCTlBLE COINS % $792,338 $1,000 GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MAD~: PRODUCTS - COM PlOP AGG PERSONAL & ADV INJURY EACH OCCURRENCE FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone flrel M ED EXP (Anyone person) COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT BODILY INJURY (Per person) BODILY INJURY (Per eccident) PROPERTY DAMAGE MEDICAL PAYMENTS PERSONAL INJURY PROT UNINSURED MOTORIST COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE 0 OCCUR OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON-OWNED AUTOS AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE DEDUCTIBLE ALL VEHICLES SCHEDULED VEHICLES ACTUAL CASH VALUE STATED AMOUNT OTHER AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: COLLISION: OTHER THAN COL: GARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO UMBRELLA FORM OTHER THAN U~llRELLA FORM RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: EACH ACCIDENT 5 AGGREGATE EACH OCCURRENCE AGGREGATE SELF-INSURED RETENTION STATUTORY LIMiTS EACH ACCIDENT DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE EXCESS UABILlTY WORKER'S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER.S LIABILITY SPECIAL CONDITIONSI OTHER COVERAGES NAMg~:AP'g.!:,~~;~:\:,:': Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council 605 City-Council Municipal Augusta GA 30911 A::::; :~~s:::i-nDAtl Q ,1iltt 0- NOTE: IMPORTANT STATE INFORMATION ON ATTACHED PAGE . ~ ACORD CORPORATION 1993. Bld ACORD 75-S (12193) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I \ I CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATiONS OWNER ~ ~ ill ~ .~ o u .~ ~ g .U .....-.: ~ ~ o ill ~ ~ o FOR THE BELLE TERRACE SWIM CENTER SWIMMING POOL AND EQUIPMENT AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION-COUNCIL Richmond County, Georgia NOTE: These specifications have been provided by Paddock Pool Company for tile swimming pool and related equipment. Other mar.ufacturers and produr:::ts may be submitted for "As-Equal" consideration prior to bid, provided they meet the requirements of the technical specifications. Prepared by Paddock Pools for: PRECISION PLANNING, INC. Consulting Planners, Engineers, Architects, & Surveyors 400 Pike Boulevard P. O. Box 2210 Lawrenceville, Georgia 30246 (770) 338-8000 August, 1996 ..-' I I SECTION 13152 I SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT I A. GENERAL I All work called for in this section shall be subject to the project general and special conditions. Contractors doing work of this section shall refer thereto. This section of the specifications is intended to describe the swimming pool construction, swimming pool equipment instaIlation and service. Only contractors capable of meeting the qualifications and furnishing all work called for in this section shall be considered. AIl work called for in this section shall be, and remain through the warranty periods, the sole responsibility of this Contractor. I I Preference will be given to those contractors supplying the complete recirculation and filtration equipment requirements for this job from one manufacturer so that all instructions, service and warranty claims will be handled by one organization specializing in this work. I A.OJ Substitutions I 1. The Owner and the Architect have made a detailed investigation before selecting the specified swimming pool recirculation, filtration and other special pool equipment. AIl base bids shall include this equipment without substitution since the operation and maintenance of this swimming pool facility has been predicated upon the specified equipment. I 2. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligation of the contract and to complete work described or if bidder does not meet the qualifications stated herein. I A.OIl Trade Names I The attention of bidders and all other parties is called to the procedure under this Article for the submission of trade names, brand names, or names of manufacturers for approval. This procedure takes the place of what is commonly known as an "or equal" provision. The successful bidder may not furnish products of any trade name, brand name, or manufacturers' name except those designated in the contract documents including published addenda. I I I 1. When reference is made in the contract documents to trade names, brand names, or to the names of manufacturers, such references are made solely to indicate what products may be furnished on base bid and are not intended to restrict competitive bidding. If it is desired to use products or trade or brand names of manufacturers which are different from those mentioned in the bidding documents, application for the approval of the use of such products must reach the hands of the Architect at least ten (10) days prior to the date set for the opening of bids. I 2. This revision is a restriction which applies only to the party making a submittal, therefore, the aforesaid restriction does not inhibit the architect from adding trade names, brand names, or names of manufacturers by addendum. The burden of proving acceptability of a proposed product rests with applicant and the submittal must be accompanied by technical data in support of the application. The architect will give consideration to reports from reputable independent testing laboratories, verified experienced records showing the reputation of the proposed product with I I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-1 I 3. I previous users, evidence of reputation of the manufacturer for prompt delivery, evidence of reputation of the manufacturer for efficiency and servicing its products, or any other written information that is helpful in the circumstances. The application to the architect for approval of a proposed product must be accompanied by a schedule setting forth in which respects the materials or equipment submitted for consideration differ from the materials or equipment designated in the bidding documents. The degree of proof required for approval of a proposed product as acceptable for use in place of named product or named products is that amount of proof necessary to convince a reasonable person beyond all doubt. To be approved, a proposed product must also meet or exceed all express requirements of the contract documents. I I I If the submittal is approved by the architect, an addendum will be issued outlining the alternate bid to all prospective bidders. Issuance of an addendum is a representation to all bidders that the architect in the exercise of professional discretion established that the product submitted for approval is acceptable and meets or exceeds all express requirements. In the event a submittal shall have been rejected by the architect and there shall have been a request for a conference as provided in this article pursuant to which conference the said submittal shall have been found to comply with the requirements of this article, a separate addendum covering the submittal will be issued prior to the opening of bid. I I I 4. In order for the architect to prepare an addendum intelligently, an application for approval of a product must be accompanied by a copy of the published recommendations of the manufacturer for the installation of the product together with a complete schedule of changes in the drawings and specifications, if any, which must be with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the product. I I 5. Unless requests for approvals of other products have been received and approvals have been published by addendum in accordance with the above procedure, the successful bidder may furnish no products of any trade name, brand name or manufacturer except those designated in the contract documents. I 6. Any party who alleges that rejection of a submittal is the result of bid conference PROVIDED: that the request for said conference, submitted in writing, shall have reached the Architect at least five days prior to the date set for the opening of bids, time being of the essence. I A.OIll Qualifications of Pool Contractor I 1. All Pool Contractors shall be pre-approved to bid this project. I 2. The Pool Contractor (PC) must have had at least five (5) years experience in the construction of the type of swimming pool herein specified and must list at least ten (10) pools of this type, each with a water surface area of not less than this pool which the PC has constructed and which, upon investigation, would be found to be completed in a satisfactory manner and in operation at least three (3) years. I I 3. The ownerlarchitect reserves the right to reject any Pool Contractor if in the opinion of the owner/architect such contractor shall not be acceptable for this project. 4. The Pool Contractor shall certify that the plans and specifications have been reviewed and that his bid will conform thereto. I I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-2 I I I I 5. I I At least two weeks prior to bid date, Pool Contractors wishing to bid this project, in addition to the list and information required in the preceding paragraph, shall: a) Furnish complete evidence that the PC has the facilities, equipment, personnel, etc., to complete all phases of this trade division. b) Be bondable and provide a certification of "Bondability" from their Bonding Agent. 6. Bids for the swimming pool portion of the project shall be considered only if they are received from a pre-approved swimming pool contracting company. I 7. Paddock Construction ComDanv. Rock Hill. SC . has been approved to bid this project. An addendum listing additional qualified bidders will be published prior to Bid date. I A.02 Summarv of Work Included The work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: I I 2. I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Layout pool with bench mark and exact location supplied by the Owner/Architect. Perform bulk excavation and furnish granular sub-base, if required, per Article C.04. 3. Perform all required hand trimming of excavation. 4. Provide and install all required forms for pool construction. 5. Provide and install specified reinforcing steel. 6. Construct monolithic pool structure. 7. Provide and install the entire recirculation system. 8. Install ceramic tile racing lanes and end wall markers. 9. Apply interior pool finish. 10. Provide and install complete filter equipment and pool mechanical system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 11. Provide and install the specified pool sanitizing equipment. 12. Furnish and install pool deck equipment and accessory equipment shown and/or specified. All anchorages contained within the pool deck shall be furnished by the Pool Contractor, but installed by the Pool Deck Contractor. 13. Provide miscellaneous pool testing and cleaning equipment, etc., as specified herein. 14. Provide instruction manuals and/or operating charts as required. 15. Provide start-up supervision upon project completion. 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-3 I I A.03 Related Work Soecified Elsewhere I. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Site access for heavy equipment. I Disposal of excavated material. Stripping pool area, grading, backfilling, and any other area preparation required prior to the start of pool construction. I Construction and backfill of all foundations, equipment room walls, footings and sumps as required for pool construction work. I Deck construction, finishes, expansion joints, caulking, drains, etc. I All necessary sleeves, openings, or there penetrations in equipment room walls and closure of same as required for pool construction work. I 7. Dewatering of pool excavation, if necessary. 8. All general construction work not called for in pool specifications in this section. I 9. Fresh water connection to filter, fillspout, or makeup water tank (see drawings) and waste water connection from filter as shown on the drawings. I 10. All backfill required for pool structure, main drain piping, etc., as required. 11. Provide access to filter room for filter equipment. I 12. All electrical connections and pool or equipment grounding shall be by the Electrical Contractor. The Pool Contractor shall provide the filter pumps and motors. All controls, including starters, shall be provided and installed by the Electrical Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall install all electrical equipment furnished by the Pool Contractor and shall provide all disconnect switches as indicated or required by codes. I I 13. Provide and install pool heaters or heat exchangers as specified in the mechanical section of the specifications. I A.04 Oualitv of Materials I. Special attention is directed to the materials, products and equipment described in these specifications. They establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality. I I 2. Where only one manufacturer's name is mentioned for a particular item of equipment or material, the Pool Contractor's base bid shall be on that item. 3. The Pool Contractor may offer similar products of other manufacturers. In proposing a substitution, the Pool Contractor is cautioned to refer to Sections A.O I and A.O II of the specifications. No consideration will be given to substitutes after award of contract. I I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-4 I I I I 4. It will be the obligation of the respective prime Contractors to inform their Subcontractors of this requirement as the respective prime Contractors wiII be held responsible to comply with all requirements set forth by the drawings, specifications and Contract documents. I 5. Where references are made to Federal Specifications, American Society for Testing and Materials, American Standards Association, American Institute of Steel Construction, Steel Institute, and similar associations, organizations and standards, it shall be construed to mean their current specifications and designations as amended as of the date of bid opening. I I A.OS Patented Materials I The Pool Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The pool contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner, the Contractor and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the Pool Contractor shall not be responsible for all such loss when a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified, but if the Pool Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, the P.C. shall be responsible for such loss unless the P.C. promptly gives such information to the Contractor, Owner and Architect I I A.06 Codes All work in this division shall be according to applicable local, state and national codes and regulations. I A.07 Shoo DrawinJ!s I Before commencing any work, Pool Contractor shall submit and obtain approval of shop drawings indicating all work called for in this division. A.OB Job Coordination I AII bidding contractors are cautioned to clearly understand the limits of responsibility of the Pool Contractor as detailed in these specifications in preparing their bid. Prior to a work start by either the Pool Contractor or the General Contractor, a meeting will be held at the job site to establish work limits, job schedule and liaison among contractors and the Architect to ensure a coordinated construction process. I A.09 Bonds I Payment and Peifonnance Bond I I The Pool Contractor shall provide a bid bond with the bid and if awarded a contract, furnish a Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bond directly to the Owner in the full amount of this contract (subcontract). Such Bond shall be of a form acceptable to the Owner and written by a Surety licensed to do business in this State. I The Pool Contractor shalI deliver the required Bonds no later than the date of execution of the Contract, or if the work is commenced prior thereto in response to a notice to proceed, the Pool Contractor shall deliver the bonds prior to commencement of the work. I I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-5 I I B. WARRANTY I B. 01 Standard Warranty Standard one-year contractual warranty for the project shall apply to all work of this section. I It is understood that the Owner will continuously maintain the installation according to service procedures and directions issued by the manufacturer and Contractor. I B.02 Owner's ResDonsibilitv The warranty shall not cover damage to the pool attributable to corrosive or other water action, excessive use of acid or other foreign materials during cleaning or for discoloration or other consequences resulting in negligence or misuse by the Owner, the owner's agents or invitees. I I This warranty shall also be void unless pool is kept full of water at all times and if drained for cleaning purposes, does not remain empty for more than a 48-hour period, unless under supervision furnished by Contractor. I C. POOL STRUCTURE I cot Site Clearin!?: Prior to the start of pool construction, the site shall have been properly prepared by the General Contractor. I C.02 Lavout of Work I Before any excavation or construction shall be commenced, the Pool Contractor, under supervision of the Architect/General Contractor, shall place batter boards permanently locating the perimeter of all structures. The site shall be excavated to an even grade b the General Contractor and templates installed denoting the exterior line of the pool shell. I C.03 Dimensions and Desi!!n I Structural designs as shown on the pool drawings shall govern. Pool floor may be of poured concrete, minimum of six (6) inches. Concrete surfaces against which shotcrete is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned and slushed with neat cement. All horizontal or vertical steel shall pass through construction joints in such a manner that the full strength of the reinforcing will be developed. I C.04 Excavation and Grodin!! The machine excavation and hand trim shall be carried on as one operation to aid in eliminating over- excavation. In order to obtain an even wall line, radius templates shall be used. The floor area shall be fine graded by the placing of screeds at intervals. If existing soil conditions, as observed during excavation, are such that a sub-base of gravel or crushed stone should be placed under the pool to ensure proper pool drainage and foundation, the Architect will so advise the pool Contractor and upon execution of an extra work order, the Pool Contractor shall place work as an extra to his contract. Ten (10) yards of crushed stone shall be included in the pool bid price for placement in the main drain sump area to provide drainage to the pool relief valves. All material placed in excess of this, if required, shall be placed as an extra work order. I I I I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-6 I I I I Any minor voids which may occur due to an over excavation or from boulders removed shall be filled in with a lean mixture of shotcrete or concrete. Any major deformations in the excavation caused by the removal of large boulders, collapse of earth or inadequate bearing capacity or cave-ins caused by subsurface water conditions shall be repaired as required and filled with bank run gravel, crushed stone or a lean mix of gunite. The cost of repair of such deformations shall be an extra to the contract. I I I Before completion of the pool excavation, the beam at the top of the pool wall, which is a monolithic portion of the pool shell, shall be formed to the dimensions as shown on the drawings. A header shall be installed completely around the pool, the inside face of which shall be properly anchored in place. A taunt cutting wire shall be anchored to ensure the dimensional integrity of the shotcrete structure. Cutting wires shall be placed at all intersections of pool radius and vertical walls and on floor elevation points to ensure dimensional accuracy of the structure. I In the event of any delay in the construction or need for additional material and labor required for corrective measures necessitated by underground conditions including but not limited to the removal or re-routing of underground pipe lines and conduits, removal of masonry; removal, refilling and compaction of ground of inadequate bearing capacity, excavation in rock, hardpan, quicksand, or the pumping, control of, diversion or sealing off of water seepage; or for changes or additions to the pool structure or other installations necessitated by such conditions, the Contractor shall be allowed an extra for such work. I I C.05 Place Fittinl!s I The Pool Contractor shall place, before commencing the gunite work, all special pool fittings and receptacles that are to be embedded in shotcrete and shall be responsible for their positioning in accordance with the drawings. I C.06 Steel Reinforcement I All reinforcing steel shall be standard size deformed bars equal to the requirements of the "Standard Specifications for Billet Steel, Concrete Reinforcement", Intermediate Grade, Serial Designation A15, steel reinforcing bars, equal in the requirement of Serial Designation A615, adopted by the ASTM. I C.07 Cement I All cement for shotcrete shall conform to the requirements of the "Standard Specifications for Portland Cement", Serial Designation C-150 of the ASTM and shall be Type I or II (except where transit mixed cement is to be employed) and shall be delivered to the jobsite in the original packages or bulk tanker and adequately protected for the weather during storage. I I C. 08 Shotcrete Low slump concrete shall be used in the walls of the swimming pool structure. It shall be pneumatically placed by the shotcrete method. The concrete mix shall be pumped in a steady flow through a steel pipe to a short section of 2" hose with a 2" nozzle where it shall be blown into place by compressed air. I The concrete shall have a 1" - 2" slump, a water ratio of 4.92 gallons per bag and minimum compressive strength of 4000 pounds at 28 days when moist cured at 70 degrees F. The following dry mix shall be used per yard of concrete: I 750.0 Lbs. of Cement, Type I 1950.0 Lbs. of Sand I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13 152- 7 I I 750.0 Lbs. of 3/8" Gravel 39.0 Gallons of Water 0.5 Ounces Airtite I The F.M. of the sand shall not exceed 3.00 nor be less than 2.40 and the sand shall contain a minimum of 15% fines that pass through the number 50 and 3% that pass through the number 100 mesh screen. The actual mix may vary due to aggregate size and moisture content. I I The concrete in the floor of the swimming pool may be poured in place. A 2" - 3" slump, 4000 pounds transit mixed concrete shall be used. All concrete in the floor shall be placed in one continuous pour avoiding cold joints. The surface shall be screeded off. When the concrete has set enough to walk on, dampen surface and cover with polyethylene. I If the floor is poured, the reinforcing steel shall run continuously between the floor and the wall. The area of the floor which is in contact with the wall shall be cleaned and sloshed with neat cement before commencing the shotcrete operation. I C.09 Interior Finish I Interior surfaces of the pool shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, oil, paint, and other loose material or foreign matter before application of any succeeding plaster coats. Interior surfaces shall receive a finish coat of "Marcite" Paddock No. 7350 or equal. This is a pool plaster manufactured from a calcareous base aggregate. This coat shall be 1/4" to 112" in thickness and shall be troweled to a smooth, dense, impervious surface exercising extreme care to avoid stains. I I "Marcite" interior finish shall be applied by mechanics having at least three (3) years' experience in the application of this [mish to shotcrete swimming pool interiors. Written proof of the mechanic's experience shall be supplied at the Owner's request as will a list of pools over five (5) years' old in which the original "Marcite" finish has not required maintenance other than yearly cleaning. I C.IO Pool Markinf!s I Ceramic tile of a color and grade similar to that shown on the drawings shall be installed on the pool walls, floors or steps as indicated. All setting and laying of tile work shall be in accordance with the latest specifications issued by the Tile Manufacturer's Association, except as otherwise noted herein by the drawings and specifications. All work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in the trade. Depth markers to be placed in deck will be supplied by.Pool Contractor to be installed by Deck Contractor. I D. STAINLESS STEEL PERIMETER RECIRCULATING SYSTEM I It is the intent of the specifications that the swimming pool perimeter overflow system channel flow and surface cleaning be maintained under all conditions of normal operation and that no water be discharged to waste except when cleaning the filters or emptying the pool. An auxiliary surge recovery channel shall be integrally formed into the face of the perimeter directly under the filtered water supply channel. This channel shall receive water from a special integral convertor or intake ports and discharge it through the overflow channel convertor all as shown on the drawings. I I The method of water recirculation specified and shown on the detailed drawings is intended as the basis for receiving bids and is the preference of the Owner. It is not the intention of the specifications to limit competition. The base proposal must be on furnishing the equipment as specified; however, any bidder may, at his option. offer a substitution for consideration. It must be shown that any system proposed for I I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13 152-8 I I I I substitution has been installed on at least five (5) pools this size or larger and has given satisfactory service for a minimum of two (2) years. In proposing a substitution, the project bidder is cautioned to refer to Section A.O 1-2 of the specifications. Any components of the substitute system subject to pressure or suction shall be fabricaJed and tested prior to shipment. Field fabricated pressure or suction conduits will not be acceptable. Any proposed substitution shall include a mechanical drawing incorporating all required changes in layout, piping and valves. The cost of such changes shall be included in the price of the substitute. Any such proposed system must have prior approval of the State and local Health Departments. I I I A perimeter overflow system consisting of an overflow channel, surge recovery channel, and a filtered water supply channel according to the details shown on the accompanying drawings shall be supplied around the entire perimeter of the pool. The entire system shall be fabricated of low carbon 304 stainless steel. All longitudinal welds shall be fully exposed and accessible for inspection. All factory welds are to be opposing to compensaJe for reverse bowing and maintain proper tube alignment. The system shall be the IFRS-ASR Perimeter, Catalog No. 9620-ASR as manufactured by the Paddock Pool Equipment Company, Inc., of Rock Hill, South Carolina. I I D.01 Installation I All work covered under this section shall be performed by an authorized licensee of the manufacturer or by the manufacturer acting as a subcontractor to the pool contractor. I I D.02 Anchorage The entire perimeter overflow system section shall be anchored to the pool structure with commercial quality "U" bolts made from reinforcing steel and fastened to the pool reinforcing steel, thus forming a continuous perimeter section as shown on the plans. These anchors shall be placed at the corners and on a maximum of 4-foot centers around the pool. I D.03 Filtered Water Inlets I The filtered water supply channel shall be stainless steel fitted with nylon jet inlet nozzles, not over 36" on center around the entire perimeter of the pool, except where inlets shall be expressly deleted at stairways or touch pads. The inlet jets shall be sized so they will not create a tube pressure in excess of 12 pounds nor have an orifice opening exceeding 9/16" in diameter. The stream of water passing through the jet nozzle shall be on a fixed 450 angle directed toward the bottom of the pool. The filtered waJer supply channel shall be machine welded using the TIG process by the manufacturer in his plant and tested prior to shipment. I D.04 Overflow Channel I I The perimeter overflow channel shall be fitted with jet flow nozzles. located as shown on the drawings, to provide a constant stream of filtered, chlorinated water in the channel to prevent any stagnation or dirt build- up on the channel should the water level fall below a level which permits its entrance into the overflow channel. D.05 Grating I The grating shall be formed of extruded PVC sections. The top surface of the ribbed "I" beam section shall be 5/8" wide and the depth shall be I ". The top surface shall be serrated to create a non-skid surface. The space between extruded sections shall not exceed 9/32". The ribs shall be placed perpendicular to the pool perimeter for maximum efficiency in quelling waves. Longitudinal ribs shall not be accepted as equal. I I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-9 I I D.06 Intef!ral SUN!e Weirs I Integral surge weirs shall be installed in the supply conduit at the pool corners and as shown on the drawings. They shall be designed to provide a water surface cleaning action when the pool is below the overflow rim during quiescent periods and to close automatically during use periods. The float type weir, which senses channel water level substantially below the overflow lip, shall be used. Design of the integral weirs shall be such as to present no bather hazard in the open or closed position. I I D.07 The Auxiliary SUN!e Recovery Channel The auxiliary surge recovery channel shall be formed of stainless steel and shall be welded to the filtered water supply channel using a common bottom. The auxiliary surge recovery channel shall be machine welded using the TIG process by the manufacturer in his plant and tested prior to shipment. The transverse weld joints between sections shall be fitted with a port for easy inspection of the internal weld between the filtered water and surge recovery channels. I I Convertors shall be installed in the IFRS Perimeter where shown on the plans. Piping, as shown, shall connect the convertors to the filter system. There shall be a minimum of two convertor outlets serving the overflow channel on opposite sides or ends of the pool Materials shall be as shown on the drawings. The special convertors which admit water to the suction tube shall be located as shown on the drawings and each placed to permit visual inspection of the suction tube. I D.08 Convertors I D.09 Main Drain I The body of the swimming pool's main drain shall be fabricated of fiberglass, the type pipe, size, and length per drawing. The grate(s) shall be fabricated from extruded PVC sections and placed in carbon Type 304 low carbon stainless steel frame(s), Paddock 88I8-F series. See drawings for size and number. Two inch (2") Paddock hydrostatic relief valves shall be installed in each sump pump as shown. I D.IO Uniformity of Welds I Filler metal shall be used on all weld joints whether butt together or not so as to result in a uniform appearing raised weld at each joint. Raised welds shall not be grounded. After the weld is cooled, a second pass may be made with the arc puddling and smoothing the original weld if required. Design shall be such that all longitudinal welds shall be visual for inspection. I D.ll Material I The exposed surfaces of the FILTERED WATER SUPPLY AND THE SUCTION TUBE which forms the front lip of the gutter section shall be fabricated of 12 gauge low carbon Type 304 stainless steel with a finish similar or equal to a #3 polished (100 mesh abrasive) finish. The 1 1/2" X 3/16" angle anchors and all stiffener brackets shall be stainless steel. The GUTrER CHANNEL SECTIONS shall be fabricated from 14 gauge, low carbon, Type 304 stainless steel with a finish similar or equal to a #3 polished (100 mesh abrasive) finish. I I D.12 Finish I The low carbon stainless steel IFRS components shall be cleaned and polished as required to present a substantially uniform finish. Each weld seam, as completed, after is cools to approximately 3000, shall be I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-10 I I I I vigorously brushed with a stainless steel brush. Blending of all surfaces shall be done with a Scotch Brite Pad. The strength of the raised weld shall not be reduced by grinding. After all stainless steel welding, brushing, blending, and testing, the welds on the stainless steel components must be cleaned with a one-to- one solution ofmuratic acid (HCCL) and water. Swab the acid on the weld seams, keeping them wet with acid for five to ten minutes. Thoroughly neutralize and rinse. Repeat swabbing the entire exposed surface of the stainless steel components with a 20% nitric acid solution. An integral, sandblasted, non-skid strip shall be provided on the top surface of the supply conduit and gutter channel section. I I I D.13 Automatic Water Level Controller The pool water level shall be maintained automatically by a water level controller, Paddock No. 6610. I D.14 Guarantee I The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee in writing that if the system is operated in accordance with written instructions given and accepted by the Owner, it will perform in complete accord with the specifications. I D.15 Installation I All installation is to be performed by a welder with at least five years experience in field welding stainless steel recirculating systems which incorporate an automatic surge recovery channel. The Contractor shall submit the installer's experience in writing to the Architect for approval prior to ordering the recirculating system. All work is to be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's technical bulletins. Should the requirements of these bulletins contradict this or any other section of the specifications, the procedures called for in the bulletin shall govern. All grout and caulking between the IFRS System and any concrete or grout surfaces required in the installation of the system shall be performed by the Contractor installing the pool structure. I I D.16 Emrineerinll Services I The Contractor shall supply the services of a competent and experience field engineer for a period of one day to test and inspect the completed installation, place it in operation, and given operating instructions relative to is care and use. I D.l7 Deck Drain There shall be a perimeter deck drain fitted to the back of the stainless steel recirculating system as shown on the drawings. There shall be drains on opposite corners and clean outs. I I E. FILTRATION EOUIPMENT I It is the intent of this specification to describe a water filtration system complete with all necessary items. It is the further intent of these specifications that the filtration unit from the pump through the backwash system, including all filter control valves as hereinafter specified, and all accessories, be supplied and guaranteed by one manufacturer. Any filter offered under these specifications shall be NSF listed at the time of offering (bid date). Such listing shall be evidenced by the filter model number appearing in the current NSF listing for swimming pool filters at the flow rate required for this project. I I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-11 I I The filter specified shall be of the Vacuum Sand type. The filter shall be a product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the fabrication of water filtration equipment and who has a minimum of five (5) years experience in manufacturing this type of filter. I It is not the intention of the specifications to limit competition. The base proposal must be on furnishing the equipment as specified; however, any bidder may, at his option, offer a substitution for consideration. In proposing a substitution, the project bidder is cautioned to refer to Section A.O 1-2 of the specifications. Any proposed substitution shall include proof of NSF approval at the time of offering (see above) and a mechanical drawing incorporating all required changes in layout, piping, and valves. The cost of such changes shall be included in the price of the substitute. Any such proposed system must have prior approval of the State and local Health Departments. I I I E.Ol Filter Requirements The filter shall be a Paddock of California Compak type VSC Vacuum Sand Filter as manufactured by the Paddock Pool Equipment Company, Inc., of Rock Hill, South Carolina, having a total capacity of 450 GPM when operated at a filtration rate of 15 GPM per square foot of filter area. Filtration shall be accomplished by drawing water through a permanent media bed of sand. A specially designed Vacuum Equalization System shall maintain a uniform flow through the media bed to the recirculating pump after which the filtered water shall be returned to the pool. A direct connection between the pump suction and pool main drain shall be provided to permit emptying of the pool without passing through the sand bed. The filter shall be Paddock No. 4792-1530-SS and shall have 30 square feet of available filter area. I I I The filter shall be a single chamber, open, rectangular tank. It shall contain a vacuum equalization screen, the media, an underdrain system, a backwash trough and in addition the control piping, valves, gauges, air release system, and pump and motor so as to make a complete filtering unit. The filter shall be completely constructed of low carbon, Type 304 stainless steel; 12 ga, in thickness. The tank exterior shall be coated with a biturnastic coating suitable for burying in the ground. I E.02 Filter Tank I The filter shall be supplied with a 8 inch main drain connection; a 6 inch perimeter overflow channel connection; a 6 inch filtered water return connection and a 6 inch backwash to waste connection. All above connections shall be PVC socket flanges. In addition, a 3" IPS male overflow connection and a I 1/2 IPS female water make-up connection shall be provided. All valve handles shall be extended so that the valves may be operated from above grating which covers the filter tank. I I The open-top of the filter tank shall be covered with a I" X 3/16" bearing bar type 6063 TC welded aluminum grating with I" X 4" openings. It shall serve as a platform and as a guide for the upper end of the valve handle extensions. I The vacuum equalization screen shall be corrugated fiberglass and sized to the exact dimensions of the tank. The vacuum equalization screen shall be supported by brackets welded to the sides of the tank. At one end, there shall be a transparent section to permit observation of the sand during backwash. I I E.03 Filter Media The filter media shall be a carefully selected grade of silica sand. The depth of media shall be 14 inches. The sand shall be free from clay or limestone deposits. The hydrochloric acid and solubility shall not exceed 1 %, the iron content 0.1 %. I I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-12 I I I I The sand shall have a particle size between .45mm and .55mm with a uniformity coefficient not to exceed 1.45mm; sphericity between 0.70 and 0.81, shape factor between 7.4 and 8.5, porosity between 0.40 and 0.48. The sand shall be supported on a layer of 1/16" to 1/8" gravel. 4 inches of gravel shal1 be placed in the bottom of the tank. I I E.04 Underdrain System I The filter chamber shal1 be supplied with a pressure equalizing underdrain system consisting of a central header drilled on 4" centers and tapped for 2" laterals. I The laterals shall be molded ABS, slotted with orifice slots on .1985" centers, extending around 1/2 the perimeter of the lateral. The loss in the underdrain system from the entrance slots to the flange at the suction header shall not exceed 0.5 inches Hg. The slot area shal1 be covered with a type 316, 30 mesh, 13 gauge, stainless steel screen with a 40.8% open area. I E.05 Air Release System I There shall be provided one Mark IB automatic air release system so that at regular intervals, air removed from the water due to the negative pressure in the filter system can be released upwards to the atmosphere. A manually reset vacuum limit control1er shall be provided as an integral part of the system. The air release and vacuum limit system requires a 115 volt, 60 cycle, 110-amp supply circuit. Connections to the 115 volt electrically held contractor in the coil of the recirculating pump and motor starter, circuit power and electrical conduits by the Electrical Contractor. I I E.06 Face PifJinJ! The filter manufacturer shall supply al1 integral piping required in the filter tank to carry out al1 normal functions of the filter, beginning with a flanged connection for the main drain in and ending with a flanged discharge connection for the line to waste and pumping suction. I E.07 Valves I The filter manufacturer shal1 supply the fol1owing valves: (1) main drain, (2) suction valve, (3) return-to- pool valve, (4) backwash suction, (5) backwash to waste, (6) by-pass to drain pool, (7) POS outlet, (8) backwash influent. AI1 valves shall be nylon coated cast iron bodied wafer type butterfly valves with stainless steel shaft, stainless steel extension handle and aluminum bronze disc. The valve handles shall be extended above and be guided by the aluminum grating. 6" and 8" valves shal1 be lever operated. Valves 10" and larger shal1 be gear operated. Gear operation is an optional extra for 6" and 8" valves. I I I E. 08 Gauf!es The filter shall be supplied with a vacuum and pressure gauge mounted on a common gauge holder, Paddock No. 5840, securely fastened to the exterior of the tank. E.09 Backwash Control I The filter shall be automatically controlled by the vacuum limit switch. When a preset vacuum is reached, the pump shall shut down indicating that the filter requires cleaning. After a two to four minute up-flow through the media, the filter may be returned to the filter mode. The backwash system shall be manual. The pump shall not restart until the vacuum limit switch is manually reset. I I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-13 I I E.! 0 Backwash System I All backwash water shall transfer by hydraulic gradient from the pool through the sand and to the backwash chamber and then out of the tank to waste. The backwash rate of flow shall be equal to the filtration rate and shall be 450 GPM. The backwash line shall be brought to the filter tank by the Plumbing Contractor. At the disposal point into the sewer or storm drain, the Plumbing Contractor shall provide a suitable air gap. If a gravity drain from the filter is not available, the backwash discharge may be pumped to a suitable discharge point by means of the recirculation pump. I I E.n Pumo and Motor There shall be supplied a Paco centrifugal pump directly connected to an electric motor Model 3095-5, or equal. The pump shall have a 4 inch suction and a 3 inch delivery and shall have a capacity of 450 GPM when delivering against a total head of 50 feet with an available suction lift not less than 18 inches of mercury at a speed not to exceed 1750 RPM. I I The motor shall be 7 1/2 HP, 3 phase, 240/480 volt, 60 cycle, 1750 RPM, ball bearing, drip proof, low starting current, normal starting torque induction motor. I Starter shall be A-C Magnetic Across the Line with 115 volt holding coil and electrically held contractor. Starter, push button station, circuit power, and electrical connections by Electrical Contractor. I On outdoor installations the pump and motor shall be covered by a vented fiberglass enclosure. The filter shall be capable of producing an effluent with a turbidity not to exceed 0.5 Fru measured with a Hach Model 1120A Turbidity Meter. I I E.n Effluent Quality E.13 Envneerinfl Services A qualified representative of the Contractor or the manufacturer shall visit the site work after the installation of the filter has been completed and shall put the filter into operation and shall assist and instruct the Owner's representative in the operation of the filter. I I E. 14 Warranty The filter manufacturer shall guarantee in writing that this filter, if operated in accordance with written instructions given and accepted by the Owner, will perform in complete accord with the specifications. This Contractor shall supply complete drawings and printed instructions for installation and operation of all equipment specified herein and shown on the plans. I All specified deck equipment and anchors, where required, shall be furnished by the pool Contractor. Installation within the pool structure shall be by the pool Contractor. Installation in or on the pool deck or elsewhere shall be by others. Installation shall be in accordance with drawings and instructions furnished by the pool Contractor. I I G. DECK EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES I The deck equipment and accessories shall be the products of a company regularly engaged in the manufacturing and supplying of such equipment. Where specific details on materials of construction are I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-14 I I I I given, they shall be strictly adhered to. The Paddock catalog numbers referred to in these specifications are used as a standard of quality. Wherever the term "or equal" is used, equipment as manufactured by Paragon will be acceptable if it meets these quality standards. I G.01 Cantilever Divinf! Board SUDDort - 1 Meter I The I-Meter Diving Stand supplied shall be Paddock No. 4060-SS or equal, and conform to USD and NCAA recommendations. The Diving Stand shall be flange mounted to anchors firmly embedded in the concrete deck and shall be removable. The Stand shall be constructed of welded and preassembled units. The Column and Platform Assembly(s) shall be fabricated out of Type 304 stainless steel. The tubular railings shall be Type 304 stainless steel. The rear mounting anchor for the Diving Board shall be hinged to eliminate flexing of the Board anchoring bolts and to permit the Board to be raised to a vertical position for storage. I I COLUMN: The Platform Assembly shall be supported by a single column fabricated of either 10" IPS, Schedule 20 stainless steel pipe with minimum wall thickness of .250 or 8" X 10" rectangular stainless steel tubing with minimum wall thickness of .187. A heavy mounting flange of stainless steel shall be jig-welded to the bottom. I I FRAME: The diving stand horizontal support frame shall be fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel 1.9" O.D. X .120" wall tubing. It shall connect the front column to the rear mounting anchor and anchor the handrails. The diving board mounting anchor shall be removable, the ladder shall be attached with swivel connectors. All other tubing to tubing connections shall be welded. I LADDER ASSEMBLY: The Ladder Assembly shall consist of stainless steel side rails of 1.90" O.D. X .065" wall thickness. Ladder Treads shall be injected molded plastic, 19" wide, mounted on 12" intervals with slip resistant top surface. Side Rails of the ladder shall slope at least 15 degrees from the vertical. Each tread shall be fastened to side rails by two (2) 3/8" stainless steel upset head carriage bolts. I I HANDRAILS: The Handrails shall be constructed of 1.90" O.D. tubing as specified for Ladder Assembly(s). Handrails shall extend horizontally approximately 36" above the diving board and there shall be an intermediate guard rail. Both shall run continuously along the length of the upper platform assembly. I I MECHANICAL FULCRUM: There shall be a wheel operated pinion gear and rack type Mechanical Fulcrum. The pinion gears shall be molded urethane rubber. The Fulcrum Bar shall be covered with a resilient pure gum rubber covering, 30 to 40 duro meter hardness. The Fulcrum Assembly shall be positioned to give the full allowable fulcrum setting for the specified diving board. G.02 Aluminum Divinf! Board I I The diving board shall be of aluminum "1" beam construction, with self locking, epoxy bonded seams. Material shall be 6061 T6 aluminum extruded "I" beams with a minimum wall thickness of .200. Board shall be constructed of 7 extruded "I" beams with 2 radius sides, epoxy bonded, with both ends of board reinforced by heliarc welded 6061 T6 aluminum plates. Boards shall be 20" wide, 1.750 in depth by 16 ft. in length. Each board will be equipped with a mounting kit, consisting of a baked-on vinyl coated strap with two 112" x 5" long cadmium plated steel bolts, with a minimum of 5-mil thickness. The non-skid surface shall be vinyl latex sand mixture extending from the base and over the tip of the board. Diving board shall be a product of a company exclusively engaged in the manufacturing of swimming pool equipment with a minimum of five (5) years experience in the industry. The board shall be a Paddock aluminum diving board, Catalog #4016-A. I I I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13 152-15 I I G.03 Starlim! Platform - Double Column (Base Bid - Anchors Only) I There shall be supplied 6 E-Z Set-Two Starting Platforms, Paddock Catalog No. 4909 or equal. The Starting Platforms shall be quickly and easily removable without using a wrench or unfastening anchor bolts. The platform frame shall be fabricated from satin finish, 1.9" O.D. X .120" wall, Type 304 stainless steel tubing. Flush with the front edge of the platform, there shall be a backstroke bar. The backstroke bar shall be fabricated from satin fmish, 1.05" O.D., Schedule 40, Type 304 stainless steel pipe. A mounting tread shall be positioned off the rear legs. The tread shall be fabricated from injection molded cycolac, and have a deeply formed integral, slip resistant surface. The tread shall be firmly bolted in place and attached to the legs by welded stainless steel gussets. At each side of the platform, attached to the legs, shall be a stainless steel plate on which the lane number is displayed with a 4" numeral. I I I Top: The top of the starting platform shall be fabricated of extruded PVC sections and enclosed in a stainless steel frame. The sections shall be white, 1" deep X 5/8" wide with a serrated top surface. The space between sections shall be 9/32". I Anchor: Two Paddock Catalog No. 4814-SFC or equal anchors, with caps, shall be supplied with each starting platform. The anchor shall be fabricated of stainless steel and the cap shall be polyethylene. The anchors shall be provided as a unit on 19" centers, held rigidly together by two #4 rebars. I G.04 Racinf! Lane Marker Lines I Racing Lane Marker Lines shall consist of individual float segments measuring 4 1/4" in diameter by 1 15/16" wide, butted end to end on a 5/32" clear, vinyl, plastic covered aircraft type stainless steel cable to form a continuous line. Each float shall be Paddock Championship Turbo-Reactive type (patent pending), injection molded of ultra violet stabilized polyethylene with a 4 Turbo-Reactive Vanes integrally molded on each side of central diaphragm at right angle to the center cable sleeve; and with a peripheral ring 3/4" wide joining the central diaphragm to the Turbo-Reactive Vanes. The Vanes shall be curved into the peripheral ring to catch and absorb the energy in the wave as it strikes the Vane. Each float segment itself shall be buoyant and shall rotate freely about the cable. Lines shall be assemblt~d at the poll site to insure proper fit. Each Marker Line shall be composed of six float segments per foot (to provide flexibility for storage), clear vinyl covered aircraft type stainless steel cable, one stainless steel extension draw bar spring, one stainless steel tension toggle, two stainless steel cable clamps, two cable thimbles, and two stainless steel 5" hooks. I I I Racing Lane Marker Lines shall be 25 yards in length with 15' at each end in a solid blue color with alternating one foot sections of blue an white in between. Paddock No. 4921, or equal 7 required. I G.OS Backstroke Marker Post (Base Bid - Anchors Only) I The Backstroke Marker Post shall be fabricated from low carbon, Type 304 stainless steel with a .065" wall thickness. The post shall have a No.3 or equal finish. The top shall be closed with an eye formed over the capped end. The eye shall be fabricated from 1/4" stainless steel rod. There shall be a rope cleat provided 2'6" from the top. The post shall be supplied with a Paddock Catalog No. 4816-SSC or equal stanchion anchor with removable cap. Paddock Catalog No. 4905 or equal, 4 required. Lengths as shown on the drawings. I I G.06 Recall Post (Base Bid - Anchors Only) I The Recall Post shall be fabricated from low carbon Type 304 stainless steel with a .065" wall thickness. The post shall have a No.3 or equal finish. The top shall be closed with an eye formed over the capped I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-16 I I I I end. The eye shall be fabricated from 1/4" stainless steel rod. There shall be a rope cleat provided 2'6" from the top. The post shall be supplied with a Paddock Catalog No. 4816-SSC or equal stanchion anchor with removable cap. Paddock Catalog No. 4905-R or equal, 2 required. Lengths as shown on the drawings. I G.07 Backstroke Pennant Line I Backstroke Pennant Lines shall be plastic tape sewn with triangular pennants alternating in the following colors: red, blue, green, yellow, white, orange. The pennant line shall be 100' in length. Paddock Catalog No. 4906 or equal. . I G.08 Stainless Steel Ladders I Ladder rails shall be constructed of 1.9" O.D. X .083 wall polished stainless steel tubing, 320 grit finish. The stainless steel shall be Type 304. The treads shall be formed of molded cycolac and shall have a deeply formed slip resistant surface. The end of each tread shall bolt into the rail with one 5/16" upset head 18-8 bolt. The tread shall be at least 3 inches in width. Ladder rails shall be of the progressive bend type and shall be spaced 19 inches apart center to center. I I There shall be a rubber bumper at the lower end of each ladder rail so that the metal rail shall not come in contact with the pool wall. Each rail shall contain a cross brace for additional stability. The cross brace shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Ladders shall be Paddock No. 4540-1 or equal 3 tread, 1 required and Paddock No. 4541-1 or equal 4 tread, 2 required. Two 4801 anchors with 4837 escutcheons shall be supplied with each ladder. I G.09 Stainless Steel Hand Rails I Stair hand rails shall be of stainless steel construction. Hand rails shall have an outside diameter of 1.90" and a wall thickness of .065". Handrails shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel polished to a #3 finish. Hand rails shall be Paddock No. 4718 or equal, 1 provided. Anchors shall be Paddock No. 4801 wi no. 4837 escutcheon or equal, 10 provided. I G.l0 Movable Stainless Steel Life1!uard Chair I I The lifeguard chair shall be moveable and shall have a molded fiberglass seat installed 6' above the deck. The frame of the chair shall be welded and shall be fabricated of 1.9 O.D. X .065 Wall Type 304 stainless steel tubing with a 320 grit finish. Frames which are bolted together, shall not be acceptable. The framework shall move across the deck on PVC rollers installed over stainless steel sleeves. I The platform shall be fabricated entirely of stainless steel and extruded PVC "I" beam sections. The surface of the extruded PVC sections shall be serrated to form a non-skid surface. The top surface of the section shall be 5/8" wide and the space between extruded sections shall not exceed 9/32". The platform shall be reached by a 15 degree sloping ladder which is 19" wide. The bottom of the ladder rail shall be fitted with white rubber bumpers which shall bear on the deck. The ladder treads shall be molded cycolac 19" long X 3" wide with a deeply formed integral slip resistant surface. I I The lifeguard chair shall be supplied with an umbrella socket fabricated of Type 304 stainless steel and be integral to the stainless steel framework on one side of the stand behind the seat. The moveable lifeguard chair shall be Paddock Catalog No. 4707-6 or equal, 2 required. I I 96-099/8-96 SWIMMING POOLS AND EQUIPMENT 13152-17 I CATALOG NO: 62oo.40B Effective: 5-01-94 Replaces: 2-01-93 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 31111 Agoura Road, Westlake Village, CA 91361-4699 (818) 889-1500 SAMPLE SPECIFICATIONS Commercial Swimming Pool Heaters, Model P Sizes 514-4000 MBTUH The heater shall be Raypak Model !:E..::. -P with 64! , o'i:ftu input,514 , 0 ~tput. The heater shall be certified by A.G.A. ASME inspected and stamped for 160 PSI working pressure, complete with manufacturer's data report. The heater shall be equipped with 125 PSI, ASME pressure relief valve. The water tube heat exchanger shall be of single level horizontal grid design constructed with 9 (18 on sizes above 2100 MBTUH) 1" x .065" wall integral copper fin tubes with fins spaced at seven per inch, and extra heavy galvanized steel gull baffles secured tightly to the tubes above the point of tangency of the fins. Each end of the tubes shall be rolled into an ASME fire box steel tube sheet and sealed to bronze headers with silicone .0" rings with a temperature rating over 5000F. The headers shall be precision machined for easy removal and the -0" rings seals shall positively prevent boiler water from reaching the steel tube sheets. They shall be of high pressure bronze with integral bronze baffling to direct water through the heat exchanger in two passes. The heat exchanger shall be capable of withstanding a 1000 PSI hydrostatic pressure. The heaters shall be secured to the tube sheets by property spaced stud bolts and flange nuts. The heat exchanger shall be readily cleanable from either the right side or the left side of the heater, and cleanable on the right side without removing external piping. The heat exchanger shall be explosion proof on the water side. It shall have 100% copper and bronze waterways to positively protect the heater from galvanic action (electrolysis). The heater shall be equipped with a 24V main electric gas valve, a factory calibrated pressure switch, a pool thermostat, and a high limit switch. Electronic Intermittent Pilot Ignition is standard. The heater shall be equipped with stainless or aluminized steel burners mounted in an easily removable burner drawer. The burners shall be capable of quiet ignition and extinction, and equipped with fixed primary air ports for atmospheric gas firing and capable of complete combustion. The heater shall be equipped with a Unitherm Governor Bypass Valve to automatically control the outlet water temperature between 1050 and 1150F. The heater shall be rated at least 80% thermal efficiency by a recognized independent gas appliance test laboratory Independent of the manufacturer. @1983, Raypak, Inc. Litho in U.S.A. . Section 00540 NOTICE TO PROCEED TO: Two State Construction Company P. O. Drawer 239 - 2292 Washington Road Thomson, Georgia 30824 Proiect Description The site of the proposed work is in Richmond County, Augusta, Georgia. The project consists of that described in Section 00030 Advertisement for Bids. You are hereby notified to commence Work in accordance with the Agreement dated Januarv 9 1997, on or before January 20, 1997, and you are to complete the Work on or before July 21. 1997. Dated this 9th day of January , 192Z--. Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council OWNER cfCJP' . ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged by Two State Construction Company this the 9th day of January , 1921.-. B END OF SECTION 00540 . 96-099/8-96 00540-1 . SECTION 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND AlA Document A312 . . 96-099/8-96 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 006 10-1 . THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS Bond No. 400 JS 6030 AlA Document A312 Performance Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): Two State Construction Company, Inc. P. O. Drawer 239 Thomson, GA 30824 SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul, Minnesota OWNER (Name and Address): Augusta-Richmond County Commission -Council 605 City-County Building Augusta, GA 30911 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT . Date: J a n u a r y 9, 1 9 9 7 Amount: $792,338.00 Description (Name and Location): Belle Terrace Swim Center, Augusta, Richmond County, GA BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): J a n u a r y 9, 1 9 9 7 Amount: $792,338.00 Modifications to this Bond: [8J None 0 See Page 3 CONTRACTOR AS PRINClPA Company: Two State Con SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance ~ompany / Signature: ot..vJ(} AL/J..( 0t1!u./Jz~ Name and Title: Susanne H. McCardle Attorney-in-fact Signature: Name and Tit CL FORD C. POSTON President (Any additional signatures appear on page 3) Graham-Naylor Agency, Inc. 1355 Terrell Mill Rd" Bldg. 1464 Marietta, GA 30067 (770) 952-1096 ~CUMENT A312 .PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 1984 ED. .AIA~ ~MERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, DC 20006 THIRD PRINTING. MARCH 1987 (FOR INFORMA TION ONL Y-Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party): Precision Planning, Inc. P. O. Box 2210 Lawrenceville, GA 30246 A312-1984 1 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. . If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract. the rety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3.1. 3 If there is no Owner Default. the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Paragraph 10 below that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and 3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Subparagraph 3.1; and . 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the terms of the contract with the Owner. 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions: 4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; or 4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contractors; or 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract. arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default; or 4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: . .1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to the Owner, or .2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reason therefor. 5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. 6 After the Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the Construction Contract. and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract. the Surety is obligated without duplication for: 6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; 6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4; and 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. 7 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators or successors. 8 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract. or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 9 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions off this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. A312-1984 2 AlA DOCUMENT A312 .PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 1984 ED. .AIA~ THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, DC 20006 THIRD PRINTING. MARCH 1987 10 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract. 11 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory .er legal requirement in the location where the construction was to rformed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory gal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 12 DEFINITIONS 12.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts 12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: . (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: (Corporate Seal) SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Name and Title: Address: Signature: Name and Title: Address: AlA DOCUMENT A312 .PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 1984 ED. .AIA@ THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, DC 20006 THIRD PRINTING. MARCH 1987 . A312-1984 3 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS . AlA Document A312 Payment Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): Two State Construction Company, Inc. P. O. Drawer 239 Thomson, GA 30824 SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul, Minnesota OWNER (Name and Address): Augusta-Richmond County Commission -Council 605 City-County Building Augusta, GA 30911 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: J a n u a r y 9, 1 9 9 7 Amount: $792,338.00 . Description (Name and Location): Belle Terrace Swim Center, Augusta, Richmond County, GA BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): J a n u a r y 9, 1 9 9 7 Amount: $792,338.00 Modifications to this Bond: [8J None 0 See Page 6 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: Two State Const SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) St. P,nl FJ" ,n. Mucl., I..."." c'm~fL.-/ Signature: ~D..M...AA..L ~ Name and Title: Susanne H. McCardle Attorney-in-fact Signature: Name and Tit CL FORD C. POSTON President (Any additional signatures appear on page 6) Graham-Naylor Agency, Inc. 1355 Terrell Mill Rd., Bldg. 1464 Marietta, GA 30067 (770) 952-1096 AlA DOCUMENT A312 .PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 1984 ED. .AlA~ ~MERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, DC 20006 "PRINTING. MARCH 1987 (FOR INFORMA TION ONL Y-Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party): Precision Planning, Inc. P. O. Box 2210 Lawrenceville, GA 30246 A312-1984 4 .. 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. . With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void of the Contractor: 2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and 2.2 Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity whose claim, demand, lien or suit is for the payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety(at the address described in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default. 3 With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes payment. directly or indirectly, for all sums due. 4 The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: . 4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof. to the Owner, stating that a claims is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. 4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor: .1 Have furnished written notice to the Contractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed; and .2 Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor, or no received within 30 days of furnishing the above notice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contractor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly, and .3 Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor. . 5 If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety, that is sufficient compliance. 6 When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions: 6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed. 6.2 Payor arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. 7 The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. 8 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and the Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under the Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of. or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 11 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Subparagraph 4.1 or Clause 4.2.3, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, the Owner or the Contractor, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page. 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this he Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirements shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. A312-1984 5 AlA DOCUMENT A312 .PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 1984 ED. .AIA~ THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, DC 20006 THIRD PRINTING. MARCH 1987 " . 14 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 15 DEFINITIONS engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished. 15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light. heat. oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract. architectural and 15.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 15.3 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: . (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: (Corporate Seal) SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Name and Title: Address: Signature: Name and Title: Address: ~CUMENT A312 .PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 1984 ED. .AIA~ ~MERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.W., WASHINGTON, DC 20006 THIRD PRINTING. MARCH 1987 A312-1984 6 TheStRlul - I . CERTIFIED COpy NO. Surety ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY 385 Washington Street, St. Paul, Minnesota 55102 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORITY NO. For verification of the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, you may telephone toll free 1-800-421-3880 and ask for the Power of Attorney Clerk. Please refer to the Certificate of Authority No. and the named individual(s). 1911476 F-13301 GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY - CERTIFIED COpy _ (Original on File at Home Office of Company. See Certification.) ~OW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Minnesota, having its principal office in the City of St. Paul, Minnesota, does hereby constitute and appoint: Richard W. Naylor, Wn. Jolm Graham, III, F. Anderson Philips, Robert M. Seyrrour, Ella G. Collins, Celeste stewart, Vicki T. Smith, SUsanne H. M::Cardle, individually, M:lrietta, Georgia its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, which are or may be allowed, required or permitted by law, statute, rule, regulation, contract or otherwise, NOT 'ID EXCEED IN PENALTY THE SUM OF FIFI'Y MILLlOO OOLIARS ($50,000,000) EACH and the execution of all such instrument(s) in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by its regularly elected officers at its principal office. This Power of Attorney is executed, and may be certified to and may be revoked, pursuant to and by authority of Article V,-SecIion 6(C), of the By-Laws adopted by the Shareholders of ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting called and held on the 28th day of April, 1978, of which the following is a true transcript of said Section 6 (C): "The President or any Vice President, Assistant Vice President, Secretary or Service Center General Manager shall have power and authority (1) To appoint Attorneys-in-fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and (2) To appoint special Attorneys-in-fact, who are hereby authorized to certify to copies of any power-of-attorney issued in pursuance of this section andlor any of the By-Laws of the Company, and (3) To remove, at any time, any such Attorney-in-fact or Special Attorney-in-fact and revoke the authority given him." Further, this Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile pursuant to resolution of the Board of Directors of said Company adopted at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May, 1959, of which the following is a true excerpt: "Now therefore the signatures of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." . IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company has caused this instrument to be signed and its corporate seal to be affixed by iIs authorized officer, this 30th day of November, A.D. 1990. ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY ~ KENNETH J. RYAN, Secretary STATE OF NEW JERSEY} ss. County of Somerset On this 26th day of April ,19 95 ,before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument, to me personally known, and, being by me duly sworn, said that he/she is the therein described and authorized officer of St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company; that the seal affixed to said instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company; that the said Corporate Seal and hislher signature were duly affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Company. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal, at the township of Bedminster, New Jersey, the day and year first above written. S, Notary Public, Middlesex, NJ My Commission Expires December 16, 1996 CERTIFICA nON I, the undersigned officer of St. Paul Fire and Marine Insuranee Company, do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit, and the copy of the Section of the By-Laws of said Company as set forth in said Power of Attorney, with the ORIGINALS ON FILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID COMPANY, and that the same are correct transcripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and that the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full force and effect. ~i. .' J r- IN TESTIMONY WH~REOF, I b,,, b~~" ,,' my "',d <hi, ~~ day of , 19 ~. MICHAEL W. ANDERSON, Secretary Only a certified copy of Power of Attorney bearing the Certificate of Authority No. printed in red on the upper right comer is binding. Photocopies, carbon copies or other reproductions of this document are invalid and not binding upon the Company. ANY INSTRUMENT ISSUED IN EXCESS OF THE PENALTY AMOUNT STATED ABOVE IS TOTALLY VOID AND WITHOUT ANY VALIDITY. 29550 Rev. 1-96 Printed in U.S.A. . . . 96-099/8-96 Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION AlA Document A20l GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 00700-1 r H E AMERICAN INSTITUTE o F ARC HIT E C T S . . AlA Document A20 I General Conditions of the Contract for Construction THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS MODIFICATION 1987 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES . 1, GENERAL PROVISIONS 8. TIME 2. OWNER 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 3. CONTRACTOR 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 11, INSURANCE AND BONDS 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 12. UNCOVERlNG AND CORRECTION OF WORK 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY , SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT This document h:JS been Jpproved Jnd endorsed by the AssociJted General Contr:J.ctors of AmeriCJ. . Copyright 1911. 1915,1918,1925.1937.1951. 1958. 1961, 1963.1966,1967,1970,1976. @1987byThe:Ame:ric:m Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue:. :"l.W., W;LShingwn, D.C.. 20006. Reproduction of the m:Hcrial herein or subst:ultial quotation of its provisions without writte:n permission of (he AlA violate:s the copyright laws of the United States :uld will be subject to legal prosecutions. AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GE~ER..\L CO<'lDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FaK CONSTRL:CTION . FOURTEENTH EDITION .\1.\' . @ I')H- THE .\.\IERIC.\N INSTlTl'TE OF .\KCHITECTS. 17.\S ~EW YOK" .\\'ENCE. ~.""., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2\l\K)(, A201-1987 1 111171111_? Acceptance of Nonconforming Work. . . . . . . .. 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 AcceptanCe of Work ........... 9.6.6,9.B.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3 AccesstoWork........................... 3.16,6.2.1,12.1 Accident Prevention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 4.2.3, 10 ActSandOmissions .,. 3.2.1,3.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.8.3.18,4.2.3,4.3.2, 4.3.9,8.3.1,10.1.4,10.2.5,13.4.2,13.7,14.1 Addenda. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 1.1.1,3.11 Additional Cost, Claims for. . . . . . . ., 4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.9,6.1.1, 10.3 Additionallnspc::ctions:lOdTesting....... 4.2.6,9.8.2.12.2.1,13.5 Additional Time, Claims for. . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.3.9,8.3.2 ADMINISTRATIONOFTHECONTRACT ....... 3.3.3,4,9.4,9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect. . . . . . . . . ., .., ... ., .' . .., .., .., 4.2.13,4.5.1 Allowances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.8 All-risk Insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 11.3 .1.1 Applications for Payment .. 4.2.5,7.3.7,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3, 9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.4,11.1.3,14.2.4 Approvals. . .. 2.4,3.3.3,3.5.3.10.2.3.12.4 through 3.12.8, 3.18.3, 4.2.7,9.3.2.11.3.1.4, 13.4.2, 13.5 Arbitration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 4.1.4,4.3.2,4.3.4,4.4.4,4.5, 8.3.1,10.\.2.11.3.9,11.3.10 Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.1 Architect, Detinition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority. . . . . . .. 2.4,3.12.6.4.2,4.3.2,4.3.6, 4.4, 5.2.6.3, 7.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.6, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3,982,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.1,13.5.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 Architect, Limitations of Authority:md Responsibility. 3.3.3,3.12.8, 3.12.11, 4.1.2, .U.I, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.2, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.6.4.9.6.6 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses . . . . . . . . ., 2.4,9.8.2, 11.3.\.1,12.2.1. 12.2.4, 13.5.2.13.5.3,14.2.4 Architect's Administration of the Contract. . . . . . . . ., 4,2, .H.6, 4.3.7,4.4,9.4,9.5 Architect's Approvals 2.4,3.5.1,3.10.2,3.12.6,3.12.8,3.18.3,4.2.7 Architect's Authority to Reject Work. . .. 3.5. 1,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect's Copyright ................................. 1.3 Architect's Decisions. . . . . . . . .' 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11. 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.2. -d.6, 4.4.1. 4.4.4, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2.9.4.9.5.1. 9.8.2, 9.9.\,10.1.2,13.5.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 Architect's Inspections . . . . . .' 4.2.2.4.2.9..4.3.6,9.4.2,9.8.2. 9.9.2,9.10.1. 13.5 Architect's Instructions.. 42.6. -U.7, 4.2.8, 4.3.7, 7.4.\, 12.1,13.5.2 Architect's Interpretations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 4.2.11,4.2.12.4.3.7 Architect's On.Site Observations. . . 4.2.2.4.2.5,4.3.6.9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1,13.5 Architect's Project Representative ..................... 4.2.10 Architect's Relationship ~'ith ContrJcmr . . . . . ., 1.1.2,3.2.1.3.2.2. 3.3.3.3.5.1. ).-:".3, 3.11, 3.I.U-l, 3.12.11, ;U6. ).IH, 4.2.:>. 4.2.4. 4.2.6.4.2.12,5.2,6.2.2,7.3.4,9.8.2. \1.3.7, 12.1. 13.5 .-\rchitect's Relationship with Subcomracmrs . . .. \ .1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4, 4.2.6. 9.6.), 9.6.4, 1\.3.7 ." ., ...... 9.'I.2.9.5.1.').lll.1 4.2.2.4.2.5.4.2.'). .+.5.6, 9.4.2. 9.5.1, 9.8.2.99.2.9.10. I, 13.5 .... lll.\ ;UH.I. 9.1ll.2. 10. U 6.\.1 Architect's Represemations . . Architect's Site Visits. . . Ashesws . . Atmrneys Fees. . . . . . A w:lrd of SeparJte ConrrJctS. Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work. . . . . . Basic Definitions. . . . . . . Biuuing Requin:mellls . . . . Bqiler and Machinery Insurance . . . BlHlds. Lien Bonds. Perlllrm:lIKe :Ind P:IYlllent . .... 5.2 1.1 1.\.1, \ 1.-:".5.2.1. 11.-i.1 11.3.2 9.lll.2 -.'.\).-i. ').111..\. 11..\9. ll.-i ~ Building Permit .................................... 3.7.1 Capitalization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 1.4 Certificate of Subst:ll1tial Completion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.8.2 Certificates for Payment. . . . . .. 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1, 9.6.6,9.7.1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,13.7,14.1.1.3,14.2.4 CertificatesofInspection, Testing or Approval ..... 3.12.11,13.5.4 Certificates of Insurance . . ., .. . . .. ., . . . . .. 9.3.2,9.10.2,11.1.3 Change Orders. . . . ., 1.1.1,2.4.1.3.8.2.4,3.11,4.2.8,4.3.3,5.2.3, 7.1,7,2,7.3.2.8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3,11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9, \2.1.2 Chwge Orders, Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.2.1 Changes. . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK .... 3.11,4.2.8,7,8.3.1, 9.3.1.I, 10.1.3 Claim, Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 4.3.1 Claims and Disputes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3,4.4,4.5,6.2.5,8.3.2, 9.3.\.2,9.3.3,9.10.4,10.1.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims ................ 4.5.6 Claims for Additional Cost. . . . . . .. 4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.9,6. \.I, 10.3 Claims tor Additional Time. . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.3.9,8.3.2 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.6 Claims for Damages. . .3.18, 4.3.9,6. \.1,6.2.5,8.3.2,9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Claims Subjectto Arbitr:llion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.2.4.4.4,45.1 CleanlngUp ................................... 3.15,6.3 Commencement of Statutory limitation Period .......... 13.7 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to . . . . . ., 2.1.2, 2.2.1,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,4.3.7,5.2.\, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 9.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Commencement of the Work, Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 8.1.2 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration ........................ 3.9.\,4.2.4,5.2.[ Completion, Conditions Relating to . . . . . .. 3.11,3.\5,4.2.2,4.2.9, 4.3.2.9.4.2,9.8.9.9.1,9.10,11.3.5,12.2.2.13.7.1 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 9 Completion, Substwtial. . . . . . . .. 4.2.9,4.3.5.2, B.I.I. 8.1.3, 8.2.;, 9.8,9.9.1, 12.2.2. 13.7 Compliance with Laws...... 1.3,3.6,3.7,3.13,4.\.1,10.2.2.1 \.I, 11.3.13.1,13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.6 Conditions of the Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 6. \.I Consent, Written. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1,3.1,3.\2.8,3.14.2,4.1.2, 4.3.4,4.5.5,9.3.2,9.8.2.99.1,9.10.2,9.10.3.\0.1.2,10.1.3, 11.3. I. 11.3.1.4, 11.3.11. 13.2, 13.4.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. \.1.4,6 Construction Change Directive. Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . ., 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives. . .. \.1.1,4.2.8,7.1,7,3,9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, ContractOr's. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.10,6.1.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts ................ 5.4 Continuing Contract Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 Contract, Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATiON OR SUSPENSION OF THE. . . . . . . 4.3.:'. ;..t.1. 1, 14 Contract Auministration . . . . . 3.3.3.4.9.4,9.5 Contract Award :lOd Execution. Conditions Relating to. . . . .. 3.7.\. 3.10. 5.2,9.2, II. 1.3, 11.3.6. II.-i.\ Contract Documents, The . . . . 1.1, \ .2. :' ContrJct Documents, Copies Furnished :lOU Cse of. .. 1.3.2.2.5.5.3 ComrJct Documents, Definition or' . . . . . . . . . . .' 1.I.l Contract Perform:mce During Arhitration . . . -i.).-i. -i.5..\ Contract Sum ........ .'. . ).t!. -i.j.6. 4.3.-:". -i.-i.4. 5.2..\. 6.1.3.7.2. :'.).9.1,9-.11..\.1,12.2.4.12..\. 1-i.2.-i Contract Sum, Detinilion of. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.1 Contract Time -i..).6, -i.).H. -i.-i.-i. -.2.\._\. -.3. H.2.1. H..U.9-, 12.1.\ ClllHracl Time, Definition llf . 6.1.1 2 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A20' . GE:>;ERAL COi'lDITIONS \)F THE COi'TR.\CT FOR COi'STRl'CTlOi'l . FOCRTEE:\TH EDITIO:\ .\1.-\' . ~ 19K- TilE .\~IERICA:\ I:>;ST\TCTE OF .\RCHITECTS. \-Y; :-JEW Yl)RK .\\.E:>;L'E. ~w.. WASHI:-JCTO:>;. D.C. !lllllHl 00700-3 r ~..:. . ~.. . . CONTRACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 3 Contnctor, Deflnitlon of .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.1, 6.1.2 Contnctor's Bid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.1 Contractor's Construction Schedules. . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.10,6.1.3 Contnctor's Employees, . . . . .. 3.3.2,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.9,3.18,4.2.3, 4.2.6,8.1.2,10.2,10.3,11.1.1,14.2.1.1 Contractor's Uablllty Insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11.1 Contnctor's Relationship with Separ:lte Contnctors and Owner's Forces. . . . .. 2.2.6,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 12.2.5 Contractor's Rel:1tionship with Subcontnctors . . . . . .. 1.2.4,3.3.2, 3.18.1,3.18.2,5.2.5.3,5.4,9.6.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8. 14.2.1.2 Contnctor's Relationship with the Architect . . .. 1.1.2,3.2.1,3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.11, 3.12.8 3.16, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.12,5.2,6.2.2,7.3.4,9.8.2, 11.3.7, 12.1, 13.5 Contnctor's Representations.. 1.2.2,3.5.1,3.12.7,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3 Contnctor's Responsibili[}' for Those Performing the Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3, 10 Contnctor's Review ofContnct DocumentS. . . . .. 1.2.2,3.2,3.7.3 Contnctor's Right to StOp the Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.7 Contnctor's Right to Terminate the Contnet .............. 14.1 Contnctor'sSubmittals ....... 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3, 7.3.6,9.2,9.3.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2, 9.10.3, 10.1.2, 11.4.2, 11.4.3 Contnctor's Superintendent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.9, 10.2.6 Contnctor's Supervision and Construction Procedures. . . . ., 1.2.4, . 3.3, 3.4, 4.2.3, 8.2.2, 8.2.3, 10 ontnctual Liability Insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11.1. 1. 7, 11.2.1 Coordination and Correl:1tion ..... . . . . . . . . .. 1.2.2, 1.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.10,3.12.7,6.1.3,6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Dnwings and Specific:ltions . .. .1.3,2.2.5,3.11 Correction of Work ..................... 2.3,2.4,4.2.1,9.8.2, 9.9.1,12.1.2,12.2,13.7.1.3 Cost, Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.3.6, 14.3.5 CostS .... 2.4,3.2.1,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2,4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.8.1,5.2.3, 6.1.1,6.2.3,6.3,7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7.3.7,9.7,9.8.2. 9.10.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.1.3,11.3.4,11.3.9,12.1,12.2.1,12.2.4,12.2.5,13.5,14 Cutting and Patching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.14,6.2.6 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separ:lte Contnctors 3.14.2, 6.2.4.9.5.1.5,10.2.1.2,10.2.5,10.3.11.1,11.3,12.2.5 Damage to the Work. .... 3.14.2.9.9.1,10.2.1.2.10.2.5,10.3.11.3 Damages, Cl:1irns for.. ;.18,4.;.9,6.1.1,6.2.5,8.3.2.9.5.1.2,10.1.4 Damages for De1ay. ................... 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6.9.7 O:lte of Commencement of the Work, Definition of . . . . . . . .. 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion. Delinition of. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8.1.3 Day, Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8.1.4 Decisions of the Architect. . '. . ., 4.2.6, -t.2.7, 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13, 4.3.2,4.3.6.4.4.1, .+'4.4, '1.5,6.3,7.3.6.7.;.8, B.I.3, 8.3.1, 9.2. 9.4.9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.1, 10.1.2, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Decisions to Withhold Certlflcatlon .......... 9.5,9.7,14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.1, .U.6, 4.3.5.9.5.2.9.8.2.9.9.1. 10.2.5. 12, 13.7.1.3 Defective Work. Delinition of .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.5.1 Definitions. ..... 1.1. 2.1.1. 3.1. 3.5.1, 3.12.1. 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 4.3.1. ;.1,6.1.2.7.2.1. 7.3.1. 7.3.6, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1 Delays and Extensions of TIme. . . . . . . . .. 4.3.1. 4.3.B.1, 4.3.8.2, 6.1.1,6.2.3, :-.2.1. 7.3.1, 7.3.4, 7.3.5, 7.3.8. 7.3.9.8.1.1. 8.3,10.3.1. I.U.1.4 . Disputes ..... ~ . . . . .. .U .4:.-1.3. -1.4. 4.;, 6.2.5, 6.3.7.3.8.9.3.1.2 Documents :md ~:unples:lt the :;,tte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.11 Dnwings, Detinition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.; Dnwings and Specilic:ltions. Csc: :md Oo;vnership oi. . . .. 1.1.1, 1.3, .U.;, 3.11. 5.3 Duty [0 Review Comn.:[ Do.:umc:ms and Fic:ld Conditions. . . .. 3.2 Effective Date: of Insur:uKC: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Emergencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.7,10.3 Employees,Contnctor's.......... 3.3.2,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.9.3.18.1, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 8.1.2, 10.2. 10.3, 11.1.1, 14.2.1.1 Equipment, Labor, Materials and .......... 1.1.3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1, 3.8.2,3.12.3,3.12.7,3.12.11.3.13,3.15.1,4.2.7, 6.2.1,7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.4, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work. . . . . ., 1.1.3, 1.2.3,3.2,3.4.1, 3.5.1.4.2.2.4.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.8,6.2.2,7.1.3, 7.3.9, 8.2. 8.3, 9.5, 9.9.1, 10.2. 14.2, 14.3 execution, Correlation and Intent of the Contnct DocumentS. ... ...... .. .. . . . . . . .. .. .. 1.2,3.7.1 E:'Ctensions ofTime .. . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.1,4.3.8,7.2.1.3,8.3, 10.3.1 Failureof~ymentbyContnc[Qr.............. 9.5.1.3,14.2.1.2 Failure of Payment by Owner ................ 4.3.7,9.7,14.1.3 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment ........ 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2, 4.3.5,9.10,11.1.2,11.1.3,11.3.5,12.3.1,13.7 Financial ArrangementS, Owner's. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.2.1 Fire and Extended Covenge Insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11.3 GENERAL PROVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1 Governing Law . ..... . . . .. .. .. . . . ... . . . . . . . . . .. .... 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty and Warranties) H=rdousMaterials............................ 10.1,10.2.4 Identification of Contnct DocumentS ................... 1.2.1 Identification of Subcontnctors and Suppliers. . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.2. I Indemnification....... 3.17,3.18,9.10.2,10.1.4,11.3.1.2,11.3.7 Information and Services Required of the Owner. . . .. 2.1.2,2.2, 4.3.4, 6.1.3, 6.1.4. 6.2.6, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.3,10.1.4,11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Injury or Damage to Person or Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.9 Inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.3.3,3.3.4,3.7.1,4.2.2, 4.2.6,4.2.9,4.3.6,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.9.2,9.10.1,13.5 Instructions to Bidders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.1 Instructions to theContnctor. ... 3.8.1,4.2.B,5.2.1,7,12.I,13.5.2 Insurance. . . . . .. 4.3.9.6.1.1,7.3.6.4.9.3.2,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2, 11 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery .................... 11.3.2 Insurance, Contractor's Liability...................... 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Insurance, Loss of Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 11.3.3 Insurance, Owner's Liability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11.2 Insurance, Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.2.5,11.3 Insurance, Stored Materials .................... 9.3.2, 11.3.1.4 INSURANCE AND BONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to P:lnial Occupancy. .9.9.1, 11.3.11 Insurance Companies, Settlement with. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11.3.10 Intent of the Contract DocumentS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 1.2.3,3.12.4, 4.2.6. 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4 Interest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 13.6 Interpretation. . . . . . .. 1.2.5, 1.4,1.5, .U.1. 4.3.1. 5.1,6.1.2.8.1.4 Interpretations. Written .................. 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.7 Joinder :lnd Consolidation of Claims Required. . . . . . . . . . . ., 4.;.6 Judgment on Final Award ................ 4.5.I,.U.4.1,4.5.7 Labor and Materials, Equipment. . .. 1.1.3, 1.1.6.3.4,3. ;.1.3.8.2, 3.12.2.3.12.3,3.12.7,3.12.11,3.13,3.15.1, 4.2.7,6.2.1,7.3.6.9.3.2.9.3.3,12.2.4,14 Labor Disputes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8.3.1 LawsandRe:gulations ....... 1.3,3.6,;I.7,;I.13,.U.I,4.5.5,4.;.7, . 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 1.'>.4, 1;\.;.1, 13.;.2, 13.6 Liens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.1.2.4.3.2,4.3.5.1. H.2.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.2 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder ................ 4.5.5 Limitations,StatuteSllf ...... .. ..' ... ..... 4.;.4.2.12.2.6,13.7 Limimions of Authority.. . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1,4.1.2.4.2.1, 4.2.3,4.2.-, -I.2.lll. ;.2.2. 5.2.4, "'.4, 1\.3:10 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GE:"ER.\L CONDITtONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEE:'<TH EDITION .\IA'" . @ 191:l7 THE .\.'IE~IC.\:-; I:-;~TITL:TE OF .\RCHITECTS, 17~~ NEW YORK .\ VENUE. N.W., "".\SHINGTON. 0 C. !tXXX, A201-1987 3 U0700-4 Limit:HionsofUability..... 2.3,3.2.1.3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.8,3.12.11. 3.17.3.18.4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12.6.2.2.9.4.2.9.6.4.9.10.4, 10.1.4,10.2.5.11.1.2.11.2.1.11.3.7,13.4.2,13.5.2 LimitationsofTime,Genera1 ........... 2.2.1.2.2.4.3.2.1.3.7.3, 3.B.2, 3.10. 3.12.5. 3.15.1, 4.2.1. 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.3.2. 4.3.3. 4.3.4,4.3.6, 4.3.9, 4.5.4.2. 5.2.1. 5.2.3. 6.2.4, 7.3.4, 7.4. 8.2. 9.5. 9.6.2. 9.8. 9.9, 9.10. 11.1.3. 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.5. 11.3.6.12.2.1.12.2.2.13.5.13.7 LimitationsofTime.Specific ......... 2.1.2,2.2.1,2.4,3.10,3.11. 3.15.1. 4.2.1, 4.2.11, 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 5.3. 5.4. 7.3.5. 7.3.9. 8.2, 9.2.9.3.1.9.3.3,9.4.1,9.6.1.9.7,9.8.2.9.10.2. 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.3.10,11.3.11,12.2.2,12.2.4.12.2.6,13.7.14 Loss of Use Insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 11.3.3 Material Suppliers .............. 1.3.1,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6.5.2.1. 9.3.1. 9.3.1.2, 9.3.3. 9.4.2. 9.6.5. 9.10.4 Materials.Hazardous ........................... 10.1,10.2.4 Materials, Labor. Equipment and ..... 1.1.3,1.1.6.3.4,3.5.1.3.8.2. 3.12.2,3.12.3,3.12.7,3.12.11,3.13.3.15.1.4.2.7,6.2.1. 7.3.6. 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 12.2.4. 14 Means. Methods, Techniques. Sequences and Procedures of Construction. . . . . . . . ., 3.3.1,4.2.3,4.2.7,9.4.2 Minor Changes In the Work. . . . . . . . ., 1.1.1,4.2.8,4.3.7,7.1,7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 13 Modifications, Defmition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.1 Modificuions to the Contract. .. ........ 1.1.1,1.1.2.3.7.3.3.11. 4.1.2.4.2.1,5.2.3,7.8.3.1,9.7 Mutual Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of . . . . . . .. 2.3.1, 4.3.5,9.5.2,9.8.2, 12, 13.7.1.3 Notice. . . . . . . . . . . ., 2.3,2.4,3.2.1.3.2.2,3.7.3,3.7.4,3.9.3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.17, 4.3, 4.4.4, 4.5. 5.2.1, 5.3. 5.4.1.1, 8.2.2. 9.4.1. 9.5.1.9.6.1.9.7,9.10,10.1.2.10.2.6,11.1.3,11.3,12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.3,13.5.1,13.5.2.14 Notice, Written ............... 2.3.2.4,3.9,3.12.8,3.12.9,4.3, 4.4.4.4.5.5.2.1,5.3,5.4.1.1,8.2.2.9.4.1,9.5.1.9.7,9.10, 10.1.2,10.2.6,11.1.3.11.3,12.2.2,12.2.4,13.3,13.5.2,14 NoticeofTestingandlnspectiOns................ 13.5.1,13.5.2 Notice to procc:c:d. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8.2.2 Notices, Permits, Fees and ...... 2.2.3,3.7,3.13.7.3.6.4. 10.2.2 Observations, Architect's On-Site ................. 4.2.2,4.2.5. 4.3.6.9.4.2,9.5.1.9.10.1,13.5 Observations, ContractOr's. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.2.2.3.2.2 Occupancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.6.6.9.8.1,9.9. 11.3.11 On-Site Inspections by the Architect .......... 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.6. 9.4.2. 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1 On-Site Observations bv th~ Architect. . . . . . . .. 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.3.6, . 9.4.2.9.5.1,9.10.1,13.5 Orders, Written . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.3,3.9,4.3.7,7,8.2.2. 11.3.9. 12.1, 12.2.13.5.2.14.3.1 OWNER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 2 Owner. Definition of . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.1 Owner, Information and Services Required of the. . . . . . ., 2.1.2, 2.2,4.3.-+.6.9, 10.1.-i. 11.2, 11.3, \3.5.1. 14.1.1.5, 14.1.3 owner's Author!tv ...... . .. 3.8.1,4.1.3,4.2.9,5.2.1.5.2.4.5.4.1, 7.3.1. 8.z'.2, 9.'.1. 9.3.2, l1A.I, 12.2.4. 13.5.2, 14.2, 14.3.1 Owner's Financial C:lpabilitv . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.2.1, 14.1.1.5 Owner's L1abll1ty Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . ., 11.2 Owner's Loss of Use Insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11.3.3 Owner's Rc:l:Hionship with SubcontractOrs. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.2, 5.2.1,5.4.1,9.6A Owner's Right to Carr\' Out the Work. . . . . . .' 2.4,12.2.4. 14.2.2.2 Owner's Right to Clean Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6,3 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6.1 Owner's Right to Stop the Work ................... 2.3,4.3.7 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 14.3 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract ... . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 14.2 Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings, Specifications and Other Documents ...... .., ....... 1.1.1,1.3,2.2.5,5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.6.6,9.9, 11.3.11 Patching, Cutting and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.14,6.2.6 Patents, Royalties and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.17 Payment, Applications for. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.2.5,9.2,9.3,9.4, 9.5.1.9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3.9.10.4,14.2.4 Payment, Certificates for. . . . . . . . . ., 4.2.5.4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5. 9.6.1.9.6.6,9.7.1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,13.7, 14.1.1.3.14.2.4 Payment, Failure of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.7.9.5.1.3, 9.7,9.10.2,14.1.1.3,14.2.1.2 Payment, Final. . . . . . . . . . .. 4.2.1.4.2.9.4.3.2,4.3.5,9.10. 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.5. 12.3.1 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.3.6.4. 9.10.3. 11.3.9.11.4 Payments, Progress ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 4.3.4,9.3,9.6. 9.8.3,9.10.3.13.6,14.2.3 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9, 14 PaymentS to SubcontractOrs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.4.2,9.5.1.3, 9.6.2. 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.8, 14.2.1.2 PCB. .. .. .. .. . ..... . .. . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . .. . . . . ., .,. 10.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 7.3.6.4, 9.10.3,11.3.9, 11.4 Permits, Fees and Notices. . . . . .. 2.2.3,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4,10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF . . . . . . . . . . ., 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.1 Product Data, Defmition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings. . ., 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Progress and Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 4.2.2.4.3.4,8.2 Progress Payments ............................ 4.3.4,9.3. 9.6,9.8.3,9.10.3,13.6,14.2.3 Project. Definition of the. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 1.1.4 Project Manual, Defmitionofthe ...................... 1.1.7 Project Manuals .................................... 2.2.5 Project Representatives ............................. 4.2.10 Property Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 10.2.5. 11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY. . . . . . . . . . . ., 10 RegulationsandLaws ............ 1.3.3.6.3.7.3.13.4.1.1,4.5.5, 4.5.7. 10.2.2,11.1,11.3,13.1.13.4.13.5.1,13.5.2.13.6,14 Rejc:ctiOnofWork ......................... 3.5.1,4.2.6.12.2 Rc:lc:asc:s of Waivers and Liens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 9.10.2 Representations......................... 1.2.2,3.5.1,3.12.7, 6.2.2.8.2.1.9.3.3.9.4.2,9.5.1,9,8.2.9.10.1 Represent:Hives............................ 2.1.1,3.1.1.3.9, 4.1.1.4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2,13.2.1 Resolution of Claims and Disputes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.4, 4.5 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work. . . . . . . . . . ., 3.3.2. 4.2.3. 6.1.3. 6.2. 10 Retainage............... 9.3.1.9.6.2.9.8.3.9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Fleld Conditions by Contractor. . . . . . . . . . .. 1.2.2.3.2,3.7.3.3.12.7 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect ............. 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12, 4.2.7,4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.3,9.2.9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by ContractOr . ................... 3.12.5 Rights and Remedies ............. 1.1.2.2.3,2.4.3.5.1,3.15.2. 4.2.6.4.3.6.4.5,5.3,6.1. 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1. 9.7,10.2.5, 10.3,12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.4, 14 Royalties and Patents. . . . . . . . . . , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " 3.17 4 A201-1987 ALA OOClIMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE CONTRACT fOR CONSTRCCTION . fOURTEENTH EDITION .\L\' . @ 1987 THE A.\IERICAN INSTITUTE Of ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE."it.:E. :-l.w., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 00700-5 ~. ~... . . Rules and Notices tor Arbitration ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.5.2 Safety of Persons and Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.2 Safety Precautions and Programs ........... 4.2.3,4.2.7,10.1 S:unples, Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and ... 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Samples atthe Site, Documents and. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . , . .. 3.11 Schedule of Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.2,9.3.1 Schedules, Conslruclion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.10 Separ:lle COntr:lcts and Contr:lcrors . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.4, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.5.5,6,11.3.7,12.1.2,12.2.5 Shop Dr:lwings, Definilionof. ........................ 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. . .. 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Site, Use of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Sile [nspeclions . . . 1.2.2,3.3.4,4.2.2,4.2.9, 4.3.6, 9.8.2, 9. [0.1, 13.5 Sile Visits, Archilect's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.6, 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.2,9.10.[, 13.5 Special Inspections and Testing .............. 4.2.6,12.2.1,13.5 Specifications, Definition of the. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.6 Specifications, The. . . . . . . . .. 1.1.1,1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.4. 1.3,3.11 Statutes of Limitations .................... 4.5.4.2,12.2.6,13.7 StOpping the Work. ............ 2.3,4.3.7,9.7,10.1.2,10.3,14.1 Stored Materials ........... 6.2.1,9.3.2,10.2.1.2,11.3.1.4,12.2.4 Subcontr:lctor, Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5 Subcontractors, Work by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.2.4,3.3.2,3.12.1, . 4.2.3, 5.3, 5.4 Subcontractual Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.3, 5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6.2, 9.6.3,9.6.4, 10.2.1, 11.3.7, 11.3.8, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.2, 14.3.2 Submittals......... 1.3,3.2.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 10.1.2, 11.1.3 Subrogation, Waivers of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6.1.1, 11.3.5,11.3.7 Substantial Completion. . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.2.9,4.3.5.2,8.1.1,8.1.3, 8.2.3,9.8,9.9.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 13.7 SubStanlial Completion, Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.8.1 Substitution ofSubcontr:lctors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.2.3,5.2.4 Substitution of the Architect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.1.3 Substitutions of Materials ............................. 3.5.1 Sub-subCOntr:lCIOr, Definilion of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.1.2 Subsurface Condilions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.6 Successors and Assigns ............................ 13.2 Superintendent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures .. . . .. 1.2.4,3.3, 3.4, 4.2.3,4.3.4.6.1.3,6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.4,8.2,8.3.1,10, 12. 14 SurelY. . . . . . . . . . . . . " 4.4.1. 4.4.4, 5.4.1.2,9.10.2,9.10.3, 14.2.2 Surety,Consentof....................... 9.9.1,9.[0.2,9.10.3 Surveys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.2.2,3.18.3 . Suspension by the Owner for Convenience ............. 14.3 Suspension of the Work ............. 4.3.7,5.4.2,14.1.1.4.14.3 SuspensionorTerminalionoflheContr:lCI ...... 4.3.7,5.4.1.1,14 Taxes ...................................... 3.6,7.3.6.4 Termination by the Contractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 14.1 Termination by the Owner for Cause. . . . , . . . . . , .. 5.4.1.1,14.2 Termin:lllon of the Architect .......................... 4.1.3 Termination of the Contr:lctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 14.2.2 TERMINATlONORSUSPENSIONOFTHECONTRACT...... 14 Tests and Inspections ..... 3.3.3,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2, 12.2.1,13.5 TIME................................................ 8 Time, Delays and extensions of . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.8,7.2.1,8.3 TimeLimits,Specific...,..... 2.1.2,2.2.1,2.4,3.10,3.11,3.15.1, 4.2.1,4.2.11,4.3,4.4,4.5.5.3,5.4,7.3.5,7.3.9,8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3,9.4.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.8.2,9.10.2,11.1.3,11.3.6,11.3.10, 11.3.11,12.2.2,12.2.4,12.2.6,13.7,14 Time LImits on Claims. . . . . . . .. 4.3.2,4.3.3,4.3.6,4.3.9,4.4,4.5 Title to Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.3.2,9.3.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK ............. 12 Uncovering of Wor1< ................................ 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions ..................... 4.3.6,8.3.1,10.1 Unit Prices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.1.4,7.3.3.2 Use of Documents ................. 1.1.1,1.3,2.2.5,3.12.7,5.3 Use of Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Values, Schedule of ............................ 9,2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims: Flnal Payment........... 4.3.5,4.5.1,9.10.3 Waiver of Claims by IheArchilect. ..................... 13.4.2 WaiverofC[aimsbytheContr:lctor......... 9.10.4,11.3.7,13.4.2 WaiverofClaimsbytheOwner.............. 4.3.5,4.5.1,9.9.3, 9.10.3,11.3.3, 11.3.5,11.3.7,13.4.2 Waiver of lienS. ................................... 9.10.2 Waivers of Sub rogal ion ................... 6.1.1,11.3.5,11.3.7 Warranty and Warranlies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.5,4.2.9, 4.3.5.3,9.3.3,9.8.2,9.9.1,12.2.2,13.7.1.3 Weather Delays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.3.8.2 When Arbitration May 8e Demanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.5.4 Work, Definilion of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.3 WriltenConsent.............. 1.3.1,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4, 4.5.5,9.3.2,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,10.1.2, 10.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.1.4, 11.3.11, 13.2, 13.4.2 Written Interpretalions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.2.11.4.2.12.4.3.7 Written Notice. . .. .. . . ... 2.3,2.4,3.9,3.12.8,3.12.9,4.3,4.4.4, 4.5,5.2.1,5.3,5.4.1.1.8.2.2,9.4.1,9.5.1,9.7,9.10,10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11.1.3, 11.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.3, 13.5.2, 14 Written Orders. . . . .. . ... .. . . . .. .... . . . . . . . .. 2.3,3.9,4.3.7, 7,8.2.2,11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GE:'>IER,\L CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDITION AI.\" . @ IWi~ THE .\.\IERIC.\:'>II:'\STITl'TE OF .\RCHITECTS, I;.\~ NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. !llIH)6 A201-1987 5 00700-6 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEANmONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract DocumentS consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda isSUed prior to execution of the Contract, other documentS listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modifi- cation is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract DocumentS do not include other documentS such as bidding requirementS (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding. requirementS). 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract DocumentS form the Contract for Construction. The Contract representS the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreementS, either written or oral. The Con- tract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract DocumentS shall not be construed to create a contrac- tual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Con- tractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub- subcontractor or (3) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shaU, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. 1.1,3 THE WORK The term "Work" me:lllS the construction and services required by the Contract DocumentS, whether completed or partblly completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1 .1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work per- formed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or bv separate contractors. 1.1,5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictOri:l.l portiOns of the Con. tract Documents. ,""herever located and whenever issued, showing the design. locition and dimensions of the Work. generally including plans. ele\'Jtinns, sections. details. sched- ules and diJgrams. 1, '1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specil!CJtinns Jre th;lt portion of the ContrJct Documents consisting of the written requirements for materi:lls. equip. ment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirementS, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and SpecificatiOns. 1.2 EXECUTlON, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.1 The Contract DocumentS shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor as provided in the Agreement. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract DocumentS, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Docu- mentS upon request. 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a repre- sentation that the Contractor has visited the site, become famil- iar with local conditions under which the Work is to be per- formed and correlated personal observations with require- mentS of the Contract DocumentS. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract DocumentS is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract DocumentS are comple- mentary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Docu- mentS and re:LSonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended resultS. 1.2.4 OrganiZ2tion of the SpecificatiOns into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract DocumentS, words which have well-known technical or construction indus- try meanings are used in the Contract DocumentS in accord- ance with such recognized meanings. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIACATlONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documentS prepared by the Architect are instrumentS of the Architect's service through which the Work to be executed by the Con. tractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub- subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documentS prepared by the Architect, and unless mheJ:""ise indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. AU copies of them, except the ContrJCtOr's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contrac- tor. Jre for use solely with respect to this Project. They Jre nOt to be used by the ContrJctor or any SubcontractOr. Sub- subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other proj- ects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the 6 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GE~ER..\L C01'<OITlONS OF THE CONTR..\CT FOR CONSTRCCTION . FOliRTEE:ITH EDITlO;\ .\1.\" . ~ 19!1~ THE .\,\\ERIC.\:O< INSTITCTE OF .\RCHITECTS. \ ~.\) NEW YORK .\\'ENL'E. ~.w.. W.\SHI~GTON. D.C. 201llX) 00700-7 tE~, . ...-c.... . Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and echitect. The ContractOr, SubcontractOrs, Sub-subcontractors d material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applioble portions of the Draw. ings, Specifications and Other documentS prepared by the Architect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract DocumentS. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documentS prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatOry requirementS or for other purposes in con- nection with this Project is nOt to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's copyright or other reserved rightS. 1.4 CAPITALIZATION 1.4.1 Terms opitalized in these General ConditiOns include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of num- bered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subpara- graphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documentS published by the American Institute of ArchitectS. 1.5 INTERPRETATION 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract DocumentS fre. quently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and arti- cles such as "[he" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in anOther is not intended to affect the interpreution of either statement. ARTICLE 2 ~.1 OWNER DEFINITION 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract DocumentS as if singular in number. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. 2.1.2 The Owner upon reasonable written request shall furnish to the ContractOr in writing information which is necessary ;md relevant for [he ContractOr to evaluate, give nOtice of or enforce mechanic's lien rightS. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein :It the time of execution of the Agreement and, within five days after any change, information of such change in title, recorded or unrecorded. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF TH~ OWNER 2,2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, prior to execution of the Agreement and promptly from time to time thereafter, furnish to the ContractOr reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's oblig:ltions under the Contract. (.Vote: Unless ~-ucb re(lSonable el'ide/lce were jilli/isb!!d on request prior to tlJe execution of tbe ttgreem!!nt. tbe proSP!!ctil'e contractor ll'ould not he required to e.\"I!cute tll!! Agreeme/lt or 10 commence tbe W'ork.j 2.2.2 The Owner ~hall furnish surveys describing physical .c~:JrJCteristiCS' leg-.J.llimitations :.lnu utility 10c:Jtions for the ~ite of the Project. Jnu :.l legal uescnptlon of the ~Ite. 2.2.3 -Except for penn its :md fee:s which :.lre the responsibili(\' of the Contracwr unuer rhe ConcrJC[ Documents, [he O\....ner shall secure: :.l11d p:.l~' t~)r necessJry appro\':.lls, cJ.Sements, :.lssess. mentS and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptn~ to avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract DocumentS, the ContractOr will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. 2.2.6 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and respon- sibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especia.lly those in respect to Article 6 (Construction by Owner or by Separate Contractors), Article 9 (PaymentS and Completion) and Article 11 (Insurance and Bonds). 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is nOt in accordance with the requirementS of the Contract DocumentS as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract DocumentS, the Owner, by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contrac. tor to stOp the Work, or any portion thereof, until the ouse for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stOp the Work shall nOt give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con- tractOr or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaultS or neglectS to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract DocumentS ;md fails within a seven.day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a second seven-day period. If the ContractOr within such second seven- day period after receipt of such second notice fails to com- mence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such defi- ciencies. including c..:ompensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure, Such action by the Owner and amounts charged co the Contr..lccor are both subject co prior approval of the Archi. tect. If payments [hen or therc..lfter due the Contr..lccor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contr..lctor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 DEFINITION 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identitied :.l.S such in the Agreement :.l11d is referred Cl) througllout the Contr:lCt Doc..:umt:l1ts :.l.S if singular in numher. The (erm ooConrr:Jcroroo mc..lOS the Cnnrr:Jcror l)r [he CllnrraCtllr's authorized represeIHJri\'e. AlA DOCUMENT AlOl . CE:"ERAL CO:"OITIONS OF THE CONTR.\CT FOR CONSTRt.:CTION . FOl'RTEE:'oITH WITIO,\; .\/A J . ~ I<JM- THE .\.\IE~IC.\:'oIINSTITl'TE ()F .\RCHITECTS. 17~, :-IEW YORK .WENl.'E. N.W.. WASHI:,,(jTON. D C ~lllllll' A201-1987 7 A"/ll" Q 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDmONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 The Contractor shall CU"efully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsis- tencies or omisSions in the Contract Documents unless the Contr:lctor recognized such error, inconsistenq or omisSion and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Con- tr:lctOr performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency or omisSion in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contrac- tOr shall assume appropriate responsibility for such perfor- mance and shall be:l1' an appropriate amount of the attributable costs for correction. 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall CU"efully compare such field mea- surements and conditions and other information known to the ContractOr with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omisSions discovered shall be reported to the Architect at once. 3.2.3 The Contr:lctor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pur- suant to paragraph 3.12. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contr:lctor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construc- tion mems, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Con- tr:lct, unless Contract Documents give other specific instruc- tions concerning these matters. 3.3.2 The ContractOr shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contr:lctor's employees, SubcontractOrs and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contr:lct with the Contractor.. 3.3.3 The Contr:lctOr shall not be relieved of obligations to per- form the Work in accordance with the Contr:lct Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administr:ltion of the Contr:lct, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the. Contr:lctor. 3.3.4 The Contr:lctor shall be responsible for inspection of por- tions of Work already performed under this Contr:lct to deter- mine that such portionS' are in proper condition to receive sub- sequent Work. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contr:lct Documents, the Contr:lctOr shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equip- ment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, he:lt, utilities, transportation, md other facilities md services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether tempor:1ry or permanent :lJ1d whether or not incorpO- rated or to be incorpor:lted in the Work. 3.4.2 The Contr:lctOr shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contr:lctOr's employees :lJ1d other persons C:lflying out the Contr:lct. The Contr:lctor shall not permit employment of un tit p<:rsons or p<:rsons nOI skilled in tasks :lSSigned to them. 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The ContractOr warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contr:lct will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permit- ted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contr:lct Documents. Work not conforming to these require- ments, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The ContractOr's warranty excludes remedy for dznage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper oper:ltiOn, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Architect, the ContractOr shall furnish satisfactoty evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, uSe and similar taxes for the Work or portiOns thereof provided by the Con- tr:lctor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go intO effect. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contr:lctOr shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completiOn of the Work which are custOmarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or nego- tiations concluded. 3.7.2 The Contr:lctOr shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regubtions and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. 3.7.3 It is not the ContractOr's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regula- tions. However, if the ContractOr observes that portions of the Contr:lct Documents are at variance therewith, the ContractOr shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.7.4 If the Contr:lctOr performs Work knowing it to be con- trary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs.. ,#'. ~:'<. . '", . 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contr:lctor shall include in the Contr:lct Sum all allowances stated in the Contr:lct Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amountS and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contr:lctor shall not be required to employ persons or entities against which the ContractOr makes reasonable objection. 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contr:lct Documents; .1 materials and equipment under :lJ1 aIIoW:lJ1ce shall be selected promptly by the Owner to avoid delay in the Work; .2 aIIow:lJ1ces shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials :lJ1d equipment delivered at the site :lJ1d all required t;!.'Ces, less applicable trade discountS; . ALA DOCUMENT A201 . GENER....L CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRCCTION . FOURTEE:-lTH EDITION .\1.\' . g) \91\7 THE .\MER1CAN I:-lSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 17,5 NEW YORK WENCE. :-l.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 2uoo6 8 A201-1987 00700-9 . .3 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other e.,,<penses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be induded in the Contract Sum and not in the allowances; .4 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3.8.2.2 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.3. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superinten- dent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superinten- . dent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Con- tractor. Important communications shall be confrrmed in writ- ing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Con- tract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a ContraCtor's constl1.lction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditiOns of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the e.;<tent required by the Con- tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practi- _able execution of the Work. .10.2 The Contractor shall prepare lI11d keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordi- nated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submitt:Us. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall conform to the most recent schedules. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications. addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record changes and selectiOns made during construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Prod- uct Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Archi- tect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 SHOP DRAWIN~ PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the ContractOr or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, per- form;mce' ch:trts, instructions. brochures, diagrams :md other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.12.3 S;unplc:s are physicll eX;lmplc:s which illustrate . m;lterials, equipment or workmanship and establish stand;mL~ by which tht.: Work will be judged. 3.12.4 Shop Dr.lwings. PrOllucr D-Jt;l, S;unplc:s ;lnd simibr suh- mituls ;m: not Cnntrxt DoCtllnents. The purpose of their suh- mitt;tl is [() del110nstrJte for [hose portions of the Work tor which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reason- able prompmess and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate con- tractors. Submittals trulde by the Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action, 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submit- tal has been approved by the Architect. Such Work shall be in accordance wit~ approved submittals. 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submitt:Us, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materi:Us, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the ContractOr has specifica.lly informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The ContractOr shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Draw- ings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Archi- tect's approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submitt:Us, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submitt:Us. 3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is nOt expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. 3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria of trulteria1s, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculatiOns and certifi- cations. 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The ContractOr shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The ContractOr shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts tit together properly. 3,14.2 The ContrJctor shall not d:umge or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially comp1c:ted construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, p;ltching or other- wise ;lIte ring such construction, or by exclVation. The ContrJC' tor shall not cur or otherwise :uter such construction by the AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GE:\ER.\L CONDITIONS Of TilE CONTR.\CT fOR CONSTRl:CTtON . fOCRTEE~TII WITtON AlA' . 19I1)>I- HIE .\.\IElllt:.\:-lI:",STITl'TE OF ,\RCIIITtcTS. I ~.I'; NEW YORK AVF.:OH:E. N.W.. W,ISIIINl;T( IN. D C ~\IIHKl A201-1987 9 00700-10 Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unrea- sonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surround- ing area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tOols, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the ContractOr. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or prod- uct of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has rea- son to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the ContractOr shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promprly furnished to the Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Archi- tect's consultants, :md agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, includ- ing but not timited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, dam- age, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible prop- erty (other than the Work itselt) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, reg:udless of whether or nOt such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. 'Such oblig;J.tion shaJI not be construed to negate, abridge. or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this ParagrJph 3.18. 3.18.2 In cl:J.ims ag:J.inst any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor. anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. the indemnitica- tion obligation under this Paragraph 3.18 shall not be limited by a limitJtion on anlOunt or type of d:unages, compensation or benefits paYJble b\' or for the Contr:1Ctor or a Subcontractor under workers' or workmen's compensation ;lCtS, disJbility bene tit ;lctS or other emplovee bene lit ;1CtS. 3.1 B.3 The tlbligations of the Contractor under this PJrJgrJph 5.1 H shall not extend (0 [he Iiabilitv of the Architect, the AIchi- tect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reportS, surveys, Change Orders, designs or specifica- tions, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture iden- tified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modilled or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unrea- sonably withheld. 4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect, the Owner shall appoint an architect against whom the Con- tractor makes no reasonable objection and whose statuS under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect. 4.1.4 Disputes arising under Subparagraphs 4. 1.2 and 4.1.3 shall be subject to arbitration. 4.2 ARCHITECTS ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the correction period described in Para- graph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have Juthority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accorcbnce with other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals JppropriJte to the stage of construction to become generally f:uniliar with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicJt- ing that the Work, when completed, will be in accorcbnce with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to mal<e exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on- site observJtions as an architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work, Jnd will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. 4,2.3 The Architect will nOt have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means. methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for SJfety precJutions and prognms in connection with the Work, since these Jre solely the Contractor's responsibility a.s provided in ParJgrJph 3.3. The Architect will nOt be responsible for the Contractor's failure [0 carry out the ""ark in Jccordmce with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for JctS or omissions of the Con- 10 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GE:O;ER.\L CO~[)ITI()NS OF THE CONTR.\CT fOR CONSTRL'CTION . fOLRTEE="TH EDITIO=" .\1.\" . {: I 'lI'- THE .\.\Ir.RIC.\=" I:O;STlTL:Tr. UF .\RCHITECTS. 1-'" :-:EW H1RK .\\'E:O;l.E. =".W.. W.\SHI~(;TON. D.t:. 2\l,ItX, 00700-11 C'~. " . . tractOr, SubcontraCtors, or their agents or employees, or of any ether persons performing portions of the Work. ".2.4 Communications Facllltatlng Contract Administra- tion. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially autho- rized, the Owner and ContraCtor shall endeavor to communi- cate through the Architect. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the: Architect. Commu- niCltions by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractOrs shall be: through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluatiOns of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the ContractOr and will issue CertifiCltes for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable: for implement:l. tion of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to e.xercisc: or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Archi. tect to the ContractOr, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons perform- ing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other . appropriate action upon the ContraCtor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Dat:l and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the ContrJct Docu- ments. The Architect's action will be taken with such re:LSon- able promptness as to Cluse no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contrJctOrs, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accurJcy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for subst:IDti:lting instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the ContrJctor's submit- tals shall not relieve the Contr.l.ctor of the obligations under ParagrJphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety preClutiOns or, unless otherwise specifically st:lted by the Architect, of any construction me:ll1S. methods, techniques, sC!quences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specitlc item shall not indicate approval of an JSSembly of which the item is a component. 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construc- tion Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspectiOns to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the (tHe of final completion. will r~eive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's revit:w lI1d records written warranties md rebted documents required by the Contract and assemblt:d by the ContractOr. mu ~vill issue :.I tin:.U Certificate for P:lyment upon compliance with the requirements of [he CnntrJct Documents. . 4.2.10 If the Owner :U1J Architect :lgree, [he Architect will pro- viue one or more pruiect represent:ltives to :lSsist in c:mying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site:. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorpo- rated in the ContraCt Documents. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concern- ing performance unde:r and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contrac- tor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made with re:lSonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpret:ltions required of the Architect shall be fur- nished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fur- nish such interpret:ltions until 15 clays after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and re:LSonably inferable from the ContrJct DocUments and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpret:ltions and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpret:ltions or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetiC effect will be fll1al if consistent with the intent expressed in the ContrJct Documents. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or JSSertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpre- tation of ContrJct terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in ques- tion between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relat- ing to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. 4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect, shall be referred initially to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4.4. A deci- sion by the Architect, as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4, shall be required as a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation of a Claim between the Contractor and Owner as to all such matters arising prior to the date final payment is due, regardless of (I) whether such matters relate to execution and progress of the Work or (2) the extent to which the Work has been com- pleted. The decision by the Architect in response to a Claim shall not be a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation in the event (1) the position of Architect is vacant, (2) the Architect has nOt received evidence or has failed to render a decision within agreed time limitS, (3) the Architect has failed to t:lke action required under Subpar-Jgraph 4.4.4 within 30 days :.Ifter the Claim is m:lde. (4) 4., dJYs have passed after the Cl:.1im h:lS been referred to the Architect or (5) the C!Jim relates to a mechanic's lien. 4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Cl:.1ims by either party must be m:lde within 2 I d:lYs after occurrence of the event giving rise to such CI;tim or within 2 I days :llkr the cl:.1imant tirst recognizes the condition giving rise to the CI;tim, whichever is !Jter. Cl:lims must be m:lde by written notice. An :lduition:ll Claim m:lue :lfter [he initi:ll Claim h:15 been implemented by Ch:lnge Oruer will not be considereu unless submitted in a timely manner. A201-1987 11 AlA DOCUMENT A20' . \;E:->EiL\L ,:O:->OITlONS 01' THE CONTR.\CT FOR CO:'<STRLCTION . I'OL'RHE:->TH EDITION .\1.\" . ~ \,,>4- TIlE .\~\ERIC.\:-> \:->qITL'TE \)F .\RUIITECTS. 1-.\'; :"E\X' YOR" .\\'E:-JI!E. :'>l.W. W.\SIII:->(;TON. D C. ':lll~~, 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Perfonnance. Pending final reso- lution of a Claim induding arbitration, unless otherwise agreed in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with perfor- mance of the Contract and the Owner sha.ll continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents, 4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: FInal Payment. The making of fmal payment sha.ll constitute a waiver of ClaimS by the Owner except those arising from: .1 liens, ClaimS, security interests or encumbrances aris- ing out of the Contract and unsertled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. 4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown CondItions. If con- ditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or orherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materi- a.Ily from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which dif. fer materia.lly from those ordinarily found to exist and genera.lly recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party sha.ll be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 clays after fust observance of the conditions. The Archi- tect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditiOns at the site are nor materia.lly different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect sha.ll so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the re:lSOns. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 clays after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If the Owner and Contractor CU1not agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment sha.ll be referred to the Architect for initial deter- mination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4.4. 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein sha.ll be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Para- graph 10.3. If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for re:LSOns including but nor limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Mchitect, (2) an order by the Owner to stOp the Work where the Contractor was nor at fault, (3) a writ- ten order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Archi- tect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with the procedure established herein. 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.8.1 If the ContractOr wishes to make Cbim for an increase in the Contract Time, written norice :IS provided herein shall be given. The ContractOr's Claim shall include m estimate of cost and of probable d1eCt of del:1v on progress of the Work. In the C:ISe of 'J continuing deby only one Cbim is necessary. 4.3.8'.2 If 'Jdn:rse wC'Jther conditions 'Jre the b:ISis for 'J Cbim for 'Jdditional time, sllch Cbim shall be documented by wta substalltiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time md could not have been reasonably anticip2ted, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. 4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, of my of the orher party's employees or agents, or of others for whose acts such party is legally liable, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, sha.ll be given to the orher party within a re:LSOnable time not exceeding 21 clays after fust observance. The notice sha.ll provide sufficient detail to enable the orher party to investigate the matter. If a Claim for addi- tional cost or time related to this Claim is to be asserted, it shall be med as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.7 or 4.3.8. 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.4.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of the following preliminary actions within ten clays of receipt of a Claim: (1) request additional supporting data from the c\aimmt, (2) submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Archi- tect expects to take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole or in part, stating reasons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of the Claim by the other party or (5) suggest a compromise. The Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. 4.4.2 If a Claim has been resolved, the Architect will prepare or obtain appropriate documentation. 4.4.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the party making the Claim shall, within ten clays after the Architect's preliminary response, take one or more of the following actions: (1) submit additional supporting c1ata requested by the Architect, (2) modify the initial Claim or (3) notify the Architect that the initial Claim stands. 4.4.4 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or requested by the Architect, the Architect wi.\1 notify the parties in writing that the Architect's decision will be made within seven clays, which decision shall be fmal and binding on the parties but subject to arbitration. Upon expiration of such time period, the Architect will render to the parties the Architect's written decision relative to the Claim, including any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. If there is a surety and there appears to be a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Architect may, but is nOt obligated to, nOtify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. 4.5 ARBITRATION 4.5.1 Controversies and Claims Subject to Arbitration. Any controversy or Claim arising out of or related to the Comract, or the breach thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in accor- dance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rutes of the Americm Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitratOr or arbitratOrs may be entered in my court having jurisdiction thereof, except controversies or Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraph 4.3.5. Such controversies or Claims upon which the A.rchitect has given notice md rendered a decision as provided in Subp'Jragraph 4.4.4 shall be subject to arbitration upon written demand of either p'Jrty. ArbitiJtion m'JY be commenced when ~5 days h'Jve p:ISsed 'Jt'rer 'J Claim has been referred to the Architect :IS provided in P:J.r'Jgr.lph -1..:\ 'Jnd no decision has been rendered. 12 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS O~ THE C6i'HRACT mK COl"STKI'CTlON . FOL'KTEENTH EDITION AI.\" . \9 I')/{" TIlE .\MERICAN INSTITUTE ()~ .\flCIIITECTS. 17.\'\ :"lEW YORK WE:-oCE. N.W.. WASIIINGTON. D.C.lIlIMMI 00700-13 C ~:'~. . . . 4.5.2 Rules and Notices for Arbitration. Claims between the .wner and Contractor not resolved under Paragraph 4.4 shall, subject to arbitration under Subparagraph 4.5.1, be dedded by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the Americm Arbitration Association cur- remly in effect, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise. Notice of demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Agreement between the Owner and Con- tractor and with the Americm Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be fIled with the Architect. 4.5.3 Contract Performance During Arbitration. During arbi- tration proceedings, the Owner and Contractor shall comply with Subparagraph 4.3.4. 4.5.4 When Arbitration May Be Demanded. Demand for arbi- tration of any Claim may not be made until the earlier of (1) the date on which the Architect has rendered a final written ded- sion on the Claim. (2) the tenth day after the parties have pre- semed evidence to the Architect or have been given re:JSOl1:J.ble opportunity to do so. if the Architect has not rendered a fmal written decision by that date. or (3) any of the five events described in subparagraph 4.3.2. 4.5.4.1 When a written decision of the Architect states that (1) the decision is fmal but subject to arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the fmal written decision. then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after . arbitration proceedings have been initiated. such d~cis~on may be entered as evidence. but shall not supersede arbltranon pro- ceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. . 4.5.4.2 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Subparagraphs 4.5.1 and 4.5.4 and Clause 4.5.4.1 as applioble. and in other C1Ses within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen. and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of leg:ll or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. 4.5.5 limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agree- ment and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any other person or entity ~ought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by consolicbtion or joinder or in any other manner, parties other than the Owner. Contractor, a separate contrac- tor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the Owner, Contractor or a separate c'ontractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an orig- inalthird party or addition:Ll third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration involving :m additionJI person or entity shaJl not constitute consent to arbitl"Jtion of J dispute not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therdn. The fore. going Jgreement to arbitl"Jte and other Jgreements to Jrbitrate with an additionJI person or entity duly consented to by pJrties 10 ihe Agreement shall be specitkJlly enforceable under Jppli. C:lhle IJW in ~Il1Y court hJving jurisJiction thereof. 4.5.6 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. A p:lfty who fIles a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitra- tion is permitted to be derrumded. When a party fuils to include a Claim through oversight, inadvertence or excusable neglect. or when a Claim has matured or been acquired subsequently. the arbitratOr or arbitrators may permit amendment. 4.5.7 Judgment on Anal Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be fmal, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applioble Law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEANITIONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with.the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a SubcontractOr or an authorized representative of the Subcon- tractor. The term "SubcontractOr" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractOr. 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractOr" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractOr or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements. the ContractOr, as soon as prac- tioble after award of the Contract. shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or enti- ties (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal por- tion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Con- tmctor in writing staring whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investig:llion, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architecr to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reason- able objection. 5.2.2 The ContractOr shall not contract with a proposed per- son or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made rea- sonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contmctor, the Contractor shall propose :mother to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shaJI be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. Ho~"'ever, no increase in the Contl"Jct Sum sh:LlI be allowed for such change unless the Contl"Jctor has Jcted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. 5.2.4 The Contl"JCtor shall nut chJnge J Subcontr:J.ClOr, person or entity previously se!c::cted if the Owner or Architect mJkes re-J.Sunable objection [0 such chJnge. AlA DOCUMENT A201 . l;f.:-;f.R.\L CONDITIONS OF TilE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRl'CTION . FOCRTEENTII EDITION AlA. .,g I')M- Tllf. .\.\IERIC.\:-; I:-;STITGTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1".\' :'olEW YORK .\VENl;E. N.W.. W.\SIIINCTON, D.C. ~I)()()(' A201-1987 13 ()()"7 nn_ 1 /. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where lega.1ly required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the SubcontractOr, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Docu- mentS, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Docu- mentS, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcon- tract agreement shall preserve and prmect the rightS of the Owner and Architect under the Contract DocumentS with respect to the Work to be performed by the SubcontractOr so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rightS, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rightS, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contr:lctor, by the Contr:lct DocumentS, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contr:lctor shall require each SubcontractOr to enter intO similar agreementS with Sub-sub- contractOrs. The ContractOr shall make available to each pro- posed SubcontractOr, prior to the execution of the subcontr:lct agreement, copies of the Contract DocumentS to which the Subcontr:lctOr will be bound, and, upon written request of the SubcontractOr, identify to the Subcontr:lctor terms and condi- tions of the proposed subcontr:lct agreement which may be at variance with the Contract DocumentS. SubcontractOrs shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documentS available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractOrs. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portiOn of the Work is assigned by the Contr:J.ctOr to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contr:J.ct by the Owner for Cluse pursuant to Para- graph 14.2 and only for those subcontr:J.ct agreements which the Owner acceptS by notifying the Subcon- tr:lctor in writing; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rightS of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contr:J.Ct. 5.4.2 If the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontr:J.ctOr's compensation shall be equitably adjusted. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD ;;EPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or oper:J.tions related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contr:lctS in connection with other por- tions of the Project or other construction or oper:ltions on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved be::C:l.use:: of such :lction by the Owner, the:: ContractOr sh:lll m:lke such Claim as provided else- whe::re in the Contract Documents. 6.1.2 When sep:l,.l.te cont,.l.cts :lre :lw:J.rded for different por- tions of the Proje::ct or other construction or ope,.l.tions on the site, the term oOContr:lCmroO in the Contl.l.Ct Documents in e:!ch C:lSt:' sh:ll1 mean the Cont,.l.ctm who executes c.l.Ch se::p:l'.l.te Owner-Col1!,.l.Ctllr A~reement. 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activi- ties of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooper:J.te with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate con- tractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction sched- ules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contr:lctor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract DocumentS, when the Owner performs construction or oper:ltions related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rightS which apply to the Contractor under the Condi- tions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in. Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. . 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBIUTY 6.2.1 The ContractOr shall afford the Owner and separate con- tr:J.ctors reasonable opporruniry for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activi- ties and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's con- struction and operations with theirs as required by the Contr:lct DocumentS. 6.2.2 If part of the Contr:lctor's Work depends for proper execution or resultS upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separ:J.te contractOr, the ContractOr shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defectS in such Other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and resultS. Failure of the Contr:J.ctor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or sepa- rate contractors' completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defectS not then reasonably discover:J.ble. 6.2.3 CostS caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be bome by the party responsi- ble therefor. 6.2.4 The ContractOr shall promptly remedy damage wrong- fully caused by the Contractor to comple::ted or partially com- pleted construction or to property of the Owner or separate contr:lCtors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question between the Contr:lctor and a se::par:lte contr:lctor shall be sub- ject to the provisions of Par:lgr:lph 4.3 provided the separ:lte contr:lctor has reciprocal obligations. 6.2.6 The Owner and e:J.ch separ:lte contr:J.ctor shall have the:: same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are describe::d for the Contr:J.ctor in Paragr:J.ph 3.1-i. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises :unong the Contractor. sep:lr:lte con- tr:lctOrs and the Owner :IS to the responsibility under their respective contractS for maintaining the premises and surround- ing are:! fre::e from waste m:lterials and rubbish as described in Par.l.graph 3. I ;, the Owne::r m:J.Y clc.U1 up and J.!locate the:: COSt among those responsib1c:: as the .\rchitect determines to be just. 14 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . l;F.:'lER.\L CONDITIONS OF THE CO~TR.\CT FOR CONSTRL'CTION . FOL'RTEENTH EDITIO;>O; .\1.\' . S; I'>IC THF. A.\tERIC.\N INSTITL'TE OF ARCHITECTS. 1-.\'\ NE~' YORK .\\'F.Nl:E. :'l.W.. WASHIi'o:GTON. D.C. !(KIlI\) 00700-15 ~ ~'..~.. . . . ARTICLE 7 . CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 CHANGES 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execu- tion of the Contnct, and without invalidating the Contnct, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations st:J.ted in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, ContnctOr and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and mayor may not be agreed to by the ContractOr; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under appli- cable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contrac- tor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. 7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantitieS originally con- templated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Con- struction Change Directive that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or ContractOr, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. . 7,2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written in:;trument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 a change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any; and .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. 7.2.2 Methods used in determining :ldjustmems to the Comr:lct Sum may include those listed in Subp:lrJ.gnph 7.3.3. . 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order pre- pared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the ContrJct consisting of addi- tions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Con- tract Time being adjusted accordingly. 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of U)(al :lgreement on the terms of a Change Order. 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum. the :ldjustment shall be based un one of the follm\'ing methmls: .1 mutual acceptance nf a lump sum properly itemized and supp\lrted hy suftkient subst:ll1tiating d:Ha to per- mit e\':llu:Hion: .2 unit prices stated in the ContrJct Documcnts or sub- sequentl\' a~reeu upon: .3 cOSt to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parries and a mutually accept:J.ble fixed or percent- age fee; or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Concractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contr:lctor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the pro- posed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contrac- tor indicates the agreement of the ContractOr therewith, includ- ing adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effec- tive immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.3.6 If the ContractOr does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contnct Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Archi- tect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, includ- ing, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Cl:1use 7,).3.3, the ContractOr shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting tOgether with appropriate supporting dat:J.. Unless Otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' or workmen's compensation insurance; .2 costs of materWs, supplies and equipment, includ- ing cOSt of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Comractor or others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales. use or simii:lr taxes related to the Work; and .5 additional cOStS of supervision and field office person- nel directly attributable to the change. 7.3.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, amounts not in dispute may be included in ApplicJtions for Payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contrac- to~ to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as con- firmed bv the Architect. When both additions and credits covering' related Work or substitution:; are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. 7,3.8 If the Owner and ContrJctor do not agree with the adjustment in Cumract Time or the method for determining it, the adjustment or the method shall be referred to the Architect for uetermination. 7.3.9 When the Owner :lOd Contr:Jctor agree with the deter. mination made bv the .\rchitect cuncerning the :ldjustments in the Cuntract Sum' and CuntrJct Time. or otherwise re:tch :Igree. mem upon the aujustments. such agreement shall be effective immeuiatdy anu shall Ile recorueu 11Y preparJtion anu execu. tion of:1I1 appropriatc Cl1ange Order. AlA DOCUMENT AlOl . I;E:>;ER.\L CO:"DITIO:"S OF THE CONTR.\CT FOR CONSTRI'CTIOr-; . FOt:RTEE:'>/TlI EDITIl):,>/ .\1'\. . S' l')~- THE .\~\F.RlC.\:-; 1\~TIT1'TE ,1F .\RCHITECTS. I-_\~ ~EW YOIHi. .-\\'E~I:E. ~.w. W.-\SHI:"I;TllN.OC. 21HlIHl A201-1987 15 00700-16 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.4.1 The Architect willluve authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall orry out such written orders promptly. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEAN mONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Con- tract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. The date shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with p:u-agraph 9.8. 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defmed. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Con- tnctor confums that the Contnct Time is a re:lSonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agree- ment or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely com- mence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely f1ling of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. 8.2.3 The ContnctOr shall proceed expeditiously with ade- quate forces and sh:uI achieve Substantial Completion within the Contnct Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contnctor is oelayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of J sepJnte contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable ClSualties or ocher causes beyond the ContractOr's concrol, or by delay :luthorized by the Owner pending :ubitration, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify deby, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such rC::'JSonable time :IS the ArchiteCt In:lV determine. 8.3.2 Cbims rebting co time shall he m:lde in :lccordance with :lppliC:lble provisions of ParJgrJph ~..). 8.3.3.:rhis P:lrJgrJph 8.) doe~ nm preclude n:covery of d:.un. ages for del:lY by dther p:lny under ocher provisions of the Contract DocumetHs. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, includ- ing authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contnctor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and sup- ported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applica- tions for Payment. 9.3 APPUCATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At le:lSt ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from SubcontractOrs and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 9.3.1.1 Such appliCltions may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet included in Change Orders. 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for pay- ment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier beCluse of a dispute or other reason. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incor- poration in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the ContnctOr with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, stOrage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Contr.lctor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The ContractOr further warrants that upon submiccal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owm:r shall, to the best of the ContrJctor's knowledge, inform:Jtion and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims. securitv inten~$ts or encumbrJnces in favor of the ContrJctor, Subcontnctors, m:lterial suppliers, or other persons or entities m:lking a cbim by rC:ISon of h:lving provided labor, m:l[erials :lnd equipment relating to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will. within seven d:lYs Jfter receipt of the Contr:lctor's Application for P:Jyment. either issue co the 16 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS ot' THE CONTR.~CT FOK CONSTRUCTION. rCJL:RTt::ENTH EDITION .~I.\' ..{) I'.IH7 THE .~MEKIC.~N INSTITUTE OF AKCHITECTS. 17.\> NEW YOKK AVENUE. :-I."".. W.~SHINGTON. D.C. !ill~)() 00700-17 ( . l . . Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contrac- .or, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly ue, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.4.2 The issilllflce of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indic:ued and that, to the best of the Architect's knowl- edge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accor- dance with the Contract DocumentS. The foregoing representa- tions are subject to an evallUtion of the Work for conformance with the Contract DocumentS upon Substantial Completion, to resultS of subsequent testS and inspections, to minor deviations from the Contract DocumentS correctable prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issilllflce of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Pay- ment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contrac- tor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. .9.5 . DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTlACATlON 9.5.1 The Architect may decide not to certify payment and may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Archi- tect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such e.'{tent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: , .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or re:LSonable evidence indicat- ing probable ftIing of such claims; .3 f:tilure of the Contractor to make paymentS prop- erly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; .4 re:LSonable evidence that the Work c:mnot be com. pleted for the unp:tid balance of the Contr:lct Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contr:lctor; .6 re:LSonable evidence that the Work will not be com- pleted within the Contr:lct Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the ;illticipated delay; or .7 persistent f:J.ilure to carry out the Work in :lccordance with the ContrJct Documents. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amountS previously withheld. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract DocumentS, and shall so notify the Architect. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontr:lctor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, Out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's por- tion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from paymentS to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make paymentS to Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontrac- tor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of com- pletion or amountS applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of por- tions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to payor to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract DocumentS. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract DocumentS the amount cer- tified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Con- tractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stOp the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contr:lct Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contr:lctor's reasonable costS of shut-down, delay and start-up, which shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPlETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is suffi- ciently complete in accordance with the Contract DocumentS so the Owner c:m occupy or utilize the Work for itS intended use. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a por- tion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. The Contr:lctor shall proceed promptly to com- plete and correct items on the list. F:tilure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contr:lctor to complete all Work in :lccord:1nce with the Contr:lct Docu- mentS. Upon receipt of the Contr:lctOr's list, the Architect will make;ill inspection to determine whether the Work or desig- ALA DOCUMENT -'201 . GE.'1ER.\L CONDITIONS OF THE CONTR.\CT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDITION AlA'" . @1911- THE .\~IERIC.\1'lI1'lSTITUTE OF .\RCHITECTS, 17~\S 1'lEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. ~0006 A201-1987 17 '"""'"""~^^ 1("') nated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architecc's inspection discloses any item, whether or noc included on the Contraccor's list, which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contrac- tor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Com- pletion, complete or correct such item upon notific:nion by the Architect. The Contraccor shall then submit a request for an ocher inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certific:ne of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Sub- stantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contraccor for security, maintenance, he:lt, utilities, damage co the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall fmish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Con- tract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless ocherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Comple- tion. The Certificate of Substantial CompletiOn shall be sub- mined to the Owner and Contraccor for their written accep- tance of responsibilities assigned to them in such CertifiC:J.te. 9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portiOn thereof and upon applic:ltion by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in recainage, if any, for such Work or por- tion thereof as provided in the Con[f:).ct Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or par- tially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contrac. cor, provided such occupancy or use is consented co by the insurer as required under Subparagraph 11.3 .11 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or noc the portion is subscantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to e:lch of them for payments, recainage if any, secu- rity, maintenance, he:n, utilities, damage to the Work and insur- ance, and have agreed in writing conceming the period for cor- rection of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion subscantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occu- pancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by wrinen agree- ment between the Owner and Contnctor or, if no agreement is re:lched, by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately prior co such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contnctor and Architect shall jointly inspect the are:l to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. 9,9.3 Unless Otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall nO[ constitute accep- tance of Work not complying with the requirements of the ContrJct Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon n:ceipt of written notice thJt the Work is re:ldy for tin;u inspection :ll1U JcceptJnce :.ll1d upon receipt of :.I tin:.1l Application for PJyment. [he :\rchitect will promptly m:J.ke such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work accept- able under the Contract Documents and the Contnct fully per- formed, the ArchiteCt will promptly issue a fmal Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architecc's observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contnct Docu- ments and that the entire balance found to be due the Contrac- cor and noted in said fmal Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's fmal Certific:lte for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contraccor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. y.:-:' ~'. 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remammg retained percentage shall become due until the Contnctor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and ocher indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidenc- ing that insurance required by the Contract Documents. to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will noc be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior wrinen notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a wrinen statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will nOt be renewable to cover the period required by the Contnct Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, co the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcon- tnctor refuses to fumish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner co indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contncror shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable anomeys' fees. ......0.. .. 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final com- pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contnctor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon applic:ltion by the Contnctor and certific:ltion by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work nOt fully com- pleted or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Con- tnct Documents, and if bonds have been fumished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that por- tion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submit. ted by the Contraccor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions goveming final payment. except that it shall not constitute J ~vaiver of claims. The making of final payment shall constitute J waiver of claims by the Owner as provided in Sub- paragraph 4.3.5. 9.10.4 Accepcance of final pavment by the Contncror, J Sub- contractOr or mJterial supplier shall constitute a waiver or claims by that payee except those previously made in writin~ and identified by that payee :J.S unsettled at the time of tin:.Ll Application for PJyment. Such waivers shall be in audition to the wJiver described in Subparagnph 4.3.5. . 18 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENER.\L CONDITIONS Or THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRLCTION . FOt:RTEENTH EDITION .\1.\" . -S; 19~- THE A.\IER1C.\N I:-lSTITUTE Or .\RCH1TECTS. 1-.\'; NEW YORK .\\'ENL'E; N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. llllllll> U07uO-19 . ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, main- taining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor sh:1l1 immediately stOp Work in the aro affected and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in fact the materi:1l is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected area sh:1l1 be resumed in the absence of asbestoS or polychlori- nated biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered h:mnless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in accordance with fin:1l detennination by the Architect on which arbitration has not been demanded. or by arbitration under Article 4. . 10.1.3 The Contractor sh:1l1 not be required pursuant to Article 7 to perfonn without consent any Work relating to asbestoS or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB). 10.1.4 To the fullest extent pennitted by law, the Owner sh:1l1 indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Architect, Archi- tect's consultanrs and agenrs and employees of any of them from and ag:tinst cb.ims, damages, losses and expenses, includ- ing but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from perfonnance of the Work in the :.Iffected are-.l if in fact the materi:1l is asbestoS or polychlorin:.lted biphenyl (PCB) md has not been rendered harmless, provided th:.lt such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work irself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent actS or omissions of the Owner, anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Owner or :myone for whose acts the Owner may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, dam:.lge, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such oblig:ltion sh:1l1 nor be construed to neg-.lte, :.Ibridge, or reduce other rightS or obligations of indemnity ';\'hich would otherwise exist as to :.I party or person described in this subparagraph 10.1.4. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY . 10.2.1 The Contr.lctor sh;1l1 t:lke rl::'.1.-;on:.lble precautions for s:.lfety of. md sh:1l1 provide reason:.lble protection to prevent dam:.lge, injury or loss to: .1 employees on the Work md other persons who m:.lY be :.ItTeGed thereby: ,2 the Work and materi:11s and equipment to be incorpo- t:lced therein, whether in stot:lge on or off the site. unuer C:.Ire, custouy or control of the Contractor or the Concr.lctor's Subcontt:lGors or Sub-subcontt:lC' tors; :.Illd ,3 ocher property at che site or :.ldj:.lcent chereto, such as trees. shrubs. l:.iwns, w:1lks. p:.lvemel1ts. to:.lu\va\'s, stnlGures :uld UCililies nOI Jesign:.lccu for removal, relo- C:llilll1 \)r repl:lcemenc in the ~,()llrsc of construGion. 10.2.2 The Contt:lctor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordin:mcc:s, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reason- able safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusu:1l methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qu:1lified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor sh:1ll promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a SubcontraCtor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contt:lctor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, :md not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contt:lctor are in :.Iddition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contt:lctor's org:mization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner :md Architect. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or penn it any part of the construction or site to be 10:lded so as to endanger irs safety. 10.3 EMERGENCIES 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor sh:1l1 act, at the Contractor's discretion, to pre- vent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensa- tion or extension of time claimed by the Contt:lctor on account of m emergency sh:1l1 be detennined as provided in Paragt:lph .4.3 md Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11,1 CONTRACTOR'S UA81L1TY INSURANCE 11,1.1 The Contractor sh:1l1 purchase from and maint;tin in :.l company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the ContrJctor from c1Jims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the COl1tt:lctor's operations under the Contt:lct :lOd for which the Contr.lcror m:lY be leg:lily liJble, whether such oper.ltions be by the Contr.lctor or by J SuhcontrJctor or by :.lOyone uirectly or iOllirectly employed by my of them, or by myone for whose :.ICtS my of them nuy be liable: .1 clJims under workers' or workmen's compenSJCilll1, c.lisJbilicy benetlt :U1U other simil:.ir employee benetlt :1(lS which are :.lppli~";Ible co che Work co be performed: AlA DOCUMENT AlOl . ~E:oIER.\L CONDITIONS OF TIlE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRL'CTION . FOL'RTEE~TH EDITION .\1.\" ...;: 1')~- THe .\~IElm:.\:-; I:-;STITl'TE OF .\RCHITECTS, I-.\'i NEW YORK .\\'E:>JI.'F.. N W. W.\SHI:-;CTON, 0 c. ~IM"Ml A201-1987 19 .2 cWms for dm1ages because of bodily injury, occupa- tional sickness or clise:lse, or de:uh of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or dise:1se, or death of any person other than the Con- tractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by another person; .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible prop- erty, including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for clamages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of owner- ship, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and .7 claims involving contractualliabiliry insurance appli- cable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Con- tract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from clate of commencement of the Work until clate of fmal payment and termination of any coverage required to be main- tained after fmal payment. 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates and the insurance polides required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 clays' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after fJrull payment and are reason- ablv available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of ~uch coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable prompmess in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. Optionally, the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance for self- protection against claims . which m:lY arise from operations under the Contract. The Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaming this optional Owner's liability insurance unless specifically required by the Contr:J.ct Documents. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Unless Otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance in the amount of the initial Con- tr:J.ct Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the entire Work:lt the site. on a replacement cost basis without vol- untary deductihles. Such property insurance shall be main- tained. unlc:ss otherwise provided in the Contr:J.ct Documents or otherwise :lgreed in writing by all persons :.md entities who :Ire benelki:.lries of such insurance~ until fU1J..l payment h:l5 been m:lde:lS provided in P:J.rJgr:J.ph 9. 10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.3 to be covered, whichever is earlier. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in' the Work. 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an all-risk policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false- work, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does nOt intend to purchase such prop- erty insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contrac- tor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to pur- chase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all reason- able costs properly attributable thereto. 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deducti- bles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Docu- ments, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. If the Owner or insurer increases the required minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the Owner elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deduc- tible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of the additional costs not covered because of such increased or voluntary deductibles. If deductibles are nOt identified in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of deductibles. 11.3.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, this property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site after written approval of the Owner :It the value established in the approval, and also portions of the Work in transit. 11.3.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until fmal acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contr:J.ctor, Subcontractors and Sub- subcontr:J.ctors in the Work, and the Owner and Contr:J.ctor shall be named insureds. 11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards. however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contr:J.ctOr for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or Other hazards however caused. 11.3.4 If the Contr:J.ctor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or for other special haz- ards be included in the properry insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contr:J.ctor by appropriate Ch:J..nge Order. 20 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDlTION .\L\" . is) 19117 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 173~ NEW YORK .\VENUE. NW., WASHINGTON, D.C. lllOOt> 00700-2t :t.. ". . . . 4( .3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner sun~s properties, real or personal or both, adjoining or adja- ent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment prop- erty insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Proj- ect during the construction period. the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11.3.7 for damages c:lused by fire or other perils covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall me with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applic:lble conditions, defmi- tions, exclusiOns and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior writ- ten notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and ContractOr waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcon- tractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their sub- contractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages Clused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.3 or other property insurance appliClble to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the .owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontrac- tOrs, sub-subcontractOrs, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other pwies enum- erated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subro- gation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that per- son or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnific:ltion, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 11.3.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applic:lble mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay SubcontractOrs their jUSl shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractOrs in similar manner. . 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall. upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper perfonnance of the Owner's duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged ag:1inSt proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account pro- ceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accor- dance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration aWlrd in which case the prO€edure sh:1l1 be as provided in Paragraph 4.5. If after such loss no ocher speci:1l agreement is m:.lde. replacement of dam- Jged property shall be covered by Jppropri:ae Change Order. 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection be made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 4.5. The Owner as fiduciary shall, in that case, make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of such arbitrators. If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.3.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or com. panies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall.take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occ.upancy or use that would C1use cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contrac- tor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Con- tract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipu- lated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be J potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obliga- tions arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's observation and be replaced at the Contractor's e..xpense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncover- ing and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to confonn to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated. installed or completed. The ContractOr sh:1l1 bear costS of correcting such rejected Work, including addition:1l testing and inspec- tions and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses mJde necessary thereby. 12.2.2 If, within one year after the date of Substanti:1l Comple. tion of the Work or design:.lted portion thereof, or Jfter the <.!:ite AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GE:'>lER.\L CONDITIONS OF THE CONTR.\CT FOR CONSTRL:CTlON . FOURTEENTH EDITION ,\IA" . @19117 THE .....'\ERIC.\N INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, I ~3~ NEW YORK AVENUE, :'>l.W., WASHINGTON. D.C.looo6 A201-1987 21 r'lr'I"7r'11'1 ')') for commencement of warranties established under Sub- paragraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner h2s previously given the Contractor a written accep- tance of such condition. This period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Work fIrst performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substan- tial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. This obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive accep- tance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after dis- covery of the condition. 12.2.3 The ContractOr shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accor- dance with Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reason- able time fIxed by written notice from the Architect, the Owner may remove it and stOre the salvable materials or equipment at the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor does not pay COSts of such removal and stOrage within ten cI:1ys after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional cI:1ys' written notice sell such material.s and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after deducting costs and damages that should have been borne by the Con- tractOr, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufftcient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractOrs caused by the ContractOr's correction or removal of Work which is not in accord:1nce with the requirements of the Con- tract Documents. 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be con- strued to establish a period.of limitation with respect to other oblig:aions which the Contractor might have under the Con- tract Documents. Establish'ment of the time period of one year as dc:scribed in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within ~vhich the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Con- tractor's obligations other than specifIolly to correct the Work. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to Jccept Work which is not in Jccord:1nce with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner mav do so inste:ld of requiring its remov:1l and cor. rection, in which C:lSe the Contract Sum will be reduced :IS :lppropriate Jnd equitJble. Such Jdjustment sh:1l1 be effected whether or not fin:ll payment hJS been mJde. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind them- selves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representa- tives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such Other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Con- tract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that P:Iro/ shaH nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the fIrm or entity or to an offtcer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certifted mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Docu- ments and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, 'obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or ContractOr shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordi- nances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless other- wise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent test- ing laboratOry or entity acceptJble to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related COSts of tests, inspections and approv:1ls. The Contractor sh:1l1 give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspec- tions are to be made so the Architect may observe such proce- dures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approv:1ls which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. 13.5.2 If the Architect. Owner or public Juthorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require Jddi. tion:1l testing. inspection or approv:1l nOt included under Sub- paragraph 13.5.1, the Architect ~vill. upon written Juthoriz:Hion from the Owner, instruct the ContractOr to make arr:J.l1gements for such addition:1l tc:sting, inspection or approv:1l by JO entity :lcceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor sh:1l1 give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests :lnd inspections are to be made so the Architect m:lY observe such procedures. 22 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRlJCTION . FOURTEENTH EDITION AI.\" . -91'1/1- THE .\MERIC.\N INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, I :~s :-lEW YORK .\\'E:"t:E. N.W. WASHINGTON. D.C. !0006 ~- . ..' . >,".: . . . 00700-23 The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Sub- ear:lgraPh 13.5.3. 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subpar:lgraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all COSts made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses. . 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless Q[herwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the ContractOr and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Con- tract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Docu- ments shall bear interest fcom the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place . where the Project is located. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY UMIT A TlON PERIOD 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: . .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substan- tia! Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any :md all events nOt later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Anal CertifI- cate for Payment. As to acts or failures [0 act occur- ring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantia! Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certifi- cate for P:1ymem, any applic:J.ble sutute of limitations shall commence to run and :my alleged cause of action shall be,deemed to h:1ve accrued in any md all events not later th:m the date of issu:mce of the: final Certiticate for Payment; md .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failurc:5 to :.ict occurring :.!fie:r the: relevant wte of issu- :.ince of [he final Ce:rtifiC'Jte for ?-Jyment. my :.ippli- cable: st:.itute of limitations shall comme:nce to run mtl my allegetl C:.iuse of :.iction shall be deemetl to h:l\'e :lccrueu in my mu all e:ve:nts not !:lter than the date of :.inv act or t-Jilure to :lct hv the: ContrJcmr pursu:lnt to :.iJ1~' W:lrrJOtv providetluode:r P:lrJgrJph ;.5. the <..bte 0(:l11\' corn:ction of the Work or failun: to correct the Work hv the ComrJcmr unde:r P:lrJgrJph 12.2. or the lbte: of ~ctu:ll commission of :.iny mher :lct or t':1ilure to perr'llrm :lnV duty or ohlig:ltion hy the: Contractor or Owner. whiche\'er lKcurs l:.ist. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stOpped for a period of 30 days through no act or fauJt of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or :my other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons; .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public author- ity having jurisdiction; .2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, making material unavailable; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certific:uion as provided in Subpar:lgraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; .4 if repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions by the Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total num- ber of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less; or .5 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. 14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written nOtice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract md recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment :md machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages. 14.1.3 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 days through no act or fault of the Contractor or :1 Subcontractor or their agentS or employees or any Other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulftll the Owner's obligations under the Contract DocumentS with respect to matters impor- t:mt to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven :luditional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect. terminate the Contract anti recover from the Owner ;IS provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. 14.2 TERMINA TlON BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The O~vne:r may terminate the ContrJct if the ContrJCtOr: ,1 persistently or repe'Jtedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilleu workers or proper m:lteri:lls; ,2 f:1ils to m:lke p:lyment to SubcontrJcmrs for m:.iu:rials or lahor in Kcordance with the respective: :.igree:ments between the CumrJctor :.inti the: SubcontrJctors:. .3 persistently dL~re:g:1[(.ls !:lws. urdinanct:s. or rules, reg. ul:ltions ur ortlers of :.i puhlic :luthority h:lving juris. diction: or .4 lltherwbe L~ guilty llf suhst:.inti:ll breach of:l provision of the ContrJct Documents. 14.2.2 Whe:n :.iJ1Y of the :lho\'e rc:.c;llns exbt, tIle: Owner, uplln certitlc:.itilln by [ht: Archit(:ct th:lt sufficient C:lll'it: existS tll jus- AlA DOCUMENT AlOl . l;E=,"EK.\L CmmlTlll:-:S OF THE CONTR.\CT FOil CONSTlll'cnON . FOI'IlTEE:-ITII E!)ITlllN .\1.\'. .,. I'JIi- TIlE .\.\IERIC.\;-': IN~ TITl'Tf. 0F .\RClIITECTS. 1-.\' NE"" YOIl!\ ..\VENl'f., :-I.W , W.\~III:-;l;TON. () C. ~l~~~l A201-1987 23 tify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the ContractOr and the ContractOr's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, termi- nate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equip- ment, tools, and construction equipment and machin- ery thereon owned by the ContractOr; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Para- graph S.4; and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the re:LSOns stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, induding compensation for the Archi- tect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the ContractOr shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the casc: may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon appU- otion, and this obUgation for payment shall survive termina- tion of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the ContractOr in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 14.3.2 An adjustment shall be made for increases in the COSt of performance of the Contract, induding profit on the incre:LSed cost of performance, caused by suspension, delay or interrup- tion. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is, was or would have been so sus- pended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contract. 14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have a murual1y agreed fixed or percentage fee. 24 A201-1987 ALA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRlJl.IlON . FOURTEENTH EDITION .\1.-\" . oS) 1,)1l7 THE .\MERIC.\N INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 173~ NEW YORK .\VENUE. :'>l.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. !()(Ml(, 3/87 00700-25 f . . . . Section 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 General Conditions A. The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201, Fourteenth Edition, 1987, Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 Basic Definitions Add the following to Subparagraph 1.1.5: "Figured dimensions on drawings shall take precedence over measurements by scale, and detailed working drawings and shop drawings are to take precedence over general drawings and shall be considered as explanatory of them and not as indicating extra work." 1.2 Execution, Correlation and Intent . Add the following to Subparagraph 1.2.3: "In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, interpretations will be based on the following priorities: A. The Agreement. B. Addenda, with those of later date having precedence over those of earlier date. C. The Supplementary Conditions. D. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. E. Drawings and Specifications. In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with the Architect's interpretation." 1.5 Interpretation Add new Subparagraphs 1.5.2 through 1.5.3: . "1.5.2 Whenever in these Contract Documents the words "as ordered", "as directed", "as required", "as pennitted", "as allowed", or words or phrases of like import are used, it shall be understood and agreed that the order, direction, requirement, pennission, or allowance of Owner or Architect is intended only to the e:-.1ent of judging compliance with the tenns of these Contract Documents. None of these terms shall imply that Owner or Architect has any authority or responsibility for supervision of Contractor's forces or construction operations, such supervision and the sole responsibility therefore being strictly reserved for 96-099/8-96 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-1 "1.5.3 Whenever the term "provided" or provide" is used in Drawings or Contract Documents, it shall mean "provided complete in place", that is, "furnished and installed". Where "as shown", "as indicated", as detailed", or other words of similar import are used, it is understood and agreed that references to Drawings are intended unless otherwise expressly stated." . Contractor. " ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner Delete Subparagraph 2.2,5 and substitute the following: 2.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished free of charge (5) copies of Drawings and Project Manuals. Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of reproduction, postage' and handling. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.5 Arbitration Add new Clause 4.5.1.1 to 4.5.1: 4.5.1.1 In addition and prior to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to settle disputes by mediation under the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Mediation shall commence, unless otherwise agreed, within the same time limits stipulated in Subparagraphs 4.5.1 and 4.5.4 and Clause 4.5.4.1 for the filing of a notice of a claim in arbitration. Such time limits shall then be extended for arbitration by ten days and the duration of the mediation process. . Add the following to Subparagraph 4.5.2: "Parties may proceed to arbitration only upon written agreement by the other party. This arbitration procedure is supplementary and not exclusive or preexemptive. Nothing herein shall in any way compromise or dilute a party's rights to proceed at law or in equity to enforce all claims and/or rights as they exist under the laws of the State of Georgia." ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 Changes Add new Subparagraph 7.1.5: "7.1.5 Owner may, at any time, without invalidating Contract or any terms or conditions of the Contract Documents and without notice to the Sureties, make alternations, deviations, additions to, or omissions from the Drawings and other Contract Documents, including an increase or decrease of the quantity of any item or portion of the Work or omit any item or portion of the Work, as may be deemed by Owner to be necessary or advisable and to require such extra work as may be determined by Owner to be required for proper completion of Work as specified herein." 7.3 Construction Change Directives 7.3.6 In the frrst sentence, delete the words "a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" and substitute 96-099/8-96 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-2 . . "an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with Clause 7.3.10.1 below." Add new Subparagraph 7.3.10: "7.3.10 In Subparagraph 7.3.6, the allowance for the combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule: A. For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 15 percent of the cost. B. For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's Subcontractor, 10 percent of the amount due the Subcontractor. C. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $1,000.00 be approved without such itemization. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.2 Progress and Completion Add new Subparagraph 8.2.4: . "8.2.4 No work past 5:00 p.m. or work on Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays requiring the presence of and/or Owner's Representative will be permitted except in case of emergency and then only to such an extent as is absolutely necessary and with the written permission of Architect. Should Contractor desire to perform overtime work on this Contract, such shall be done only after approval of Architect, and all resultant Project Representative costs must be reimbursed to Owner by Contractor at his own cost and expense." 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time Add new Subparagraphs 8.3.4 and 8.3.5: "8.3.4 Contractor is presumed to have taken all difficulties due to weather conditions into consideration in preparing his proposed Contract Price and in establishing his time for completion of the Work under this Contract. He must be prepared and must take all precautions to protect Work from unfavorable weather and extremes of temperature, whether hot or cold. He shall provide approved facilities for protecting against unfavorable weather at all times, to the entire satisfaction of Architect." "8.3.5 Completion time will not be extended for normal bad weather. Time for completion as stated in the Contract documents includes an allowance for working days on which work cannot be performed out-of- doors. The term "working day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean Mondays through Fridays, excluding weekends and legal holidays. For the purpose of this Contract, Contractor agrees that he may expect to lose working days due to weather in accordance with the following table: January 14 days February 14 days March 10 days April 7 days May 6 days June 3 days July 4 days August 2 days September 2 days October 3 days November 5 days December 9 days . 96-099/8-96 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-3 If the total accumulated number of working days lost to the weather from the start of work until the building is enclosed exceeds the total accumulated number to be expected for the same period from the table above, time for completion will be extended by the number of working days needed to include the excess number of working days lost. No extension will be made for days of bad weather occurring after the building is enclosed. No changes in the contract sum will be authorized because of adjustment of contract time due to weather." . ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3 Applications for Payment 9.3.1 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 9.3.1: The form of Application for Payment shall be a notarized AlA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, supported by AlA Document G703, Continuation Sheet. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property Add new Clause 10.2.4.1 to 10.2.4: "10.2.4.1 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice." ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance . 11.1.1 In the first line following the word "maintain" insert the words "in a company or companies licensed to do business in the State of Georgia. Add the following Clauses 11.1.1.8 and 11.1.1.9 to 11.1.1: "11.1.1.8 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including: A. Premises Operations (including X, C and U coverages as applicable). B. Owner's and Contractors' Protective. C. Products and Completed Operations. D. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted. E. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's obligation under Paragraph 3.18. F. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles. G. Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations. H. Blanket Contractual Liability. 1. Fire Legal Liability. 11.1.1.9 If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial General Liability Policy on a claims-made basis, the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages 96-099/8-96 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-4 . . required to be maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2." Add the following Clause 11.1.2.1 to 11.1.2: 11.1.2.1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following limits, or greater if required by law: A. Worker's Compensation: a) b) c) State: Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoremen's): Employer's Liability: Statutory Statutory $100,000 per Accident $500,000 Disease, Policy Limit $100,000 Disease, Each Employee B. Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability (including Premises-Operations; Owners' and Contractors' Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage): a) Bodily Injury: $500,000 $2,000,000 Each Occurrence Aggregate b) Property Damage: . $500,000 $2,000,000 Each Occurrence Aggregate c) Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for one (1) year after final payment: $2,000,000 Aggregate d) Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide X, C and U coverage. e) Broad Form Property Damage Coverage shall include Completed Operations. C. Contractual Liability: a) Bodily Injury: $500,000 Each Occurrence b) Property Damage: $500,000 Each Occurrence D. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted: $1,000,000 Aggregate . 96-099/8-96 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-5 E. Business Auto Liability (including owned, non-owned and hired vehicles): . a) Bodily Injury: $500,000 Each Occurrence b) Property Damage: $500,000 Each Occurrence F. If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial Liability policy, the: a) General Aggregate shall be not less than $2,000,000 and it shall apply, in total, to this Project only. b) Fire Damage Limit shall be not less than $300,000 on anyone Fire. c) Medical Expense $10,000 on anyone person. G. Umbrella Excess Liability: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence 11.1.3 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 11.1.3: If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates shall be AlA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance. If this insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form, ACORD form 25S will be acceptable. 11.2 Owner's Liability Insurance . 11.2.1 Delete the last two sentences of Subparagraph 11.2.1 and substitute the following: The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance covering the Owner's contingent liability for claims which may arise from operations under the Contract. 11.3 Property Insurance 11.3.1 Modify the first sentence of Subparagraph 11.3.1 as follows: Delete "Unless otherwise provided, the Owner" and substitute "the Contractor." Add the following sentences: The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value. If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such insurance, then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. Delete Clause 11.3.1.2 and substitute the following: 11.3.1.2 The Contractor shall provide insurance coverage for portions of the Work stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the approval, and also for portions of the Work in transit. 96-099/8-96 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-6 . . 11.3.1.3 Delete Clause 11.3.1.3. 11.3.1.4 Delete Clause 11.3.1.4. 11.3.4 Delete Subparagraph 11.3.4. Delete Subparagraph 11.3.6 and substitute the following: 11.3,6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Contractor shall file with the Owner two certified copies of the policy or policies providing this Property Insurance coverage, each containing those endorsements specifically related to the Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.3.7 Modify Subparagraph 11.3.7 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" at the end of the first sentence. 11.3.8 Modify Subparagraph 11.3.8 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" as fiduciary; except that at the first reference to "Owner" in the first sentence, the word "this" should be substituted for "Owner's." 11.3.9 Modify Subparagraph 11.3.9 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" each time the latter word appears. 11.3.10 Modify Subparagraph 11.3.10 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" each time the latter word appears. . 11.4 Performance Bond and Payment Bond Delete Subparagraph 11.4.1 and substitute the following: 11.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be obtained through the Contractor's usual source and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract Sum. The amount of each bond shall be equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. 11.4.1.1 The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date the Agreement is entered into, or if the work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished. 11.4.1.2 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Add the following Paragraph 13.8 to Article 13: 13.8 Equal Opportunity 13.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows: . 96-099/8-96 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800- 7 13.8.1.1 The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shalI not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex or national origin. The Contractor shalI take affumative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex or national origin. Such action shalI include, but not be limited to, the folIowing: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of payor other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination. . 13.8.1.2 The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shalI, in alI solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that alI qualified applicants wilI receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex or national origin. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT Add the folIowing Paragraph 14.4 to Article 14: 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4.1 The Owner may, at anytime, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall: C. Cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; Take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and Except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate alI existing Subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further Subcontracts and purchase orders. . A. B. 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shalI be entitled to receive payment from the Owner on the same basis provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. END OF SECTION 00800 96-099/8-96 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-8 . . SECTION 00840 ADMINISTRATIVE AND PROCEDURAL ITEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 This section of the Contract Documents references the various forms and other documents that will become a part of these Contract Documents during the course of the Work. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 FORMS AND DOCUMENTS A. Application for Payment (AlA G702/G703) B, Change Order (AlA G701) C. Certificate of Substantial Completion (AlA G704) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3,01 Engineer/Architect shall provide Contractor with sufficient copies of the above listed fonus andlor documents where applicable for submittal by Contractor during course of the Work. (Examples of the listed forms are included in this Section. Contractor may use these andlor xerox copies of same for submittal) . 3.02 Engineer/Architect shall use these forms for administrative and procedural duties. (Examples of the listed fonus are included in this section) END OF SECTION 00840 . 96-099/8-96 ADMINISTRATIVE AND PROCEDURAL ITEMS 00840-1 l> "'C "'C r ---0. (.. >. b4t z )> z c (') m ~ - -n - (') ~ m -n o :0 ~ ~ s: m . :> ,..: v C ~ z 2 m () :7. ~ '7 ~ ~ < :> > n n ::-l v o n c 3: r:1 Z -3 Cl " :=; l'ol ~ ... :I. ;:l ~ ~ ::: U> .... rt , r: .... ..,. I": :r. ,.. .s -::-::~ - ~ .., .~ == ~ -::o() ~':i>: -:...,:...., Z 0 (5 ~.. z ::r. z .. 9 000002 ~ ~ ~ ~ C := ~ ~ ~ - z = -: = ~ =. ~ -: ::: ~ ~ S ~ () o Z :> Q ::J ~ ," ~ z ~ :.:: ~ (; > (") :::~ 0 3'~Z - - ;:: :.-i :. :: :0 :: :;:. l> ~=(") ;:: ;:; -i F- ~ 0 :> ;:-. :0 :;:; -- Ci t CJ) g-;l> :: ;; :3 ::: "tJ I": .- "'P"'I ::l:.: '" ~u>r- C') tr. _ -...J =- (") ~~ ~ -... -, u> __ ::[0 - - s~ Z n __ ." c.::: . ~ 0 ~:o oJ a"tJ ~~ ~s: =-m =-Z r:~ g .... :.: r: - o :D G') Z > r C") o Z -i :D > C") -i en c: s: ... ..;.~ \,)0.,; t..... -::::. -i C") Z ~. 0 0 to ::::. -i Z - => -i n 3r :D :T ::: C") > ~ 00 C") lC ...s: -i to ::: -0 en C' ~r c: '< -' m s: C") -...J -i _ :: m -i .... ~e 0 ~ QD e 'g CJ) ~ 0 b m a. :II r to m - iil e ~ -l - o H- e !'oJ ~ ~ m ... ... ... ..J\ . - :'::D ...:~ -;:::\,... nl ~ ~. = :J ~ ::; .. - - .- 6- ~ ~. ~ ~. ~ -==~ ~C'm ~ ". ., <. - - ,..' 'T- .."' v:) ~~-~ ~ =-::::c.r. +r. S ~~~ ~g _r': ~~ ::~ ,.. ~.~- ::l ~ ~--",'7 _ Cl+ ~ 82- ~ '" 3. ~ ~ '",,;.J:;' s:..:-'o -:: - ~ .... ... ... ... =' --i :::0 ::: ~ I": > .1..r -m [;, > u> :D :-z :. m r: e \J1r ...:m ::;. en ;:;CJ) =:D m ~ Z > G'> m ... ...::::r -...J ::: III C") -:: r :. > c: :. m "'r :D -CJ) 1":> :D r:en I,)oJz m ='-0 ;::C") z ::;-':D ~m -i ::m _-I -0 ::< 3' 0 ~ -;:; (5 ,.,::!! s: ~. c: 9Z m ::;CJ) - Z ~.C") ~ -I' (-:. m - e ::. ~ z c: ~~ C") m :.:- -C") E ,S> e ~ _ m z en G') on :II 0 m :D ~ -0 "'z ~ > s: G'> m . m..:..-. Z -I ... ... z ? :::::-: :l :J ;:; r: ;:0 - .-:: :.; > n .., :: !l z - :g Cl ;; tn L:: '" z .... ::. ::, Cl , ;::0': 0 r: ..... ~ m =:. tr. CIl C. ::..:.: 0 c;' v;":J ~ ... C"~ -< in' ~ -< 0 CIl :::: o~ c 0 , ,.. :::: ::l ~ < - :::: 0': . .... ::l :. > r: ..., n ... 00 .... :< 2.~ r: In .... > 0 0 ::j 0 z CIl ::J m ::J c: Q 0 z CIl I ~n~=-: r: 0 :-:....: ~%~=..;; CI'I;J~s= .., ("'l :J ..- - n"';"':,JC n-c-r: !::..~=c-~ ~ C';:; C'o: c-~nr:= ~~::~2. o~=:::'() :;;t;":~~ ~~.=-~~ n .., r:. ,-' :.: ..~~r. 0< :,...... :::: _~;l:'~ ~~~~~ r:=-~:::n ...;_r:r::: -~ ~:~;) ;: i~=~ =-95-<~ [V.~~: n f"': :or. = !2~~>::' ~~~:g,~ .:~gg~ ~?~~~ :: """':: ~.=- ~~~:;~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~. ~g;~~ ::::::::::: _ t": r: -"""' r;":; .~:r: ~ r"':. =-"J, ~ nUl. ,... - -: :::.. =. _ oJ r"':- ~~ ~~~' n o z ....., :;::l > () ...J (j ~ -< :! ~ 3 ~()~ r:5-0", ::.u>;o ::. q - 0 VI = "< -. ~ .. n 0 c.:;'> .., ~ u> ~ o .... c- ::: !;i 5 :: ~ .... r: ? ~ <" z - - -< - 0:; () .... c-< 5 2' ::'-C' u> - ~n ::> .. ::l ,., X ~ n u> > :0 (") :J: ~ m ~ en (") m :0 ~ - ." - (") ~ m ." o :0 "tJ ~ s: m Z ~ -.=>>n:- U) c: """' 0 - n"'!2.3~ ~:::::=-":Jn ;;"-<n::!.O ooQ.;a. c.. ::' ~.. ci5 ~ 5~5=-::l ":J ::> Vi :l:: .., ~o ~ :.: - -< - ~ = """\ ~ ~ ::"' ...,J ";J::' C-":) _ ~ -0': =::- %"'_nn~ .... 5' =- ::. n ..., .-J _ ,... -'t..:.:::-.:::::: - r") ..... .-J ..J - ("') ..." - - (;0;::.:3 .., ~ - ("') >C--r:_ ~~'5>= O~::;""o ~ ~ :.: !2 ("') Z ". = :::. = .:::.c.r::3 -:~::i"'" n o;.~;;~ :=ri~~___ jn=-5~ "'1::>r:~r: :;~~v'::" :; :3 =- ~ ;: . ~..." -' ...; ;l:' ::. ... gK9 ~. - -- < r:. - ..., - - - -' - - ..... r:: ..... g~..; [ v:~=~ UH ..... ~ v. _ ::l - - _ ~ ~ :: r: :.; ..- -,. ,... ~::.::.'" ~ ;; ~ ~ ":J~.....,t:::>8=-~> r;~:::"'''<::::o_-.-s: -;:- ~ Vi .. 0 s, ~ ti 0 cOn ....000..., c: -.., n - ~ ::: \::" n::l.... .....,;::... ll> Z n~:=.. m_~~-t 53;? Qo"'~C") n .., ..' - 9 ~ m ~c..n ~-:::c "<::-~ ~s.~=! ~ ~ :3 ::: ~. 0- -n ~g.S2 ~~;:m v;~~ ~~~c n - ..... ~ o~O'O ~:::_ ~~~ ~85 _t..:.foj -:::-.- n;J::i ~c= O"'n (:;.;:- n . ..... ~ :2 -...: :--- ~ ll> =~=f .........~:::.. ~ ~ n ~~ - > 0 -. ~~~ ::~ n~O s.~ o c: ~S; ~~~ l)~ ~c..-: ~t"i !2 .., 0 :::. ':::-0 Q ~ ~ ~. d n - ::: ::: =-0""': ~- ~g~ ~,~ 1":-"'0 ::~ ':"'~o: :-~ =-_Vl'!: ~~__ ~'~~ ~ ~ ~ f:. _ r:- - - - ~. ~ g. ~ ~ ~;n ='-5 :.: f"': - ~ ~2= ~~ , ...~ r.; ~ 25 ~~ .... =- ~ ~ .,. - - ~ ~ ~ ~ -' n ..... -. - ,... .....- :: :; ~ :s' - , .... - :I'~~ : '~i!!3U !~ ) . : ?2 ~ ~ '" > ~ ~ C 1 r:-: 0 T . ("l ) Z c: :. ~~ ~ .:= _ -l ;; ~ C1 o ~. 0 ~ ~ f\) ) C'l . :l.. c~ ~ ;z ~ " _n - ~> > ("l""' :> ;"'0 ~ ;;;Z o ><> n ~Z E: \/'10 3 ~("l n>> NrT. ~ :::; - . ~ :IE ;E~ {; ?;~ ;r z:ri ;r Z.." ~ p.~ ~ ;:~ CD =< n ~:: m :;:1m C ..Z = !,-l o . ::l ~- ~ 6~ ~ I; ~ ~ ~ _ 5"~ ~ lCl 0 .... Z lD s.. ?- 2.> > !o- j ::; e \=. rE fIl@ 5' n ~ ~ 0 "" ;- ~. '" ::. '" cc -I c ::r= ; :rr. III !i!> - ~:: ;r rr. III ..:::: ;; [~ ;- :t:Z cE =2 CD ..~ II> c"'" :IE .E:= - ~~ = -ri. ~ -:l 2. ;~ r:r .., > CD 0'''' O _("l ..- r:r -- g) 2=i n m C o~ ; _.c/. ::l. .! - i: !?-~ 3 ] ~ ~ =~ o n- n C'" n =0 :: go;: ..., .:;r. ~ ~ ~ ::l. ;) n C 3 I':l :l 7J " ;; ... 'll ':J o c.. C n lD ?- C) -.oJ o I\) . ..... to to I\) c (') o z ~ - z c: ~ - o z en J: m m ~ :> - :> U o (') c: 3: r:1 Z ~ CJ ::::! .- '..>J ,..... ~ ~ "" ~ ::; v. - 3 r. "" tr. r. tr. .s ~ .. ~ ;;: - (') > - - - - HH ~ g 0 6 '" .... .... - -- - - - ...., - ........ =@-~~ ;:-'.< c ~ - "" :: :: ",' :>- g ~ ~. ~ :r. ~ 0 _ , ;;; eo r.>., <: . =-.., (J-: ~ ~ ~ 0 r.",::.z , - ::l ::: :: n :>- ~g,~z =--00 ~ 0 ? (J ~=--m !::. ..... Vl ~ :.; Cl .., -: - ::; - - :: n i! ~ ~::;Q.r. r:c;~>: :;:-'-eo::; ~ ~ ':.; ==:= 0 ""':.:l _ r: ~ _ - - ~ ;;; ::; -< ~ 3: ~ 2; ~ :-: oJ oJ ':<: :>- n ;:::: :>- ~ ::;: > ~ c ~ ::::-Q;::: ..Q~:j~ ::-.... 0 . nozo -:ooz ~~:>-;z ""'-' r'. --: ,..... :. ':-! ::- ~ \ 4 -: \~ \ ~~ - :.r. r. ~ '"' :: z ~ v :s:< 6 ;r, tr. r. <= >:-:: =-':i (") -- r;;;:: '"' >:::: -:::0 B~::= +n~ ~ v >.::: l"'l'"'< 0 ~c- - zO ;r, = (") In 0 - :: -; In ::l r:i m ::; r:: 0 " -:::?' oz~;;~ oQCi~;:;:i "':l :::-::=z:= .!::z~=E =-<tr. >r. -::-;~o ~Ov::~ ~:::~==::: +:::;0:"::: - .--. ....:.:~r;~ ~ c;-:; '3 "" =~ D r:~ ;: ','~~; - S~-; - "":';::: ~g~ - ""'-z ~~~ nl:~~' )> .:. c: ,....~ ::! 'I~ g ~~ .. r.' )> .~ ~g '" zc: g ~~ c: .:: - s<-( Co ;,;; :: <roC) '" =i:l CD Z'-l CD c; . ~ CQ "" z- - - z tE., ~-: :l r.z II> '_ ;; ~~ - x- :> :::-:; Co ",z o ......::.r. n ~= :: '" 3 i~ ~ )>;:!' - :%l_ :E ~::: ::r z::,> - Q..... n .. = =- eN :1' ;t- : g~ - :>'" ::r ~ .... iD Q.~ ~ -g.~ ~ c;::; g- gz ::l 0 . '0 ~~ ~ :: > ::l ll:I_ o ~. ~ E@ = :~ CD c: .... ~ en. :> ~-: .; ~~ ... -> i5 €::: - -:-r, ::l _::: II> -_ ;- !~ '" ..z CII :I_ t: c.Z I; :e ~ C6 E = - ca~ [ ~;; n .. ~ - !l~ ; c; :I CD::: ~ ~~ at ~~ !. o~ = ~~ ~ 0' v: o _' ; .g 2 CD _ '" o ." z rr a", ... co s< n .._ c 5.~ fD 0":: Co :>7- II> . '" 3 II> '< o n g ~ ~ c. o n c: ~ ;; ::l . ~ C) -. ..... ~ 0 :a w o . c. ... c: to n to ~ I',) ~-01j800 AlA DOCWI/ENT CiO 1 OWNER ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR FIELD OTHER o o o o o CHANGE ORDER . TO CONTRACTOR: (n:une, address) CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: DATE: ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO: CONTRACT DATE: CONTRACT FOR: PROJECT: (n:une, :lddress) The Comoct is changed :LS follows: . Not valid until signed by the Owner, Architect and Qlntractor. The origiml (ContraCt Sum) (G~teed M:lximum Price) w:IS . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ Net ~ge by previously authorized Olmge Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ The (Conna Sum)(GU2rWtc:ed Maximum Price) poono this Q\:lnge Order was. . . . . . . . . . S The (Contr.l.Ct Sum) (GlW3Oteed MzQmum Price) will be (incrcsed) (decrosc:d) (uncrumged) by this Qunge Ordc:r in the :mlOW1t of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ The new (Canna Sum) (Gu=mteed Mmmurn Price) including this Ch:1nge Order will be .. $ The Canna TIme will be (incrosed) (decre:1sed) (unch:mged) by The date of Subscnti:ll Completion as of the d:1te of this Change Order therefore is ) <uys. NOTE: This surnm:u-y does no[ reflect c.h:mges in me: Concr:lCt Sum. Conu:lC[ Time: or Gu:u"Jmc:ed ~l:l:timum Price which rove: bc:c:n :lumorized by Construction Ch:mge Directive:. ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR O\V7'JER Address Address .-\ddress .y BY BY DATE D.....TE DATE AlA DOCUMENT G701 . CH.\.NGE uR1)ER. . \98- ED1110N . .\1.\" . .:s; \9117 . THE .\,\IERIC....'4 I..'4STTTt.'TE OF .\RC:iITECTS. \-~'\ ;o.lEW YOR., .~vr:.. ;o.l.~'. \'C\SHL"G70;o.l. 0 C. 2L~~'" G701-1987 (1n~~'l n_~ - -. -r;nns nn reverse side) OW:"iER ARCHITECT CONTR.\CTOR FIELD OTHER o o o o o :l-HTit-it;ATE OF ;UBSTANTIAL COMPLETION .::. DOCUMENT G704 'lzOjECT: PROJECT NO.: . \.'t.J/rn' ,,"i1 ,,,tclrl.'SSI CONTR.-\CT FOR: CONTR.-\CT DATE: to OWNER: TO CONTRACTOR: (S""'t! "lid eu/dres..;) ':';dOh! 'Hul ,,",Ires.';) DATE OF ISSCANCE: PROJECT OR DESIGNATED PORTION SHALL INCLCDE: The \~Drk pe:rformed under this Comr:lc! h:lS been n::\'ic:we:d :md found. to the: Architect's be:st knowledge. inform:J.tion :md belic:f. to be subsonti:1l1y complete. Subsomi:l.l Completion is the snge in the progress of the Work when the Work or design:l.ted portion thereof is sufficiently complete in :lccord::mce 1:\iith the Comr::lct Documents so the Owner C:ln occupy or utilize the ~'ork for its imended use. The d.::lte of Subsomi:ll Completion of the Project or portion thereof design:l.ted. :lbo\'e is hereby esoblished. :IS which is :1Iso the d::1te of commencemem of :lpplic:lble w:lrr:lmie:s required by the Comr:lc! Documents. except :IS snted below: . A list of items to be completed or corrected is :ltt:lched heretO. The f:l.ilure to include :J.ny items on such list does not :lIter the respon- sibility of the Comr:lctor to complete :111 Work in :lccord::1nce with the Contr:lct Documents. ARCHITECT BY DATE The Comr:lctor will complete or correct the Work on the list of items :ltt:lched heretO within the :lbove d::1te of Subsomi:J.1 Completion. cl::1ys from CONTRACTOR BY DATE The Owner :lccepts the Work or design:lted portion thereof :IS subsomi:llIy complete :lnd will :lSsume full possession thereof :It (time) on (d:lte). OWNER BY DATE The responsibilities of (he Owner Jnd. the C\Jntr::lctor for se:curil\'. m:.limem.nce:. he:.l!. utilities. d:.lm:.lge (0 (he: \"1;'nrk :.Inu insurJnc(: sh:.lll be :IS follows: r,\'nlt'-I)Il'/It'r's ,III" (,'CJ/lIracCJr.s {("II/ .llI" :IISI/rllll,'t' LrJIlIIS,'{ .'-;)lIl/i" ,io!lc!rl/lll1c! <lilt! rc!t'1t'tc illsurallcl! rt',!uirl!J//t'lIls 1111" Lr)/'t'ragt'.) . m CAUTION: You should use an original AlA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. = ~\~1.4 AlA DOCUMENT G70-1. ~:;.:;.\~'IF!\'.\j'~' ,';:'~ 1,'7\\:'\'\i \'\'\llJ~: :":\" . :..q.; 1-:IJITll\'\: . \1.\" . ~ ;'~I": . :-i!~: \.\\F.!,:\"~\.\. \:'--'1':-:-::-:: ,)!= \Sl~ll\!'\"" :-~" ,t:'X ,;,':-\~ \\:.';: '\\\" \\::.\.....\11\\.,7\)' '..,)\. ~'.'lll'n..;~.,..: __.1_._ .......... .",11 "::ll.bie-c! :he Violator ~o ;eq31 prosecution. 00840-5 Gi'04-1992 . SECTION 01023 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 I REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Monetary amount of allowance in Contract Sum. B. Disbursement of funds from allowance. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 00500 - Owner-Contractor Agreement: Contractor and subcontractor percentages of overhead and profit for Change Orders. B. Section 00300 - Bid Form: The undersigned proposes to furnish all services, labor, and materials required by them for the entire work and to include a contingency amount of $10,000.00 within the Lump Sum Base Bid in accord with said documents for the sum of: 1.03 ALLOWANCE . A. Allow the lump sum of $10,000.00 or disbursal at Owner's instructions. B. Contractor's costs for products, labor, insurance, payroll taxes, bond, transportation, equipment rental, and overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this allowance. 1.04 USE OF ALLOWANCE A. Funds will be drawn from allowance only by Change Order. B. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used, END OF SECTION 01023 . 96-099/8-96 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE 01023-1 . SECTION 01027 APPLICA nONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governmg the Contractor's Applications for Payment. '- B. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing each prime contractor's Applications for Payment. 1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. . 1. Schedules: The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals." 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALVES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: a. Contractor's Construction Schedule. b. Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets. c. List of subcontractors. d. Schedule of allowances. e. Schedule of alternates. f. List of products. g. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. h. Schedule of submittals. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the fonnat for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. . 96-099/8-96 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT o I 027 - I 96-099/8-96 L Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of the Architect. c. Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include requirements for insurance and bonded warehousing, if required. Provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. Unit-Cost Allowances: Show the line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by the measured quantity. Estimate quantities from the best indication in the Contract Documents. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs and margins on actual costs only when such items are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at the Contractor's option. . . 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 2 . . 1.04 APPLICA TIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. I. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment-Application Times: Each progress-payment date is indicated in the Agreement. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. c. . Payment-Application Fonns: Use AlA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the fonn for Applications for Payment. . D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the fonn. Include notarization and execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. . E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required. I. Transmit each copy with a transmittal fonn listing attachments and recording appropriate infonnation related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Architect. F. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous application. I. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with the Contractor's waiver of mechanics lien for the period of construction covered by the application. a. Submit fmal Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with perfonnance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on fonns, and executed in a manner, acceptable to the Owner, . 96-099/8-96 APPLICATIONS FOR PA YMENT o 1027 - 3 G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following: . 1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of principal products. 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work. 12. Initial progress report. 13. Report of preconstruct ion meeting. 14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 15. Performance and payment bonds. 16. Data needed to acquire the Owner's insurance. 17. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. I. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include: a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. c. Test/adjust/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Meter readings. f. Startup performance reports. g. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. h. Final cleaning. \. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety. J. Advice on shifting insurance coverages. k. Final progress photographs. 1. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion. . 2. 1. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following: 96-099/8-96 I. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled. APPLlCA TIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 4 . . 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue delay. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner. Certified property survey. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid, Removal of temporary facilities and services. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements. Change of door locks to Owner's access. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) . . 96-099/8-96 END OF SECTION 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR P A YM ENT o 1 027 - 5 . SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates, 1.03 DEFINITIONS A, Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work, No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. . 1.04 PROCEDURES A, Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates, C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract. D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each alternate, PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) . 96-099/8-96 AL TERNA TES 01030 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES . A. Provide all of the following systems/items in lieu of systems/items shown on the drawings and specifications: Alternate No.1: Provide V.C.T. (per Specification Section 09660) in Men's and Women's Locker Areas in lieu of ceramic floor tile. Alternate No.2: Provide epoxy painted C.M. U, (per Specification Section 09900) in Men's and Women's Shower Areas in lieu of ceramic wall tile, Alternate No.3: Provide slip resistant floor finish (as specified in Section 09900 "Paint" for swim area floor) in Men's and Women's Shower Areas in lieu of ceramic floor tile. Alternate No.4: Replace entry canopy and column system at north elevation with metal building manufacn.rrer's standard metal canopy system (19'-2" wide by 8'-0" deep to match area shown on 1/ A4,l). Nautical light fixtures to be mounted to metal building at same elevation as shown on drawings. Alternate No.5: Replace all indicated split face concrete block with smooth face concrete block. See drawing 2/A6.1 and plan for extents. Alternate No.6: Omit lockers and benches as indicated on Drawings and Specification Section 10505. Alternate No, 7: Omit racing equipment, excluding anchor bolts, as indicated on Pool Manufacturer's Drawings. Anchor bolts will remain as part of the Construction Documents with or without the equipment. . END OF SECTION 01030 96-099/8-96 ALTERNATES 01030 - 2 . . PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 01035 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES / I 1.0 1 RELATED DOCU1vIENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing contract modifications. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2. 3. 4. . 5. Division I Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices. Division I Section "Submittals" for requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" for administrative procedures governing Applications for Payment. Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. 1.03 MJNOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. The Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, on AIA Form G710, Architect's Supplemental Instructions. 1.04 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. . 96-099/8-96 I. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider them as an instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 20 days of receipt of a proposal request, submit an estimate of cost necessary to execute the change to the Architect for the Owner's review. MODlFICA nON PROCEDURES 01035 - I a. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract Time. . b. c. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AlA Document G709 for Change Order Proposal Requests. 1.05 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: For allowance-cost adjustment, base each Change Order Proposal on the difference between the actual purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by the fmal measurement of work-in-place. Where applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. . 1. Include installation costs in the purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. When requested, prepare explanations and documentation to substantiate the margins claimed. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work claimed in the Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. 4. The Owner reserves the right to establish the actual quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or the Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. The Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days. 1. Do not include the Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has 96-099/8-96 MODIFICA TrON PROCEDURES 01035-2 . . 2. changed from what could have been foreseen from information in Contract Documents. No change to the Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and the Contractor disagree on the terms of a Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714. The Construction Change Directive instructs the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of the change in the Work. It also designates the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 1.07 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of the Owner and the Contractor on AIA Form G701. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01035 . 96-099/8-96 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035-3 . SECTION 01040 COORDINA TION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: I. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Coordination Drawings. 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Cleaning and protection. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: . 1. Division 1 Section "Field Engineering" specifies procedures for field engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. Division I Section "Project Meetings" for progress meetings, coordination meetings, and preinstallation conferences. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" for coordinating general installation. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" for coordinating contract closeout. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.03 COORDINA TION A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. I. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. . 96-099/8-96 COORDlNA TION o I 040 - 1 B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. . I. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work.. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the Work. 1.04 SUBMITIALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. . 1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals." B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers. 1. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and each temporary telephone. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. 96-099/8-96 COORDlNA TION 01040 - 2 . . 8. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects. C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to 'assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is'subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the 'construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: . L 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 1L 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18, 19. 20. 2L 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. . 96-099/8-96 Excessive static or dynamic loading. Excessive internal or external pressures, Excessively high or low temperatures. Thermal shock. Excessively high or low humidity. Air contamination or pollution. Water or ice. Solvents. Chemicals. Light. Radiation. Puncture. Abrasion. Heavy traffic. Soiling, staining, and corrosion. Bacteria, Rodent and insect infestation. Combustion. Electrical current. High-speed operation. Improper lubrication. Unusual wear or other misuse. Contact between incompatible materials, Destructive testing, Misalignment. Excessive weathering. Unprotected storage. Improper shipping or handling. Theft. Vandalism, END OF SECTION 0 1040 COORDINA TION o 1040 - 3 . SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field- engineering services including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Land survey work. 2. Civil-engineering services. 3. Damage surveys. 4. Geotechnical monitoring. 8. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for submitting Project record surveys. Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents and recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels. . 2. 3. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit a certificate signed by the land surveyor or professional engineer certifying the location and elevation of improvements. 8. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies of the final property survey. C. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey data as required under provisions of "Submittals" and "Project Closeout" Sections. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SW"Veyor Qualifications: Engage a land surveyor registered in the state where the Project is located, to perform required land-surveying services. B. Engineer Qualifications: Engage an engineer of the discipline required, licensed in the state where the Project is located, to perform required engineering services. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) . 96-099/8-96 FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 - I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINA TION . A. Identification: The Owner will identify existing control points and property line comer stakes. B. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding to layout the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. 1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. D. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction. I. Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping. . 3.02 PERFORMANCE A. Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided for their use. 2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level, and plumb. B. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Make this log available for reference. 1. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected. 2. On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. 96-099/8-96 FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 - 2 . . C. Site Improvements: Locate and layout site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and layout batter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical work. E. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction. F. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for the Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by the surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of the Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with local governing authorities as the official "property survey." END OF SECTION 01050 . . 96-099/8-96 FIELD ENGINEERING 01050-3 . SECTION 01055 CONSTRUCTION STAKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Construction staking shall include all the surveying work required to layout the work and control the location of the finished construction. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construction staking will be performed under the supervision of a licensed surveyor registered in the State of Georgia who is acceptable to the Owner. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name, address, telephone number and registration number of surveyor prior to beginning work, B, Upon request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. Documentation may include, but is not limited to original field notes, worksheets, etc. . C. Submit at least two sets of prints of "as-built" drawings with a surveyor's certificate verifying that elevations and locations are in conformance with the contract drawings. Base drawings will be provided by the Engineer. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Boundary and topographic survey information is included in the drawings. B. The Owner will furnish sufficient monuments and benchmarks at the site as shown on site drawing to allow a system of construction staking to be done with reasonable effort. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. The contractor shall furnish and use surveying equipment and supplies maintained in good working order. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3,01 GENERAL A. The property boundary is the primary reference for the work. B. Field notes must be kept and may be inspected by the Owner or Owner's Representative at any time. . 96-099/8-96 CONSTRUCTION STAKING 01055-1 C. Contractor shall be responsible for line and grade stakes, and for resetting same if destroyed. . D. Outer limits of all cuts and fills shall be set by slope stakes. This work shall be examined by Owner and, on his approval, grading will begin. 3.02 FINAL GRADES A. "Blue Tops" shall be installed to control final paving subgrade. Any variance with plan grades shall be identified by the surveyor and approved by the Owner's Representative prior to paving base installation. 3.03 UTILITIES A. Staking of utilities shall be done in accordance with. the generally accepted practice for the type or utility involved. B. Storm drain lines and drainage structure bases shall be correctly located to yield the drainage structure top locations and orientations shown on the plan drawings. 3.04 AS-BUILT PLANS A. As-built plans of all construction shall be maintained by the Contractor. These plans shall be certified by a licensed surveyor and turned over to the Owner's Representative at end of project. The Owner's Representative will furnish a sepia reproducible, if requested, to facilitate fmal recording. . END OF SECTION 01055 96-099/8-96 CONSTRUCTION STAKING 01055-2 . . SECTION 01095 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference. Location is not limited. C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. . D. "Approved": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. E. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, fInishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, who performs a particular construction activity including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 1. The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having successfully completed a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope . 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - I 3. to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Trades: Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding genenc name. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract requirements remains with the Contractor. a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. . 2. 1. "Project site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and mayor may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. K. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. 1.03 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION . A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 16-division format and "MasterFormat" numbering system. B. Specification Content: These Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-2 . . 1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2 or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different but apparently equal to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or perfonned. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. . 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perfonn a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source and make them available on request. E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to Gale Research Inc. 's "Encyclopedia of Associations," which is available in most libraries. F. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following abbreviations and acronyms, as referenced in the Contract Documents, mean the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but are not assured, to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association 900 19th St., NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20006 (202) 862-5 I 00 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1518 K St., NW Washington, DC 20005 (202) 737-0202 . 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-3 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers . Assoc. 1540 E. Dundee Road, Suite 310 Palatine, II.. 60067 (708) 202-1350 AAN American Association of Nurserymen 1250 I St., NW, Suite 500 Washington, DC 20005 (202) 789-2900 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol St., Suite 249 Washington, DC 20001 (202) 624-5800 AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists P.O. Box 12215 One Davis Dr. Research Triangle Park, NC 27709-2215 (919) 549-8141 ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Assoc. 1200 19th St., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20036 (202) 429-5155 ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association 950 North G1ebe Rd., Suite 160 Arlington, V A 22203 (703) 522-7350 . ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Detroit, MI 48219 (313) 532-2600 ACII.. American Council of Independent Laboratories 1629 K St., NW Washington, DC 20006 (202) 887 -5872 ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association 8618 Westwood Center Dr., Suite 105 Vienna, VA 22182 (703) 821-1990 ADC Air Diffusion Council 11 South LaSalle St., Suite 1400 Chicago, II.. 60603 (312) 201-0101 AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Assoc. (Now ABMA) 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-4 . . AFPA American Forest and Paper Association IIII 19th St., NW, Suite 800 Washington, DC 20036 (202) 463-2455 AGA American Gas Assoc. 1515 Wilson Blvd. Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 841-8400 AHA American Hardboard Assoc. 1210 W. Northwest Highway Palatine, IL 60067 (708) 934-8800 AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers 20 N. Wacker Dr., Suite 1500 Chicago, IL 60606 (312) 984-5800 Al Asphalt Institute Research Park Dr. P.O. Box 14052 Lexington, KY 40512-4052 (606) 288-4960 AlA The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Ave., NW Washington, DC 20006 (202) 626-7300 . AlA American Insurance Assoc. 1130 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 1000 Washington, DC 20036 (202) 828-7100 AlHA American Industrial Hygiene Assoc. 2700 Prosperit Ave., Suite 250 Fairfax, VA 22031 (703) 849-8888 AlSC American Institute of Steel Construction One East Wacker Dr., Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60601-2001 (312) 670-2400 AlSI American Iron and Steel Institute 1101 17th St., NW Washington, DC 20036-4700 (202) 452-7100 AlTC American Institute of Timber Construction 7012 S. Revere Pkwy, Suite 140 Englewood, CO 80112 (303) 792-9559 ALA American Laminators Association 419 Norton Building Seattle, W A 98104-1584 (206) 622-0666 . 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-5 ALl Associated Laboratories, Inc. clo HOH Chemicals . 500 S. Vermont St. Palatine, IL 60067 (708) 358-7400 ALSC American Lwnber Standards Committee P.O. Box 210 Germantown, MD 20875 (301) 972-1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Assoc. 30 W. University Dr. Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893 (708) 394-0150 ANSI American National Standards Institute 11 West 42nd St., 13th Floor New York, NY 10036 (212) 642-4900 AOAC AOAC International 2200 Wilson Blvd., Suite 400 Arlington, VA 22201-3301 (703) 522-3032 AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts 201 N. 8th St., Suite 400 P.O. Box 81152 Lincoln, NE 68501-1151 (402) 476-3852 APA AP A-The Engineered Wood Association (Formerly American Plywood Assoc.) . P.O. Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 (206) 565-6600 API American Petrolewn Institute 1220 L St., NW Washington, DC 20005 (202) 682-8000 ARI Air-Conditioning and Refiigeration Institute 4301 F airfa.x Dr., Suite 425 Arlington, VA 22203 (703) 524-8800 ARMA Asphalt Roofmg Manufacturers Assoc. 6000 Executive Dr., Suite 201 Rockv111e, MD 20852-3803 (301) 231-9050 ASA Acoustical Society of America 500 Swmyside Blyd. Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 576-2360 ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council 1627 K St., NW, Suite 1000 Washington, DC 20006-1707 (202) 452-1500 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS . 96-099/8-96 01095-6 . ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 345 East 47th St. New York, NY 10017-2398 (800) 548-2723 ASHE American Society for Healthcare Engineering One North Franklin Chicago, IL 60606 (800) AHA-2626 (312) 422-3811 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, NE Atlanta, GA 30329-2305 (800) 527-4723 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th St. New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7722 ASPA American Sod Producers Assoc. (Now TPI) ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers . 3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210 Westlake Village, CA 91362 (805) 495-7120 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering P.O. Box 40362 Bay Village, OH 44140 (216) 835-3040 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 100 Barr Harbor Dr. West Conshohocken, PA 19428 (610) 832-9585 ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions 1200 G St., NW, Suite 500 Washington, DC 20005 (202) 628-6380 AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Assoc. (Now WCMA) AWl Architectural Woodwork Institute P.O. Box 1550 13924 Braddock Rd., No. 100 Centerville, V A 22020 (703) 222-1100 . REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 96-099/8-96 01095-7 AWPA American Wood Preservers' Assoc. P.O. Box 286 . Woodstock, MD 21163-0286 (410) 465-3169 AWPB American Wood Preservers' Bureau (This organization is now defunct.) AWS American Welding Society 550 Lejeune Rd., NW Miami, FL 33126 (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Assoc. 6666 W. Quincy Ave. Denver, CO 80235 (303) 794-7711 BANC Brick Association of North Carolina P.O. Box 13290 Greensboro, NC 27415-3290 (910) 273-5566 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Assoc. 355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor New York, NY 10017 -6603 (212) 661-4261 BlA Brick Institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Dr. Reston, VA 22091-1525 (703) 620-0010 BIFMA The Business and Institutional Furniture . Manufacturer's Association 2680 Horizon Dr., SE, Suite Al Grand Rapids, MI 49546-7500 (616) 285-3963 CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute clo Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Sumner Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-7333 CAUS Color Association of the United States 409 W. 44th St. New York, NY 10036 (212) 582-6884 CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers Assoc. 1422 Euclid Ave., Suite 402 Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-0711 CCC Carpet Cushion Council P.O. Box 546 Riverside, CT 06878 (203) 637 -1312 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-8 . 96-099/8-96 . CDA Copper Development Association Inc. 260 Madison Av., 16th Floor New York, NY 10016 (800) 232-3282 (212) 251-7200 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. clo Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Sumner Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-7333 CGA Compressed Gas Assoc. 1725 Jefferson Davis Highway, Suite 1004 Arlington, VA 22202-4100 (703) 412-0900 CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Assoc. 579 W. North Ave., Suite 301 Elmhurst, IL 60126 (708) 833-1919 CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 5959 Sha11owford Rd., Suite 419 Chattanooga, TN 37421 (615) 892-0137 CLF1v1l Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1776 Massachusetts Ave., NW, Suite 500 . Washington, DC 20036 (202) 659-3537 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute P.O. Box 2048 Dalton, GA 30722-2048 (706) 278-0232 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 N. Plum Grove Rd. Schaumburg, IL 60 173 -4758 (708) 517-1200 CTIOA Ceramic Tile Institute of America 12061 West Jefferson Blvd. Culver City, CA 90230 (310) 574-7800 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 14170 Newbrook Dr. Chantilly, VA 22021-2223 (703) 222-2010 DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Assoc. 245 Riverchase Parkway East, Suite 0 Binningham, AL 35244 (205) 988-9870 DLPA Decorative Laminate Products Assoc. 13924 Braddock Rd. Centreville, VA 22020 (800) 684-3572 . REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 96-099/8-96 01095 - 9 ECSA Exchange Carriers Standards Assoc. . (Now ATlS) EIA Electronic Industries Assoc. 2001 Pennsylvania Ave., NW Washington, DC 20006-1813 (202) 457-4900 EIMA EIFS Industry Manufacturers Assoc. 2759 State Road 580, Suite 112 Clearwater, FL 34621 (813) 726-6477 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Assoc. 25 N. Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 (914) 332~0040 En En Testing Laboratories, Inc. clo Inchcape Testing Services P.O. Box 2040 3933 Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 (800) 345-3851 (607) 753-6711 FCr Fluid Controls Institute c/o Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Sumner Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-7333 FClCA Floor Covering Installation Contractors . Assoc. (Formerly Floor Covering Installation Board) P.O. Box 948 Dalton, GA 30722-0948 (706) 226-5488 FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Assoc. (Now GANA) FM Factory Mutual 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 9102 Norwood, MA 02062 (617) 762-4300 FTl F acing Tile Institute P.O. Box 8880 Canton, OH 44711 (216) 488-1211 GA Gypsum Association 810 First St., NE, Suite 510 Washington, DC 20002 (202) 289-5440 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 10 . . GANA Glass Association of North America 3310 SW Harrison St. Topeka, KS 66611-2279 (913) 266-7013 HEI Heat Exchange Institute clo Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Sumner Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-7333 HI Hydraulic Institute 9 Sylvan Way Parsippany, NJ 07054-3802 (201) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute P.O. Box 218 35 Russo Place Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922 (908) 464-8200 HMA Hardwood Manufacturers Assoc. 400 Penn Center Blvd. Pittsburgh, PA 15235 (412) 829-0770 HPVA Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Assoc. 1825 Michael F arraday Dr. P.O. Box 2789 . Reston, VA 22090-0789 (703) 435-2900 IBD Institute of Business Designers 341 Merchandise Mart Chicago, II.. 60654 (312) 467-1950 rCEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. P.O. Box 440 South Yarmouth, MA 02664 (508) 394-4424 IEC International E1ectrotechnica1 Commission (Available from ANSI) 11 West 42nd St., 13th Floor New York, NY 10036 (212) 642-4900 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 345 E. 47th St. New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7900 IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 120 Wall St., Floor 17 New York, NY 10005-4001 (212) 248-5000 . REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 96-099/8-96 01095-11 IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council . clo ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc. P.O. Box 2040 Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711 ll.J Indiana Limestone Institute of America Stone City Bank. Building, Suite 400 Bedford, IN 47421 (812) 275-4426 IMSA International Municipal Signal Assoc. 165 E. Union St. Newark, NY 14513 (315) 331-2182 IRI Industrial Risk Insurers P.O. Box 5010 85 Woodland St. Hartford, CT 06102-5010 (203) 520-7300 ISA Instrument Society of America P.O. Box 12277 67 Alexander Dr. Research Triangle Park, NC 27709 (919) 549-8411 KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Assoc. 1899 Preston White Dr. Reston, VA 22091-4326 (703) 264-1690 LGSI Light Gage Structural Institute . P.O. Box 866301 PIano, TX 75086-6301 (214) 618-3977 LIA Lead Industries Association, Inc. 295 Madison Ave. New York, NY 10017 (212) 578-4750 LPI Lightning Protection Institute 3365 N. Arlington Heights Rd., Suite J Arlington Heights, IL 60004 (800) 488-6864 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Assoc. clo Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Stunner Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-7333 MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America 1385 Piccard Dr. Rockville, MD 20850-4329 (301) 869-5800 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 12 . . MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Assoc. 60 Revere Dr., Suite 500 Northbrook, n. 60062 (708) 480-9138 MIA Marble Institute of America 30 Eden Alley, Suite 201 Columbus, OH 43215 (614) 228-6194 MIA Masonry Institute of America 2550 Beverly Blvd. Los Angeles, CA 90057 (213) 388-0472 MI.JSF A Metal Lath/Steel Framing Assoc. (A Division of the NAAMM) 11 South LaSalle St., Suite 1400 Chicago, n. 60603 (312) 201-0101 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry 127 Park St., NE Vienna, VA 22180-4602 (703) 281-6613 NAA National Arborist Assoc. The Meeting Place Mall Route 101, P.O. Box 1094 Amherst, NH 03031-1094 (603) 673-3311 . NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 11 South LaSalle St., Suite 1400 Chicago, IL 60603 (312) 201-0101 NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Assoc. 44 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 3 10 Alexandria, VA 22314 (703) 684-0084 NAPA National Asphalt Pavement Assoc. NAP A Building 5100 Forbes Blvd. Lanham, MD 20706-4413 (301 )731-4748 NAPF National Association of Plastic Fabricators (Now DLP A) NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Assoc., Inc. clo Rock of Ages 369 N. State St. Concord, NH 03301 (800) 884-7936 . REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 96-099/8-96 01095 - 13 (603) 225-8397 NBHA National Builders Hardware Assoc. . (Now Dill) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Assoc. 2302 Horse Pen Rd. Herndon, V A 22071-3499 (703) 713-1900 NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute P.O. Box 759 253-80 Center St. Lake Geneva, WI 53147 (414) 248-9094 NCRPM National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements 7910 Woodmont Ave., Suite 800 Bethesda, lvID 20814 (301) 657-2652 NCSPA National Corrugated Steel Pipe Association 1255 23rd St., NW, Suite 850 Washington, DC 20037 (202) 452-1700 NEC National Electrical Code (Available from NFP A) NECA National Electrical Contractors Assoc. . 3 Bethesda Metro Center, Suite 1100 Bethesda, lvID 20814-5372 (301)657-3110 NEIl National Elevator Industry, Inc. 185 Bridge Plaza, North Fort Lee, NJ 07024 (201) 944-3211 NELMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Assoc. 272 Tuttle Rd. P.O. Box 87A Cumberland Center, tv1E 04021 (207) 829-6901 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Assoc. 2101 L St., NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037 (202) 457 -8400 NETA International Electrical Testing Assoc. P.O. Box 687 Morrison, CO 80465-1526 (303) 697-8441 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 14 . . NFPA National Fire Protection Assoc. One Batteryrnarch Park P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101 (800) 344-3555 (617) 770-3000 NFPA National Forest Products Assoc. (Now AFP A) NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Assoc. P.O. Box 34518 Memphis, TN 38184-0518 (901) 377-1818 NKCA National Kitchen Cabinet Assoc. (Now KCMA) NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority 103-4400 Dominion St. Burnaby, BC V5G 403 CANADA (604) 451-7323 NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Assoc. P.O. Box 3009 Memphis, TN 38173-0009 (901) 526-5016 . NPA National Particleboard Assoc. 18928 Premiere Ct. Gaithersburg, MD 20879-1569 (301) 670-0604 NPCA National Paint and Coatings Assoc. 1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW Washington, DC 20005 (202) 462-6272 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Assoc. O'Hare International Center 10255 W. Higgins Rd., Suite 600 Rosemont, IL 60018-5607 (708) 299-9070 NSF NSF International (FOImerly National Sanitation Foundation) 3475 Plymouth Rd. P.O. Box 130140 Ann Arbor, MI 48113-0140 (313) 769-80 I 0 NSSEA National School Supply and Equipment Assoc. 8300 Colesville Rd., No. 250 Silver Spring, MD 20910 (301) 495-0240 . 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-15 NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Assoc. 3166 Des Plaines Ave., Suite 132 . Des Plaines, IT.. 60018 (708) 635-7744 NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Assoc. (Now NWWDA) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Assoc. 1400 E. Touhy Ave., #G54 Des Plaines, IT.. 60018 (800) 223-2301 (708) 299-5200 P A TM! Power Actuated Tool Manufacturers' Institute, Inc. 1000 Fairgrounds Rd., Suite 200 St. Charles, MO 63301 (314) 947 -6610 PCA Portland Cement Assoc. 5420 Old Orchard Rd. Skokie, IT.. 60077 -1083 (708) 966-6200 PCI PrecastlPrestressed Concrete Institute 175 W. Jackson Blvd. Chicago, IL 60604 (312) 786-0300 pm Plumbing and Drainage Institute clo Sol Baker 1106 W. 77th St., South Dr. . Indianapolis, IN 46260 (317) 251-6970 PEl Porcelain Enamel Institute 102 Woodmont Center, Suite 360 Nashville, TN 37205 (615) 385-0758 PIMA Polyisocyanurate Insulation Manufacturers Association 1001 Pennsylvania Ave., NW 5th Floor North Washington, DC 20004 (202) 624-2709 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute 966 Hungerford Dr., Suite 12-B Rockville, 1vID 20850 (30 I) 340-8580 RIS Redwood Inspection Service 405 Enfrente Dr., Suite 200 Novato, CA 94949 (415) 382-0662 RMA Rubber Manufacturers Assoc. 1400 K St., NW Washington, DC 20005 (202) 682-4800 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS . 96-099/8-96 01095 - 16 . SAE SAE International 400 Commonwealth Dr. Warrendale, P A 15096-0001 (412) 776-4841 SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 (216) 493-7886 SDI Steel Door Institute 30200 Detroit Rd. Cleveland, OH 44145-1967 (216) 889-0010 SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Assoc. 1028 Duchess Dr. McLean, VA 22102 (703) 790-8661 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council clo ETL Testing Laboratories U.S. Route II, Industrial Park P.O. Box 2040 Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711 SHLMA Southern Hardwood Lumber Manufacturers Assoc. . (Now HMA) SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Assoc. 401 N. Michigan Ave. Chicago, IL 60611 (312) 644-6610 SJI Steel Joist Institute 1205 48th Avenue North, Suite A Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 -5424 (803) 449-0487 SMA Screen Manufacturers Assoc. 3950 Lake Shore Dr., Suite 502-A Chicago, IL 60613 -3431 (312) 525-2644 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Assoc. 4201 Lafayette Center Dr. P.O. Box221230 Chantilly, VA 22022-1230 (703) 803-2980 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 4709 Scenic Highway Pensacola, FL 32504-9094 (904) 434-2611 . 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-17 SPRI SPRI . (Formerly Single Ply Roofmg Institute) 175 Highland Ave. Needham, MA 02194 (617) 444-0242 SSIUS Specialty Steel Industry of the United States 3050 K St., NW Washington, DC 20007 (202) 342-8630 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Cotulcil 4516 Henry St. Pittsburgh, P A 15213 (412) 687-1113 SSPMA Sump and Sewage Pump Manufacturers Assoc. P.O. Box 647 Northbrook, n.. 60065-0647 (708) 559-9233 STI Steel Tank Institute 570 Oakwood Rd. Lake Zurich, n.. 60047 (708) 438-8265 SWI Steel Window Institute c/o Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Sumner Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-7333 SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Assoc. . 1806 Johns Dr. Glenview, n.. 60025-1657 (798) 729-7972 TCA Tile Cotulcil of America 511 Westinghouse Rd. Pendleton, SC 29670 (803) 646-4021 P.O. Box 1787 Clemson, SC 29633 TIMA Thennal Insulation Manufacturers Assoc. (Now NAIMA) TP1 Truss Plate Institute 583 D'Onofrio Dr., Suite 200 Madison, WI 53719 (608) 833-5900 TPI Twfgrass Producers International (Formerly American Sod Producers Assoc.) 1855-A Hicks Rd. Rolling Meadows, n.. 60008 (800) 405-8873 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 18 . . UL Underwriters Laboratories 333 Pfmgsten Rd. Northbrook, IT.. 60062-2096 (708) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bel PVC Pipe Assoc. 2655 Villa Creek Dr., Suite 155 Dallas, TX 75234 (214) 243-3902 USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (Formerly U.S. Pharmacopoeial Convention) 12601 Twinbrook Pkwy Rockville, MD 20852 (301) 881-0666 WA Wallcoverings Assoc. 401 N. Michigan Ave. Chicago, IT.. 60611-4267 (312) 644-6618 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau P.O. Box 23145 Portland, OR 97281 (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Assoc. 355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor New York, NY 10017 (212) 661-4261 . WIC Woodwork Institute of California 3164 Industrial Blvd. P.O. Box 980247 West Sacramento, CA 95798-0247 (916) 372-9943 WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Assoc. P.O. Box 25278 Portland, OR 97225 (503) 292-9288 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 1101 Connecticut Ave. NW, Suite 700 Washington, DC 20036-4303 (202) 429-5125 WSC Water Systems Council Building C, Suite 20 800 Roosevelt Rd. Glen Ellyn, IT.. 60137 (708) 545-1762 WSFI Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute (Now MFMA) WWCA Western Wall and Ceiling Assoc. (Formerly Western Lath, Plaster, Drywall Industries Assoc.) 7571 Mission Gorge Rd. San Diego, CA 92120 (619) 229-8307 . REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINlTIONS 96-099/8-96 01095 - 19 WWPA Western Wood Products Assoc. Yeon Building 522 SW 5th Ave. Portland, OR 97204-2122 . (503) 224-3930 WWPA Woven Wire Products Assoc. 4940 E1mgate Dr. Orchard Lake, MI 48324 (810) 681-1055 G. Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of Federal Government standards- or specification- producing agencies are often abbreviated. The following abbreviations and acronyms referenced in the Contract Documents indicate names of standards- or specification-producing agencies of the Federal Government. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but are not assured, to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Corps of Engineers (U.S. Department of the Army) Chief of Engineers General Information Referral 20 Massachusetts Ave., NW Washington, DC 20314 (202) 761-0660 CFR Code of Federal Regulations (Available from the Government Printing Office) 732 N. Capitol St., NW Washington, DC 20401 (Material is usually published first in the "F edera1 Register. ") (202) 512-0000 . CPSC Consumer Product Safety Cormnission East West Towers 4330 East-West Hwy Bethesda, MD 20814 (800) 638-2772 CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 (202) 512-0000 DOC Department of Commerce 14th St. and Constitution Ave., NW Washington, DC 20230 (202) 482-2000 DOT Department of Transportation 400 Seventh St., SW Washington, DC 20590 (202) 366-4000 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 20 . . EPA Environmental Protection Agency 401 M St., SW Washington, DC 20460 (202) 260-2090 FAA Federal Aviation Administration (U.S. Department of Transportation) 800 Independence Ave., SW Washington, DC 20591 (202) 366-4000 FCC Federal Communications Commission 1919 M St., NW Washington, DC 20554 (202) 418-0126 FDA Food and Drug Administration 5600 Fishers Lane Rockville, MD 20857 (301) 443-1544 FHA Federal Housing Administration (U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development) 451 Seventh St., SW Washington, DC 20410 (202) 708-1112 FS Federal Specification Unit (Available from GSA) . 470 East L'Enfant Plaza, SW, Suite 8100 Washington, DC 20407 (202) 755-0325 GSA General Services Administration F St. and 18th St., NW Washington, DC 20405 (202) 708-5082 MIL Military Standardization Documents (U.S. Department of Defense) Defense Printing Service 700 Robbins Ave., Building 4D Philadelphia, P A 19111 (215)697-2179 NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (U.S. Department of Commerce) Building 101, #AI134 Rte. 1-270 and Quince Orchard Rd. Gaithersburg, MD 20899 (301) 975-2000 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) 200 Constitution Ave., NW Washington, DC 20210 (202) 219-5000 . REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 96-099/8-96 01095-21 PS Product Standard ofNBS (U. S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 . (202) 512-0000 RUS Rural Utilities Service (F ormerly Rural Electrification Administration) (U.S. Department of Agriculture) 14th St. and Independence Ave., SW Washington, DC 20250 (202) 720-9560 USDA U.S. Department of Agriculture 14th St. and Independence Ave., SW Washington, DC 20250 (202) 720-8732 USPS U.S. Postal Service 475 L'Enfant Plaza, SW Washington, DC 20260-0010 (202) 268-2000 H. State Government Agencies: The following state government agency produces standards referenced in the Contract Documents: CBHF State of California, Dept. of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation Teclmical Information 3485 Orange Grove Ave. North Highland., CA 95660-5595 . (916) 574-2041 1.05 GOVERNING REGULATIONS AND AUTHORITIES A. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the following regulations and retain at the Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01095 96-099/8-96 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 - 22 . . PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Preconstruction conferences. 2. Preinstallation conferences. 3. Progress meetings. 4. Coordination meetings. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: . 1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating project meetings with other construction activities. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. 1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Schedule a preconstruct ion conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to the Owner and the Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at the Project Site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: . 96-099/8-96 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Tentative construction schedule. Critical work sequencing. Designation of responsible personnel. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. Distribution of Contract Documents. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. Preparation of record documents, Use of the premises. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - I 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Parking availability. Office, work, and storage areas. Equipment deliveries and priorities. Safety procedures. First aid. Security. Housekeeping. Working hours. . 1.04 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. Conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. B. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 96-099/8-96 1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. 1. Compatibility problems. J. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. \. Manufacturer's recommendations. m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities. q. Space and access limitations. r. Governing regulations. s. Safety. t. Inspecting and testing requirements. u. Required performance results. v. Recording requirements. w. Protection. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner and the Architect. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date. . 2. 3. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 2 . . 1.05 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regular intervals. Notify the Owner and the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request. 8. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Architect, each subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project. . 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to insure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: a. Interface requirements. b. Time. c. Sequences. d. Status of submittals. e. Deliveries. f. Off-site fabrication problems. g. Access. h. Site utilization. \. Temporary facilities and services. J. Hours of work, k. Hazards and risks. 1. Housekeeping. m. Quality and work standards. n. Change Orders. o. Documentation of information for payment requests. 2. D. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each meeting, distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. . 96-099/8-96 1. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 3 1.06 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals convenient for all parties involved. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular progress meetings and special preinstallation meetings. . B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for the construction activities involved. C. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01200 . PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 4 . 96-099/8-96 . SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A, Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for perfonnance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submittal schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Shop Drawings. 5. Product Data. 6. Samples. 7. Quality assurance submittals. . B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Penn its. 2. Applications for Payment. 3. Perfonnance and payment bonds. 4. Insurance certificates. 5. List of subcontractors. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" specifies requirements for submittal of the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Coordination" specifies requirements governing preparation and submittal of required Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" specifies requirements for submittal and distribution of meeting and conference minutes. 4. Division 1 Section "Construction Photographs" specifies requirements for submittal of periodic construction photographs. 5. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" specifies requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports. 6. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies requirements for submittal of Project Record Documents and warranties at project closeout. . 96-099/8-96 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1 1.03 DEFINITIONS . Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or to function as intended. A. 1. Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 1 Section "Coordination" and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data. B. Field samples are fun-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or [mish materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. C. Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. 1.04 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with perfonnance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of perfonnance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination, a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals. a. Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Anow additional time if the Architect must delay processing to pennit coordination with subsequent submittals. b. If an intennediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. c. Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal. d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to pennit processing. . 2. 3. B. Submittal Preparation: Place a pennanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 96-099/8-96 1. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 2 . . 2. Include the following infonnation on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of the Architect. d. Name and address of the Contractor. e. Name and address of the subcontractor. f. Name and address of the supplier. g. Name of the manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. \. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect using a transmittal form. The Architect will not accept submittals received from sources other than the Contractor. I. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. 2. Transmittal Form: Use AlA Document G810. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's construction schedule. Submit within 30 days after the date established for "Commencement of the Work." . 1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertica1line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values." 2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion. 3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. 4. Secure time commitments for perfonning critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. 5. Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other schedules. 6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. B. Phasing: On the schedule, show how requirements for phased completion to permit Work by separate Contractors and partial occupancy by the Owner affect the sequence of Work. . 96-099/8-96 SUBM1TIALS 01300 - 3 c. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including submittal review, testing, and installation. . D. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be sequenced or integrated with other activities. E. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs, On the line, show dollar volume of Work perfonned as of the dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" for cost reporting and payment procedures. F. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. G. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. . 1.06 SUB NnTTAL SCHEDULE A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required for submittal of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and the list of products as well as the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following infonnation: a. Scheduled date for the first submittal. b. Related Section number. c. Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples). d. Name of the subcontractor. e. Description of the part of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for resubmittal. g. Scheduled date for the Architect's final release or approval. B. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their 96-099/8-96 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 4 . . assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved In construction activities. c. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.07 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A. Prepare a daily construction report recording the following infonnation concerning events at the site, and submit duplicate copies to the Architect at weekly intervals: . I. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at the site. 3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 4. Accidents and unusual events. 5. Meetings and significant decisions, 6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 7. Meter readings and similar recordings. 8. Emergency procedures. 9. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 10. Change Orders received, implemented. 11. Services connected, disconnected. 12. Equipment or system tests and startups. 13. Partial Completions, occupancies. 14. Substantial Completions authorized. 1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared infonnation drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard infonnation as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard infonnation prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following infonnation: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by II inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 36 by 48 inches (890 by 1220 mm). 7. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and one blue- or black-line print for the Architect's review. The Architect will return the reproducible print. 8. Final Submittal: Submit 3 blue- or black-line prints and 2 additional prints where required for maintenance manuals, plus the number of prints needed by the . 96-099/8-96 SUBMITIALS 01300-5 9. 1.09 PRODUCT DATA Architect for distribution. The Architect will retain 2 prints and return the remainder. a. One of the prints returned shall be marked up and maintained as a "Record Document." Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken. . A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves. 1.10 SAMPLES 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with trade association standards. c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection of options is required. Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal; submit 4 copies where required for maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one and will return the other marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's possession. b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. . 2. 3. 4. 5. A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. 96-099/8-96 1. Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Architect's sample. Include the following: a. Specification Section number and reference. b. Generic description of the Sample. SUBMITI ALS 01300 - 6 . . . 2. c. Sample source. d. Product name or name of the manufacturer. e. Compliance with recognized standards. f. A vailability and delivery time. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. c. Refer to other Sections for.Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals. d. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Owner's property, are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to Substantial Completion. Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. a. The Architect will review and return preliminary submittals with the Architect's notation, indicating selection and other action. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets, The Architect will return one set marked with the action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. a, Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. 3. 4. 5. B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work, Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Field samples are full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and to establish the Project standard, a. Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications. . 96-099/8-96 SUBMITTALS 01300-7 8. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements. . I. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company. C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies are specified in Division I Section "Quality Contro!." 1.12 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Except for submittals for the record or infonnation, where action and return is required, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. 8. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a unifonn, action stamp. The Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved as Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is In progress. Other Action: Where a submittal is for infonnation or record purposes or special processing or other activity, the Architect will return the submittal marked "Action Not Required." . 2. 3. 4. C. Unsolicited Submittals: The Architect will return unsolicited submittals to the sender without action. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 96-099/8-96 END OF SECTION 01300 SUBMITIALS 01300 - 8 . . SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELA TED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control services. B. Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. . D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products. 1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality- control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. E. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for development of a schedule of required tests and inspections. 1.03 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibilitY of another identified entity, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. . 96-099/8-96 QUALITY CONTROL o 1400 - I 1. 2. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are the Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality- control services. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform those services. . B. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's responsibility. 1. The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements. C. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. Provide access to the Work. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the agency in taking samples. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples. Deliver samples to testing laboratories. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site. . 4. 5. 6. 7. D. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties. The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 1. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor. E. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 96-099/8-96 1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities. QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 2 . . 1.04 SUB MITT ALS A. Unless the Contractor is responsible for this service, the independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service to the Architect. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service through the Contractor. 1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs. 2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. L Test results and an interpretation of test results. j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements. I. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on retesting. . 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. 1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction. . 96-099/8-96 QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 3 96-099/8-96 C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services. . END OF SECTION 01400 . QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 4 . . SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Water service and distribution. 2. Temporary electric power and light. 3. Temporary heat. 4. Ventilation. 5. Telephone service. 6. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water. 7. Storm and sanitary sewer. . C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. field offices and storage sheds. 2. Temporary roads and paving. 3. Dewatering facilities and drains. 4. Temporary enclosures. 5. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards. 6. Waste disposal services. 7. Rodent and pest control. 8. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Temporary fire protection. 2. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 3. Sidewalk bridge or enclosure fence for the site. 4. Environmental protection. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. . 96-099/8-96 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - I B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of the date established for commencement of the Work, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility. . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Building code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. B. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations," ANSI Al 0 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities. " 1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code." C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS . A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements In Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 96-099/8-96 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 2 . . I. For job-built temporary offices, shops, and sheds within the construction area, provide UL-Iabeled, fire-treated lumber and plywood for framing, sheathing, and siding. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior-type, Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood of sizes and thicknesses indicated. For fences and vision barriers, provide minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick exterior plywood. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8- inch- (16-mm-) thick exterior plywood. 2. 3. 4. C. Gypsum Wallboard: Provide gypsum wallboard on interior walls of temporary offices. D. Roofmg Materials: Provide UL Class A standard-weight asphalt shingles or UL Class C mineral-surfaced roll roofing on roofs of job-built temporary offices, shops, and sheds. E. Paint: Comply with requirements of Division 9 Section "Painting." 1. For job-built temporary offices, shops, sheds, fences, and other exposed lumber and plywood, provide exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer. 2. For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. 3. For interior walls of temporary offices, provide 2 coats interior latex-flat wall paint. F. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL-Iabeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. For temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon-reinforced, laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride, fire-retardant tarpaulins. . G. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. H. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) thick, galvanized 2-inch (50-mm) chainlink fabric fencing 6 feet (2 m) high with galvanized barbed-wire top strand and galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) LD. for line posts and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) I.D. for corner posts. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch (19-mm), heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet (30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the ma.ximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge. C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment. . 96-099/8-96 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-3 D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. . E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. F. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed. G. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air-conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading. H. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. I. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFP A-recommended classes for the exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations. 1. Arrange with company and eXlstmg users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 96-099/8-96 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 4 . 3. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Architect. Neither the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders. . 2. 4. 8. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. 1. Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use. C. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switch gear. 1. Install electric power service underground, except where overhead service must be used. 2. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, ac 20 Ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance. . D. Temporary Lighting: When overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements without operating the entire system. Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. E. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. F. Heating Facilities: Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system, provide vented, self-contained, LP-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. I. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited. G. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service throughout the construction period for all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install telephone on a separate line for each temporary office and first-aid station. . 96-099/8-96 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 5 I. Separate Telephone Lines: Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Where an office has more than 2 occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants. b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for a fax machine in the field office. c. Provide a separate line for the Owner's use. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. . 2. H. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the Project's needs. I. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material. I. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit-type privies will not be permitted. 1. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel. 1. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition. I. Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety, and sanitation of personnel. . K. Drinking- Water Facilities: Provide containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking- water units, including paper supply. 1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F (7 to 13 deg C). L. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful marmer. 1. Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. 2. Connect temporary sewers to the municipal system, as directed by sewer department officials. 3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. Following heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. M. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains. 96-099/8-96 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 6 . . 3.03 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 1. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Owner. B. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within the construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241. C. Field Offices: Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel at. the Project Site. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small progress meetings. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furnish with a desk and chairs, a 4-drawer file cabinet, plan table, plan rack, and a 6-shelf bookcase. 2. Equip with a water cooler and private toilet complete with water closet, lavatory, and medicine cabinet unit with a mirror. D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building or elsewhere on-site. . E. Temporary Paving: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paving to support the indicated loading adequately and to withstand exposure to traffic during the construction period. Locate temporary paving for roads, storage areas, and parking where the same permanent facilities wiI\ be located. Review proposed modifications to permanent paving with the Architect. 1. Paving: Comply with Division 2 Section "Hot-Mixed Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of temporary paving. 2. Coordinate temporary paving development with subgrade grading, compaction, installation and stabilization of subbase, and installation of base and finish courses of permanent paving. 3. Install temporary paving to minimize the need to rework the installations and to result in permanent roads and paved areas without damage or deterioration when occupied by the Owner. 4. Delay installation of the final course of permanent asphalt concrete paving until immediately before Substantial Completion. Coordinate with weather conditions to avoid unsatisfactory results. 5. Extend temporary paving in and around the construction area as necessary to accommodate delivery and storage of materials, equipment usage, administration, and supervision. F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included under individual . 96-099/8-96 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 7 Sections, comply with dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections. Where feasible, utilize the same facilities. Maintain the site, excavations, and construction free of water. . G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. 1. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 2. Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar materials. 3. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load- bearing, wood-framed construction. 4. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. (9.2 sq. m) in area, use UL-Iabeled, fire-retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing. H. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 1. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare project identification and other signs of size indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. . 1. Project Identification Signs: Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics. Comply with details indicated. 2. Temporary Signs: Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. J. Temporary Exterior Lighting: Install exterior yard and sign lights so signs are visible when Work is being performed. K. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with requirements ofNFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully. L. Rodent and Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Employ this service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so the Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. 96-099/8-96 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 8 . . M. Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Cover finished, permanent stairs with a protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at the time of acceptance. 3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Except for use of permanent fife protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or longer, as requested by the Architect. B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFP A 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations." 1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fife extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire- protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. . C. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project, complete installation of the permanent fife-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. E. Enclosure Fence: Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose the entire site or the portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates. 1. Provide plywood fence, 8 feet (2.5 m) high, framed with four 2-by-4-inch (50-by- 100-mm) rails, and preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.5 m) apart. F. Covered Walkway: Erect a structurally adequate. protective covered walkway for passage of persons along the adjacent public street. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. Provide wood plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar . 96-099/8-96 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 9 provisions for protection and safe passage. Extend the back wall beyond the structure to complete the enclosure fence. Paint and maintain in a manner acceptable to the Owner and the Architect. . G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. 1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and. are of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism. H. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. A void use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. 3.05 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. . C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's property. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at the temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority. 96-099/8-96 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 10 . . . . 96-099/8-96 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period including, but not limited to, the following: a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions. c. Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by hours of use. END OF SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - II . SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project. . 1. Multiple Prime Contracts: Provisions of this Section apply to the construction activities of each prime contractor. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Reference Standards and DefInitions" specifies the applicability of industry standards to products specified. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submittal of the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule. Division 1 Section "Substitutions" specifies administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. 2. . 3. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. DefInitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. a. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. b. "Foreign Products," as distinguished from "domestic products," are items substantially manufactured (50 percent or more of value) outside the United States and its possessions. Products produced or supplied by entities substantially owned (more than 50 percent) by persons who are not citizens of, nor living within, the United States and its possessions are also considered to be foreign products. . 96-099/8-96 NrA TERIALS AND EQUIPtvlENT 01600 - 1 1.04 SUBM1TT ALS 2. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, fmished, refined or otheYWise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping. . 3. A. Product List: Prepare a list showing products specified in tabular form acceptable to the Architect. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed. 1. Coordinate product list with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals. Form: Prepare product list with information on each item tabulated under the following column headings: a. Related Specification Section number. b. Generic name used in Contract Docurnents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of an initial product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations from Contract requirements. a. At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in the Contract period. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of the completed product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations from Contract requirements. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the completed product list. No response within this period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons for this action. . 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source. 96-099/8-96 1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not, or cannot, produce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the Architect to determine the most important product qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes, such as visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources producing products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2 . . B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each prime contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods that are compatible with products and construction methods of other prime or separate contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between prime contractors over concurrently selectable, but incompatible products, the Architect will determine which products shall be retained and which are incompatible and must be replaced. C. Foreign Product Limitations: Except under one or more of the following conditions, provide domestic products, not foreign products, for inclusion in the Work: 1. No available domestic product complies with the Contract Documents. 2. Domestic products that comply with the Contract Documents are available only at prices or terms substantially higher than foreign products that comply with the Contract Documents. D. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. I. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or, where required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspICUOUS. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service- connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. . 2. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. I. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. . 96-099/8-96 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3 4. 5. 6. 7. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Docurnents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. . 2.01. PRODUCT SELECTION A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, fInish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. B. Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Docurnents and governing regulations govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 96-099/8-96 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a single product or manufacturer, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or manufacturers, provide 1 of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. a. Where Specifications specifY products or manufacturers by name, accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal," comply with the Contract Docwnent provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. Nonproprietary Specifications: When Specifications list products or manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Docwnent provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or \vithout use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and othenvise complies with Contract requirements. . 2. 3. 4. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 4 . . PART 3 - EXECUTION . 5. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "... as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures ..." or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "A1lowance" provisions in Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for processing such selections. 6. 7. 8. 9. 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. . 96-099/8-96 1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 0 1600 tv1ATERIALS AND EQUIPtvlENT 01600 - 5 . SECTION 01631 SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SIDAMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. 1. Multiple Prime Contracts: Provisions of this Section apply to the construction activities of each prime contractor. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Reference Standards and DefInitions" specifies the applicability of industry standards to products specified. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule. Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" specifies requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and product options. 2. . 3. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered to be requests for substitutions. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions: 1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions. 2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents. 4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. . 96-099/8-96 SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - I 1.04 SUBMITTALS . Substitution Request Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 60 days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. A. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and according to procedures required for change-order proposals. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. b. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight, size, durability, and visual effect. c. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. d. Samples, where applicable or requested. e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. g. The Contractor's certification that the proposed substitution conforms to requirements in the Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated. h. The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. Architect's Action: If necessary, the Architect'will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. The Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. Acceptance will be in the form of a change order. a. Use the product specified if the Architect cannot make a decision on the use of a proposed substitute within the time allocated. . 2. 3. 4. 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider the Contractor's request for substitution when one or more of the follO\ving conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. 96-099/8-96 SUBSTITUTIONS 0163 I - 2 . . If the following conditions are not satisfied, the Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents. 3. The request is timely, fully docurnented, and properly submitted. 4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result offailure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 5. The request is directly related to an "or-equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 6. The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the Owner must assume. The Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner, and similar considerations. The specified product or method ot construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty. Where a proposed substitution involves more than one prime contractor, each contractor shall cooperate with the other contractors involved to coordinate the Work, provide uniformity and consistency, and assure compatibility of products. 7. 8. 9. 10. . 11. B. The Contractor's submittal and the Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) . 96-099/8-96 END OF SECTION 01631 SUBSTITUTIONS 01631-3 . SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SillvfMAR Y A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operation and maintenance manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Final cleaning. B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. . 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Surn. b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, [mal certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar fmal record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. . 96-099/8-96 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - I 7. 8. 9. 10. Make fmal changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. Complete fma1 cleanup requirements, including touchup painting. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed fInishes. . B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is substantially complete. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for fmal acceptance. 1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting fmal inspection for certification of fmal acceptance and fmal payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. Submit the fmal payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required. Submit an updated fmal statement, accounting for fmal additional changes to the Contract Surn. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's fmal inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Architect. Submit fmal meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. Submit consent of surety to fmal payment. Submit a fmalliquidated damages settlement statement. Submit evidence of fmal, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. . 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 96-099/8-96 1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of fmal acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for fmal acceptance. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2 . . 2. Ifnecessary, reinspection will be repeated. 1.05 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3. Note related change-order numbers where applicable. 4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set. C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Include with the Project Manual one copy of other written construction documents, such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. . 1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. 2. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed construction that carmot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. 3. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. 4. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's records. D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Note related Change Orders and markup of record drawings and Specifications. 1. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. 2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. 3. Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Architect for the Owner's records. . 96-099/8-96 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 3 E. Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet with the Architect and the Owner's personnel at the Project Site to determine which Samples are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with the Owner's instructions regarding delivery to the Owner's Sample storage area. . F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owner's records. G. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch (Sl-mm), 3- ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended "turn-around" cycles. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 8. Fixture lamping schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items: I. Maintenance manuals. 2. Record documents. 3. Spare parts and materials. 4. Tools. 5. Lubricants. 6. Fuels. 7. Identification systems. 8. Control sequences. 9. Hazards. 10. Cleaning. 11. Warranties and bonds. 96-099/8-96 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 4 . . 12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 1. Startup. 2. Shutdown. 3. Emergency operations. 4. Noise and vibration adjustments. 5. Safety procedures. 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7. Effective energy utilization. 3.02 FINAL CLEANING A. General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular site cleaning is included in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls." B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. . a. b. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface. c. d. e. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid the Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, hannful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of Ia\vfully. . 96-099/8-96 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 5 96-099/8-96 1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner. . . CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-6 . . PROJECT CLOSE OUT CHECK-OFF LIST PROJECT NAME: PROJECT NUMBER: DOCUMENT** Contractors Warranty Statutory Affidavit Non-Influence Affidavit Inspection reports County Building Inspector County Plumbing Inspector County Electrical Inspector State Fire Marshal-Occupancy Certificates Consent of Surety to Final Payment Contractors Affidavit - Release of Liens Other as specified - (Fill in): . NO. OF COPIES MAINTENANCE MANUALS & EOUlPMENT BROCHURES** Air Conditioning Equipment Boilers Water Heaters Plumbing Fixtures Electrical Equipment Food Service Equipment Cold Storage Equipment Test and Balance Reports Wiring and Controls Diagrams for Equipment Other as specified - (Fill in): Termite Letter KEYS Schedule by Door Locations Certificate of Receipt of Keys Schedule of Value tags, Location & Function **Where Applicable by Specification . 96-099/8-96 DATE RECEIVED CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 7 Augusta-Richmond County Commission-Council Augusta. Georgia . ", Contractor for the above referenced project, and I Owner, hereby certify that "as-built" drawings for the above-referenced project have been prepared by the Contractor and provided to the Owner. The Owner and Contractor further certify that the Contractor has provided the owner with all maintenance and operation instructions, and product warranties, and that the Owner, or Owner's representative has been trained in the maintenance and operations of the systems installed. The Owner and the Contractor understand that the Contractor's warranty for the project begins on the date of substantial completion and remains in effect for a period of one (1) year. The Owner understands that he/she shall direct warranty concerns to the Contractor, during this warranty period and to the product manufacturers for warranties beyond this time period. If the Contractor, after notice, fails to proceed within seven (7) days to comply with the terms of the guarantee, the Owner may have the defects corrected and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expense incurred. . Contractor Date Owner Date Precision Planning, Inc. Date CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 8 . 96-099/8-96 . NON- INFLUENCE AFFIDAVIT COUNTY OF STATE OF I do solemnly swear on my oath that as to the contract dated , 19, between and the I have no knowledge of the exertion of any influence or the attempted exertion of any influence on the firm on behalf of which this affidavit is made in any way, manner, or form in the purchase of materials, equipment, or other items involved in construction, manufacturer, or employment of labor under the aforesaid contract by any employee, officer, or agent of or any person connected with the State Government of Georgia in any way whatsoever. This day of ,19_. (L.S.) Signature . Tille Finn COUNTY OF STATE OF Personally before me, the undersigned authority, appeared who is known to me to be an official of the firm of , who, after being duly sworn, stated on his oath that he had read the above statement and that the same is true and correct. Notary Public My commission expires This day of ,19_, . 96-099/8-96 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-9 STATUTORY AFFIDAVIT . UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE UPON FINAL PAYMENT ST A TE OF GEORGIA COUNTY OF The undersigned mechanic and/or materialman has been employed by (name of contractor) to furnish (describe materials and/or labor) for the construction and/or improvements known as (title of the project or building) which is located in the City of , County of , and is owned by (name of Owner) and more particularly described as follows: (DESCRIBE THE PROPERTY UPON WHICH THE INIPROVEMENTS WERE MADE BY USING EITHER A METES AND BOUNDS DESCRIPTION, THE LAND LOT DISTRICT, BLOCK AND LOT NUMBER, OR STREET ADDRESS OF THE PROJECT.) . Upon the receipt of the sum of $ , the mechanic and/or materialman waives and releases any and all liens or claims of liens or any right against any labor and/or material bond it has upon the foregoing described property. Given under hand and seal this day of .19_ (Seal) (Witness) (Address) NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT WAIVES RIGHTS UNCONDITIONALLY AND STATES THAT YOU HA VE BEEN PAID FOR GIVING UP THOSE RIGHTS. THIS DOCUMENT IS ENFORCEABLE AGAINST YOU IF YOU SIGN IT, EVEN IF YOU HAVE NOT BEEN PAID. IF YOU HAVE NOT YET BEEN PAID, USE A CONDITIONAL RELEASE FORM. END OF SECTION 01700 . 96-099/8-96 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-10 . SECTION 01710 FINAL CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Final cleaning of exterior and interior of project. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 00700 - General Conditions (AlA A201, 1987 Edition): Cleaning Up. B. Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions. C. Section 01701 - Contract Closeout Procedures. D. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific cleaning for product or work. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Execute cleaning prior to inspection for Substantial Completion of the Work. . 1.04 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS A. Remove and dispose of waste materials, rubbish, debris and trash in compliance with provisions of governing laws, codes, ordinances and regulations. 1. Do not burn or bury rubbish, trash, debris and waste materials on Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Use materials which will not create hazards to health or property, and which wiII not damage surfaces. B. Use only materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material being cleaned. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PERIODIC CLEANING A. On a regular and frequent basis during progress of Work, perform cleaning necessary to keep Work, Project site and adjacent properties free from unsightly and unsafe accumulation of scrap and waste materials, debris, rubbish and trash resulting from construction operations. . 96-099/8-96 FINAL CLEANING 01710-1 1. Provide sufficient trash bins and containers for collection of scrap and waste material, debris, rubbish and trash. Provide separate, closable top metal containers for collection of oil and paint soaked rags; empty volatile substance cans and other waste products subject to spontaneous combustion. Designate approved eating areas and provide covered containers conforming to local health codes for collection of waste paper and left-over foodstuffs. Enforce usage of containers by workmen. . 2. 3. B. Dispose of scrap and waste materials, debris, rubbish and trash by one of the following optional methods: 1. Provide services of company regularly engaged in refuse disposal operations, including usage of large metal dump-type trash containers. 2. Use own forces and equipment for loading, hauling and disposal. C. Remove accumulations of scrap and waste materials as bins and containers are filled and not less than once per week. 1. Remove containers containing products subject to spontaneous combustion daily. 2. Remove containers containing waste paper and left-over foodstuff daily. 3. Legally dispose of all waste materials, rubbish, volatile materials and cleaning materials off Project site. 4. Dispose of no materials in waterways. A. During application of finished surface materials, including painting and decorating, employ dust control methods during cleaning operations to prevent dust from contaminating wet and freshly coated surfaces. . 3.02 DUST CONTROL 3.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Prior to Substantial Completion of Work, or some designated portion thereof acceptable to Owner, perform cleaning of visually exposed materials, fixtures, equipment and finished surfaces. B. Remove labels, tags, stickers and unauthorized identification markings from finished surfaces. 1. Do not remove permanently affixed nameplates, instructions, markings, Underwriters Laboratories labels and approval stickers, Factory Mutual approved stickers and other identifying markings required by federal, state and local codes, ordinances and regulations. C. Remove broken, chipped and defective glass; remove stains, spots, marks, paint smears; dirt and foreign materials; clean and polish exterior and interior glass; clean and polish mirrors. 96-099/8-96 FINAL CLEANING 01710-2 . . D. E. F. G. H. . Remove temporary protective coatings, tapes and films from finished aluminum surfaces and ornamental metal surfaces, clean and polish aluminum and ornamental metal in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. . Remove paint smears, spots, marks, dirt, mud and dust from exposed interior and exterior fmished surfaces. Clean and polish finished hardware; remove marks, stains, scratches and blemishes. Clean and polish ceramic floor and wall tile; clean and polish toilet fixtures and trim, toilet accessories and toilet compartments. Sweep concrete floors not less than broom clean; vacuum where necessary to remove excessive dust; thoroughly clean other hard surfaced floors. 1. Remove mortar droppings, joint compound, plaster and cementitious material droppings from floors prior to final cleaning. I. Sweep exterior paved surfaces broom clean; rake clean unpaved surfaces. J. Thoroughly clean all items of mechanical and electrical equipment; remove excess oils and grease from exposed surfaces. 1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if ventilating units were operated during construction. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. 2. K. Vacuum clean carpeted and similar soft surfaces. L. Clean, machine buff, wax and polish all resilient and hard-surfaced floors as specified. 3.04 INSPECTION A. Prior to occupancy by Owner of any designated portion of Work, conduct inspection in presence of Owner to verify Work is properly clean and ready for acceptance by Owner. 3.05 MAINTENANCE . 96-099/8-96 A. Provide Owner with manufacturer written recommendations regarding cleaning and maintaining all interior finishes within the building. END OF SECTION 01710 FINAL CLEANING 01710-3 . SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples. B. Submittal of Record Documents and Samples. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. B. C. D. E. . F. Section 00700 - General Conditions (AlA A201, 1987 Edition): Documents at the site. Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions Section 01300 - Submittals: Shop drawings, product data, and samples. Section 01701 - Contract Closeout Procedures. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data. Individual Specifications Sections: Manufacturer's certificates and certificates of inspection. 1.03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES . 96-099/8-96 A. In addition to requirements in General Conditions, Maintain at the site for Owner, two record copies of: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Approved shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Field test records. 7. Inspection certificates. 8. Manufacturer's certificates. B. Store Record Documents and samples in Field Office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and samples. C. Label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance with Section number listings in Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-1 D. Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. . E. Keep Record Documents and samples available for inspection by Architect/Engineer. 1.04 RECORDING A. Record information on a set of blue line opaque drawings, and in a copy of a Project Manual. Label each sheet of the Project Record Drawings in the lower right corner with the neatly printed words "Project Record Drawings." One (1) set of Contract Documents and Drawings will remain clean without mark-up for record purposes. Contractor shall use the additional set for marking measurements, on-site changes, items of construction that are actually used, and other conditions as they are encountered during the course of the Work. This marked-up set of Contract Documents and Drawings shall consist of red-lined copies of plans and shop drawings, shall indicate actual field dimensions, shall represent the work as actually constructed, and shall be recorded on a daily basis. Failure to produce these records on request of Architect or Owner shall constitute grounds to halt construction with no time extension until steps are taken to see that these records are being properly made. . B. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording information. 1. The Construction Manager shall provide colored pencils for marking record copies of Contract Drawings and Specifications. Use a different colored pencil for each of the following: a. Architectural Work Red b. Plumbing Work Green c. HV AC Work Blue d. Electrical Work Orange e. Other written notations Brown 2. Establish a color code denoting what trade will use what color, and show this on a schedule on the front sheet of the "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS." C. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. D. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: 1. Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 96-099/8-96 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-2 . . 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. Field changes of dimension and detail. Changes made by Modifications. Details not on original Contract Drawings. References to related shop drawings and Modifications. 4. 5. 6. 7. E. Prior to final construction inspection, Contractor shall furnish to Architect a neatly marked set of construction plans which accurately depict the conditions and records all changes made during construction. Architect shall promptly notify Contractor in writing if additional information is required. F. Other Documents: Maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, and field test records, required by individual Specifications sections. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. At Contract closeout, deliver Record Documents and samples under provisions of Section 01701. B. Transmit with cover letter in duplicate, listing: . PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION . 96-099/8-96 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Date. Project title and number. Contractor's name, address, and telephone number. Number and title of each Record Document. Signature of Contractor or authorized representative. Not Used. Not Used. END OF SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-3 . SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Format and content of manuals. B. Instruction of Owner's personnel. C. Schedule of submittals. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittals procedures, Shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 01701 - Contract Closeout: Contract Closeout Procedures. C. Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds. D. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. . 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 1.04 FORMAT A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under work of this contract. B. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-112 x 11 inch three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers; one inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. D. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. . 96-099/8-96 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-1 F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. . 1.05 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, subconsultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. E. Type Tex.t: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each as specified in Section 01740. A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. . 1.06 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture Protection and Weather Ex.posed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification Sections. 1.07 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics. controls and communications. 96-099/8-96 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-2 . . c. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls 'manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. . M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. N. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification Sections. 1.08 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Before final inspection, provide necessary instruction to Owner's designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. B. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons within six months. C. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. . 96-099/8-96 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-3 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments. . B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. C. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. D. Submit two copies of revised volumes of data in final form within ten days after final inspection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01730 . 96-099/8-96 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-4 . . SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SIDvfMAR Y A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's period for correction of the Work. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies procedures for submitting warranties. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies contract closeout procedures. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. . 4. C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. 1.04 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction. . 96-099/8-96 WARRANTIES 01740 - I B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. . C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. . B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution. C. forms for special warranties are included at the end of this Section. Prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. D. form of Submittal: At final Completion compile 2 copies of each required warranty properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. WARRANTIES o I 740 - 2 . 96-099/8-96 . E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8- 1/2-by-ll-inch (l15-by-280-mm) paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer. 2. IdentifY each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES, II Project title or name, and name of the Contractor. 3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LIST OF WARRANTIES A. Schedule: Provide warranties on products and installations as specified in the following Sections: . 1. 2. Aluminum Windows: Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows. Water Heaters: Section 15460 - Water Heaters. END OF SECTION 01740 . 96-099/8-96 WARRANTIES o I 740 - 3 . SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protection of existing trees indicated to remain. 2. Removal of trees and other vegetation. 3. Topsoil stripping. 4. Clearing and grubbing. 5. Removing above-grade improvements. 6. Removing below-grade improvements. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS . A. Traffic: Conduct site-clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. 1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property. 2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners. C. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. I. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) in diameter that are cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt or other acceptable coating formulated to use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible. 2. . 96-099/8-96 SITE CLEARING 02110 - I 3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations in a manner acceptable to Engineer. Employ a licensed arborist to repair damage to trees and shrubs. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Landscape Architect. . 4. 1.04 EXISTING SERVICES A. General: Indicated locations are approximate; determine exact locations before commencing Work. B. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services. Notify affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval before starting this Work. C. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected 'services. Identify service lines and capping locations on Project Record Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and off-site disposal of stumps and roots. . 1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as a firm, fine clayey sand found in a depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. 1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. a. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip Jines to prevent damage to root system. 2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion. C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. 1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. 96-099/8-96 SITE CLEARING 02110 - 2 . . 3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) loose depth, and thoroughly compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. D. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. 1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings and is included under work of related Division 15 and 16 Sections. Removing abandoned underground piping or conduits interfering with construction is included under this Section. 3.02 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning will be permitted only at designated areas and times directed by Owner. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials until fires are extinguished. B. Removal to Owner's Spoil Area: Transport noncombustible waste materials and unsuitable topsoil materials to designated spoil areas on Owner's property and dispose of as directed. END OF SECTION 02110 . . 96-099/8-96 SITE CLEARING 02 I I 0 - 3 . SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing and grading sub grades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, and landscaping. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage and moisture-control fill course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for walks and pavements. 5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 6. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. 7. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and appurtenances. . B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, topsoil removal, and tree protection. 2. Division 2 Section "Landscape Work" for fInish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and planting. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Excavation consists of the removal of material encountered to sub grade elevations and the reuse or disposal of materials removed. B. Sub grade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not available from excavations. D. Subbase Course: The layer placed between the sub grade and base course in a paving system or the layer placed between the sub grade and surface of a pavement or walk. E. Base Course: The layer placed between the subbase and surface pavement in a paving system. F. Drainage Fill: Course of washed granular material supporting slab-on-grade placed to cut off upward capillary flow of pore water. . 96-099/8-96 EARTHWORK 02200 - I G. Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated sub grade elevations or dimensions without direction by the Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Architect, shall be at the Contractor's expense. . H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface. 1. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within building lines. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for the following: 1. Each type of plastic warning tape. 2. Filter fabric. C. Samples of the following: 1. 20 lb (9 kg) samples, sealed in air-tight containers, of each proposed fill and backfill soil material from on-site or borrow sources. 2. 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) sample of filter fabric. D. Photographs of existing adjacent structures and site improvements. . 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ a qualified independent geoteclmical engineering testing agency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing. C. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1. Before commencing earthwork, meet with representatives of the governing authorities, Owner, Engineer, consultants, Geoteclmical Engineer, independent testing agency, and other concerned entities. Review earthwork procedures and responsibilities including testing and inspection procedures and requirements. Notify participants at least 3 working days prior to convening conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish a copy to each participant. 96-099/8-96 EARTHWORK 02200 - 2 . . 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. I. Provide a minimurn n-h.ours' notice to the Engineer and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shutoff services if lines are active. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient approved soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and ot]er deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: M:TM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, NfH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT. . D. Backfill and fill Materials: Satisf2.ctory soil materials. E. Subbase and Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (75 micrometer) sieve. f. Engineered fill: Subbase or base materials. G. Bedding Material: Subbase or base materials with 100 percent passing a 1 inch (25 mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (75 micrometer) sieve. H. Drainage fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate grading size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No.8 (2.36 mm) sieve. I. filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and natural sand, with 100 percent pas~;ing a 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 50 (300 micrometer) sieve. 1. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Detectable Warning Tape: Aci.d- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and . 96-099/8-96 EARTHWORK 02200 - 3 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick minimum, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep. . 1. Tape Colors: Provide tape colors to utilities as follows: a. Red: Electric. b. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. c. Orange: Telephone and other communications. d. Blue: Water systems. e. Green: Sewer systems. B. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven pemous geotextile fabric of polypropylene, nylon or polyester fibers, or a combination. 1. Provide filter fabrics that meet or exceed the listed minimum physical properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and the referenced standard test method in parentheses: a. Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D 4632): 100 1b (45 kg). b. Apparent Opening Size (ASTM D 4751): #100 U.S. Standard (150 micrometer) sieve. c. Permeability (ASTM D 4491): 150 gallons per minute per sq. ft. (l02 Lis per sq. m). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. . B. Protect sub grades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff in accordance with the latest edition of the "Manual for Erosion and Sediment Control in Georgia," and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. D. Tree protection is specified in the Division 2 Section "Site Clearing." 3.02 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared sub grades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect sub grades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. Explosives: Obtain written permission from authorities having jurisdiction before bringing explosives to the site or using explosives on the site. 96-099/8-96 EARTHWORK 02200 - 4 . . I. Do not damage adjacent structures, property, or site improvements or weaken the bearing capacity ofrock wbgrade when using explosives. B. Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified and includes excavation to required sub grade elevations. Excavation will be classified as earth excavation or rock excavation as follows: . 1. Earth excavation includes excavation of pavements and other obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be demolished and removed; together with soil and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock::>r unauthorized excavation. a. Intermittent drilling, blasting, or ripping to increase production and not necessary to permit excavation of material encountered will be classified as earth excavation. Rock excavation include:; removal and disposal of rock material and obstructions encountered that cannot 'be removed by the following heavy-duty rock excavating equipment without systematic drilling, blasting, or ripping. a. Rock material includes boulders 1/2 cu. yd. (0.38 cu. m) or more in volume and rock in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits. Rock excavating equipment for footings, trenches, and pits shall be equivalent to Caterpillar Model No. 215D LC track-mounted hydraulic excavator, equipped with a 42 inch (1050 mm) wide short-tip radius rock bucket, rated at not less than 120 hp (89 kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 25,000 Ib (111 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,700 Ib (83 kN), measured according to SAE Standard 11179. Rock-excavating equipment for open excavations shall be equivalent to Caterpillar Model No. 973, heavy-duty, track-mounted loader, rated at not less than 210 hp (157 kW) flywheel power and developing minimum of 45,000 Ib (200 kN) breakout force, measured according to SAE Standard J732c-69. a. Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet (9 m) in either kngth or width are defmed as open excavations. Rock excavation will be paid by unit prices included in the Contract Docurnents. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross-sectioned by Engineer. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.04 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS A. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations. 3.05 EXCA VA TION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.2 inches (30 mm). Extend excava"ions a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. 'Excavations for Footing~i and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.06 EXCA VATION FOR WALKS AND PA VENfENTS A. . 96-099/8-96 Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. EARTHWORK 02200 - 5 3.07 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations. . B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otheIWise indicated. 1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit. 2. Clearance: AJ; indicated C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape sub grade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading. 1. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter and flat- bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. F or pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Where encountering rock or another unyielding bearing surface, carry trench excavation 6 inches (150 mm) below invert elevation to receive bedding course. 3.08 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. . B. When Geotechnical Engineer determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backf111 or fill material as directed. 1. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according to the Contract provisions for changes in Work. C. Reconstruct sub grades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. 3.09 UNAUTHORIZED EXCA VA TION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position when acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. B. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special installation procedures, as required by the Engineer. 96-099/8-96 EARTHWORK 02200 - 6 . . 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile excavated materials al;ceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable borrow materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent wind-blown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials ~way from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.11 BACKFILL A. Backfill excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Acceptance of construc:tion below fInish grade including, where applicable, dampproofmg, wateq>roofmg, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations ofur.derground.utilities for record documents. 3. Testing, inspecting, and Hpproval of underground utilities. 4. Concrete formwork remcval. 5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. 6. Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL . A. Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B. Concrete backfill trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are excavated within 18 inches (450 mm) of footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of footings. C. Provide 4 inch (100 mm) thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installation and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. D. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm), to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. E. Coordinate backfilling with utilitie:s testing. F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is removed. G. Place and compact fmal backfill of satisfactory soil material to final sub grade. . 96-099/8-96 EARTHWORK 02200 - 7 H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 rom) below sub grade under pavements and slabs. . 3.13 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE BACKFILL A. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of filter fabric around perimeter of drainage trench or at footing, as indicated. Place a 6 inch (150 mm) compacted course of filtering material on filter fabric to support drainage pipe. After instalIing and testing, encase drainage pipe in a minimum of 6 inches (150 rom) of compacted filtering material and wrap in filter fabric, overlapping edges at least 6 inches (150 rom). B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact drainage backfill of filtering material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final sub grade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of filter fabric, overlapping edges at least 6 inches (150 mm). C. Impervious Fill: Place and compact impervious filI material over drainage backfill to final sub grade. 3.14 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills. 1. Plow strip, or break up sloped surlaces steeper than I vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing surface. B. When sub grade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for fill, break up ground surface to depth required, pulverize, moisture-condition or aerate soil and recompact to required density. . C. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below. 1. Under grass, use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material, or satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use subbase material. 4. Under building slabs, use drainage fill material. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. 3.15 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate sub grade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 3 percent of optimurn moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet to compact to specified density. a. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material. 96-099/8-96 EARTHWORK 02200 - 8 . . 3.16 COMP ACTION A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compa(;ted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations. Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Percentage of Maximurn Dry Dl;nsity Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, methodically compact the top 12 inches (300 mm:1 below sub grade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximwn dry density. using heavy compaction equipment; the upper 12" to 98 percent maximum dry density. 2. Under walkways, compact the top 6 inches (150 mm) below sub grade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximwn dry density. 3.17 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. . 1. 2. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish sub grades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1.2 inches (30 mm). 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1.2 inches (30 mm). 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). C. Grading Inside Building Lines: Finish sub grade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10 foot (3 m) straightedge. 3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course material on prepared subgrades. Place base course material over subbases to pavements, as indicated on typical sections. 1. Compact subbase and ba:;e courses at optimwn moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D 4254 relative density. 2. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 3. When thickness of comp acted subbase or base course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials in a singl~ layer. . 96-099/8-96 EARTHWORK 02200 - 9 4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm), place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick when compacted. . B. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders at least 5.0 feet (1.5m) wide of acceptable soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer. 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each sub grade and each fill or backfill layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements. 1. Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTMD 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2937 (drive cylinder method), as applicable. a. Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according to ASTM D 2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D 3017. b. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. Footing Subgrade: At footing sub grades, perform at least one test of each soil stratum to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of each sub grade with related tested strata when acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At sub grade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for each 100 feet (30 m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests along a wall face. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and fmal backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for each 150 feet (45 m) or less of trench, but no fewer than two tests. . 2. 3. 4. 5. B. When testing agency reports that sub grades, fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact and retest until required density is obtained. 3.20 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 96-099/8-96 EARTHWORK 02200 - 10 . . B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Architect; reshape and recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density. C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, qua),ity, and condition of [mished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evid(:nce of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on the Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Engineer. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it on the Own(:r's property in areas designated by Engineer. END OF SECTION 02200 . . 96-099/8-96 EARTHWORK 02200 - II . SECTION 02281 TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Soil treatment below slabs-on-grade for subterranean insects. B. Soil treatment at interior and exterior foundation perimeter, for subterranean insects. 1.02 REFERENCES A. EPA - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and. Rodenticide Act. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in soil treatment for termite control with five years documented experience and shall be a state licensed pest control operator. B. Materials: Provide certification that toxicants conform to requirements of authority having jurisdiction. . C. Material Packaging: Manufacturer's labels and seals identifying content. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Federal, State and Lc,cal requirements for application licensing and authority to use toxicant chemicals. 1.05 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit product data indicating toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate, and manufacturers installation instructions. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty for material and installation. B. Warranty: Cover against invasion or propagation of subterranean termites, damage to building or building contents camed by termites; repairs to building or building contents so caused. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2:01 MATERIALS A. Chemical shall be applied in a water solution. . 96-099/8-96 TERMITE CONTROL 02281-1 B. Acceptable Products: Toxicants shall be registered by the Environmental Protection Agency for their intended use and shall be accepted by the U. S. Department of Agriculture for use in controlling tennite infestation of buildings, without being injurious to plant life. . C. Mixtures of chemicals are prohibited, except as premixed from manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify the soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, ready to receive treatment. B. Beginning of application means acceptance of soil 'conditions. 3 .02 APPLICATION A. Apply toxicant under concrete slabs and along both sides of foundation walls in accordance with label instructions and EP A requirements for subterranean or surface treatment. B. Apply subterranean treatments by means of injection or trenching. C. Perform no treatment when soil is wet or after rains. Avoid flow of toxicant from treated surfaces. D. Coordinate soil treatment at foundation perimeter with fInish grading and landscaping work to avoid disturbance of treated soil. Retreat disturbed treated soil. . 3.03 RETREATMENT A. If inspection identifies the presence of termites, retreat soil and retest. B. Use same toxicant as for original treatment. END OF SECTION 02281 96-099/8-96 TERMITE CONTROL 02281-2 . . SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CE~NT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SillAMAR Y A. This Section includes exterior portland cement concrete paving for the following: 1. Walkways. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Ea.Jthwork" for sub grade preparation, grading and subbase course. 2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS . A. General: Submit the following ac;cording to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary ma.terials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake fInish materials, and others if requested by Engineer. C. Design mixes for each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when characteristics of materials, projel;t conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. D. Laboratory test reports for evaluation of concrete materials and mix design tests. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete Standards: Comply with provisions of the following standards, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. I. American Concrete Insti,tute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, " 2. ACI 318, "Building Cod~ Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Stl~el Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." . 96-099/8-96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - I B. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. . C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform materials evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. D. Field-Constructed Mockup: Cast mockup of size indicated or as required to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. 1. When Engineer determines that mockup does not meet requirements, demolish and remove it from the site and cast another until the mockup is accepted. 2. Keep accepted mockup undisturbed during construction as a standard for judging completed paving. Undamaged mockup may be incorporated into the Work. 3. Demolish accepted mockup and remove from site when directed by Engineer. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" and the following: 1. Before installing portland cement concrete paving, meet with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction, Owner, Engineer, consultants, independent testing agency, and other concerned entities to review requirements. Notify participants at least 3 working days before conference. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a 100-foot or less radius. B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form-release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars and Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775 with ASTM A 615, Grade 60 deformed steel bars. C. Plain, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A 82. D. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. 96-099/8-96 PORTLAND CENfENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 2 . . 1. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire FabJic: ASTM A 497. F. Fabricated Bar Mats: Welded or dip-assembled steel bar mats, ASTM A 184. Use ASTM A 615, Grade 60 steel bars, unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. H. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775 with ASTM A 615, Grade 60 plain steel bars. I. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grad,~ A bolts, internally and externally threaded. Design hook bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. 1. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, dowel bar supports and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS . A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4, and as follows. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Do not use fine or coars(: aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. 3. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Architect. D. Water: Potable. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. . 96-099/8-96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 3 C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. . D. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. G. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.05 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. I. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap-polyethylene sheet. C. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A or B, wax free. D. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. 1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L. . E. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. F. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: a. Clear Cure; Anti-Hydro Co., Inc. b. Spartan-Cote; The Burke Co. c. All Resin; Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co. d. Sea1co 309; Cormix Construction Chemicals. e. Day-Chem Cure and Seal; Dayton Superior Corp. f. Diamond Clear; Euclid Chemical Co. g. #64 Resin Cure-Clear; Lambert Corp. h. L&M Cure R; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 1. Masterkure; Master Builders, Inc. J. 3100 Series; W.R. Meadows, Inc. k. Seal N Kure; Meta1crete Industries. \. Kure-N-Seal; Sonnebom-Chemrex. 96-099/8-96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 4 . . 2. m. Horn Clear Seal; TammslA.C. Horn. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: a. Clear Cure Water Base; Anti-Hydro Co., Inc. b. Spartan Cote W3; The Burke Co. c. W.B. Resin Cure; Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. d. Sealco VOC; Corrnix Construction Chemicals. e. Safe Cure and Seal (1-18); Dayton Superior Corp. f. Diamond Clear VOX; Euclid Chemical Co. g. Aqua Kure-Clear; Lambert Corp. h. Dress & Seal #2.2 WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 1. Masterkure 100W; Master Builders, Inc. J. 1100 Clear Seri1es; w.R. Meadows, Inc. k. Metcure; MetaIc:rete Industries. \. Kure-N-Seal WB; Sonneborn-Chernrex. m. Horncure 100; TammslA.C. Horn. Evaporation Control: a. Aquafllm; Cons:?ec Marketing and Mfg. Co. b. Eucobar; Euclid Chemical Co. c. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc. e. Waterhold; Met~lcrete Industries. 3. 2.06 RELATED MATERIALS A. . B. Boiled Linseed Oil Mixture: Combination of boiled linseed oil and mineral spirits, complying with AASHTO M-233. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Fused aluminum oxide granules or crushed emery as the abrasive aggregate for a nonslip finish, W:.th emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less thm 25 percent ferric oxide. Use material that is factory- graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials. C. Bonding Agent: Acrylic or styrene: butadiene. D. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and dass to suit requirements. E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.07 CONCRETE MIX A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. . 96-099/8-96 1. Do not use the Owner':, field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing agency. 2. Limit use of fly ash to 25 percent of cement content by weight. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PA VING 02520 - 5 B. Proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: . 1. Compressive Strength (28-Day): 4000 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.40. 3. Slump Limit at Point of Placement: 3 inches. a. Slump limit for concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after adding admixture to site- verified 2-to-3-inch slump concrete. C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent: 1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch maximum aggregate. D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. 2.08 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-112 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.02 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for paving to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 96-099/8-96 PORTLAND CEll/rENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 6 . . C. Clean forms after each use and coal with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement ofloose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wre. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats. 3.04 JOINTS A. General: Construct contraction, construction, and isolation joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless indicated otherwise. . I. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless indicated otherwise. B. Contraction Joints: Provide weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Tooled Joints: Form cO:1tractionjoints in fresh concrete by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with a radiused jointer tool. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1I8-inch-wide joints into hardened concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before development of random contraction cracks. 3. Inserts: Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strips into frl~sh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with paving surface. Radius each joirrt edge with a jointer tool. Carefully remove strips or caps of two-piece assemblies after concrete has hardened. Clean groove of loose debris. C. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operaticns are stopped for more than 112 hour, unless paving terminates at isolation joints. . 96-099/8-96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 7 3. 4. Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless indicated otherwise. Embed keys at least 1-112 inches into concrete. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip paving unless indicated. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. . 1. 2. D. Expansion Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 25 feet, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 112 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with fInished concrete surface when no joint sealant is required. 3. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. 4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. E. Installation of joint fillers and sealants is specified in Division 7 Section "Paving Joint Sealants. " F. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. . 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcing before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on surfaces that are frozen. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required fInish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with requirements and with ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. 1. When concrete placing is interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 8 . 96-099/8-96 . F. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. G. Consolidate concrete by mechani'~al vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipmmt and procedures to consolidate concrete complying with ACI 309R. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. H. Screed paved surfaces with a stra:.ghtedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to form a smooth surface plane before exce:ss moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces pJior to beginning fInishing operations. 1. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatu:es. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less lhan 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not use calcium chlOlide, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 2. 3. . J. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified when hot weather conditions exist. 1. Cool ingredients beforj~ rruxmg to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not e:xceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog spray forms, reinforl~ing steel, and sub grade just before placing concrete. Keep sub grade moisture unifo:rm without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10-foot-long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular te:\ture. . 96-099/8-96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 9 1. Burlap finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform gritty texture fInish. . B. Final Tooling: Tool edges of joints formed in fresh concrete with a jointing tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface fmishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1. Radius: 1/4 inch. 3.07 SPECIAL fINISHES A. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Apply nonslip aggregate fInish to paving surfaces indicated. 1. After completing float finish, uniformly spread 25 Ib of dampened nonslip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. 2. After curing, lightly work surface with a sted wire brush or an abrasive stone, and water to expose nonslip aggregate. B. Dry-Shake Color Hardener Finish: Apply a dry-shake color hardener fInish to indicated paving surfaces as follows: 3. Uniformly apply dry-shake materials at a rate of 100 Ib per 100 sq. ft., unless a greater amount is recommended by material manufacturer. Immediately following the first floating operation, uniformly distribute approximately 2/3 of the dry-shake material over the concrete surface with a mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. Follow the floating operation with a second shake application, uniformly distributing the remainder of the dry- shake material to ensure uniform color, and embed by power floating. After fmal floating, apply a light hand-trowel fInish followed by a broom finish to concrete. Cure concrete with a curing compound recommended by the dry-shake material manufacturer. Apply the curing compound immediately after fmal fInishing. . I. 2. 3.08 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R for cold weather protection and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during fInishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating. C. Begin curing after fInishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 96-099/8-96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 10 . . 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous watl:r-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surface:s and edges with a 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. Moisture-Retaining-Covel: Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours alter initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.. 2. 3. E. Boiled Linseed Oil Treatment: Apply boiled linseed oil mixture no sooner than 28 days after placement to clean dry concrete surfaces free of oil, dirt, or other foreign material. Apply in 2 sprayed applications at rate of 40 sq. yd. per gallon for the fIrst application and 60 sq. yd. per gallon for the second application. Allow complete drying between applications. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING A. . . 96-099/8-96 The Owner will employ a qualifIed testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reJ::orts during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include the fonowing: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. a. Slump: AST\1 C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes. b. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air..entrained concrete. c. Concrete Tem:perature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specunens. d. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless directed otherwise. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when fIeld-cured test specimens are required. e. Compressive-~:trength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete dass exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. Test one specimen at 7 days, test two specimens at 2.8 days, and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required. PORTLAND CEtvfENT CONCRETE PA VING 02520 - II 2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. . B. Test results will be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in paving, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for 7-day, 14-day, and 28-day tests. C. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. D. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. 3.1 0 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet the requirements of this Section. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. . D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. END OF SECTION 02520 96-099/8-96 PORTLAND CEtvfENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 12 . . SECTION 02665 WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 Sillv1MARY A. This Section includes water syst(:ms piping. for potable water service and fire protection service outside the building. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 15 Sections for water distribution systems inside building. C. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site and ready for installation. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS . A. Minimurn Working Pressure Ratings: Except where otherwise indicated, the following are rninimurn pressure requirements for water system piping. 1. Underground Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 2. Underground Piping, Downstream of Fire Department Connections: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division Specification Sections. B. Product data, including pressure rating, fated capacity, and settings of selected models for the following: 1. Water meters. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Valves. 4. Fire hydrants. 5. Fire department connections. 6. Yard hydrants. 7. Identification materials and devices. . 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - I C. Shop drawings for precast concrete pits. Include frames and covers. Include drains when indicated. . D. Shop drawings for cast-in-place concrete valve and meter pits. Include frames and covers. Include drains when indicated. E. Wiring diagrams for alarm devices. F. Coordination drawings showing pipe sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations and elevations. Include details of underground structures, connections, anchors, and reaction backing. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from water system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures. G. Record drawings at Project closeout of installed water system piping and products according to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." H. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3. 1. Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified In Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." Include data for the following: 1. Water meters. 2. BackfIow preventers. 3. Valves. 4. Fire hydrants. 5. Yard hydrants. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backfIow prevention. B. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire protection systems. Includ,e materials, hose threads, installation, and testing. C. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable water plpmg and plumbing systems. Include materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. D. Comply with NFP A 24 "Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances" for materials, installations, tests, and flushing. E. Comply with NFP A 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated devices. F. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards. G. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in "National Electrical Code," Article 100. 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 2 . . 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. H. Product Options: Water system~. specialties and accessories are based on specific types, manufacturers, and models indicated. Components by other manufacturers but having equal performance characteristics may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions, operation, and other characteristi,;s do not change design concept or intended performance as judged by Architect. The burd~n of proof of equality of products is on Contractor. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions." 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fIre hydrants, for shipping as follows: 1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and weld ends. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling. B. Storage: Use the following precautions for valves, including fIre hydrants, during storage: 1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect valves from wea1her. Store valves indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew point temperature. Support valves off ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary. . C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fIre hydrants whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. D. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. E. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside. F. Protect flanges, fIttings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. G. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service fo:~ area where Project is located. B. Verify that water system piping may be installed in compliance \vith original design and referenced standards. . 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 3 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING . A Coordinate connection to water main with utility company. B. Coordinate with pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of building fire protection systems piping. C. Coordinate with pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of building water distribution systems piping. D. Coordinate with other utility work. E. Coordinate electrical requirements of actual equipment furnished with requirements specified in Division 16. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 96-099/8-96 1. Drilling Machine Corporation Stops: a. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc. b. Hays Div., Romac Industries. c. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. Bronze Corporation Stops and Valves: a. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc. b. Hays Div., Romac Industries. c. AY. McDonald Mfg. Co. d. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. Tapping Valves: a. Clow Valve Co. Div., McWane, Inc. b. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. c. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. d. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. e. U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co. Gate Valves: a. American Darling Valve Div., American Cast Iron Pipe Co. b. Clow Valve Co. Div., McWane, Inc. c. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. d. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. e. Hammond Valve Corp. f. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. g. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. h. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. 1. Nibco, Inc. J. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. k. U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co. 1. Waterous Co. . 2. 3. 4. WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 4 . . . . 96-099/8-96 Indicator Posts and Indicator Gate Valves: a. American Darli:Jg Valve Div., American Cast Iron Pipe Co. b. Clow Valve Co. Div., McWane, Inc. c. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. d. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. e. Nibco, Inc. f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. g. U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co. h. Waterous Co. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants: a. American Darling Valve Div., American Cast Iron Pipe Co. b. Clow Valve Co. Div., McWane, Inc. c. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. d. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. e. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. f. U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co. g. Waterous Co. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydranu;: a. Clow Valve Co. Div., ofMcWane, Inc. b. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. Water Meters: a. Badger Meter, Inc. b. Carlon Meter Co., Inc. c. Hays Div., Romac Industries. d. Hersey Product" Inc., Grinnell Corp. e. Kent Meters, Inc. f. Neptune Water Div., Schlumberger Industries, Inc. g. Sensus Technologies, Inc., BTR Co. h. Water Specialties Corp. Detector- Type Water Meters: a. Badger Meter, Inc. b. Hersey Product" Inc., Grinnell Corp. c. Neptune Water Div., Schlumberger Industries, Inc. d. Sensus Technologies, Inc. Drains: a. Ancon, Inc. b. Jones Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Josam Co. d. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc. e. Wade Div., Tyl,er Pipe Subsid., Tyler Corp. f. Zum Hydromechanics Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. 11. Detector Check Valves: a. Ames Co., Inc. b. Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp. c. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. d. Viking Corp. e. Watts Regulator Co. 12. BackfIm.v Preventers: a. Ames Co., Inc. b. Cla- Val Co. Div., Griswold Industries. c. Conbraco Indwitries, Inc. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 5 13. d. Febco. e. Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp. f. Watts Regulator Co. g. Wilkins Regulator Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. Sanitary- Type Yard Hydrants: a. Murdock, Inc. Post- Type Yard Hydrants: a. Ancon, Inc. b. Jones Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Josam Co. d. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc. e. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe Subsid., Tyler Corp. f. Woodford Mfg. Co. Div., WCM Industries, Inc. g. Zum Hydromechanics Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. Fire Department Connections: a. Badger-Powhatan, Figgie International Co. b. Croker Div., Fire-End and Croker Corp. c. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. d. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. e. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. g. Potter-Roemer Div., Smith Industries, Inc. h. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. i. Sierra Fire Equipment Co. Alarm Devices: a. Gamewell Co. b. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. c. Potter Electric Signal Co. d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. e. System Sensor Div., Pittway Corp. f. Victaulic Co. of America. g. Watts Regulator Co. Grooved Couplings for A WW A Ductile-Iron Piping: a. Gustin-Bacon Div., Tyler Pipe Subsid., Tyler Corp. b. Victaulic Co. of America. . . 14. 15. 16. 17. 2.02 PIPES AND TUBES A. Refer to Part 3 Article "Piping Applications" for identification of systems where pipe and tube materials specified below are used. B. Ductile-Iron Pipe: A WW A C 151, Classes 150,200, and 250. 1. Lining: A WW A C 1 04, cement mortar, seal coated. 2. Gaskets, Glands, and Bolts and Nuts: A WW A C 111. 3. Push-On-Joint-Type Pipe: A WW A C 111, rubber gaskets. 4. Mechanical-Joint- Type Pipe: A WW A C 111, rubber gaskets, ductile- or cast-iron glands, and steel bolts and nuts. C. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L (ASTM B 88M, Types A and B), seamless water tube, annealed temper. 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 6 . . D. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: A WW A C900; Classes ISO and 200; with bell end and elastomeric gasket, with plain end for cast-iron or ductile-iron fittings, or with plain end for PVC elastomeric gasket fittings. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pvc cto only." 2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, c:1astomeric seal. E. Polyvinyl Chloride (pVC) Pipe: AWWA C905, 200-psig (1380-kPa) minimum working pressure, with bell end and elastomeric gasket for PVC elastomeric gasket fittings. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pvc cto only." F. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF -pw" or "NSF -pvc cto only." G. Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2662; SIDRI5 and SIDRII.5. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF -pw" or "NSF -pvc cto only." H. Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Tubing: AWWA C902 or ASTMD 2666; SDR13.5. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pw" or "NSF-pvc cto only." I. Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing: A WW A C901, PE Compound Numbers required; with DR 9 for 1 25-psig (860-kPa) pressure rating and DR 7 for 160-psig (1100- kPa) pressure rating. . 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF -pw" or "NSF -pvc cto only." J. Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2239, PE Compound Numbers required; with SIDR 15 for I35-psig (930-kPa) pressure rating and SIDR 11.5 for 170-psig (1I70-kPa) pressure rating; at 100 deg F (38 deg C). I. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pw" or "NSF-pvc cto only." 2.03 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A. Refer to Part 3 Article "Piping Applications" for identification of systems where pipe and tube fitting materials specified bel.ow are used. B. Ductile-Iron and Cast-Iron Pipe Fittings: A WW A ClIO, ductile-iron or cast-iron, 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum pressure rating; or A WW A C 153, ductile-iron compact fittings, 350- psig (2400-kPa) pressure rating. 1. Lining: A WW A C 104, ::ement mortar. 2. Gaskets: A WW A C 111, rubber. C. Ductile-Iron Pipe, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47 malleable-iron or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron, A WW A-pipe-size, grooved-end fittings having cement lining or Food lmd Drug . 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 7 Administration (FDA)-approved interior coating, designed to accept A WW A C606 couplings, for A WW A-size grooved-end piping joints. . D. Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Flanged Fittings: A WW A ClIO, 250-psig (1 725-kPa) minimum pressure rating, with A WW A C 1 04 cement-mortar lining. E. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends conforming to AWWA ClIO or AWWA C153. Units have 2 gasketed ball-joint sections and 1 or more gasketed sleeve sections, rated for 250-psig (l725-kPa) minimum working pressure and with FDA-approved epoxy interior coating, for offset and expansion indicated. F. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections, gaskets, and restr~ned-joint ends confonning to AWWA ClIO or AWWA C153. Units rated for 250-psig (1 725-kPa) minimum working pressure, and with cement lining or FDA-approved epoxy interior coating, for up to 20 degrees (0.34 rad) deflection. G. Ductile-Iron Expansion Joints: 3-piece assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron bell-and-spigot end sections conforming to AWWA ClIO or AWWA C153. Units rated for 250-psig (l725-kPa) minimum working pressure, and with cement lining or FDA-approved epoxy interior coating, for expansion indicated. H. Polyethylene Encasement: AWWA CI05, 8-mils (2 mm) minimurn thickness, tube or sheet. 1. Copper Tube Fittings: ASME BI6.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. J. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Couplings and Fittings: AWWA C900, with ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal gaskets. . K. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic, Schedule 80, Socket-Type Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2467. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF -pw" or "NSF -pvc cto only." L. Polyvinyl Chloride (pVC) Plastic, Schedule 40, Socket-Type Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2466. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pw" or "NSF-pvc cto only." M. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Fittings: Schedule 40 socket-type, solvent cement joint, or elastomeric gasketed joint. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, "NSF-pw" or "NSF-pvc cto only." 2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, eIastomeric seal. N. Cast-Brass fittings for Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Pipe: flare, compression, or barbed, insert- type fittings; made to PB pipe and tube dimensions. O. Molded Polyethylene (PE) Plastic fittings: ASTM D 3350, PE resin, socket-type and butt- fusion type, made to PE pipe dimensions. 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 8 . . P. Cast-Brass Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe: Compression fittings or flare fittings, made to PE pipe dimensions. Q. Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2609, insert-type, with serrated end or threaded ends as required, and with corrosion-resistant bands or corrosion-resistant cnmp rIngs. 2.04 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 Article "Piping Applications" for identification of systems where joining materials specified below are used, B. Ductile-Iron Pipe and Ductile-Iron or Cast-Iron Fittings: The following materials apply: 1. Push-On Joints: A WW A C 111 rubber gaskets and lubricant. 2. Mechanical Joints: A WW A C 111 ductile-iron or gray-iron glands, high-strength steel bolts and nuts, and rubber gaskets. 3. Flanged Joints: A WW A C 115 ductile-iron or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber gaskets, and high-strength steel bolts and nuts. a. Gaskets: Rubber, flat face, 118 inch (3 mm) thick except where other thickness is indicated; and full-face or ring type except where other type is indicated. b. Flange Bolts and Nuts: AS:ME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is indicated. C. Couplings for Grooved-End Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings: A WW A C606, consisting of ASTM A 536 ductile-iron housing having enamel fInish, with synthetic-rubber gasket having central-cavity, pressure-responsivl~ design, with ASTM A 183 carbon-steel bolts and nuts to secure grooved pipe and fittings rod gasket suitable for hot water, except where otherwise indicated. . D. Brazing Filler Metals: A WS A5.~" BCuP (copper-phosphorus) Series. E. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95; tin (approximately 95 percent), silver (approximately 4.5 percent), with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. F. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn9S, Alloy Sn94, or Alloy E; tin (approximately 95 percent), silver or copper (approximately 5 percent), with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. G. Primers for PVC Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: ASTM F 656. H. Solvent Cement for PVC Piping ~:olvent-Cement Joints: ASTM D 2564. I. Pipe Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined. 1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron. 2. Followers: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510, or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets: Rubber. 4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA Cll1. . 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 9 5. 6. Finish: Enamel paint. Encasement: A WW A C 1 05, polyethylene film tube or sheet. . 1. Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, except where other type or material is indicated. 2.05 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Flexible Pipe Connectors for Non-Ferrous Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper-tube, pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends; brazed to hose. B. Flexible Pipe Connectors for Ferrous Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless- steel wire braid; with ASME B 1.20.1 threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16.5 steel pipe flanges; welded to hose. C. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and corrosion. 2.06 VALVES 1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck end types and matching piping system materials. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, designed for 2S0-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). Include insulating material isolating dissimilar metals and ends with inside threads according to ASMEBl.20.1. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for ISO-psig (1035-kPa) or 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum pressure to suit system pressures. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150-psig (l035-kPa) or 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel couplings having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). . 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A. Nonrising Stem Gate Valves 3 Inches (ON 80) and Larger: A WW A C509, resilient seated; bronze stem, cast-iron or ductile-iron body and bonnet, stem nut, 200-psig (1380-kPa) working pressure, mechanical joint ends. B. Rising Stem Gate Valves, 3 Inches (ON 80) and Larger: A WW A C509, resilient seated; cast-iron or ductile-iron body and bonnet, OS& Y, bronze stem, 200-psig (1 380-kPa) working pressure, flanged ends. 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 10 . . C. Nonrising Stem Gate Valves, 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; body and screw bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with Class 125 threaded ends, solid wedge, nonrising copper-silicon alloy stem, brass pHcking gland, polytetrafluoroethylene (pTFE)-impregnated packing, and malleable-iron handwheel. D. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron box havi:lg top section and cover with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches (124 mm) in diameter, and adjustable cast-iron ,extension oflength required for depth of bury of valve. 1. Provide a steel tee-handle operating wrench with each valve box. Wrench shall have tee handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate valve, and socket- fitting valve-operating nut. E. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FM-approved, vertical type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of bury of valve. F. Curb Stops: Bronze body, ground key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet to match service piping material. G. Service Boxes for Curb Stops: Cast-iron box with telescoping top section of length required for depth of bury of valve. Include cover having lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base of size to fit over curb stop and barrel approximately 3 inches (75 mm) in diameter. . 1. Provide steel tee-handle shutoff rod with each service box. Shutoff rod shall have tee handle with 1 pointed end, stem of length to operate curb stop, and slotted end fitting curb stop head. H. Tapping Sleeve and Tapping Valve: Complete assembly, including tapping sleeve, tapping valve, and bolts and nuts. Use sleeve and valve compatible with tapping machine. I. Tapping Sleeve: Cast-iron or ductile-iron 2-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch connectlon. Sleeve may have mechanical joint ends with rubber gaskets or sealing rings in sleeve body. Use sleeve that mates with size and type pipe material being tapped. Outlet flange shall be size required for branch connection. 2.07 WATER METERS A. General: Provide water meter with registration in gallons (litres). B. Detector-Type Water Meter: AWWA C703, UL-Iisted, FM-approved, mam line, proportional type, lSO-psig (1 03S-kPa) working pressure, with meter on bypass. 1. Bypass Meter: A WW A C702, compound type, bronze case; size not less than one- half the nominal size of the main line meter. C. Detector-Type Water Meter: A WW A C703, UL-listed, FM-approved, main line turbine type, 175-psig (1200-kPa) working pressure, with strainer, and meter on bypass. 1. Bypass Meter: A WW A C701, turbine type, bronze case; not less than 2-inch (50- mm) size. . 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - II D. Water Meter: A WW A C704, propeller type. E. Water Meter: AWWA C7l0, displacement type, plastic main case. . F. Remote Registration System: Utility company standard. Include meter modified with self- generating transmitter, low-voltage connecting wiring, totalizing device, and remote wall register. G. Meter Box: Cast-iron body, cast-iron cover having lettering "WATER METER," and base section of length to fit over service piping. Base section is open at bottom, slotted, and may be cast iron, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or piece of clay or other pipe. 2.08 PITS A. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Reinforcement: Steel conforming to the following: 1. Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615, Grade 400), deformed. C. Ladder: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), steel or polyethylene-encased steel steps. . D. Manhole: ASTM A 48, Class 35, gray-iron, 24-inch (6l0-mrn) minimum diameter traffic frame and cover, of size and weight indicated. E. Manhole: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron, 24-inch (6l0-mm) mmunum diameter traffic frame and cover, of size and weight indicated. F. Drain: ASME AI12.21.1M, cast-iron area drain, of size indicated. Include body anchor flange, light-duty cast-iron grate, bottom outlet, and integral or field-installed bronze ball or clapper-type backwater valve. 2.09 FIRE HYDRANTS A. General: Cast-iron body, compression-type valve, opening against pressure and closing with pressure, 6-inch (ON 150) mechanical joint inlet, l50-psig (l035-kPa) working pressure. B. Outlet Threads: NFP A 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department. Include cast-iron caps with steel chains. C. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) point to flat. D. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to the left, or counterclocbvise. WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 12 . 96-099/8-96 . E. Finish: Red exterior alkyd gloss enamel paint. F. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants: UL 246, FM-approved, two 2-1/2-inch (DN 65) and one 4-1/2- inch (DN 115) outlets, 5-1/4-inch (133 mm) main valve, drain valve, and 6-inch (DN 150) mechanical joint inlet. G. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants: A WW A C502, two 2-1/2-inch (DN 65) and one 4-1/2-inch (DN 115) outlets, 5-1/4-inch (133 mm) main valve, drain valve, and 6-inch (DN 150) mechanical joint inlet. H. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: UL 246, FM-approved, two 2-1/2-inch (DN 65) and one 4-1/2- inch (DN 115) outlets, 6-inch (DN 150) threaded or flanged inlet, and base section with 6- inch (DN 150) mechanical joint inlet. I. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: A WWA C503, hyo 2-1/2-inch (DN 65) and one 4-1/2-inch (DN 115) outlets, 6-inch (DN 150) threaded or flanged inlet, and base section with 6-inch (DN 150) mechanical joint inlet. 2.10 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Exposed, Sidewalk Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-brass body, with thread inlets according to NFP A 1963 and matching local fIre department hose threads, and threaded NPS bottom outlet. Include lugged cap, gasket, and chain; lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose connection inlet; 18-inch (460-mm)-high brass sleeve; and round sidewalk escutcheon plate. . 1. Connections: Two 2-1 12-inch (DN 65) inlets and 6-inch (DN 150) outlet. 2. Inlet Aligrunent: In line, horizontal. 3. Finish Including Sleeve: Rough chrome plated. 4. Escutcheon Plate Marking: "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE." 2.11 DETECTOR CHECK VAL YES A. Detector Check Valves: UL 213, galvanized cast-iron body, bolted cover with air-bleed device for access to internal parts, and flanged ends; designed for 175 psig (1200-kPa) working pressure. Include I-piece bronze disc with bronze bushings, pivot, and replaceable seat. Include threaded bypass taps in the inlet and outlet for bypass meter connection. Set valve to allow minimal water flow through bypass meter when major water flow is required. I. Water Meter: A WW A C700, disc type, of size not less than one-fourth the size of detector check valve. Include meter, bypass piping, gate valves, check valve, and connections to detector check valve. 2.12 BACKFLOW PREYENTERS A. General: ASSE Standard backfIow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate and maximum pressure loss indicated. 1. Working Pressure: 150 pSlg (1035 kPa) minimum except where indicated otherwise. . 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 13 4. 5. 6. 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with flanged ends. a. Interior Lining: FDA-approved epoxy coating for backflow preventers having cast-iron or steel body. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate when used in chrome-plated piping system. Strainer on inlet where strainer is indicated. . 2. 3. B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventer: ASSE 1013, with OS&Y gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve having ASME Al12.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous-pressure application. 1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximurn through middle third of flow range. C. Reduced-Pressure Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1047, PM-approved or UL-listed, with OS&Y gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include pressure-differential relief valve having ASME A 112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves, test cocks, and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and reduced-pressure backflow preventer, for continuous-pressure application. 1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum through middle third of flow range. 2.13 YARD HYDRANTS A. Yard Hydrants, Sanitary Type: Nonfreeze, post type, with nondraining chamber for storing water trapped downstream of inlet valve. Hydrants have I-inch (DN 25) inlet, integral or field-installed vacuum breaker with outlet conforming to ASME B 1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose, brass or bronze casing, and other parts in contact with water, and are handle or key operated. Body of hydrant is of length required for installation of storage chamber below frost line. Furnish 2 keys for each key-operated hydrant. . 2.14 ANCHORAGES A. Clamps, Straps, and Washers: ASTM A 506, steel. B. Rods: ASTM A 575, steel. C. Rod Couplings: ASTM A 197, malleable iron. D. Bolts: ASTM A 307, steel. E. Cast-Iron Washers: ASTM A 126, gray iron. F. Concrete Reaction Backing: Portland cement concrete mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 14 . . 2.15 ALARM DEVICES A. General: UL 753, FM-approved, of types and sizes to mate and match piping and equipment. B. Water Flow Indicators: Vane-type waterfIow detector, rated to 250 psi (1725 kPa); designed for horizontal or vertical installation; having 2 single pole, double throw (SPDT) circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere 125 volts a.c. and 0.25 ampere 24 volts d.c.; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends a signal when cover is removed. C. Supervisory Switches: SPDT, designed to signal valve in other than full open position. D. Pressure Switches: SPDT, designed to signal increase in pressure. 2.16 IDENTIFICATION A. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." B. Metallic-Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." PART 3 - EXECUTION . 3.01 EARTHWORK A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING A. Extend water system piping and connect to water supply source and building water distribution and fire protection systems at outside face of the building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. 1. Terminate water system piping at building wall until building water systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building water systems when those systems are installed. B. Water distribution systems and fire protection systems are specified in Division 15 Sections. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." C. Install restrained joints for buried piping within 60 inches (1500 mm) of building. Use restrained-joint pipe and fittings, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports at vertical and horizontal offsets. . 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 15 A. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fittings products listed below. Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications. Piping in pits and inside building may be joined with flanges or couplings, instead of joints indicated, for grooved-end A WW A-size piping. . 3.03 PIPING APPLICATIONS B. Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods according to following applications. 1. 2 Inches (ON 50) and Smaller: Copper tube, Type L (Type B), copper tube fittings, and soldered joints. 2. 2-1/2 Inches (65 DN) to 3-1/2 Inches (ON 90): Copper tube, Type L (Type B), copper tube fittings, and soldered joints. 3. 2-1/2 Inches (ON 65) to 3-1/2 Inches (ON 90): Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe, Schedule 40 PVC fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. 4 Inches (ON 100) to 8 Inches (ON 200): Class 200, ductile-iron pipe, ductile-iron or gray-iron fittings, and push-on or mechanical joints. 5. 10 Inches (ON 250) and Larger: Class 250, ductile-iron pipe, ductile-iron or gray- iron fittings, rubber gaskets, and push-on or mechanical joints. 3.04 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: I. Pit and Aboveground Installation, Valves 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: UL/FM, OS& Y gate valves. . 3.05 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-End Pipe and Fitting Joints: Cut-groove pipes. Assemble joints with grooved couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. B. Copper Tube and Fittings, Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to A WS "Brazing Manual," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." C. Copper Tube and Fittings, Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to A WS "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube." D. AWWA Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping Gasketed Joints: Use AWWA C900 joining materials. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 277 4 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions. E. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM D 2672 and ASTM D 2855. 1. Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in ASTM F 402 for safe handling when joining plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cements. 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 16 . . F. Polybutylene (PB) Piping Insert-Fitting Joints: Construct joints with insert fittings according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions. G. Polybutylene (PB) Piping and Brass-Fitting Joints: Construct joints with brass or bronze fittings according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions. H. Polyethylene (PE) Pipe Heat-Fusion Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM D 3309 procedure for polybutylene piping heat-fusion joints and piping manufacturer's written instructions. I. Polyethylene (PE) Piping Insert-Fitting Joints: Construct joints with insert fittings according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Construct joints using adapters that are compatible with both piping materials, outside diameters, and system working pressure. Refer to "Piping Systems - Common Requirements" Article for joining piping of dissimilar metals. 3.06 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS B. . C. D. E. F. G. A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. Install piping at indicated slope. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. Install piping free of sags and bends. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below. 1. Install unions, in piping 2 inches (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at fmal connection to each piece of equipment having 2-inch (DN 50) or smaller threaded pipe connection. 2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2 inches (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at fmal connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. 3. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals. 3.07 PIPING INSTALLATION . 96-099/8-96 A. Water Main Connection: Arrange for tap in water main, of size and in location indicated, from water utility. WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 17 A. Anchorages: Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: . 3.08 ANCHORAGE INST ALLA TION 1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron Piping: According to A WW A C600. 2. Gasketed-Joint, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping: According to A WW A M23. 3. Fire Service Piping: According to NFPA 24. B. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices. 3.09 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for 3-inch (80-mm) and larger buried installation. Use threaded- and flanged-end valves for installation in pits and inside building. Use nonrising stem UL/FM gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use bronze corporation stops and valves, with ends compatible with piping, for 2-inch (50-mm) and smaller installation. B. AWWA-Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried valves with stem pointing up and with cast-iron valve box. C. UL/FM-Type Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. 1. Install buried valves and valves in pits with stem pointing up and with vertical cast- iron indicator post. . D. Bronze Corporation Stops and Curb Stops: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install buried curb stops with head pointed up and with cast-iron curb box. 3.10 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION A. AWWA-Type Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17. Install with gate valve and provision for drainage as indicated. B. UL/FM- Type Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFP A 24. Install with gate valve and provision for drainage as indicated. 3.11 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS A. Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility company's instructions and requirements. 3.12 PIT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. Construct pits of poured-in-place concrete or provide precast concrete pits of dimensions indicated, with manhole frame and cover, ladder, and drain. Include sleeves with waterproof mechanical sleeve seals for pipe entry and exit. 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 18 . . B. Connect area drain outlet to storm drain. Storm drainage is specified in Division 2 Section "Storm Sewerage." 3.13 DETECTOR CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install detector check valves in pits for proper direction of flow. Install bypass with water meter, gate valves on each side of meter and check valve downstream from meter. B. Support detector check valves, meters, shutoff valves, and piping on 3000-psi (20.7 -MPa) minimum, portland-cement-mix concrete piers as indicated. 3.14 BACKFLOW PRE VENTER INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to plumbing and health department authorities having jurisdiction. B. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer. C. Do not install reduced-pressure-principle-type in pit. D. Support backflow preventers, valves, and piping on 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) ITummum, portland-cement-mix concrete piers as indicated. 3.15 YARD HYDRANT INSTALLATION A. Install sanitary-type yard hydrants in pavement or with concrete anchor as indicated. . 3.16 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install fIre department connections of types and features indicated in locations indicated. B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fIre department connection to mains and where indicated. 3.17 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with NFP A 26 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Buried valves with curb boxes do not require supervision. B. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position. 1. Valves: Grind away a portion of exposed valve stem. Bolt switch, with plunger in stem depression, to OS& Y gate-valve yoke. 2. Indicator Posts: Drill and thread hole in upper barrel section at target plate. Install switch, with toggle against target plate, on barrel of indicator post. C. Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valve as follows: I. Valves: Install chains and padlocks on open OS& Y gate valves. 2. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post. . 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 19 D. Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel offrre hydrants. Install switches. E. WaterfIow Indicators: Install in water service piping in pit. Select indicator having saddle and vane matching pipe size. Drill hole in pipe, insert vane, and bolt saddle to pipe. . F. Connect alarm devices to building frre alarm system. Refer to Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for wiring and devices not specified in this Section. 3.18 IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back-filling of trench for underground water service piping. Locate 6 inches (150 mm) to 8 inches (200 mm) below finished grade, directly over piping. 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours prior to testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours. 1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test untilleakage is within above limits. . 3.20 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by that authority, use procedure described in A WW A C651 or as described below: a. Comply with NFP A 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. b. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve oft) system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours. c. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. d. Following allowed standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming from system. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authority having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination made by authority shows evidence of contamination. 96-099/8-96 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 20 . . B. . . 96-099/8-96 Prepare reports for purging and disinfecting activities. END OF SECTION 02665 WATER SYSTEMS 02665 - 2 1 . SECTION 02700 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sewerage and drainage systems outside the building. Systems include the following: 1. Sanitary sewerage. 2. Storm drainage. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. I. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for foundation drain connecting to storm drainage system. 2. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Systems" for building drains. . 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Drainage Piping: System of sewer pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of storm drainage. B. Sewerage Piping: System of sewer pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of sanitary sewage. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 8. Product data for the following: 1. Polymer-concrete, channel drainage systems. 2. Stainless-steel, trench drainage systems. 3. Backwater valves, c1eanouts, and drains. 4. Storm-water disposal systems. . 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - I C. Shop drawings for precast concrete manholes and other structures. Include frames, covers, and grates. . D. Reports and calculations for design mixes for each class of cast-in-place concrete. E. Coordination drawings showing manholes and other structures, pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Include details of underground structures and connections. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures. 1. Sanitary sewerage. 2. Storm drainage. F. Inspection and test reports specified in the "Field Quality Control" Article. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Environmental Agency Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage and storm drainage systems. B. Utility Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage and storm drainage systems. Include standards of water and other utilities where appropriate. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of system components and are based on specific manufacturer types indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions." . 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic structures in direct sunlight. B. Do not store plastic pipe or fittings in direct sunlight. C. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. D. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's rigging instructions. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide acceptable temporary utility services. 1. Notify Engineer not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 2 . . 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving Architect's written permission. 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate sanitary sewerage system connections to Richmond County's sanitary sewer. B. Coordinate sanitary sewerage system connections to existing on-site sanitary sewer. C. Coordinate with interior building drainage systems. D. Coordinate with other utility work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.0 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.02 PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, service and extra-heavy classes, gray cast iron, for gasketed joints. . I. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, compression type, thickness to match class of pIpe. B. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 301 or ASTM A 888, gray cast iron, for coupling joints. 1. Couplings: CISPI 310, corrugated, stainless-steel shield and clamp assembly, with ASTM C 564 rubber sealing sleeve. 2. Heavy-Duty Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel housing and stainless-steel clamp assembly, with ASTM C 564 rubber sealing gasket. Include housings 3 inches (76 mm) wide in sizes 1-1/2 to 4 inches (40 to 100 mm) and 4 inches (102 mm) wide in sizes 5 to 10 inches (125 to 250 mm). 3. Heavy-Duty Couplings: ASTM A 48, cast-iron housing and stainless-steel bolt assembly, with ASTM C 564 rubber sealing gasket. C. Ductile-Iron Pipe: A WW A C 151, Class 150 minimum, for push-on joints. I. Standard-Pattern, Ductile-Iron and Cast-Iron Fittings: A WW A C 11 0, for push-on joints. 2. Compact-Pattern, Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WW A C 153, for push-on joints. 3. Pipe and Fitting Interior Coating: A WW A C 1 04, asphaltic-material seal coat, minimum I-mil (0.025-mm) thickness. 4. Gaskets: A WW A C 111, rubber. . 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 3 D. Stainless-Steel Drainage Pipe and Fittings: Fabricated from ASTM A 240, Type 304, stainless steel. Include socket and spigot ends, for gasket joints. . 1. Gaskets for Sizes 4 to 6 Inches (100 to 150 mm): Lip seals, of shape molded to fit socket groove. Include plastic back-up ring. Use the following materials: a. Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM) rubber for general applications, except where other materials are indicated. b. Nitrile rubber compound for fluids containing gasoline or oil. 2. Couplings for Sizes 8 to 12 Inches (200 to 300 mm): Stainless steel, mechanical type, with seal. Use the following seal materials: a. Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM) rubber for general applications, except where other materials are indicated. b. Nitrile rubber compound for fluids containing gasoline or oil. E. Corrugated-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 760 (ASTM A 760M), Type I, made from ASTM A 444 (ASTM A 444M), zinc-coated steel sheet for banded joints. 1. Fittings: Fabricated to types indicated and according to same standards as pipe. 2. Connecting Bands: Standard couplings made for corrugated-steel pipe to form soiltight joints. F. Corrugated-Aluminum Pipe: ASTM B 745 (ASTM B 745M), Type I, made from ASTM B 744 (ASTM B 744M), aluminum-alloy sheet for banded joints. 1. Fittings: Fabricated to types indicated and according to same standards as pipe. 2. Connecting Bands: Standard couplings made for corrugated-aluminum pipe to form soiltight joints. G. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2751, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints. . 1. SDR 35 for 4 and 6 inches (100 and 150 mm). 2. SDR 42 for 8 to 12 inches (200 to 300 mm). 3. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 4. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. H. Corrugated, Polyethylene (PE) Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252 Interim, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252 Interim, corrugated, matching tube and fittings to form soiltight joints. 2. Silttight Couplings: Polyethylene (PE) sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material, that mates with tube and fittings to form silttight joints. I. Corrugated, Polyethylene (PE) Drainage Tubing: AASHTO M 252 Interim, Type S, with smooth waterway for gasketed joints. \. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with socket ends, for gasketed joints. 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 4 . . 2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals, that mates with tube and fittings to form watertight joints. J. Corrugated, Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294 Interim, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294 Interim, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings to form soiItight joints. 2. Silttight Couplings: Polyethylene (PE) sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material, that mates with pipe and fittings to form silttight joints. K. Corrugated, Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe: AASHTO M 294 Interim, Type S, with smooth waterway for gasketed joints. 1. Fittings 12 and 15 Inches (300 and 375 mm): ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with socket ends, for gasketed joints. 2. Fittings 18 to 24 Inches (450 to 600 mm): ASTM F 1336, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with socket ends, for gasketed joints. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals, that mates with pipe and fittings to form watertight joints. L. Corrugated, Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294 Interim, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. . 1. Couplings: Polyethylene (PE) sleeve with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals, that mates with pipe and fittings to form watertight joints. M. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Cellular-Core Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 891, Sewer and Drain Series, PS 50 minimum stiffness, for solvent-cemented joints. 1. Fittings: ASTM D 2729 or ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe fittings. 2. Primer: ASTM F 656. 3. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. N. Polyvinyl Chloride (pVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for solvent- cemented or gasketed joints. I. Primer: ASTM F 656. 2. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. O. Polyvinyl Chloride (pVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 679, T-I wall thickness, bell and spigot for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. P. Polyvinyl Chloride (pVC), Profile, Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 794, open and closed profile, bell and spigot for gasketed joints. . 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 5 1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal to form watertight joints. . Q. Polyvinyl Chloride (pVC), Ribbed Drain Pipe: AASHTO M 304M, bell and spigot, with smooth waterway for bell-gasketed joints. 1. Fittings: AASHTO M 304M or ASTM F 794 for bell-gasketed joints. 2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal to form soiltight joints. R. Nonreinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 14 (ASTM C 14M), Class 2, for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. S. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M), Class III, Wall B, for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 2.03 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS A. Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined, for nonpressure joints. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Sleeves for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. Sleeves for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564, rubber. Sleeves for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. Sleeves for Dissimilar Pipes: Compatible with pipe materials being joined. Bands: Stainless steel, at least one at each pipe insert. . B. Gasket-Type Pipe Couplings: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket, made to match outside diameter of smaller pipe and inside diameter or hub of adjoining larger pipe, for nonpressure joints. 1. Gaskets for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 2. Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564, rubber. 3. Gaskets for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 4. Gaskets for Dissimilar Pipes: Compatible with pipe materials being joined. C. Internal, Expansion-Type Pipe Couplings: Stainless-steel expansion band with ethylene- propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM), rubber-compound sealing sleeve, made to match inside diameter of pipes for nonpressure joints. Use nitrile rubber-compound sealing sleeve for fluids containing oil or gasoline. D. Pressure-Type Pipe Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, matching outside diameters of pipes to be joined, for pressure joints. Include polyethylene (PE) film encasement. 1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron with enamel paint finish. 2. Followers: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 (ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010), or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: A WW A C 111. 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 6 . . E. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with a combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends conforming to AWWA ClIO or AWWA C153. Include 2 gasketed ball-joint sections and I or more gasketed sleeve sections, rated for 250-psig (l725-kPa) minimum working pressure and FDA-approved epoxy interior coating for offset and expansion indicated. Include polyethylene (PE) film encasement. F. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends conforming to A WW A C 11 0 or A WW A C 153. Include rating for 250-psig (l725-kPa) minimum working pressure, and cement lining or FDA-approved epoxy interior coating for up to 20 degrees (0.35 rad) deflection. Include polyethylene (PE) film encasement. G. Ductile-Iron Expansion Joints: 3-piece assembly of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections conforming to A WW A C 11 0 or A WW A Ci53. Include rating for 250-psig (I 725-kPa) minimum working pressure, and cement lining or FDA-approved epoxy interior coating for expansion indicated. Include polyethylene (PE) film encasement. 2.04 PIPE ENCASEMENT A. Include AWWA CI05, polyethylene film tube and sheet, 8-mil (0.2-mm) thickness for the following: . 1. 2. Ductile-iron piping. Ductile-iron, special pipe fittings. 2.05 MANHOLES A. Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for rubber gasket joints. 1. Base Section: 6-inch (l50-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having a separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 2. Riser Sections: 4-inch (lOO-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1220-mm) diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 3. Top Section: Eccentric cone type, unless concentric cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 4. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 5. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (152- to 229-mm) total thickness, that match a 24-inch- (61 O-mm-) diameter frame and cover. 6. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into base, riser, and top section sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. 7. Steps: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M) individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. . 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 7 8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. . B. Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 858, precast, reinforced concrete, designed according to ASTM C 857 for structural loading. Include depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for rubber gasket joints. I. Gaskets: Rubber. 2. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (152- to 229-mm) total thickness, that match a 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and cover. 3. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into base, riser, and top section sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. 4. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. C. Brick Manholes: Brick and mortar, of depth indicated. 1. Base, Channel, and Bench: Concrete. a. Ballast: Increase thickness of or add concrete to base, as required to prevent floatation. Wall: ASTM C 32, Grade MS, manhole brick; 8-inch (200-mm) minimum thickness and an inside diameter of 48 inches (1220 mm) with tapered top for a 24-inch (610-mm) frame and cover. Include 12-inch (305-mm) minimum wall thickness for section of manhole deeper than 96 inches (2400 mm). a. Option: ASTM C 139, concrete masonry units may be used instead of brick. Mortar and Parging: ASTM C 270, Type S, using ASTM C 150, Type II, portland cement, 1/2-inch (I3-mm) minimum thickness on exterior surface. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. . 2. .., ". 4. D. Cast-in-Place Concrete Manholes: Construct of reinforced-concrete bottom, walls, and top, designed according to ASTM C 857 for loading. Include depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. 1. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. E. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, heavy-duty ductile iron. Include 24-inch (610-mm) inside diameter by 7- to 9-inch (178- to 229-mm) riser with 4- 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 8 . . 2.06 CATCH BASINS inch (lOO-mm) minimum width flange, and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering, equivalent to the following, cast into cover: 1. Sanitary Sewerage Piping Systems: SANlT AR Y SEWER. 2. Storm Drainage Piping Systems: STORM SEWER. 3. Piping Systems Containing Sanitary Sewage: SANITARY SEWER. A. Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for rubber gasket joints. . 1. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having a separate base slab or base section with integral floor. Riser Sections: 4-inch (lOO-mm) minimum thickness; 48-inch (1220-mm) diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated. Top Section: Eccentric cone type, unless concentric cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (152- to 229-mm) total thickness, that match a 24-inch- (61 O-mm-) diameter frame and grate. Steps: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M) individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for catch basins less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 858, precast, reinforced concrete, designed according to ASTM C 857 for structural loading. Include depth, shape, and dirnensions indicated, with provision for rubber gasket joints. 1. Gaskets: Rubber. 2. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (152- to 229-mm) total thickness, that match a 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and grate. 3. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into base, riser, and top section sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for catch basins less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. 4. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. C. Brick Catch Basins: Brick and mortar, of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated. . 96-099/8-96 I. Base, Channel, and Bench: Concrete. 2. Wall: ASTM C 32, Grade MS, manhole brick; 8-inch (200-mm) minimum thickness with tapered top for a 24-inch (61 O-mm) frame and cover. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 9 3. 4. a. Option: ASTM C 139, concrete masonry units may be used instead of brick. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type S, using ASTM C 150, Type II, portland cement. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for catch basins less than 60 inches (I500 mm) deep. . D. Cast-in-Place Concrete Catch Basins: Construct of reinforced-concrete, designed according to ASTM C 857 for structural loading. Include depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. 1. Bottom, Walls, and Top: Reinforced concrete. 2. Channels and Benches: Concrete. 3. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for catch basins less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. E. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, heavy-duty ductile iron, 24-inch (610- mm) inside diameter by 7- to 9-inch (178- to 229-mm) riser with 4-inch (lOO-mm) minimum width flange, and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter flat grate having small square or short-slotted drainage openings. 2.07 STORM-WATER INLETS . A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. B. Gutter Inlets: Made with horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. C. Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. D. Frames and Grates: Heavy-duty frames and grates according to utility standards. E. Curb Inlets: Vertical, curb-opening type, of materials and dimensions indicated. F. Gutter Inlets: Horizontal, gutter-opening type, of materials and dimensions indicated. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. G. Combination Inlets: Vertical, curb-opening and horizontal, gutter-opening type, of materials and dimensions indicated. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. H. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, heavy-duty ductile iron, frames and flat grates, of dimensions indicated. Include small square or short-slotted drainage openings in grates. 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 10 . . 2.08 CONCRETE A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Structures: Portland-cement design mix, 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cement ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M, Grade 400), deformed steel. C. Structure Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland-cement design mix, 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cement ratio. 1. Include channels and benches in sanitary sewerage and storm drainage manholes. a. Manhole Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of the vertical sides to 3/4 of the pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. 1) Invert Slope: 1.2 inches (30 mm) through manhole. b. Manhole Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. I) Slope: 1 inch per foot (1: 12). 2) Slope: 0.5 inch per foot (1:24). Include channels and benches in storm drainage catch basins. a. Catch Basin Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of the vertical sides to 3/4 of the pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. 1) Invert Slope: 1.2 inches (30 mm) through catch basin. b. Catch Basin Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. 1) Slope: I inch per foot (1:12). . 2. 2.09 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. General: Include factory- or field-applied protective coatings to structures and appurtenances according to the following: B. Coating: 1- or 2-coat, coal-tar epoxy, IS-mil (0.381-mm) minimum thickness, except where otherwise indicated. I. Manholes: On exterior surface. 2. Brick Manholes: Over parging on exterior surface. 3. Manhole Frames and Covers: On surfaces that will be exposed to sewer gases. 4. Catch Basins: On exterior surface. 5. Storm-Water Inlets: On exterior surface. . 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 11 2.1 0 POLYMER-CONCRETE CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. General: Modular system of precast, polymer-concrete channel sections, grates, and appurtenances, designed so that grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling. Include number of units required to form total lengths indicated. . B. Sloped-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Systems: Include the following components: 1. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 4-inch (lOO-mm) inside width and deep, rounded bottom, with built-in invert slope of 0.6 percent (1: 167) and outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. Include extension sections necessary for required depth. a. Frame: Include cast-iron or steel frame for grate. 2. Grates with manufacturer's designation "Medium Duty," with slots or perforations that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Galvanized steel. 3. Grates with manufacturer's designation "Heavy Duty," with slots that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Galvanized steel. 4. Covers: Solid cast iron, where indicated. 5. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. c. Narrow-Width, Level-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Systems: components: Include the following 3. 4. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 5-inch (l27-mm) inside width and 9-3/4-inch (248-mm) deep, rounded bottom with level invert, and 4-inch (lOO-mm) outlets in number and locations indicated. Grates with slots or perforations that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Galvanized steel. Covers: Solid cast iron, where indicated. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. . 1. 2. D. Wide-Width, Level-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Systems: Include the following components: 1. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 8-inch (203-mm) inside width and 13-3/4-inch (350-mm) deep, rounded bottom with level invert, and outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. 2. Grates with slots or other openings that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Cast iron. 3. Covers: Solid cast iron, where indicated. 4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. E. Appurtenances: Precast, polymer-concrete units. 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 12 . . 1. Large Catch Basins: 24-by-12-inch (610-by-305-mm) polymer-concrete body, with outlets of number and sizes indicated. Include cast-iron slotted grate. a. Frame: Include cast-iron or steel frame for grate. Small Catch Basins: 19 to 24 inches by approximately 6 inches (483 to 610 mm by approximately 150 mm) polymer-concrete body, with outlets of number and sizes indicated. Include cast-iron slotted grate. a. Frame: Include cast-iron or steel frame for grate. Oil Interceptors: Polymer-concrete body with interior baffle and 4 steel support channels and two l/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) thick steel-plate covers. a. Capacity: 200 gallons (757 L). b. Inlet and Outlet Size: 6 inches (150 mm). Sediment Interceptors: 27-inch- (686-mm-) square polymer-concrete body, with outlets of number and sizes indicated. Include 24-inch- (61 O-mm-) square cast- iron frame and slotted grate. 2. 3. 4. F. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, except where otherwise indicated. G. Channel-Section, Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by system manufacturer. 2.11 BACKWATER VALVES A. Horizontal Backwater Valve Type: ASME AI12.14.1, cast-iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub-and-spigot ends. . B. Combination Horizontal Backwater Valve and Manual Gate Valve Type: ASME AI12.14.1, cast-iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub- and-spigot ends. C. Terminal Backwater Valve Type: ASME AI12.14.1, cast-iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub inlet. 2.12 CLEANOUTS A. Description: ASME A 112.36.2M, round, cast-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, cast-iron cover. Include cast-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. Use units with top- loading classifications according to the following applications: I. Light Duty: In earth or grass, foot-traffic areas. 2. Medium Duty: In paved, foot-traffic areas. 3. Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas. 4. Extra Heavy Duty: In roads. B. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings. . 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 13 2.13 DRAINS A. Area Drains: ASME Al 12.21.1M, round, cast-iron body with anchor flange and round, secured, cast-iron grate. Include bottom outlet with inside calk or spigot connection, of sizes indicated. Use units with top-loading classifications according to the following applications: . 1. Medium Duty: In paved, foot-traffic areas. 2. Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas. 2.14 OUTFALLS A. Construct headwall, apron, and tapered sides of cast-in-place, reinforced concrete. B. Riprap: Broken stone, irregular size and shape, weighing 15 to 50 pounds (7 to 23 kg) each. C. Energy Dissipators: Construction as indicated, from materials indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures. . 1. Use warning tapes or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.03 SEWERAGE PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Include watertight joints. B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications. C. Pipe Size 4 to 6 Inches (100 to 150 mm): Hub-and-spigot, extra-heavy class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; compression-type gaskets; and gasketed joints. D. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): Ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, cast- iron or ductile-iron fittings or compact-pattern, ductile-iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 14 . . E. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (IOO and 150 mm): Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), cellular-core plastic pipe; ASTM D 3034, PVC, solvent-cement, sewer pipe fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. F. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints. G. Pipe Sizes 8 and 10 Inches (200 and 250 mm): Hub-and-spigot, extra-heavy class, cast- iron soil pipe and fittings; compression-type gaskets; and gasketed joints. H. Pipe Sizes 8 and 10 Inches (200 and 250 mm): Ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, cast- iron or ductile-iron fittings or compact-pattern, ductile-iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. I. Pipe Sizes 8 and 10 Inches (200 and 250 mm): ASTM A 240, Type 304, stainless-steel drainage pipe and fittings; mechanical couplings; and coupled joints. Use ethylene- propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM), rubber-compound seal, except where otherwise indicated. Use nitrile-rubber-compound seal for wastes containing gasoline or oil. 1. Pipe Sizes 8 and 10 Inches (200 and 250 mm): ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints. K. Pipe Sizes 12 to 16 Inches (300 to 400 mm): Ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, cast-iron or ductile-iron fittings or compact-pattern, ductile-iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. . L. Pipe Sizes 12 and 15 Inches (300 and 375 mm): AASHTO M 294 Interim, corrugated, polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe; ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), socket-end fittings; gaskets; and watertight, gasketed joints. M. Pipe Sizes 12 and 15 Inches (300 and 375 mm): AASHTO M 294 Interim, corrugated, polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe and fittings; couplings with seals; and watertight, coupled joints. N. Pipe Sizes 12 and 15 Inches (300 and 375 mm): ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVc) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints. O. Pipe Sizes 12 and 15 Inches (300 and 375 mm): Reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings; rubber gaskets; and gasketed joints. P. Pipe Sizes 18 to 24 Inches (450 to 600 mm): AASHTO M 294 Interim, corrugated, polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe; ASTM F 1336 or ASTM D 3034 pattern, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), socket-end fittings; gaskets; and watertight, gasketed joints. Q. Pipe Sizes 18 to 24 Inches (450 to 600 mm): AASHTO M 294 Interim, corrugated, polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe and fittings; couplings with seals; and watertight, coupled joints. . 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 15 R. Pipe Sizes 18 to 24 Inches (450 to 600 mm): ASTM F 679, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. . . S. Pipe Sizes 18 to 24 Inches (450 to 600 mm): ASTM F 794, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) profile sewer pipe; ASTM F 794, PVC profile fittings; elastomeric seals; and gasketed joints. T. Pipe Sizes 18 to 24 Inches (450 to 600 mm): Reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings; rubber gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3.04 DRAINAGE PIPING APPLICA nONS A. General: Include watertight, silttight, or soiltight joints, except where watertight or silttight joints are indicated. B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications. C. Pipe Sizes 4 to 6 Inches (100 to 150 mm): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; couplings; and coupled joints. D. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): Ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, cast- iron or ductile-iron fittings or compact-pattern, ductile-iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. E. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): Corrugated-steel pipe; corrugated-steel fittings; connecting bands; and soiltight, coupled joints. F. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), cellular-core plastic pipe; ASTM D 3034, PVC, solvent-cemented, sewer pipe fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. . G. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm): ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints. H. Pipe Sizes 4 to 6 Inches (100 to 150 mm): ASTM F 794, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) profile, gravity sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. I. Pipe Sizes 8 to 16 Inches (200 to 400 mm): Ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, cast-iron or ductile-iron fittings or compact-pattern, ductile-iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 1. Pipe Sizes 8 to 15 Inches (200 to 375 mm): Corrugated-steel pipe; corrugated-steel fittings; connecting bands; and soiltight, coupled joints. K. Pipe Sizes 8 to 15 Inches (200 to 375 mm): ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints. L. Pipe Sizes 18 to 36 Inches (450 to 900 mm): Corrugated-steel pipe; corrugated-steel fittings; connecting bands; and soiltight, coupled joints. 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 16 . . M. Pipe Sizes 18 to 36 Inches (450 to 900 mm): Corrugated-aluminum pipe; corrugated- aluminum fittings; connecting bands; and soiltight, coupled joints. N. Pipe Sizes 18 to 36 Inches (450 to 900 mm): Reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings; rubber gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3.05 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLING AND FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Special Pipe Couplings: Use where indicated and where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is specified. Do not use instead of specified joining methods. 1. Use the following pipe couplings for nonpressure applications: a. Strait-pattern, sleeve type to join piping, of same size, with small difference in outside diameters. b. Increaser/reducer-pattern, .sleeve type to join piping of different sizes. c. Gasket type to join piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's outside diameter and larger piping's inside diameter permits installation. d. Internal-expansion type to join piping with same inside diameter. 2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force-main, pressure application joints. Include polyethylene (PE) encasement. B. Special Pipe Fittings: Use where indicated. Include polyethylene (PE) encasement. 3.06 INSTALLATION, GENERAL . A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general location and arrangement of underground sewerage and drainage systems piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. B. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. C. Use manholes for changes in direction, except where fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, except where direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. E. Install gravity-flow-systems plptng at constant slope between points and elevations indicated. Install straight piping runs at constant slope, not less than that specified, where slope is not indicated. F. Extend sewerage piping and connect to building's sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated. . 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 17 G. Install sewerage piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 0.5 percent (1 :200) and 24-inch (667-mm) minimum cover, except where otherwise indicated. . H. Extend drainage piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated. I. Install drainage piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 0.5 percent (1 :200) and 24-inch (667-mm) minimum cover, except where otherwise indicated. J. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions, that cannot be disturbed, by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both. 3.07 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to the following. B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and fittings: With rubber compression gaskets according to CISPI "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Volume I. Use gaskets that match class of pipe and fittings. 1. Install polyethylene film encasement over cast-iron soil pipe and fittings according to ASTM A 674 or A WWA CI05. C. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and fittings: With CISPI-type couplings according to cISPI 310 and CISPI "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Volume I. 1. Install polyethylene film encasement over hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA CI05. . D. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: With heavy-duty-type couplings according to applicable provisions of CISPI 310, CISPI "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Volume I, and coupling manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install polyethylene film encasement over hub less, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings according to ASTM A 674 or A WWA CI05. E. Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Cast-Iron Fittings: With push-on-joint, rubber gaskets according to A WW A C600. 1. Install polyethylene film encasement over ductile-iron pipe and ductile- and cast- iron fittings according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA CI05. F. Stainless-Steel Drainage Piping: According to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Stainless-Steel Drainage Piping: According to manufacturer's written instructions and ASME AI12.3.1. H. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with final finished surface. 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700-18 . . I. Corrugated-Steel Pipe: Join and install according to ASTM A 798. Use soiltight joints made with coupling bands and gaskets, except where other joints are indicated. 1. Corrugated-Aluminum Pipe: Join and install according to ASTM B 788. Use soiltight joints made with coupling bands and gaskets, except where other joints are indicated. K. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings: As follows: 1. Join solvent-cement-joint pipe and fittings with solvent cement according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM F 402. 2. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with elastomeric seals according to ASTM D 2321. 3. Join profile sewer pipe and ribbed drain pipe and gasketed fittings with elastomeric seals according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instruction. 4. Install according to ASTM D 2321. L. Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ACPA "Concrete Pipe Handbook." Use the following seals: 1. Round Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets. 2. Elliptical Pipe: ASTM C 877 (ASTM C 877M), Type I, sealing bands. 3. Arch Pipe: ASTM C 877 (ASTM C 877M), Type I, sealing bands. M. System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, except where otherwise specified. . N. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit both systems' materials and dimensions. 3.08 MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install manholes, complete with accessories, as indicated. B. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet, where indicated. C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface where manholes occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches (76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere, except where otherwise indicated. D. Place precast concrete manhole sections as indicated, and install according to ASTM C 891. 1. Provide rubber joint gasket complying with ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443 M), at joints of sections. E. Construct brick manholes as indicated. F. Construct cast-in-place manholes as indicated. . 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 19 3.09 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. . B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 3.10 STORM DRAINAGE INLET AND OUTFALL INSTALLATION A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated. B. Construct outlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated. C. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated. D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated. E. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated. F. Construct energy dissipators at outlets, as indicated. 3.11 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACT 318, AcI 350R, and as indicated. 3.12 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. . B. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions, ASME AI12.3.1, and as indicated. C. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with final finished surface. 3.13 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal units in piping where indicated. B. Install combination units in piping and in structures where indicated. C. Install terminal units on end of piping and in structures where indicated. Secure units to structure walls. 3.14 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install c\eanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for c\eanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to c\eanouts. Install piping so c\eanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 20 . . B. Set c1eanout frames and covers in earth in a cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) deep. Set with tops I inch (25 mm) above surrounding earth grade. C. Set c1eanout frames and covers in concrete paving with tops flush with surface of paving. 3.15 DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Install type drains in locations indicated. B. Embed drains in a 4-inch (lOO-mm) minimum depth of concrete around bottom and sides. C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated. D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with surface of paving. 3.16 TAP CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so fmished work conforms as nearly as practical to requirements specified for new work. B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch (I50-mm) overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day, compressive-strength concrete. . C. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, sizes 4 to 20 inches (100 to 500 mm) by removing a section of existing pipe and installing a wye fitting into existing piping. Encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day, compressive-strength concrete. D. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, sizes 24 inches (600 mm) or larger or to underground structures by cutting an opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches (76 mm) of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete for a minimum length of 12 inches (300 mm) to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground. 1. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use epoxy bonding compound as an interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials. E. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. . 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 21 3.17 fIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as the work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. . I. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. 2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and whenever work stops. 3. Flush piping between manholes and other structures, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, to remove collected debris. B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of the Project. 1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visual between structures. b. Deflection: flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of a ball or cylinder of a size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. C. Test new piping systerns and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired for leaks and defects. . 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests, and their inspections by authorities having jurisdiction, with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate reports for each test. 5. Where authorities having jurisdiction do not have published procedures, perform tests as follows: a. Sanitary Sewerage: Perform hydrostatic test. 1) Allowable leakage is a maximum of 50 gallons per inch (4.6 L per mm dimension) nominal pipe size, for every mile (km) of pipe, during a 24-hour period 2) Close openings in system and fill with water. 3) Purge air and refill with water. 4) Disconnect water supply. 5) Test and inspect joints for leaks. 6) Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to A WW A C600, Section 4 "Hydrostatic Testing." Use test pressure of at least 10 psig (69.0 kPa). b. Sanitary Sewerage: Perform air test according to UNI-B-6. 96-099/8-96 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 22 . . . . 96-099/8-96 c. I) Option: Test concrete plpmg according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M). Storm Drainage: Perform hydrostatic test. I) Allowable leakage is a maximum of 200 gallons per inch (18.4 L per mm dimension) nominal pipe size, for every mile (km) of pipe, during a 24-hour period. 2) Close openings in system and fill with water. 3) Purge air and refill with water. 4) Disconnect water supply. 5) Test and inspect joints for leaks. 6) Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to A WW A C600, Section 4 "Hydrostatic Testing." Use test pressure of at least 5 psig (34.5 kPa). 7) Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 969 (ASTM C 969M). 8) Option: Test .concrete arch piping and elliptical plpmg according to authorities having jurisdiction. Storm Drainage: Perform hydrostatic test. Close openings in system and fill with water to not less than 10-foot (3-m) head of water. Disconnect water supply. Water level must not drop for 15 minutes. Inspect joints for leaks. I) Option: Test concrete arch piping and elliptical piping according to authorities having jurisdiction. Storm Drainage: Perform air test according to UNI-B-6. 1) Option: Test round concrete piping, 24 inches (600 mm) and smaller, according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M). 2) Option: Test concrete arch piping and elliptical piping according to authorities having jurisdiction. d. e. END OF SECTION 02700 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 23 . SECTION 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. 02 SIDvllv1AR Y A. This Section includes the following: 1. Galvanized-steel chain link fabric. 2. Galvanized-steel framework. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for filling and grading work. 2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete for post footings. 1.03 SUBtv1ITTALS . A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data in the form of manufacturer's technical data, specifications, and installation instructions for fence and gate posts, fabric, gates, gate operators, and accessories. C. Shop drawings showing location of fence, gates, each post, and details of post installation, extension arms, gate swing, hardware, and accessories. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has at least three years' experience and has completed at least five chain link fence projects with same material and of similar scope to that indicated for this Project with a successful construction record of in- service performance. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain chain link fences and gates, including accessories, fittings, and fastenings, from a single source. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: VerifY layout information for fences and gates shown on the Drawings in relation to the property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by tield measurements. . 96-099/8-96 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 0283 I - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.01 FABRIC A. Selvage: Knuckled on both selvages. B. Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric: Fabricated in one-piece widths for fencing 12 feet and less in height to comply with Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) "Product Manual" and with requirements indicated below: I. Mesh and Wire Size: 2-inch mesh, 0.148-inch diameter (9 gage). 2. Coating: ASTM A 817, Type 2, Class 2, zinc-coated (galvanized). 2.02 FRAMING A. Round member sizes are given in actual outside diameter (OD) to the nearest thousandth of inches. Round fence posts and rails are often referred to in ASTM standard specifications by nominal pipe sizes (NPS) or the equivalent trade sizes in inches. The following indicates these equivalents all measured in inches: Actual NPS Trade OD Size Size 1.315 1 1-3/8 1.660 1-1/4 1-5/8 1.900 1-1/2 2 2.375 2 2-1/2 2.875 2-112 3 . 3.500 3 3-1/2 4.000 3-112 4 B. Type I Round Posts: Standard weight (schedule 40) galvanized-steel pipe conforming to ASTM F 1083, according to heavy industrial requirements of ASTM F 669, Group lA, with minimum yield strength of 25,000 psi, not less than 1.8 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. Type A coating inside and outside according to ASTM F 1234, as determined by ASTM A 90, and weights per foot as follows: Actual Weight NPS OD Ob/ft) Size 1.315 1.68 1 1.660 2.27 1-1/4 1. 900 2.72 1-1/2 2.375 3.65 2 2.875 5.79 2-1/2 3.500 7.58 3 4.000 9.11 3-112 C. Roll-Formed Steel: Rolled form steel shapes (e.g., C section) produced from structural- quality steel conforming to ASTM A 570, grade 45, or ASTM A 446, grade D, galvanized, conforming to heavy industrial requirements of ASTM F 669, Group II, with a minirnum CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 2 . 96-099/8-96 . D. E. F. yield strength of 45,000 psi. Protective coating system according to ASTM F 1234, Type A, hot-dip galvanized with a minimum of 2.0 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. according to ASTM A 123,4.0 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. according to ASTM A 525; or Type C, a minimum of 1.0 oz. ofzinc-5 percent aluminum-mischmetal alloy per sq. ft. according to ASTM A 875. Roll-Formed Steel: Hot-rolled steel shape H section with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi conforming to ASTM F 669, group III. Protective coating system according to ASTM F 1234, Type A, hot-dip galvanized with a minimum of2.0 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. of according to ASTM A 123, or 4.0 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. according to ASTM A 525. Square Tubing: Cold-formed steel structural tubing conforming to ASTM A 500, Grade B with minimum yield strength of 42,000 psi and not less than 1.8 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. Type A coating inside and outside according to ASTM F 1234, as determined by ASTM A 90. Top Rail: Manufacturer's longest lengths with swedged-end or expansion-type coupling, approximately 6 inches long for joining. Provide rail ends or other means for attaching top rail securely to each gate corner, pull, and end post. 1. Round Steel: 1.660-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe. 2. Roll-Formed Steel: 1-l/4-by-I-5/8-inch C section weighing a minimum of 1.40 Ib per linear ft. G. Steel posts for fabric heights over 6 feet: 1. 2. . 3. 4. 5. 6. Round Line or Intermediate Posts: 2.375-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe. Round End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 2.875-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe. Roll-Formed Line or Intermediate Posts: 2.25-by-1.70-inch C section weighing a minimum of 2.70 Ib per linear ft. Hot-Formed Line or Intermediate Posts: 2.25-by-l.70-inch galvanized-steel H section weighing a minimum of3.261b per linear ft. Square End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 2-l/2-inch-square galvanized-steel tubing weighing a minimum of 5.00 Ib per linear ft. Roll-Formed End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 3-I/2-by-l-l/2-inch roll-formed galvanized-steel sections weighing a minimum of 5.10 Ib per linear ft. H. Swing Gate Posts: Furnish posts to support single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double-gate installation, according to ASTM F 900, sized as follows for steel and aluminum pipe posts: I. Steel posts for fabric height over 6 feet and gate leaf width: a. Over 6 to 12 Feet: 4.000-inch OD pipe weighing at least 8.65 Ib per ft. 2.03 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Material: Comply with ASTM F 626. Mill-fmished aluminum or galvanized iron or steel to suit manufacturer's standards. . 96-099/8-96 1. Steel and Iron: Unless specified otherwise, hot-dip galvanize pressed steel or cast- iron fence fittings and accessories with at least 1.2 oz. zinc per sq. ft. as determined by ASTM A 90. 2. Aluminum: Die cast conforming to ASTM B 26, aluminum-alloy 360 or sand cast conforming to ASTM B 85, aluminum-alloy 365, ZG61 A, or Tenzalloy. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 0283 I - 3 B. Post and Line Caps: Provide weathertight closure cap for each post. Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail. . C. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace. Use material specified below for brace, and truss to line posts with 3/8-inch-diameter rod and adjustable tightener. Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel, cast-iron or cast-aluminum cap for each end. 1. Round Steel: 1.660-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe. 2. Roll-Formed Steel: 1-1I4-by-l-S/8-inch C section weighing a minimum of 1.40 Ib per linear ft. D. Bottom and Center Rail: Same material as top rail. Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel, cast-iron or cast-aluminum cap for each end. E. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Hot-dip galvanized steel with a minimum length 2 inches less than the full height of fabric, a minimum cross section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch, and a minimum of 1.2 oz. of zinc coating per sq. ft. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, except where fabric is integrally woven into the post. F. Tension and Brace Bands: 3/4-inch-wide minimum hot-dip galvanized steel with a minimum of 1.2 oz. of zinc coating per sq. ft. 1. Tension Bands: 0.074 inch thick (14 gage) minimum. 2. Brace Bands: 0.105 inch thick ( 12 gage) minimum. G. Tension Wire: 0.177 -inch-diameter metallic-coated steel rnarcelled tension wire conforming to ASTM A 824 with fInish to match fabric. . 1. Coating Type II zinc in the following class as determined by ASTM A 90. a. Class 2, with a minimum coating weight of 1.20 oz. per sq. ft. of uncoated wire surface. H. Tie Wires: 0.106-inch-diameter (12-gage) galvanized steel with a minimum of 0.80 oz. per sq. ft. of zinc coating according to ASTM A 641, Class 3 or 0.148-inch-diameter (9-gage) aluminum wire alloy 13S0-Hl9 or equal, to match fabric wire. 2.04 CONCRETE A. Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., I-inch maxirnum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump. B. Packaged Concrete Mix: Mix dry-packaged normal-weight concrete confonning to ASTM C 387 with clean water to obtain a 2- to 3-inch slump. 96-099/8-96 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 0283 I - 4 . . 2.05 GATES A. Fabricate perimeter frames of gates from same material and fInish as fence framework. Assemble gate frames by welding. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame members maximum of 8 feet apart unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fabric: Same as for fence unless otherwise indicated. Secure fabric at vertical edges with tension bars and bands and to top and bottom of frame with tie wires. 2. Bracing: Install diagonal cross-bracing consisting of 5/16-inch-diameter adjustable- length truss rods on gates to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist. B. Swing Gates: Comply with ASTM F 900. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 1. Steel: Gates up to 8 feet wide: a. Over 6 Feet High: Fabricllte perimeter frames of 1.90-inch minimum OD Type I or II steel pipe or 2-inch-square galvanized-steel tubing weighing 2.52 Ib per sq. ft. Gate Hardware: Provide galvanized hardware and accessories for each gate according to the following: a Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf over 6-foot norninal height. b. Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of latch. c. Keeper: Provide a keeper for vehicle gates that automatically engages gate leaf and holds it in the open position until manually released. d. Gate Stops: Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of mushroom- type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. 2. A. General: Install fence to comply with ASTM F 567. Do not begin installation and erection before fmal grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted. I. Apply fabric to outside of framework. Install fencing on boundary lines inside of property line established by survey as required by Division 1. B. Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate (using post-hole digger) holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in fIrm, undisturbed or compacted soil. . 96-099/8-96 I. If not indicated on Drawings, excavate holes for each post to minimum diameter recommended by fence manufacturer, but not less than four times the largest cross section of post. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 5 2. Unless otherwise indicated, excavate hole depths approximately 3 inches lower than post bottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 36 inches below fmish grade surface. . C. Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Space a maximum of 10 feet o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Protect portion of posts above ground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and fInishing operations. a. Unless otherwise indicated, extend concrete footings 2 inches above grade and trowel to a crown to shed water. D. Top Rails: Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and at other posts terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer. E. Center Rails: Install center rails in one piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side, using rail ends and special offset fittings where necessary. F. Brace Assemblies: Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of comer and pull posts. Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric on fences with top rail and at two thirds fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. G. Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric before stretching fabric and tie to each post with not less than same gage and type of wire. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch-diameter (II-gage) hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches o.c. . H. Top Tension Wire: Install tension wire through post cap loops before stretching fabric. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch-diameter (II-gage) hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches o.c. I. Fabric: Leave approximately 2 inches between finish grade and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released. 1. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, comer, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not over 15 inches o.c. K. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to secure fabric fmnly to posts and rails. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. 1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches O.c. and to rails and braces 24 inches o.c. L. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts for added security. 96-099/8-96 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 6 . . 3.02 GATE INSTALLATION A. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. Install gates according to manufacturer's instructions, plumb, level, and secure. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Gates: After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic, readjust gates for optimum operating condition and safety. Lubricate operating equipment and clean exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 02831 . . 96-099/8-96 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 0283 I - 7 . PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Work includes: Work under this Section consists of providing reinforced and non- reinforced concrete as indicated on the drawings. I. Materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance. 2. Exposed surfaces throughout project shall have the same texture and color for like locations. B. Related documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division One Sections of these Specifications, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Codes and standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section. . 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. . 20. 21. 96-099/8-96 1. 2. ACI 301-R75, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". ACI 304-73, Reaffirmed 1983, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". ACI 305R-77, "Hot Weather Concreting". ACI 306R-78, "Cold Weather Concreting". ACI 309R-82, "Identification and Control of Consolidation Related Surface Defects in Formed Concrete". ACI 315-80, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement". ACI 318-83, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". ASTM A82-79, "Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement". ASTM A615-82 (S 1), "Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement". ASTM C31-84, "Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field". ASTM C33-84, "Concrete Aggregates". ASTM C42-84a, "Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete". ASTM C78-84, "Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete". ASTM C94-84, "Ready-Mixed Concrete". ASTM CI43-78, "Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete". ASTM CI50-85, "Portland Cement". ASTM CI71-R80, "Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete". ASTM CI72, "Sampling". ASTM C 173-78, "Test Method For Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method". ASTM CI92, "Making and Curing Cylinder". ASTM C231-82, "Test Method for Air Content of Freshly MLxed Concrete by the Pressure Method". 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 1.03 SUBMITI ALS ASTM C260-77, "Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete". ASTM C309-81, "Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete". ASTM C494-82, "Chemical Admixtures for Concrete". ASTM C618, "Fly Ash". A WS-D1.4-79, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforced Steel". CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice". . A. General: Comply with the provisions of Section 01300. B. Manufacturers' data: Submit: I. Mix designs for each type and class of concrete. Submittal shall include independent lab tests verifying the design strength in accordance with ACI 318 Chapter 4. 2. Cornplete list of all items proposed for the work under this Section and sufficient data to demonstrate cornpliance with these specifications. 3. Complete description of proposed curing methods. 4. Concrete cylinder test reports. C. Shop drawings: Submit complete Shop Drawings of all materials proposed to be provided under this Section. Comply with ACI 3 I 5 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structur es." Include: 1. 2. 3. 4. Bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement and assemblies. Special reinforcement required around openings throughout concrete structures. Location of all proposed construction joints, keying, and water stops. Locations of all openings, depressions, construction and control joints, trenches, sleeves, inserts, and other items affecting the reinforcement and placing of concrete. . D. Mill Certificates: Accompanying the Shop Drawings, submit steel producer's certificates of mill analysis, tensile, and bend tests for reinforcing steel. E. Placement schedule: Submit schedule for all pours in project. Number each pour in schedule and cross reference schedule number to test report subrnittals indicating location for each pour. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer qualifications: Provide at least one person thoroughly familiar with specification requirements, completely trained, qualified to perform the work, who shall be present at all times on the project site directing the work. Provide additional skilled personnel to ensure installation in strict accordance with design Documents. B. Quality control: Sampling during placement shall be accomplished either by an employee of an independent Testing Laboratory or by an individual, approved by the ARCHITECT, qualified to perform operations as described herein. Testing shall be accomplished by an independent laboratory as described in Section 01400. 96-099/8-96 1. Sampling and testing shall include the following: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 . . . 2. a. Slump: ASTM C143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge. b. Air content: ASTM C173, volumetric method; for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive test specimens. c. Concrete tern perature: Record hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, or when 80 degrees F. and above, and each time a set of strength test specimens are made. d. Cornpression test specimen: ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold, cure and store as directed by the Testing Laboratory. Field test specimens: Samples of concrete mixtures shall be taken to determine the adequacy of control of materials, proportioning, consistency, mixing, and air content of the concrete. Sufficient quantities shall also be tested for curing strength as follows: a. Compression test cylinders: One (1) set offour cylinders shall be made from the same batch for each 50 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, for each type of concrete placed daily, and not less than four (4) cylinders for each day's operation or for each 4000 square feet of surface area places. Field sampling reports: Forward to the ARCHITECT, on the same day sampling is performed, one Field Sample Report for each set of field test specimens made or a Daily Surnrnary Report, listing each set of field test specimens, containing the following information. a. Project name and number b. Name of individual performing sampling c. Date d. Weather conditions e. For each of test specimens: 1 Time 2. Temperature 1 Air Content ~ Slump ~ Type and class of concrete .2 Location ofbatch in structure 1 Specimen numbers 3. C. Allowable tolerances for concrete placement: . 96-099/8-96 1. Variation from level or grades specified or indicated; unless noted on plans: a. Slabs 1 In any 10ft. length 2. In any bay or in any 20 ft. length and Maximum for the entire length 3/8 inch Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related position of columns, walls and partitions: 1 In any bay 2. In any 20 ft. length 1 Maximum for the entire length Variation in the sizes and location of sleeves, floor openings, and wall openings Variation in the thickness of slabs Footings, variations in: 1/4 inch 2. 1/4 inch 3/8 inch 1/2 inch 3. 4. 5. 1/4 inch 1/4 inch CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 a Dimensions in plan b. Misplacement of eccentricity: 2 percent of the footing width in the direction of misplacement but not more than c. Thickness 1 Decrease I inch . 2 inches 2 Increase 6. Steps, variations in: a Each flight 1 Rise 2. Run b. Consecutive steps 1 Riser 2. Tread 5% or max. 2 inches No limit 1/8 inch 1/4 inch 1/16 inch 1/8 inch 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, irnrnediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the ARCHITECT's approval at no additional cost. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Cold weather concreting: Equipment shall be provided for protection of the concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be used. Whenever the temperature is below 40 degrees F., all concrete placed in the forms shall have a temperature of between 70 and 80 degrees F., and means shall be provided for maintaining a temperature of not less than 70 degrees F., for three (3) days, or 50 degrees F. for five (5) days, or for more time to insure curing of the concrete. Work shall be in accordance with ACI 306, "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting." . B. Hot weather concreting: During hot weather when atmospheric temperature rises higher than 90 degrees F., attention shall be given to ingredients, production method, handling, placing, protection and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation in accordance with ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting." PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.0 I FORMWORK A. Design offormwork is the Contractor's responsibility. 2.02 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be produced at a central batching plant, mixed and delivered in the forms. 96-099/8-96 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 . . B. Concrete shall be class, weights, and strength as listed herein, shown in the drawings, and as otherwise directed and specified. C. Concrete class: Item Description Class Weight Minimum Strength at 28 days Slump All Concrete A Normal Weight 145 PCF 3000 psi 3-5 D. Concrete materials: . 1. Portland cement: Meeting ASTM C 150, Type I or II, and using one brand of cement throughout project. 2. Fine aggregates: Conform to ASTM C 33, for normal weight and ASTM C 330 for light wieght 3. Coarse aggregate: Conform to ASTM C 33, for normal weight. Conform to ASTM C 330, for light weight. Maximum size shall be I" for slabs; 1-1/2" for reinforced footings; or not more than 1/5 the narrowest dimension between the sides of the forms or 3/4 the minimum clear distance between parallel reinforcing--whichever is smaller. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing bars: Comply with ASTM A 615, Grade 60. B. Steel wire: Comply with ASTM A 82, plain cold-drawn steel wire. C. Welded wire fabric: Comply with ASTM A 185. D. Supports for reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. 1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI specifications, or concrete bricks. Do not use wood, brick, and other unacceptable materials. 2. For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners. 3. Surfaces exposed-to-view, provide supports contacting forms with either hot-dipped galvanized or plastic protected legs. 2.04 CURING MATERIAL A. Liquid curing and sealing compounds shall conform to ASTM C 309. See Acceptable Products: I. Type: Clear high solids based, meeting ASTM C 309, Type I. Gifford-Hill & Co., Inc. Sea1co 8000. . 96-099/8-96 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5 Guardian Chemical Co. Protex Industries, Inc. . B. Sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C 17 I. C. Burlap Cloth made from jute or kenaf and weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd. for moist curing. Provide two layers. 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturers: Other manufacturers for a particular material may be submitted for consideration to the Architect, provided products are of comparable design, quality and accompanied by satisfactory evidence as defmed in Section 01600. Materials described herein are based on manufacturer's product and industry standards in order to establish standards of design and quality. B. Provide Manufacturer technical field service during initial pours, at no cost to the Owner by a person experienced in the adjustment of concrete mixes for the particular admixtures being used. C. Air entraining admixtures: Conform to the requirements of ASTM C260 and shall contain no chloride. Submit data for approval. 1. Euclid Chemical Company: Air Mix Perm a Air Gifford- Hill: Air- Tite Amex 210 Air-Tite 60 (formulated for fly ash mixtures) Monier: Relcrete Air 30 Relcrete Air 40 Septair . 2. 3. D. Water reducing admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A for normal setting or Type D for retarding admixture; contain no chloride, and free of organic acids, (or salts of organic acids) and cornpatible with air entraining admixture. Submit data for approval. 1. Euclid Chemical Company: Eucon II (Type A, Mild Setting) Eucon HR 75 (Type A, Normal Setting) 2. Gifford-Hill, P.S.I. (Type A or D, Chloride Free) 3. Monier, Relcrete L, Nor T E. Retarding admixtures: Conform to ASTM C 494, Type B or Type D; contain no chloride and free of organic acids or salts; and compatible with air entraining admixture. Submit data for approval. 96-099/8-96 1. 2. 3. Euclid Chemical Company, Eucon Retarder 75 (Type B or D) Master Builders, Pozzolith Silka 161 R (Type D) . CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 . F. All other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the ARCHITECTs approval. 2.06 PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE MIXTURES A. General: The concrete shall be proportioned by one of the following methods: Laboratory verification method or waterlcement ratio method. Proportioning shall be based on the requirements of a plastic and workable mix within the slump range for class and strength as specified. B. Air content of freshly mixed concrete as determined by the method of ASTM C 173 shall be 5%. A field tolerance of 1 % plus or minus is acceptable. All concrete shall be air entrained except for footings. C. Water reducing admixture shall be used in al~ concrete to reduce the total water requirement per cubic yard of concrete without loss of workability or test strength. D. Retarding admixture shall be used to retard the setting time when anticipated ambient temperature exceeds 75 degrees F. during placing or finishing operations. 2.07 BA TCHING AND MIXING A. . B. Measure cement by weight on a scale separate from those used for other materials. Cement may be measured in bags of standard weight of 94 pounds; however, no fraction of a bag shall be used in any batch. Measure aggregates by weight Batch weights shall be based on saturated surface dry materials corrected for the actual moisture condition of the aggregate. C. Measure water by volume or by weight by devices not subject to variation due to variable pressure in the water supply line. Measuring tanks shall be provided with means for checking their calibration. D. Devices for measuring quantities of cement, aggregates, water and admixtures shall be accurate within 1 % under operating conditions. E. Furnish delivery ticket for each batch of concrete before unloading at the site. Weights of fine and coarse aggregate, amount of cement, and total water as batches shall be printed on ticket by an automatic printing device. Delivery tickets shall, in addition, include the following: . 96-099/8-96 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Name of batch plant. Serial number of ticket. Date and truck number. Name of contractor. Job name of location. Class of concrete and slump. Cubic yards of concrete. Time loaded. Amount water added at job. Initials of Job Superintendent. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7 F. Ready-mixed concrete shall be produced and delivered in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 94. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrate and conditions under which work of this Section is to be performed, and correct unsatisfactory conditions which would prevent proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Conduit Work I. Electrical conduits shall be buried in concrete slabs. Low conduit shall be wired to the upper side of bottom reinforcing, and top conduit shall be wired to the lower side oftop steel. 2. Take care in placing concrete around gangs or parallel conduit. Where such conduits occur, they shall be separate by at least one inch (1 "), concrete slab shall be thickened to maintain the same cross sectional concrete area. 3.02 REINFORCING PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Comply with the specified standards for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. Position, supports, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with 16 gauge wire to hold reinforcement accurately in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so that twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh. Provide sufficient numbers of supports of the strength required to carry reinforcement. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2 inches beyond the last leg of any continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. . 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Splices: Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact and tightly wire tie. 3.03 JOINTS A. Construction joints: 96-099/8-96 1. Horizontal construction joints will not be permitted except as shown on the Drawings. . CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 . 2. If construction joints necessary for the progress of the work are not shown on the Drawings, shown them in complete detail on Shop Drawings. For slabs on grade, locate joints as indicated on the drawings. Provide keyways at least mid depth in all construction joints in walls, slabs, and between footings and walls. 3. 4. B. Isolation joints in slabs on grade: Provide isolation joints in slabs on grade at points of contact between slabs on grade and vertical surfaces where indicated. C. Control joints in slabs on grade: Provide control joints in slabs on grade to form panels or patterns as shown. Joints shall be constructed with keyed metal forms as indicated. Except where floor covering is required, construction and expansion joints in slabs shall be filled with joint sealant meeting the requirements of Section 07920. 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General 1. Place concrete in compliance with practices and recommendations of ACI 304, and as herein specified. 2. Notify ARCHITECT 48 hours before placing concrete in any portion of the structure to permit inspection of the forms and reinforcement. All embedded iterns of whatever nature shall be in place prior to inspection. B. Procedures . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Do not place any concrete which does not rneet slump requirements for concrete specified. Deposit concrete continuously in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Perform concrete placing at such rate that concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its fmal location to avoid segregation due to rehandling and flowing. Do not subject concrete to any procedure which will cause segregation. Screed concrete which is to receive other construction to the proper level to avoid excessive skimming and grouting. Do not use concrete which becomes nonplastic and unworkable, or does not meet the required quality control limits, or which has been contaminated by foreign materials. Remove rejected concrete from the site and dispose of it in an approved location. C. Placement schedule: Place concrete in conformance with the placement schedule to ensure an even distribution of loads throughout the entire structure. D. Concrete conveying: . 96-099/8-96 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9 3. Handle concrete from the point of delivery and transfer to concrete conveying equipment, and to the locations of fmal deposit, as rapidly as practicable and by methods which will prevent segregation and loss of concrete mix materials. Keep interior surfaces of conveying equipment, including chutes and tremies, free from hardened concrete, debris, water, and other deleterious materials. Use chutes or tremies for placing concrete where a drop of more than 72 inches is required. Where free drop through tremies exceeds 18', use flow checking devices. . 1. 2. 4. E. Placing concrete in forms: I. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches, avoiding inclined construction joints. 2. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 3. Rernove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete placing has reached the elevation of such spreaders. 4. Do not place concrete in supporting elements until the concrete previously placed in columns and walls is no longer plastic. F. Placing concrete slabs: 1. Immediately before placing concrete, ensure that any required subgrade, waterproofmg, vapor barriers, bond breaks, and/or joint forms have been properly installed. 2. Install wire mesh and/or steel reinforcement as indicated and specified. 3. Deposit and consolidate concrete in a continuous operation, within the limits of the construction joints, until the placing of a panel or area is complete. 4. Consolidate concrete during placernent by use of Contractor approved equiprnent, thoroughly working concrete around the reinforcernent and into comers. 5. Consolidate concrete placed against bulkheads of slabs on grade, as specified for fonned concrete. 6. Consolidate concrete in remainder of slabs by vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screed, or other rnethods acceptable to the ARCHITECT. 7. Screed to correct level with straightedge to bring surface to the required finish elevation with no coarse aggregate visible. 8. Immediately following screeding finish the surface to a true even plane using bullfloats or darbies. After concrete has stiffened sufficiently to support one man's weight without imprint and the water sheen has disappeared, it shall be wood floated. 9. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, immediately following wood floating, the surfaces shall be steel troweled to produce a smooth, dense surface free from blemishes including trowel marks. In lieu of hand fmishing, an approved power finishing machine may be used in accordance with the directions of the machine manufacturer. A fmal hard steel troweling shall be done by hand. 10. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface; do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to start of finishing operations. . 3.03 HOT AND COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. See Job Conditions, paragraph 1.6 elsewhere herein. 96-099/8-96 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-10 . . 3.04 . 3.05 . CONSOLIDATION A. General: 1. Consolidate al1 concrete in forms in accordance with provisions of ACI 309. 2. Consolidate each layer of concrete immediately after placing, by use of internal concrete vibrators supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete. 4. Maintain a frequency of not less than 10,000 vibrations per minute for internal vibrators. 5. Do not vibrate forms or reinforcement. B. Equiprnent: Provide adequate number of units and power source at al1 times. Maintain spare units on hand. C. Procedures: 1. Limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation of aggregate. Insert the vibrator so as to penetrate the lift immediately below the one being placed, and manipulated to blend the two lifts. Use the vibrator to melt force the concrete as it is being placed, and use the vibrator to consolidate concrete masses. In the case of wall construction, assign one vibrator and vibrator operator to blend the mix; assign at least one other vibrator and operator for consolidating the masses of concrete. 2. 3. 4. CURING A. General: I. Al1 concrete shal1 be cured by an approved method for the period of time given below. Type III cement 3 days Type I, II, IP ofIS cement 7 days Type I or Type II cement blended with pozzolan 12 days 2. Immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from premature drying extremes in temperatures, rapid temperature change, mechanical injury and injury from rain and flowing water. All materials and equipment needed for adequate curing and protection shall be available and accessible prior to placing concrete. No fire or excessive heat shal1 be permitted near or in direct contact with the concrete at any time. Curing shall be accomplished by any of the fol1owing rnethods, or combination thereof, as approved by Contractor. B. Moist curing: Concrete to be moist-cured shal1 be maintained continuously wet for the entire curing period. If water or curing materials used, stains or discolors concrete surfaces which are to be permanently exposed, the concrete surfaces shall be cleaned. When wooden forms are left in place during curing, they shall be kept wet at all times. If the forms are removed before the end of the curing period, curing shall be carried out as on unformed surfaces, using suitable materials. Horizontal surfaces shall be cured by covering with waterproof paper, polyethylene sheet, polyethylene-coated burlap or saturated burlap. 96-099/8-96 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-11 C. Membrane curing: 1. . Membrane curing shall not be used on surfaces that are to receive any subsequent treatment depending on adhesion or bonding to the concrete; except a styrene acrylate or chlorinated rubber compound meeting Class B requirements may be used for surfaces which are to be painted or are to receive bituminous roofing or waterproofmg, or floors that are to receive adhesive applications of vinyl composition tile. 2. Membrane curing corn pound shall not be used on surfaces that are maintained at curing temperatures with free steam. 3. The curing compound shall be applied to formed surfaces immediately after the forms are rernoved and prior to any patching or other surface treatment except the cleaning ofloose sand, mortar, and debris from the surface. 4. The surfaces shall be thoroughly moistened with water and the curing corn pound shall be applied to slab surface as soon as the bleeding water has disappeared, with the tops of joints being temporarily sealed to prevent entry of the compound and to prevent moisture loss during the curing period. 5. The compound shall be applied in a one-coat continuous operating, at a uniform coverage in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 6. Concrete surfaces which have been subjected to rainfall within three hours after curing compound has been applied shall be recoated at the same coverage rate and method herein specified. On surfaces permanently exposed to view, the surface shall be shaded from direct rays of the sun for the duration of the curing period. Surfaces coated with curing compound shall be kept free of foot and vehicular traffic and frorn other sources of abrasion and contamination during the curing period. . 3.06 FINISH OF FORMED SURF ACES . A. Rough form finish: I. Provide as cast rough form finish to formed concrete surfaces that are to be concealed in the finish work or by any other construction. 2. Standard rough form fmish shall be the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with tie holes and defective area repaired and patched, and all fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth form fmish: 1. Provide as-cast srnooth form finish for formed concrete surfaces that are to be exposed to view, or that are to be covered with a coating material other than cement plaster applied directly to the concrete. 2. Produce smooth form fmish by selecting form material to impart a srnooth, hard, uniform texture and arranging them orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. 3. Repair and patch defective areas with all fms and other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. Related unformed surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a smooth troweled fmish. 96-099/8-96 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-12 . . 3.07 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch finish: 1. Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for terrazzo tile and other bonded applied cementitious-fmish flooring material. 2. After placing slabs, plane the surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 24" when tested with a straightedge. 3. Slope uniformly to drains where required. 4. After leveling, roughen the surface before its final set by using a stiff broom, a brush, or a rake. B. Float finish: I. 2. 3. 4. 5. . 6. 7. 8. Apply float fmish to monolithic slab. surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other fmishes as specified, and to slab surfaces which are to be covered with insulation, and as otherwise shown on the Drawings or in the schedules. After placing concrete slabs, do not work the surface further until ready for floating. Begin floating when the surface water has disappeared and when the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of a power-driven float, or both. Consolidate the surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is srnall or inaccessible to power units. Check and level the surface plan to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in (10'0") when tested with a 10'-0" straightedge placed on the surface at not less than two difference angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope to drains where required. Immediately after leveling, refloat the surfaces to a smooth, uniform, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply trowel fmish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless otherwise shown, and to slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, carpeting, paint or other thin-film fmish coating system. 2. After floating, begin the first trowel fmish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when the surface produces a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface. 3. Consolidate the concrete surface by the fmal hand troweling operation, free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10'0" when tested with a 10'-0" straightedge. 4. Grind smooth those surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Nonslip broom fmish: . 96-099/8-96 1. Apply nonslip broom fmish to exterior concrete paving, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in the schedules. Immediately after trowel fmishing, slightly roughen the concrete surface by brooming in the direction perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use a fiberbristle broom. 2. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-13 E. Chemical hardener fmish: . 1. Apply chemical hardener fmish to exposed dry interior concrete floors where required by the Drawings and the schedules. 2. Apply liquid chemical hardener after complete curing and drying of the concrete surface. 3. Dilute the liquid hardener with water and apply three coats. First coat: 1/3 strength Second coat: 1/2 strength Third coat: 2/3 strength 4. Evenly apply all coats and allow 24 hours drying time between coats. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Areas shall be barricaded after the curing and sealing compound has been applied. As soon as the compound has dried, adequately cover floor surface to prevent staining, discoloration or physical damage which may be difficult to correct. Use scuff-proof non-staining building paper or polyethylene film, suitably weighted or ballasted with sand as necessary. B. Where other concrete structures are to be poured on to or adjacent to fmished surfaces, take all necessary precautions to prevent damage from erection of form work or staining from concrete 1aitance. C. Alert other trades to the need for special protection against rolling or sliding heavy loads across the surface, oil drippings from pipe threaders, spillage of paint, plaster and mortar. Ensure that the covering is not damaged or removed during the progress of the work. . 3.09 QUESTIONABLE CONCRETE A. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of three (3) consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the required 28-day strength, and no individual strength test result falls below the required 28-day strength by more than 500 pounds per square inch. B. Failure to comply with the evaluation procedure shall constitute questionable concrete, and core tests shall be made at no cost to the Owner in accordance with ACI Building Code 318, Chapter 4, ASTM C 42, and as directed by the ARCHITECT. If core tests fail to demonstrate the strength required by the contract docwnents, load tests shall be made in accordance with Chapter 20 of the ACI Building Code 318. If concrete again fails to demonstrate strength required, the materials shall be removed and new materials provided. The Contractor shall pay all costs of the load test and all costs of corrective measures to make the work conform to the Contract Docwnents. C. The term "Building Official" in ACI Building Code 318 shall be interpreted to mean the ARCHITECT. 3.10 CORRECTIVE WORK A. Any careless or improper application of curing compounds, variations in fmishing, curing, staining, marring or other damage from ensuring construction operations shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-14 . 96-099/8-96 . . . 96-099/8-96 B. Corrective work shall be performed in accordance with procedures and utilizing materials recommended by approved manufacturer. Corrective work shall produce a texture, color and finish which will match adjacent accepted surface as approved by the ARCHITECT. END OF SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-15 . SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and S'upplernentary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete unit masonry. 2. Brick unit masonry. 3. Masonry waste disposal. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for gutter and downspouts. 2. Division 7 Section" Joint Sealants" for sealing joint in mockup. C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following: . 1. Steel shelf angles for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications. " 2. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 3. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings specified in Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (fm) at 28 days. 1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: As follows, based on net area: a. fm = 1500 psi (1 0.3 ~a). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. . 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-1 C. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. . D. Samples for verification of the following: 1. Accessories embedded in the masonry. E. Material certificates for the following, signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material complies with requirements. 1. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 2. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. 3. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories. 4. Mortar complying with property requirementS of ASTM C 270. 5. Masonry units. F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. . B. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Mockup: Prior to installing unit masonry, construct sample wall to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as other qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for fmal unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on site in the locations indicated. a. Include all coursing and material variations. b. Include sealant-filled joint complying with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 2. Build mockups for the following types of masonry in sizes approximately 60 inches (1524 rom) long by 48 inches (1200 rom) high by full thickness, including face and 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-2 . . 3. 4. back-up wythes as well as accessories. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches (400 rom) long in each mockup. a. Typical exterior face brick wall with through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch (600-mm) length in comer of mockup approximately 16 inches (400 mm) down from top of mockup with a 12-inch (300-rom) length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing). Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner indicated. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Acceptance of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Acceptance of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. c. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. 5. 6. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. . B. Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air-dried condition. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. I. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. . 96-099/8-96 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. UNIT MASONRY 04200-3 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry. . 4. C. Cold- Weather Requirernents: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen sub grade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirernents: 1. Cold-Weather Construction: When the ambient temperature is within the limits indicated, use the following procedures: a. 40 to 32 deg F (4 to 0 deg C): Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). b. Do not conduct masonry operations when temperature falls below 32 deg (0 deg C) 2. Cold-Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is within the limits indicated, provide the following protection: a. 40 to 25 deg F (4 to -4 deg C): Cover masonry with a weather-resistant mernbrane for 48 hours after construction. 3. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air ternperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after completion of cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and hwnidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply rnortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and above. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Blue Circle b. Claussen Concrete c. Metromont d. Augusta Concrete Block Co. 2. Mortar Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime: a. Blue Circle b. Glen-Gery Corporation. c. Lafarge Corporation. d. Lehigh Portland Cement Co. e. Grant Cement Co. 3. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors: a. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. Heckman Building Products, Inc. c. Hohmarm & Barnard, Inc. 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-4 . . d. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. National Wire Products Industries. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS e. A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of concrete masonry unit required. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Provide square-edged units for outside comers, except where indicated as bullnose. . 2.03 BRICK I. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with rrurumum average net-area compressive strength indicated below: a. 1900psi(13.IMPa). b. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. Weight Classification: Light weight. Aggregates: Do not use aggregates made from pumice, scoria, or tuff. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below (within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification) for the corresponding nominal sizes indicated on Drawings: a. 8 inch (200 mm) nominal: 7-518 inch (194 mm) actual. b. 4 inch (100 mm) nominal: 3-5/8 inch (92mm) actual. Exposed Faces: See Drawings. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required. 1. Provide units with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. B. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 1. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at comers, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. C. Face Brick: ASTM C 216 and as follows: . 96-099/8-96 1. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with grade and minimum average net-area compressive strength indicated below: a. Grade: MW. b. 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Between 5 and 20 g/30 sq. in. (g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. UNIT MASONRY 04200-5 4. 5. Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring, other than flashed or sand-fmished brick, shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no. observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet (3 m). Type: FBS. Size: Bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions within tolerances specified in ASTM C 216: a. Modular: 3-1/2 to 3-5/8 inches (89 to 92 mm) thick by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 7 -1 12 to 7 -5/8 inches (190 to 194 mm) IDng. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. Color and Texture: Berkeley Modular by Boral Brick Co. . 3. 6. 7. D. Hollow Brick: ASTM C 652 and as follows: 1. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with grade and minimum average net-area compressive strength indicated below: a. 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 2. Surface COIDring: Brickwithsurface coloring, other than flashed or sand-fmished brick, shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no. observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet (3 m). 3. Type: HBS. 4. Class: H60V (void areas between 40 and 60 percent of grDss cross-sectiDnal area). 5. Size: Bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions within tDlerances specified in ASTM C 652: a. 4-Inch MDdular: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) thick by 2-1/4 inches (57 rom) high by 11-5/8 inches (295 mm) lDng. 2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. . 1. For pigmented mortars, use premixed, cDlored masonry cements Df formulatiDn required to produce color indicated, or if not indicated, as selected frDm manufacturer's standard formulations. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 1 percent for carbon black. B. Mortar Cement: u.B. C. Standard No. 21-14. 1. F or pigmented mortars, use premixed, colored mortar cements of fDrmulation required to. produce color indicated, Dr if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of mortar cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 1 percent fDr carbon black. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm), use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 rom) sieve. 1. Colored~MDrtar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone, as required to match Architect's sample. E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-6 . . F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, cornpounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. G. Ready-Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in this Article; combined with set-controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 1142. H. Water: Potable. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Colored Masonry Cement: a. Brixment-in-Color; Essroc. Materials, Inc. b. Magnolia Color Masonry Cement; Blue Circle Cement Co. c. Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement; Lehigh Portland Cement Co. d. Flamingo Color Masonry Cement; Riverton Corporation (The). 2. Mortar Pigments: a. True Tone Mortar Colors; Davis Colors. b. Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation. c. SGS Mortar Colors; Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc. 3. Cold-Weather Admixture: a. Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co. b. Morset; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co. . 2.05 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon-steel wire, coating class as follows: a. ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1, for interior walls; and ASTM A 153, Class B-2, for exterior walls. B. For single-wythe rnasonry, provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: 1. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. C. For multi-wythe masonry and mock-up wallljob sign, provide type as follows: 1. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 rom) o.c. 2.06 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire: As follows: . 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-7 1. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating for wire ties and anchors in exterior walls. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). . 2. C. Steel Sheet: As follows: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M) (commercial quality) cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 or B-3, as applicable, for sheet-metal ties and anchors. D. Thickness of Steel Sheet Galvanized After Fabrication: Uncoated thickness of steel sheet for hot-dip galvanizing after fabrication: 1. 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm). 2.07 BENT WIRE TIES A. Individual units prefabricated from bent wire to cornply with requirements indicated below: 1. Tie Shape for Hollow Masonry Units Laid with Cells Vertical: Rectangular with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) wide. 2. Type for Masonry Where Coursing Between Wythes Does Not Align: Adjustable ties composed of 2 parts; one with pintles, the other with eyes; maximum misalignment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). 3. Type for Masonry Where Wythes Are of Different Materials: Adjustable ties composed of 2 parts; one with pintles, the other with eyes; maximum misalignment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). . 2.08 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STRUCTURAL FRAME A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies as described below, allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and frame parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it. 1. F or anchorage to steel framing, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with crimped 1I4-inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel and triangular-shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face and as follows: a. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). 2.09 ADJUST ABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and wall framing parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it, for attachment over sheathing to wood studs, and with the following structural performance characteristics: 1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 1 OO-Ibf (445-N) load in either tension or compression without deforming oyer, or developing play in excess of, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). UNIT MASONRY 04200-8 . 96-099/8-96 . B. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section complying with the following requirements: 1. Wire Tie Shape: Triangular. 2. Wire Tie Length: As required to extend 1-1/2 inches (38 rom) into masonry wythe of veneer face. 3. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet-metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, 0.0747 inch (1.9 mm) thick by 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) wide by 3 inches (75 mm) high; fabricated into tee shape with 2 projecting tabs, 3/4 inch (19 rom) wide by I inch (25 mm) long; with slotted holes for connection of vertical legs of triangular wire tie specially formed to fit anchor section. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Screw-Attached, Masonry- Veneer Anchors: a. D/A 213; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. Pos-I- Tie; Heckman Building Products, Inc. c. DW-IO; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. DW-lOHS; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. e. DW-I0-X; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS: A. Vinyl Sheet Flashing: Flexible sheet flashing especially formulated from virgin polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers and other modifiers to remain flexible and waterproof in concealed masonry applications, black in color, and of thickness indicated below: . 1. Thickness: 30 mils (0.8mm). 2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. B. Solder and Sealants for Sheet-Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal." C. Adhesive for Flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use indicated. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the following material: I. Neoprene. 2. Urethane. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. I. Styrene-Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805. . 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONR Y 04200-9 C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofmg felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). . D. Weep Holes: Provide the following: 1. Wicking Material: Material as indicated below, in length required to produce 2- inch (50-rom) exposure on exterior and 18 inches (450 mm) in cavity between wythes: a. Fibrous glass rope. 2.12 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0. 14-L) dry rneasure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water. B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortarlgrout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 4. F or masonry not subject to metal1ic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a concentrated blend of surface-acting acids, chelating, and wetting agents. For dark-colored masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of surface-acting acids and special inhibitors. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be used to clean unit rnasonry surfaces include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 202 New Masonry Detergent; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. 200 Lime Solv; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. c. 202V Vana-Stop; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. d. Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc. e. Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent; ProSoCo., Inc. f. Sure Klean Vana Trol; ProSoCo, Inc. . 1. 2. 3. 2.13 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless othenvise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium cWoride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for job- mixed mortar, and ASTM C 1142 for ready-mixed mortar, of types indicated below: 1. F or masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: M. 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-10 . . 2. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: N. C. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. 1. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight: a. For mineral oxide pigments and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10 percent. b. For carbon-black pigment and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 2 percent. c. For mineral oxide pigments and masonry cernent mortar, not more than 5 percent. d. For carbon-black pigmen~ and masonry cement mortar, not more than 1 percent. D. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates combined with selected cementitious materials. E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fme or coarse) at time of placement that will completely fill spaces intended to receive grout. 1. Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2 inches (50 rom) in horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2 inches (50 rom) or more in least horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. . 2. F. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's directions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness indicated. . 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-11 B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. . C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masoruy. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full- size units without cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Mix units for exposed unit masonry frorn several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick prior to laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 gl30 sq. in. (gl194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb the water so they are damp but not wet at the time oflaying. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and anises, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 rom in 3 m), nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet (10 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 rom in 12 m) or more. For external comers, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 rom in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 rom in 3 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 rom) maximum. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 rom in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For top surface of bearing wails, do not exceed 1/8 inch (3 rom) in 10 feet (3 m), nor III 6 inch (1.5 mm) within width of a single unit. . C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, wails, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet (12 mm in 6 m), nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19 rom in 12 m) or more. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: F or columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) nor plus 1/2 inch (12 rom). E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 rom). Do not vary bed-joint thickness from bed-joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch (3 rom). Do not vary from head-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary head-joint thickness from adjacent head-joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch (3 rom). Do not vary frorn collar-joint thickness indicated by more than minus 114 inch (6 mm) or plus 3/8 inch (10 rom). 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-12 . . 3.04 LA YING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at comers, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (lOO-rom) horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches (50 rom). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at comers. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. 1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for one-half running bond or 113-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. . F. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. G. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At exterior frames, insert extruded polystyrene board insulation around perimeter of frame in thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch (19 rom) to act as a thermal break between frame and masonry. H. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metailath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 1. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Build nonioad-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of roof structure above and as follows: 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. . 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-13 A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: . 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed., including areas under cells. 4. Maintain joint widths indicated., except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated., lay walls with 3/8-inch (lO-rom) joints. B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not furrow bed joints or slush head joints. 1. At cavity walls, slope beds toward cavity to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As work progresses, trowel rnortar fins protruding into cavity flat against cavity face of brick. C. Lay hollow brick as follows: 4. Lay vertical-cell units with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide bed joints with full mortar coverage on face shells and webs. Lay horizontal-cell units with full bed joints, unless otherwise indicated. Keep drainage channels, if any, free of mortar. Form head joints with sufficient mortar so excess will be squeezed out as units are placed in position. Butter both sides of units to be placed, or butter one side of unit in place and one side of unit to be placed. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 1/4- to 3/8-inch (6- to 10-rom) joints. Where epoxy-mortar pointed joints are indicated, rake out setting mortar to a unifonn depth of 1/4 inch (6 rom) and point with epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy-mortar manufacturer's directions. . 1. 2. 3. D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. E. Cut joints flush for rnasonry walls that are to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MUL TIWYTHE MASONRY A. Use individual metal ties installed in horizontal joints to bond wythes together. Provide ties as shown, but not less than 1 metal tie for 4 sq. ft. (0.37 sq. m) of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally and vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches (305 rom) of openings and space not more than 36 inches (915 mm) apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches (610 rom) o.c. vertically. UNIT MASONRY 04200-14 . 96-099/8-96 . B. Use continuous horizontal-joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between wythes. C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, unless otherwise shown. I. Provide continuity with horizontal-joint reinforcement at corners by usmg prefabricated "L" units in addition to masonry bonding. D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and space as follows: 1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 16 inches (406 rom) o.c. 2. Provide continuity with horizontal-joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" uni ts. 3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores. 3.07 CA VITIES A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavities flush. B. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with individual metal ties. Stagger alternate courses. . C. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with continuous horizontal-joint reinforcing. 3.08 HORIZONTAL-JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal-joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (I6 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches (150 rom). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond opening. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcernent. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. . 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-15 3.09 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS . A. Anchor masonry to structural mernbers where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 rom) in width between masonry and structural mernber, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 rom) o.c. horizontally. 3.10 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wood studs with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to wood studs with 2 metal fasteners of type indicated. Fasten anchors through sheathing to woodl studs with rnetal fasteners of type indicated. Insert anchor section in wood studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards. Embed tie section in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2-inch (50-rom) air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. Locate anchor section relative to course where tie section is embedded to allow maximum vertical differential movement of tie up and down. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 18 inches (457 rom) o.c. horizontally. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 rom) of openings and at intervals around perimeter not exceeding 8 inches (203 rom). . . 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.11 CONTROL AND JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit rnasonry where indicated. Build-in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movernent B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of block units on one side of control joint Fill the resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces. 2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. C. Build-in horizontal pressure-relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section" Joint Sealants." 96-099/8-96 1. Locate horizontal pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer and attached to structure behind masonry veneer. UNIT MASONRY 04200-16 . . 3.12 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick size units and 24 inches (610 rom) for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. C. Provide minimum bearing of8 inches (200 rom) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.13 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar. C. Install flashing as follows: . 1. At composite masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm), and through the inner wythe to within 1/2 inch (13 rom) of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2 inches (50 rom), unless otherwise indicated. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through the veneer, up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm), and behind air-infiltration barrier/buiIding paper. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches (100 rom) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form a pan. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet-metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 2. 3. 4. D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry irnrnediately above embedded flashing and as follows: . 96-099/8-96 1. Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section. 2. Space weep holes 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. 3. In cavities, place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course, but not less than 2 inches (50 mm), irnrnediately above top of flashing embedded in the wall, as masonry construction progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage. 4. Place cavity drainage material irnrnediately above flashing in cavities. 5. In insulated cavities, cover cavity side of open weep holes with copper or plastic insect screening before placing loose-fill masonry insulation in cavity. UNIT MASONRY 04200- 17 E. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. . F. Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity. Space vents and close off cavities vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. 1. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking. 3.14 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 96-099/8-96 1. Do not exceed the foIlowing pour heights for fine grout: a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3/4 inch (19 rom) or for minimum grout space ofhoIlow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 2 inches (38 by 51 rom), pour height of 12 inches (305 mm). b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of2 inches (51 rom) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2 by 3 inches (51 by 76 rom), pour height of 60 inches (1524 rom). c. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches (63 rom) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of2-1/2 by 3 inches (63 by 76 nun), pour height of 12 feet (3.6 m). d. For minimum widths of grout spaces 00 inches (76 nun) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm), pour height of24 feet (7.3 m). Do not exceed the following pour heights for coarse grout: a. For rninimum widths of grout spaces of 1-1/2 inches (38 rom) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3 inches (38 by 76 rom), pour height of 12 inches (305 rom). b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches (51 nun) odor minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches (63 by 76 rom), pour height of 60 inches (1524 mm). c. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells 00 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm), pour height of 12 feet (3.6 m). d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of3 inches (76 mm) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 4 inches (76 by 101 rom), pour height of 24 feet (7.3 m). . 2. UNIT MASONRY 04200-18 . . 3. Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches (76 rom) in least dimension for grout pours over 60 inches (1524 rom) in height. a. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar. b. At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following testing for field quality control. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed during construction for each 5000 sq. ft. (460 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof. C. Mortar properties will be tested per property specification of ASTM C 270. D. Mortar composition and properties will be evaluated per ASTM C 780. E. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. 3.16 REP AIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. . B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for application of sealants. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised, using the following masonry cleaner: a. Job-mixed detergent solution. 5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated In NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. . 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-19 E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masoruy is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. . 3.17 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Recycling: Undamaged, excess masoruy materials are Contractor's property and shall be removed from the Project site for his use. B. Excess Masoruy Waste: Remove excess, clean masoruy waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04200 . 96-099/8-96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-20 . . SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Not less than 5 years experience in fabrication of structural steel for projects of similar scope. B. Steel Erector: Not less than 5 years experience in the erection of structural steel structures of similar magnitude to the proposed structure. 1.02 STANDARDS AND CODES A. American Institute of Steel Construction: 1. AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings". 2. AISC "Code of Standard Practice". 3. "Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints. 4. AISC "Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards". . B. American Welding Society: I. A WS "Structural Welding Code". 2. A WS "Welding Symbols". 3. A WS "Gas Metal-Arc Welding with C02 Shielding". 4. A WS ''Non-Destructive Testing Symbols". C. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. A6, General Requirements for Delivery. 2. A325, H. S. Bolts. 1.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Plumb, level and align individual pieces in accordance with the requirements of the "Code of Standard Practice" of the AISC. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accord with the Contract Conditions: 1. Indicate all shop erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, holes, bolts, welds and preparation required such as bevels, testing and backup bars. . 96-099/8-96 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1 2. Indicate all welds, both shop and field, by A WS "Welding Symbols", A2.0, latest edition. . 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery of materials to be installed under other sections: 1. Coordinate delivery of ernbedded items with General Contractor. 2. Provide setting drawings for installation of embedded items to General Contractor. B. Storage and Materials: 1. Store structural steel members at the project site above ground on platforms, skids or other supports. 2. Store bolts and weld rod in original unbroken containers with labels intact. 3. Protect all items from corrosion affecting structural strength and use. 1.06 SEQUENCING, SCHEDULING AND PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall review the structural capacities of areas to be used for lifting devices, material delivery and storage and shall not exceed design loads without taking appropriate steps to compensate for the anticipated loads exceeding design loads. B. Any modifications, temporary or permanent, to the building's structural frame required to support erection equipment (including trucks, cranes and other devices) and its load shall be made by the Contractor at his own expense and as subject to review and direc- tives of the ArchitectlEngineer. . C. Any redesign by the Contractor for his own convenience, if acceptable to the ArchitectlEngineer, is to be paid for by the Contractor. D. Place Contractor's lifting equipment in location approved by the General Contractor. E. The Contractor shall furnish and place any temporary guys, braces or falsework required to stabilize the structural steel during erection and it shall not be removed until the structure is fully erected and bolted or welded. F. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with authorized personnel making inspections of both shop and field operations. The Contractor will provide access to scaffolds and work platforms and any necessary manpower to assist in the inspection of welding and bolting. 1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Owner shall provide an independent testing laboratory to check structural steel erection for compliance with AISC Specifications including Part 6 of "Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Contractor shall coordinate erection and testing to facilitate construction. 96-099/8-96 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2 . . B. Inspection will be required of a random selection of 10 percent of all high strength shop and field bolting. To be acceptable 95 percent of all bolts tested shall meet design tension, and no bolt shall test to less than 85 percent of design tension. If the bolting fails to meet this requirement, bolts shall be reworked by the Contractor and additional tests of 50 percent of all bolts shall be made until the above requirements are met. C. Where field welding has been used for structural connections, testing laboratory will perform visual inspections of minimum of 50 percent of welds. Should any welds fail, then 100 percent of welds shall be inspected. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. B. C. D. E. F. . G. H. Structural Steel: ASTM A36. High-Strength Bolts: ASTM A325. Unfinished Bolts: ASTM A307. Structural Tubes: ASTM A500, Grade B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. Filler Metal: E70 electrodes or equivalent. Electrodes shall be as recommended by their manufacturers for the position and other conditions of actual use. Paint for shop coat and touch-up field coat shall be combination of gray iron oxide and alkyd resin. Lintel angles and exposed steel to be galvanized in accordance with applicable ASTM specifications. 2.02 F ABRICA TION A. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISc, except as modified or noted in these sped fications. B. Drill or punch holes at right angles to the surface of the metal. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. Remove burrs resulting from drilling operations. C. Apply one (I) shop coat of paint after cleaning of all rust, scale, and foreign matter. Surfaces shall be dry and clean at time of paint application. 2.03 CONNECTIONS . 96-099/8-96 A. All connections shall conform to those shown on structural drawings or as approved by Architect/Engineer. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-3 A. Use high strength bolts in bearing. . 2.04 BOLTING B. Size bolts allowing full thread engagement. C. Enter bolts into holes without damaging the thread. D. Oversize and short-slotted holes are subject to approval by Architect/Engineer. If approved for use, standard hardened washers are required to provide adequate bearing area. Place washers on the exposed face of the oversized or short-slotted hole. E. Long-slotted holes are subject to approval by Architect/Engineer. 2.05 WELDING A. Prior to commencing welding, joint elements are to be bolted or tacked in intimate contact and adjusted to dimensions shown on drawings with allowance for any weld shrinkage. B. Shop splices not shown on drawings are subject to approval by Architect/Engineer. C. Welding shall be performed by welders currently qualified under A WS standard qualification procedures to perform the type of work required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION . A. Check alignment and elevations and locations of all anchor bolts. Report to Architect/Engineer all gross errors and proposed correcting methods prior to proceeding with corrections and base plate setting. B. Field correction of fabrication by flame cutting will only be permitted by written prior approval of the Architect/Engineer. C. Provide all temporary erection bracing. Be responsible for design and installation of all erection bracing and for its safe removal. D. Assemble structural steel frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated within the specific tolerances. E. Align and adjust accurately members forming parts of the complete frame before fastening. F. Splices permitted only where indicated. G. Remove all temporary erection material (lifting hitches, column erection lugs, temporary gussets for bracing or guy calbes, and related items). 96-099/8-96 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-4 . . 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Connections shall comply with requirements specified in Part 2, Products. B. Remove run-off tabs and grind surfaces smooth where the tabs interfere with fireproofing and architectural treatment. C. Do not use powder actuated fasteners for connections onto structural steel unless written permission is granted by the Architect. 3.03 PAINTING A. Immediately after erection, spot paint field connections and abraded places with the same paint used for shop coat. B. Surfaces shall be clean and dry before painting. Apply no paint in freezing weather. C. All touch-up painting to be by steel erector. See Specification Section 09900 "Painting" for additional information. END OF SECTION 05120 . . 96-099/8-96 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5 . SECTION 05200 OPEN WEB JOISTS PART I GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: Furnish all necessary, labor, material, and equipment to fabricate and erect open web joists. 1.02 STANDARDS: Comply with specifications, standards and recommendations of the following: American Institute of Steel ConstJuction (AISC). American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). Steel Joist Institute (S11), including "Standard Specifications and Load Tables. 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS: In accordance with DIVISION 1, submit shop drawings showing plan layout, complete details and schedules for fabricaLtion and erection, including special connections, jointing, and accessories. Furnish templates for anchor bolt installation by others. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 PRODUCTS . A. Steel: ASTM A36, or other per AISC-SJI specifications. B. Fasteners: High-strength bolts cmd nuts, ASTh1 A325 or A490 unfinished bolts and nuts, ASTM A307, Grade A. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRlCATION A. All joists shall be manufactured by one of the following: 1. A member company of the Steel Joist Institute or American Institute of Steel Construction whose d~:signs have been approved by the Steel Joist Institute. 2. A company not a member of the Steel Joists Institute who shall, prior to the fabrication, submit to and receive approval of the following items from the Architect: a. Complete design calculations for the joists to be supplied. b. Complete fabrication details. c. A certificate bearing the seal of a registered professional engineer stating that the joist design, materials and workmanship comply with these specifications. B. Identify each joist with its marlc. . 96-lN<)/S-96 OPEN WEB JOISTS 05200 - I 3.02 SHOP PAINT: Comply with AISC-Sn specifications for materials.and application, except asphalt paint not permitted. 3.03 BRIDGING: Comply with AISC-Sn specifications for type of joists and installation requirements. Provide bridging anchors for ends of bridging lines terminating at walls or beams. . 3.04 END ANCHORAGE: Comply with AISC-Sn specifications unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 ERECTION: Comply with AISC-Sn specifications for bridging, end supports, and handling and erection unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION . OPEN WEB JOISTS 05200 - 2 . 96-099/8-96 . SECTION 06105 NITSCELLANEOUSCARPENTRY PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMtv1AR Y A. This Section includes the following: I. Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified in this Section. 1.03 SUBNITTT ALS . A. General: Submit each itern in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials: 1. F or each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 2. F or waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. C. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fIre-retardant-treated wood products with performance requirements indicated. D. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation \vithin and around stacks and under temporary coverings. 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. . 96-099/8-96 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - I PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.01 LUMBER GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian). 3. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bur:eau. 6. WVVPA - Western Wood Products Association. C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory rnarked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. I. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece. D. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. . I. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of A WP A C2 (lumber) and A WP A C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 Ib/cu. ft. (4.0 kg/cu. m). After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood blocking and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. C. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 Ib/cu. ft. (6.4 kg/cu. m). 96-099/8-96 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-2 . . 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, nailers, blocking, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items are not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No.3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any species. 2.04 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. I. Where miscellaneous carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-I05. . C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. C. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of nailers, blocking, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Apply field treatment complying with A WP A M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. E. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards. F. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. G. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. . 96-099/8-96 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 3 3.02 WOOD NAILERS, AND BLOCKING A. Install where shown and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Cut and shape to required size. Coordinate locations with other work involved. . B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 06105 . 96-099/8-96 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-4 . . SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plastic-laminate countertops. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for exposed framing and for blocking for installing interior woodwork. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork. 1.03 DEFINITIONS . A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork installation. B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing, headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. I. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of blocking including concealed blocking. 3. Apply WIC Certified Compliance Label to first page of shop drawings. . 96-099/8-96 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as wen as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for interior architectural woodwork installation by a fIrm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this Project. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Arrange for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers by a single fIrm. D. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards: 1. A WI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, fInishes, and other requirements. a. Provide A WI Certification Labels or Certificates of Compliance indicating that woodwork meets requirements of grades specified. WIC Quality Standard: "Manual of Millwork" of the Woodwork Institute of California for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. a. Provide WIC Certified Compliance Certificate indicating that woodwork meets requirements of grades specified. b. Provide WIC Certified Compliance Certificate for Installation. c. Mark one unit of each elevation of casework and plastic-laminate countertop with WIC Certified Compliance Label indicating quality grade required. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the Quality Standard as well as additional requirements beyond those of the Quality Standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the Quality Standard. . 2. 3. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions." 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is completed, and HV AC syste~ is operating and win maintain temperature and relative hwnidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fItted to other construction, check actual dirnensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, 96-099/8-96 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 . . and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final shop drawings. 2. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of blocking, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved schedule for cabinet hardware specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate cabinet shop drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.0 I WOODWORK FABRICATORS A. Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering interior architectural woodwork that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: . B. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural woodwork by one of the following: 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the A WI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of interior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated: B. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the WIC quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hardboard: AHA A 135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 4. Softwood Plywood: PS 1. 5. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement. . 96-099/8-96 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 2.03 INST ALLA nON MATERIALS A. Blocking: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. . B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and fmish required for each use. Comply with ASME B 18.6.1 for applicable requirements. 1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N- 105 for applicable requirements. D. Anchors:' Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.04 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard and of the following grade: 1 . Grade: Premium. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. . C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, prof1les, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Comers of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick orless: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). 2. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) mernbers and rails: 1/16 inch (1.5 rom). D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 2.05 COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with A WI Section 400 requirements for countertops. B. Type of Top: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following: 1. Grade: GP-50, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm) nominal thickness. 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and te:-.iures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4 . 96-099/8-96 . 3. 4. a. Match Architect's sample. Edge Treatment: As indicated. Core Material: Medium-density particleboard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with A WI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and level (including tops). C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. . D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use [me finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. I 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. . 96-099/8-96 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5 3.04 PROTECTION A. 96-099/8-96 . Provide fmal protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06402 . INTERIOR ARCI-liTECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 6 . . SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hot-applied asphalt dampproofmg. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified, including data substantiating that materials comply with requirements for each dampproofmg material specified. Include recommended method of application, recommended primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and recommended protection course. . 1. Certification by dampproofmg manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed bituminous dampproofmg similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary darnpproofing materials and primers from one source and by a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with dampproofing only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. . 96-099/8-96 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 160 - I C. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofmg in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofmg has thoroughly cured. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hot-Applied Asphalt Dampproofmg: a. Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc. b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.; Trumbull Division. 2.02 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING A. General: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for designated application. 1. Odor Elimination: For concealed-in-wall uses, provide type of bituminous dampproofmg material warranted by manufacturer to be substantially odor free after drying for 24 hours under normal conditions. B. Hot-Applied Asphalt Dampproofing: Dampproofmg asphalt, complying with ASTM D 449, Type I. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Asphalt primer complying with ASTM D 41, for asphalt-based dampproofmg. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; cornply with recommendations of prime rnaterials manufacturer. B. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers, if any, as recommended by prime materials manufacturer, with particular attention at construction joints. C. Install separate flashings and comer protection stripping, as recommended by prime materials manufacturer, where indicated to precede application of dampproofmg. Comply with details shown and with manufacturer's recommendations. Pay particular attention to requirements at building expansion joints, if any. D. Prime substrate as recommended by prime rnaterials manufacturer. E. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains and conductors. Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work by masking or otherwise protecting adjoining work. 96-099/8-96 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160 - 2 . . 3.02 INST ALLA TION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated and where Project conditions require extra precautions to ensure satisfactory performance of work. B. Application: Apply dampproofing to the following surfaces. 1. Exterior surface of inside wythe of double-wythe, exterior masonry walls above grade, to prevent water-vapor penetration through the wall. C. Hot-Applied Asphalt Dampproofing: Apply on exterior surfaces only. D. Apply vertical dampproofmg down walls from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing. Extend 12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when the Project is completed. 3.03 HOT-APPLIED ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Do not apply hot asphalt when substrate condition causes foaming. B. Apply a coat of hot asphalt by mopping or spraying at a rate of 20 Ib or 2.5 gal./1 00 sq. ft. (98 kg or 1 Usq. m), to produce a uniform film thickness of not less than 30 mils (0.8 mm). . C. Apply a second coat, as specified above, after allowing 24 hours for first coat to cure. Apply double thickness of second coat where first application has failed to produce a smooth, shiny, impervious coat. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior, below-grade dampproofmg membrane from damage until backfill is completed. Remove overspray and spilled materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofmg. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE A. General: Where indicated, install protection course of type indicated over completed-and- cured dampproofmg treatment. Comply with dampproofmg materials manufacturer's recommendations for method of support or attaching of protection materials. Support with spot application of trowel-grade mastic where not otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 07160 . 96-099/8-96 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160 - 3 . SECTIONonl0 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. 02 SU1v1MAR Y A. This Section includes the following: 1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Cavity wall insulation. 3. Loose-fill building insulation. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in cavity walls and masonry cells. 1.03 SUBMITTALS . A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission, water absorption, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. D. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance of foam-plastic insulations with building code in effect for Project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without delaying the Work. . 96-099/8-96 BUILDING INSULATION on 10 - I 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. . B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Cornplete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products by one of the following: 1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation (1-1/2" Foundation) a. Amoco Foam Products Company. b. DiversiFoam Products. c. Dow Chemical Co. d. UC Industries, Inc.; Owens-Corning Co. Perlite Loose-Fill Insulation: a. Producer Members of Perlite Institute Inc. . 2. 2.02 INSULATING MA TERlALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Prefonned Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed from polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as blowing agent to comply with ASTM C 578 for type and with other requirernents indicated below: I. Type IV, 1.60-1b/cu. ft. (26-kglcu. m) minimum density, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of75 and 450, respectively. 3. Recycled Content: Not less than 50 percent blend of postconsumer and recovered polystyrene resins. 96-099/8-96 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 . . 2.03 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 rom) thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 nglPa x s x sq. m). B. A vail able Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirernents, provide one of the following: 1. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: a. DURA-SKRIM 6WB; Raven Industries, Inc. b. Griffolyn T-65; Reef Industries, Inc., Griffolyn Div. 2.04 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. . 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated. . 96-099/8-96 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PERllv1ETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. . B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection board. Set in adhesive according to written instructions of insulation manufacturer. C. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection board. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY WALL AND MASONRY CELL INSULATION A. Pour granular insulation into cavities indicated to receive insulation, taking care to fill voids completely. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close ports after confirming complete coverage. Limit fall of insulation to 1 story in height, but not exceeding 20 feet (6 m). 3.06 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. . C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, either by pouring or by machine blowing to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 1. For cellulosic loose-fill insulation, comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association's "Special Report -- Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation." 3.07 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extrermtles of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4 . 96-099/8-96 . vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or ano~er layer of vapor retarder. 3.08 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 . . 96-099/8-96 BUILDING INSULATION 072 10 - 5 . SECTION 0790 I JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general prOVISions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: . I. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. e. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. f. Other joints as indicated. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated. 3. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 8 "Glazing" for sealants used in glazing. 2. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeter of acoustical ceilings. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint substrates. . 96-099/8-96 JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - I 1.04 SUBMITTALS . A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. 1. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. C. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials fonning joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. . 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicornponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4 deg C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. 96-099/8-96 JOINT SEALANTS 07901-2 . . C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable ofinteIfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after completion ofwaterproofmg, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.0 1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. 2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet at end of this Section, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. . B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Elastomeric Sealant Data Sheet. 2.03 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable latex sealant offormulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. B. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: . 96-099/8-96 JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 3 a. "AC-20," Pecora Corp. b. "Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. c. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc. Silicone-Emulsion Sealant: a. "Trade Mate Paintable Glazing Sealant," Dow Corning Corp. . 2. 2.04 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant- substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. . C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant 96-099/8-96 JOINT SEALANTS 07901-4 . . 2. manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofmg, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. 3. 4. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to cornply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confme primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. . C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install Jomt fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. . 96-099/8-96 JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 5 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where indicated. . 2. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. . 96-099/8-96 JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 6 . . PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1- ELASTO?vfERIC JOINT SEALANT A. Elastorneric Joint Sealant Designation: ES 1 B. Base Polymer: Acid Curing Silicon C. Type: S (single component). D. Grade: NS (nonsag). E. Class: 25. F. Use[s] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). G. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Use 0 Joint Substrates: Plastic, ceramic tile, and wood. H. Available Products: 1. Pecora Corporationp; 863 2. Sonneborn Building Products Division; Omniplus .' . 96-099/8-96 JOINT SEALANTS 07901 -7 PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT A. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES2 B. Base Polymer: Urethane. C. Type: M (multicomponent). D. Grade: P (pourable). E. Class: 25. F. Use[s] Related to Exposure: T (traffic). G. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A. H. Available Products: 1. W. R. Meadows; Pourthane 2. Pecora Corporationp; NR-200 Urexpan 3. Sonneborn Building Products Division; Sonolastic SL-2 96-099/8-96 . . JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 8 . . PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT A. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES3 B. Base Polymer: Neutral-curing silicone. C. Type: S (single component). D. Grade: NS (nonsag). E. Class: 25. F. Use[s] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). G. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A. 1. Use 0 Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodized aluminum, galvanized steel, ceramic tile, and wood. H. Available Products: 1. Dow Corning; 795 or 790 or 791 2. Pecora Corporationp; 895 or 864 3. Sonneborn Building Products Division; Sonolastic Omniseal . . 96-099/8-96 JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 9 PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT A. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES4 . B. Base Polymer: Urethane. C. Type: M (multicomponent). D. Grade: NS (nonsag). E. Class: 25. F. Users] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). G. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M,G, A. H. Available Products: 1. W. R. Meadows; cm-60 2. Pecora Corporationp; GC-5 SSynthacaulk 3. Sonneborn Building Products Division; Sonolastic two part sealant . 96-099/8-96 JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 10 . . PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT A. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: LS B. Base Polymer: Acrylic Latex C. Type: S (single component). D. Grade: NS (nonsag). E. Class: 25. F. Use[s] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). G. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M,G,A. H. Available Products: 1. Pecora Corporationp; 863 2. Sonneborn Building Products Division; Omniplus . . 96-099/8-96 JOINT SEALANTS 0790 I - II I JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE ! DESIGNATION JOINT SEALERS DESCRIPTION ESl One-part mildew-resistant silicone Interior joints in vertical surfaces of ceramic tile sealant in toilet rooms, and showers. ES2 Multi-part pourable urethane sealant Exterior and interior joints in horizontal surfaces of concrete; between metal and concrete, mortar, stone, and masonry. ES4 Multi-part urethane sealant Exterior and interior joints in vertical surfaces of concrete and masonry; between concrete masonry and stone; between metal and concrete, mortar, or stone; interior and exterior perimeter joints of metal frames in exterior walls; exterior overhead joints. LS Acrylic-emulsion sealant Interior joints in field-painted vertical and overhead surfaces; in gypsum drywall, plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry; and all other interior ioints not indicated otherwise. END OF SECTION 07901 96-099/8-96 JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 12 . . . . SECTION 08111 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELA TED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel doors and frames. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for building anchors into and grouting frames in masonry construction. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weatherstripping. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting primed doors and frames. 1.03 SUBMITTALS . A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDl 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are . 96-099/8-96 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 1 labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. . 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: . a. Ceco Door Products. b. Curries Co. c. Habersham Metal Products. d. Fenestra Corp. e. Kewanee Corp. f. Mesker Door, Inc. g. Peachtree Doors. h. S tee !craft. 1. D & D Specialties, Inc. 2.02 DOORS A. Steel Doors: Provide Ic3/4-inch- (44-mm-) thick doors of materials and ANSUSDI 100 grades and models specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules: 1. Interior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick cold-rolled steel sheet faces. 2. Exterior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2A, seamless design, minimum 0.0785-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick galvanized steel sheet faces. 96-099/8-96 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 2 . . 2.03 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors and other openings, according to ANSI/SOl 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. I. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped comers, continuously welded construction for exterior applications and knocked down for field assembly at interior applications. 2. Fabricate frames for interior openings over from 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel sheet. 3. Form exterior frames from 0.0785-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick galvanized steel sheet. B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. D. Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry." 2.04 FABRICATION . A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SOl 100 requirements. 1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to SOl standards: a. Vertical steel stiffeners with insulation. 2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom. a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold-rolled steel sheet. C. Tolerances: Comply with SOl 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SOl 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0.0635-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick galvanized steel channels. with channel webs . 96-099/8-96 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 3 placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. . 1. At exterior locations and where indicated. F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. G. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. H. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SOl 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. I. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (OBI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." J. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359-inch- (0.9-mm-) thick steel or 0.040-inch- (l-mm-) thick aluminum. 2.05 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. . 2.06 GAL V ANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with non petroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780. B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply air-dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment. I. Shop Primer: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-641, Type II. 2.07 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP I to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling). 96-099/8-96 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 4 . . B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SOl 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. . 1. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry removable yoke. 2. In metal-stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel-stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SOl 100. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke-Control Doors: Comply with NFPA 105. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08111 . 96-099/8-96 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 5 . SECTION 08510 STEEL WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCillAENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. \.02 SUMN1ARY A. This Section includes standard intermediate steel casement windows. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Joint sealing between windows and adjacent materials is specified in Division 7 Section" Joint Sealers." 2. Glazing requirements, including windows specified to be factory glazed, are specified in Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing." 3. Field painting of factory prime coated windows is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting. " . \.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide steel window units that comply with performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding stock windows according to test methods indicated. B. Design Requirements: Comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated. I. Testing: Test each type and size of required window unit through a recognized independent testing laboratory or agency for compliance with specified performance requirements. 2. Structural Performance: Provide window units with no failure or permanent deflection for positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 30 Ibf per sq. ft. (1436 Pa), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330. 3. Casement Units: It shall not be possible to insert freely a steel feeler gage 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick between more than 40 percent of the inside metal to metal contacts between frames and ventilators without forcing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. I. Product data for each type of window are required, including: a. Construction details and fabrication methods. . 96-099/8-96 STEEL WINDOWS 085 10 - I 2. b. Profiles and dimensions of individual components. c. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes. d. Weight per foot of each steel section. Shop drawings for each type of window are required. Include information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard product data and the following: a. Layout and installation details, including anchors. b. Elevations of continuous work at 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1 :50) scale and typical window unit elevations at 3/4 inch = I foot (I :20) scale. c. Full-size section details of typical composite members, including reinforcement. d. Hardware, including operators. e. Accessories. f. Glazing details. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques and workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. Material Test Reports: Engage a recognized independent testing laboratory or agency to perform tests specified. Provide certified test results showing that each type, grade and size of window unit complies with performance requirements indicated. . 3. 4. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed installation of steel window units similar in design and extent to those required for the project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Standards: Comply with applicable recommended specifications of the Steel Window Institute except to the extent more stringent requirements are indicated. . C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide steel windows produced by a single manufacturer capable of showing prior production of units similar to those required. D. Design Concept: The drawings indicate the size, profiles and dimensional requirements of the steel window types required and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Steel window units by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations from dimensions and profiles indicated are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual window openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work. 96-099/8-96 I. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit of window units. STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 2 . . 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Scheduling: Except where steel window units have been pre glazed before installation, complete field painting of window units before installation of glass. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Steel Window Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace window units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to: I. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or alT infiltration. 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: 3 years after the date of Substantial Completion. C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies that the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. A & S Window Associates, Inc. 2. William Bayley Company. 3. Bliss-Cashier Metal Products, Inc. 4. Coast to Coast Manufacturing Co. 5. Hope's Architectural Products, Inc. 6. Torrance Steel Window Co., Inc. 2.02 MA TERlALS A. Steel Window Members: Provide frame members formed from hot-rolled new billet steel sections. Size and weight of principal frame and ventilator members shall conform to the following requirements: I. Standard Intermediate Windows: Combined weight of frame and ventilator members shall not be less than 3.0 Ib per lineal ft. (4.5 kg per linear m). Front to back depth of frame or ventilator section shall not be less than 1-114 inches (32 mm). B. Trim members, including glazing beads and similar items shall be extruded aluminum, formed sheet aluminum or stainless steel. Trim located entirely on the interior face of windows may be of formed steel. . 96-099/8-96 STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 3 c. Fasteners: Provide bronze, brass, stainless steel or other metal fasteners warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with steel window members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components. . 1. Exposed Fasteners: If exposed fasteners are used, provide Phillips, flat-head machined screws that match the finish of the member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. D. Anchors, Clips and Window Accessories: Provide units of stainless steel, hot-dip zinc coated steel or iron complying with ASTM A 123. Provide units with sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by the manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonrnigrating. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" of these specifications for selection and installation of sealants.. F. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to the "Glass and Glazing" sections of these specifications. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Fabrication steel window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units. 1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling ventilator framing. B. Glazing Stops: Provide screw-applied or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with glass selection and glazing system as indicated. Finish glazing stops to match window units, if fabricated of steel; otherwise provide the manufacturer's standard finish as selected by the Architect. . C. Glazing Clips: Where face glazing (without stops) is indicated, furnish glazing clips for concealment in glazing compound. 2.04 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations offmishes. B. Surface Preparation: Before fabrication clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants followed by a zinc-phosphate pretreatment applied in accordance with the 'window manufacturer's recommendations. C. Shop Prime Coat Finish: See Specification Section 09900 for shop priming and field applied fmishes. I. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample. 96-099/8-96 STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 4 . . D. Protect shop fmishes from damage due to shipping, handling, and exposures prior to application of field finish or prior to time of substantial completion where shop finish is the fmal fmish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that rough or masonry openings are correct and the sill plate is level. I. Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand and other construction debris. 2. Metal surfaces shall be dry, clean, free of grease, oil, dirt, rust and corrosion, and welding slag, and shall be without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of window units, hardware, operators, and other components of the work. B. Set window units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames. Provide proper support and anchor securely to surrounding construction with approved fasteners. I. Separate zinc-coated steel and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion of electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials, by inserting a bituminous coating or plastic sheet materials. . 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces promptly after installation of windows. Exercise care to avoid damage to the fmish. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installation of windows. Comply with requirements of the "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through the remainder of the construction period, to ensure that, except for normal weathering, window units will be free of damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08510 . 96-099/8-96 STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 5 . . . SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE PART I - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnishing hardware for interior and exterior doors. B. Furnishing and installing access control systems. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 08100 Metal Doors and Frames 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The company furnishing hardware under this Section shall be regularly engaged in the sale and distribution of Finish Hardware for commercial projects. B. The person responsible for scheduling, detailing, ordering and coordinating hardware for this project shall be an experienced hardware consultant. Consultant membership in the Door and Hardware Institute is acceptable as indication of required experience. C. Hardware furnished shall comply with the requirements of the Standards and Codes listed in 1.04 of this Section. I.04 REFERENCES A. Standards: I. BHMA 1301-1982 Materials and Finishes. 2 ANSI A117.1-1991 Specification for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 3. ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities B. Codes: I. ANSUNFP A 101-1991 Life Safety Code 2. Standard Building Code-1991 Edition 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Within 30 days of award of purchase order, submit to the Architect for review a complete vertical format hardware specification in accordance with these Specifications. Furnish six copies of complete submittal. 96-099/8-96 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-1 B. Submittal shall include manufacturer's name, type, finish and location for each item. Title page shall indicate Project, Architect, Owner, and Contractor and shall include address and phone number of each. There shall also be included a table of contents, glossary of terms, abbreviations, and symbols used in the Hardware Schedule. Also include a cross reference of all product numbers used within the Schedule that deviate from those specified. Column 1 shall state specified item and manufacturer and Column 2 shall state prior approved substitute item and its manufacturer. . C. Schedule and detail each floor separately. On doors of different sizes or where hinges, closers, or locks are different, a separate heading shall be used. No labeled openings shall be combined with non-labeled openings. Note each Specification hardware set in each schedule heading. D. Submit a sample of each item of hardware that differs from the Specification. Ifrequested, supply a sample of each hardware item required, to be retained by the Architect for comparison with the hardware furnished on the project. Samples will be returned in time for identification E. Furnish as part of the submittal six copies of catalog cuts of all products. F. After approval of hardware schedule, furnish templateS to other trades who have hardware applied to their products. All templates shall be clearly marked as to their respective heading number and shall give full information with regard to installation, fasteners, dimensions and other pertinent details affecting their installation and operation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Hardware shall be delivered to the job site in the manufacturers' original packages. Each item shall be clearly marked with the opening number and hardware heading to identify correct location. B. Locked storage space complete with shelving, for unpacked crates and sorting out hardware shall be furnished. The space shall be maintained clean and dry for protection of hardware. . 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate hardware with related trades such as entrance, steel and wood doors, frames, millwork, electrical, etc. B. Hardware shall be ordered so that it will be available on time for job requirements. 1.08 WARRANTY A. All hardware items shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from ftnal acceptance, with exception of door closers, which shall carry a ten year warranty. PARTS 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPT ABLE MANUFACTURERS A. A Specified Manufacturer is shown for each hardware item to establish a standard of quality and minimum functional requirements. The product numbers of these manufacturers are found in the Hardware Sets. B. Approved Manufacturers designate manufacturers whose products may be acceptable on the Project if . in the opinion of the Architect the products meet the intent of the specification in terms of design, function, material, and quality of workmanship. . FINISH HARDW ARE 08710-2 96-099/8-96 . . . C. All items of a particular hardware category i.e. locksets, closers, hinges, shall be of the same manufacturer. D. Hinges: 1. Specified Manufacturer - Stanley 2. Approved Manufacturers - Hager, Lawrence, McKinney. 3. All ball bearing hinges shall be equipped with non-rising pins. Furnish non-removable pins where noted "NRP" in the Hardware Sets. Size hinges in accordance with specified manufacturer's published recommendations. E. Locksets, Latches, Deadbolts: I. Specified Manufacturer - Schlage D Series, heavy duty commercial, Rhodes trim. 2. Approved manufacturers - Corbin/Russwin . 3. Alllocksets shall have through-bolted mechanism, 1/2" throw latchbolts, and shall have solid stainless steel trim and wrought rose. F. Door Closers: 1.. Specified Manufacturer - LCN Closers series 4110/1460. 2. Door closers shall be fully adjustable for accessibility requirements, and have cast iron cylinders. 3. Exterior closers shall be certified to exceed 10,000,000 full load cycles and utilize hydraulic fluid with no seasonal adjustment _300 F to 1200 F. G. Pushes, Pulls, Stops, Trim, Flush Bolts: I. Specified Manufacturer - Rockwood Manufacturing 2. Approved Manufacturers - Baldwin, Quality 3. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates shall be furnished 10",4", and 36" high respectively, and 2" less than door width when applied to the push side of the door and 1" less than door width when applied to the pull side of the door or to pairs of doors. H. Weatherstrip, Thresholds, Soundseal: I. Specified Manufacturer - National Guard Products 2. Approved Manufacturers - Reese, Zero 1. Silencers: I. Specified Manufacturer - Rockwood 2. Approved Manufacturer - Ives, Glynn Johnson 3. Supply three silencers for single opening and two silencers for double openings. 1. Key Cabinet: I. Specified Manufacturer - Telkee 2. Supply Regent Series SMTC RWC25S 96-099/8-96 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-3 A. Establish a new masterkey system. Stamp all keys and key blanks with "Do Not Duplicate". . 2.02 KEYING B. All10cksets shall be subject to a Construction Masterkey System during the construction period. A total of six (6) construction masterkeys shall be furnished. Construction Masterkey System shall be voided at the project completion at the direction of the architect C. Supply key requirements as follows: Three (3) Masterkeys and (2) Change keys for each lock cylinder. D. Final keying requirements shall be coordinated with the Owner and Architect. 2.03 MATERIAL AND FINISHES A. Unless otherwise shown in the Hardware Sets finishes shall be as follows: Hinges on metal doors - 600 (US32D) Dull Stainless Steel. Locksets-630 (US32D) Dull Stainless Steel. Door closers-Powder coated to match adjacent hardware. Other items-630 (US32D) or 626 (US26D) ifnot available. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Condition of opening size shall be verified as door frames being plumb and of correct tolerance to receive doors and hardware. . 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All Hardware shall be installed by carpenter mechanics, skilled in the application of institutional grade hardware. B. A schedule of mounting heights for all items of hardware shall be included in hardware schedule for approval. C. Degree of opening for doors with overhead holders, closers, etc. shall be included in hardware schedule for approval. D. The hands of doors shall be shown in the hardware schedule. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Hardware shall be adjusted for correct operation. B. Coordinate with "Contract Closeout" Section. C. After installation of hardware and before the building is accepted, inspect the installation and certify that the hardware is correctly installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. D. If doors are tield painted or finished, hardware shall be protected. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-4 . 96-099/8-96 . . . E. After installation of all hardware and before acceptance of the building, check each locked door against key schedule to make certain that correct locks and cylinders are on proper doors. For any incorrectly located cylinder, tag and have relocated to proper location. 3.04 HARDWARE SETS HEADING # 1 DOORS #: 100A, 107 EACH PAIR TO HAVE: 3 1 1 I 2 2 2 1 1 I PAIR HINGES EXIT DEVICE EXIT DEVICE CYLINDER PULLS CLOSERS KICK PLATES THRESHOLD SET DOOR SEALS DOOR BOTTOM SEAL FBB 199 NRP 9927 NL-OP . 9927 EO 20-000 157 41 II-H-SPRING CUSH 1000 425 120SA 200SA HEADING #2 DOOR #: 100B EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 11/2 PAIR HINGES I EXIT DEVICE 1 CYLINDER I PULL I CLOSER 1 KICK PLATE 1 THRESHOLD I SET DOOR SEALS I DOOR BOTTOM SEAL FBB199 NRP 99 NL-OP 20-000 157 4111-H-SPRING CUSH 1000 425 120SA 200SA HEADING #3 DOOR #: 10 I EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 11/2 PAIR HINGES I LOCKSET 1 CLOSER I KICK PLATE I WALLBUNWER FBB 191 D53PD 1461 1000 404 96-099/8-96 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-5 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-6 96-099/8-96 . . HEADING #8 DOORS #: 108A, 108B, 109A, 109B EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 11/2 PAIR HINGES FBB 191 1 PUSH 70C I PULL 107 I CLOSER 1461 I KICK PLATE 1000 1 WALL BillvfPER 404 HEADING #9 DOOR #: 112 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 11/2 P AIR HINGES FBB 191 I LOCKSET D80PD 1 CLOSER 1460-CUSH I KICK PLATE 1000 . HEADING #10 DOOR #: 114 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 11/2 P AIR HINGES FBBI91 NRP I LOCKSET D80PD 1 CLOSER I 460-H-CUSH I KICK PLATE 1000 I THRESHOLD 425 1 SET DOOR SEALS 120SA I DOOR BOTTOM SEAL 200SA END OF SECTION 08710 . 96-099/8-96 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-7 . SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Glass and glazing for interior storefront system. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Bathroom mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. FS DD-G-451 - Glass, Float or Plate, Sheet, Figured (Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses). . D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. . M. 96-099/8-96 FS DD-G-1403 - Glass, Plate (Float), Sheet, Figured, and Spandrel (Heat Strengthened/Fully Tempered). FS TT-G-4lO - Glazing Compound, Sash (Metal) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for Channel or Stop Glazing). FS TT-S-227 - Sealer Compound: Rubber Base, Two Component (for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Building Construction). FS TT -S-230 - Sealing Compound: Synthetic Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically Curing for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Building Construction. FS TT-S-1543 - Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound: Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based Solvent Release Type (for Buildings and Other Types of Construction). SIGMA No. 64-7-2 - Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. FGMA - Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual. Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC): Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials, (16CFR1201). Associated Laboratories, Inc.: Directory, March 1981 Edition. GLAZING 08800-1 N. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Conform to Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual for glazing installation methods. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. B. Provide data on glazing sealant. Identify colors available and identify glazing sealant used. C. Submit minimum 1'-0" by 1'-0. samples of each type glazing proposed for use. D. Submit 6-inch long bead of glazing sealant in color selected. E. Submit sealed glass unit manufacturer's certificate indicating units meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Framing manufacturer's approval: Indicate by letter prior to submission of shop drawings that an authorized representative of selected aluminum storefront manufacturer and security metal work has reviewed and approved details, including glass bite, clearances and glazing methods. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION . A. Store and protect products as recommended by manufacturer. B. Move no case which has been partially unpacked. Unpack glazing materials in accord with manufacturer's product data for type of material being handled. Stack individual lites as recommended by manufacturer. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Unframed mirrors: Warrant against silver spoilage for period of ten (10) years, beginning at date of Substantial Completion. B. Warranty: Include coverage of sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same for period of ten years, beginning at date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE GLASS MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers I. AFG Industries, Inc. 96-099/8-96 GLAZING 08800-2 . . 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Ford Motor Company Glass Division. Guardian Industries, Corp. Libbey-Owens Ford Company. PPG Industries, Inc. Architect approved equal. 2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS A. Tempered Clear Float Glass: 1/4" thickness, glazing quality, fully tempered in accord with ANSI Z97.1-1975. B. Mirror Glass: FS DD-G-41, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, 1/4" thick, with silver coating, copper protective coating and non-metallic paint coating complying with FS DD-M-411. 2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks and Edge Cushions: Neoprene, 70-90 duro meter hardness, meeting ASTM D1056-85. . 1. Setting Blocks a) Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone, 85 5 + Shore A durometer hardness. b) Width: 1/16" less than full channel width. c) Height: Sufficient height to provide recommended nominal bite and minimum edge clearance. d) Length: 0.1" length per square foot glass, but not less than 4" long. Edge Cushions: Neoprene 65 .J:. 5 Shore A durometer hardness, 3" long minimum. 2. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, meeting ASTM D1056-85. C. Glazing Sealant 1. Acceptable Products a) Dow Coming Corp., #999 Silicone Rubber Sealant. b) General Electric Company, Silicone Products Dept.: Silicone Construction 1200 Sealant. c) Tremco, Inc., Proglaze. d) Architect approved equal. 2. Characteristics: One part silicone rubber. Colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection to match existing site conditions. D. Preshimmed Glazing Tape 1. Acceptable Products . a) Pecora Corp., Pre shimmed Extru-Seal Glazing Tape. b) Protective Treatments, Inc., PTI-303 Spacer Rod Glazing Tape. c) Tremco, Inc., Preshimmed 440 Tape. d) Architect approved equal. Characteristics: Preformed butyl or butylpolyisobutylene tape encasing continuous rubber shim, 100% solids, color as required to match existing. 2. 96-099/8-96 GLAZING 08800-3 E. Polyvinyl chloride foam tape: Closed cell, self-adhesive tape meeting ASTM DI667-76. F. Furnish and install plate glass mirrors where indicated on drawings. . G. Acceptable Products (Mirror Adhesive) 1. Miracle Adhesives Company; Type M, Black Magic. 2. Palmer Products Corp.; Mirro-Mastic. 3. Architect approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of this Section. B. Verify compliance with the following requirements prior to beginning glazing work. 1. Framing is anchored in position, plumb and square within 1/8" of nominal dimensions indicated. 2. Fastener heads and other projections are removed from glazing rabbets. 3. Comers and fabrication intersections are sealed and framing is weathertight. 4. Rabbets at sills weep to outside and rabbets are of sufficient depth and width to receive glazing material and provide required overlap of glazing material. A. Install glazing materials to obtain airtight and watertight installation to withstand normal temperature changes and windloads without failure. . 3.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS B. Protect glazing material faces and edges during handling and installation. C. Size glazing materials for each opening to ensure bite on glazing material, without imposing strain, in accord with manufacturer's product data. D. Maintain minimum bed clearance between glazing material and sash of 1/8", both sides, except where greater clearance is required by either glazing material or framing manufacturer. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Clean glazing channel of debris and protective coating immediately prior to glazing. Use material acceptable to framing, glazing material, and glazing sealant manufacturers. B. Inspect glazing material prior to installation. Eliminate lites having face or edge damage. C. Do not cut or alter lites of tempered glass in field. D. Expansion allowances for polycarbonate shall generally be 1/16" per 11", per 1000 F change in temperature. 96-099/8-96 GLAZING 08800-4 . . 3.04 GLAZING PROCEDURES A. Install glazing materials in accord with manufacturer's product data and applicable standards, except where more stringent requirements are specified. B. Install setting blocks for all glazing materials over six square feet in area. Install at sill rabbet at quarter points. Size setting blocks in proportion to glass weight; minimum 4" length. C. Shim all lites over 100 united inches, inboard and outboard, on all sides using continuous shims. D. Mirrors 1. Install with mirror clips uniformly spaced at 2'-0" O.C., maximum, along top and bottom of mirrors; minimum two each per mirror. Anchor mirror clips with toggle bolts. 2. Install with adhesive in accord with manufacturer's product data, and provide four (4) corner anchors. 3.05 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect glazing materials subject to damage during construction from breaking by attachment of crossed streamers to framing. Do not mark on surfaces. . B. Remove and replace broken, cracked, chipped, or otherwise damaged glazing materials prior to date of Substantial Completion. C. Cleaning shall be done using a mild detergent, such as Formula 409 and lukewarm water. Use a clean sponge or cloth and rinse well. END OF SECTION 08800 . 96-099/8-96 GLAZING 08800-5 . SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE P ART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCillAENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMN1ARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Glazed wall tile. 3. Waterproof membrane for thin-set tile installations. 4. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab fmishes specified for tile substrates. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. Division 9 Section "Portland Cement Plaster" for portland cement scratch coat over metal lath on wall surfaces. 2. . 3. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated. B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499). C. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI Al37.!. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of friction: for tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.8. B. Load-Bearing Performance: For ceramic tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide installations rated for the following load-bearing performance level based on testing assemblies according to ASTM C 627 that are representative of those indicated for this Project: . 96-099/8-96 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - I 1. Heavy: Passes cycles 1 through 12. . 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type oftile, mortar, grout, and other products specified. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Tile patterns and locations. 2. Widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Tile Samples for Initial Selection: See drawings for manufacturer and color selections. Approved equal per Architect. Approved equals to submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: See drawings for manufacturer and color selections. Approved equals per Architect. Approved equals to submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of grout showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated. E. Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and construction indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. I. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 inches (300 mm) square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with grouted joints using product complying with specified requirements and approved for completed work in color or colors selected by Architect. 2. Full-size units of each type oftrirn and accessory for each color required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. . F. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. G. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements. H. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1. Tile Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of special-purpose tile with specified requirements. 96-099/8-96 CERAMIC TILE 093 10 - 2 . . 1. Setting Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of tile- setting and -grouting products with specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product: I. Stone thresholds. 2. Joint sealants. 3. Waterproofing. E. Mockups: Before installing tile, construct mockups for each form of construction and [mish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work. . I. Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before proceeding with [mal unit of Work. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. . 96-099/8-96 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 3 B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. . C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. I. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in the ceramic tile installation schedules on drawings. . B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Tile Products: a. Dal- Tile Corporation. b. Or Architect approved equal. 2. Tile-Setting and -Grouting Materials: a. Dal- Tile Corporation. b. Or Architect approved equal. 2.02 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A 137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. I. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part I "Definitions" Article. 96-099/8-96 CERAMIC TILE 093 10 - 4 . . B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. Match Architect's samples. 2. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and patterns for products of type indicated. 3. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. . E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools, on exteriors, or in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for these kinds of installations and has a record of successful in-service performance. . F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. 2.03 Tll..E PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat tile complying with the following requirements: 1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm). 3. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm). 4. Face: Plain with cushion edges. B. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements: 1. Module Size: 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm). 2. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 3. Face: Manufacturer's standard edges. 4. Mounting: Factory back-mounted. C. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with the following requirements: . 96-099iS-96 CERAMIC TILE 093 10 - 5 I. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight. b. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose. c. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except with coved base and cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes. d. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide a reduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch (12.7 to 6.35 mm) across nomina14-inch (lOO-mm) dimension. . 2. 2.04 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al 18.4, composed as follows: 1. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added at Project site. a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A 118. 4 for mortar of this type defmed in Section F- 2.1.2. 2.05 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI Al18.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4, composed as follows: . 1. Factory-Prepared, Dry-Grout Mixture: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to produce the following: a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and narrower. b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and wider. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement- based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; is compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 96-099/8-96 I. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile. CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 6 . . C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. 2.07 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. I. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy fIlms, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI Al 08 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect. . 2. 3. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A 108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions. 2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken . 96-099/8-96 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 7 from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. . D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces: I. Grout release. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI Al 08 series of tile installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. . E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Layout tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. I. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. . F. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI AI08.l0. 3.04 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofmg to comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce a waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofmg has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 96-099/'8-96 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 8 . . 3.05 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A I 08 series of tile installation standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (\.6 mm). C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI AI 08 series of tile installation standards: I. Tile floors in wet areas, including showers, tub enclosures, laundries, and swimming pools. 2. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. 3.06 WALL TILE INSTALLATION A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: . 1. Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (\.6 mm). C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A I 08 series of tile installation standards: 1. Tile wall installations in wet areas, including showers, tub enclosures, laundries, and swimming pools. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free offoreign matter. I. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. . 96-099/8-96 CERAMIC TILE 093 10 - 9 B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. . C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. D. Before [mal inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.08 CERAMIC TILE FLOOR INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Ceramic Tile Floor Installation CTF I: Where interior floor installations of this designation are indicated, comply with the following: 1. Tile Type/Products: Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. Provide the following product: a. Porcelain Ceramic Mosaics; Dal- Tile 2. Setting Bed and Grout: ANSI AI08.1A with the following grout: a. Latex-portland cement mortar and grout. B. Ceramic Tile Floor Installation CTF[ #]: Where interior floor installatioris of this designation are indicated, comply with the following: . 3.09 CERAMIC TILE WALL SCHEDULE A. See drawings for schedule and pattern of tile. B. Ceramic Tile Wall Installation CTWI: Where interior wall and shower-receptor installations of this designation are indicated, comply with the following: 1. Tile Type/Products: Glazed wall tile. Provide the following product: a. Dal-permatones; Dal- Tile 2. Setting Bed and Grout: ANSI A108.5 with the following mortar and grout: a. Latex-portland cement mortar and grout. END OF SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE 093 10 - 10 . 96-099/8-96 . SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings I. Submit detailed shop drawings of construction details, at a scale of no less than 3" - l' -0", reflected ceiling plans at a scale of no less than 1/8" - l' -0", and specified suspension systems. 2. Indicate locations of lighting fixtures, grilles, and sprinkler heads; insert and hanger spacing and fastening details; splicing method for main and cross runners; change in level details; access panel dimensions and locations; support at lighting fixtures. Indicate framing and support details for work of other supported by the suspension system. B. Samples: Submit the following: 1. l' -D" by l' -D" samples of each type acoustical material specified. Samples shall show the full range of color and texture to be expected in the completed work and, upon approval, shall become the standard of quality for the work. 2. l' -D" length of each suspension member and moulding. . C. Product Data: Include product descriptions and installation instructions for each material. D. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and refinishing each type of acoustical material used. Include precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to fmishes and acoustical efficiency. E. Certificates: Indicate compliance with specified requirements, including Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) fire-resistive ratings. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical units in manufacturers original unopened cartons, fully identified by type, finish, performance data and compliance labels. B. Handle, store and protect in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.03 QUALITY CRITERIA A. Allowable Tolerances 1. Deflections: Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices supporting lighting fixtures, ceiling grilles and acoustical units shall have maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span, tested in accordance with ASTM C635-86. . 96-099/8-96 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-1 2. Bow, camber and twist: Not exceeding tolerances established by ASTM C635- 86. Variation from level in finished ceiling: + 1/8" in 12' -0" . . 3. B. Installer's Qualifications: Installer shall be approved by material manufacturers and have at least five (5) years experience in the installation of the specified products. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Maintain humidity in 65 % to 75 % range in areas where acoustical materials are to be installed 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation. 2. Maintain uniform temperature in the range of 550 F to 890 F for at least 48 hours prior to installation and after installation until Date of Substantial Completion. B. Sequencing and Scheduling 1. Do not install ceiling until space has been enclosed and is weathertight. Wet work shall be completed and be nominally dry prior to installation of ceilings. 2. Schedule acoustical material installation to minimize need for removal and replacement of acoustical units to accommodate work of other trades. C. Coordination: Coordinate with the mechanical and electrical trades to locate all items to be installed in acoustical ceiling system, and do not permit installation of any work which will penetrate acoustical ceilings or affect designated ceiling heights until layouts and all questions are resolved by the Architect. . D. Protect completed work above ceiling system from damage during installation of ceiling suspension system. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Acoustical tile manufacturer shall provide a 10-year limited warranty of dimensional stability against warping, buckling, sagging or delamination. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Armstrong. 2. Architect approved equal. B. Exposed Grid System 1. Type: Exposed inverted "tee" as manufactured by Armstrong and conforming to ASTM C-635 medium duty system. 2. Grid: Non-fire rated, exposed tee, all components die cut and interlocking. 96-099/8-96 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-2 . . 3. Accessories: Splices, edge moldings, hold down clips as required to complete and complement suspended ceiling grid system. Materials: .020 gauge commercial quality cold-rolled steel; off white enamel finish on exposed surfaces. Finish on exposed components: Factory-applied, low-gloss white paint. 4. 5. C. Accessories 1. Hanger wire: Minimum 12 ga., galvanized, soft-annealed, mild steel wire. 2. Wall molding: Angle shape, exposed face surface finished to match suspension system components. 3. Molding attaching clip: Friction-fit clip to attach cross tees and main tees to wall molding. 4. Partition attachment clip: Snap-fit clip, prefmished to match suspension system components. 5. Hold down clips: Suspension system manufacturer's standard design. 6. Hanger rod: 1/4" diameter, threaded galvanized steel rod. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES A. Acceptable Products 1. Armstrong. 2. Architect approved equal. . B. Lay-in panels 1. Standard Acoustic Tiles: 24 inch x 48 inch x 5/8 inch thick; mineral fiber composition; fissured surface finish; flat shape; 75 % light reflectance; equal to Minaboard. Note: Provide Owner with one extra package of replacement ceiling tile at project completion. 2. Vinyl Faced Acoustic Tiles: 24 inch x 48 inch x 5/8 inch thick; vinyl film facing and fiberglass composition; fissured surfac/washable fmish; flat shape; 75 % light reflectance; equal to Minaboard. Note: Provide Owner with one extra package of replacement ceiling tile at project completion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install suspension system in accordance with applicable portions of ASTM C636-86, the manufacturer's recommendations, and approved shop drawings. B. Field measure entire ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite ends of each ceiling. Avoid the use of less-than-half width units at borders and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Notify the Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Do not proceed until receiving instructions from Architect. C. Hangers . 96-099/8-96 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-3 1. Space hangers at 4'-0" o.c., maximum, in each direction. Secure to building structure by powder-activated studs. Secure to structural framing members by attaching to metal clips designed for the type of member involved, or where possible, by looping and wire-tying directly to member. For steel joist spacing of 2' -0" or less, tie furring channels directly to joists. For spacings greater than 2'-0" o.c., suspend furring channels on cold rolled channels. Secure to concrete by wire-tying powder-activated studs. Coordinate placement of wire hangers or inserts with concrete work. . 2. 3. 3.02 ACOUSTICAL UNIT INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical units in level plane and straight line courses within allowable tolerances. B. Place materials to bear all around on suspension members. C. Pattern shall be symmetrical about centerline of area, unless otherwise indicated. Layout units having directional pattern in same direction. D. Seal joints in acoustical units around pipes, ducts, and ducts and electrical outlets with acoustical sealant. E. Where cutting of acoustical units is required, cut so that no cut or damaged edges are visible in finished work. Cut all reveal edge tiles at wall and edge angle intersections as required for finish installation. F. Hold-down clips . 1. Install acoustical units surrounding recessed troffer lights with hold-down clips to prevent movement or displacement of units. 2. Install hold-down clips at exterior ceiling panels and fire-resistive panels. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation. B. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted metal surfaces. C. Remove and replace damaged and stained acoustical units with new units. 96-099/8-96 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-4 . . PRODUCT DATA SHEET I - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Acoustical Panel Ceiling Designation: APC-I B. Acoustical Panel Characteristics: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for characteristics described below: l. Pattern: As specified by product designation below. 2. Type: Wet formed mineral fiber. 3. Color: White. 4. Light Reflectance Coefficient: LR 0.75. 5. Noise Reduction Coefficient: .50-.60. 6. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: 35-39. 7. Edge Detail: Square. 8. Thickness: 5/8 inch (19 mm). 9. Size: 24 by 48 inches. C. Suspension System Type: Provide suspension system that complies with requirements in Part 2 "Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated, Direct-Hung Suspension Systems" wide-face, capped, double-web, steel suspension system. D. Panel Products: I. Classic Minaboard #758 by Armstrong. 2. Architect Approved Equal Prior to Bid. . . 96-099/8-96 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-5 PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Acoustical Panel Ceiling Designation: APC-3 . B. Acoustical Panel Characteristics: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for characteristics described below: 1. Pattern: As specified by product designation below. 2. Type: Wet formed mineral fiber with factory applied vinyl latex paint. 3. Color: White with gray spatter. 4. Light Reflectance Coefficient: LR 0.80. 5. Noise Reduction Coefficient: .55-.65. 6. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: 35-39. 7. Edge Detail: Square. 8. Thickness: 5/8". 9. Size: 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm). C. Suspension System Type: Provide suspension system that complies with requirements in Part 2 ''Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated, Direct-Hung Suspension Systems" wide-face, capped, double-web, steel suspension system. D. Panel Products: 1. Mylar RH90 Fire Guard #882. 2. Architect Approved Equal Prior to Bid. . END OF SECTION 09510 96-099/8-96 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-6 . . SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring and base. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. FS L-F-475 - Floor Covering, Vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing. C. FS SS-T-312 - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition. D. FS SS-W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS . A. Conform to applicable code for flame/ fuel/smoke rating requirements of in accordance with ASTM E84. SUBMITTALS 1.04 A. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns and colors available. B. Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches (full size), illustrating color and pattern for each floor material specified. Also submit full range of manufacturers available colors and selections. C. Submit 2, 2-1/2" long samples of base and accessory material for each color specified. Also submit full range of manufacturers available color selections. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. . 96-099/8-96 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-1 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 2 % extra flooring and base of each material specified. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - TILE FLOORING & BASE A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) 1. Armstrong Standard Excelon. 2. Architect approved equal. B. Vinyl Rubber Base 1. Allstate Rubber Base. 2. Architect approved equal. 2.02 TILE FLOORING MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV, Composition I; 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8 inch thick. Two (2) colors as selected by Architect. Refer to plans for patterns. 2.03 BASE MATERIALS A. Base: Vinyl; 4 inch (100 mm) high; .080 inch thick; coved; premolded external corners x 48 inches long. B. Base Accessories: Premolded end stops and external comers, of same material, size, and color as base. . C. Color as selected by Architect. D. Conforming to Fist SS-W-40. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: Type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Edge Strips: As recommended by flooring manufacturer and as approved by Owner. D. Sealer and Wax: Non-slip types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat and are ready to receive the Work. 96-099/8-96 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-2 . . B. Commencing installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. D. ThorougWy clean substrate as required to assure a proper installation. E. Apply primer to surfaces as per manufacturer recommendation. 3.03 INSTALLATION - TILE MATERIAL A. B. C. D. . E. F. G. H. 1. 1. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce minimum number of seams and symmetrical tile patterns. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. Install flooring in pan type floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern. Install flooring under movable partitions without interrupting floor pattern. 3.04 INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL . 96-099/8-96 A. Fit joints tight and vertical. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-3 3.05 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. . 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 09650 . RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-4 . 96-099/8-96 . SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCillAENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMN1ARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: I. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. . 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment C. Do not paint prefmished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefmished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Acoustical wall panels. c. Metal toilet enclosures. d. Metal lockers. e. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Ceiling plenums. c. Pipe spaces. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Copper. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. . 96-099/8-96 PAINTING 09900 - 1 5. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. . D. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for traffic-marking paint. 2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 4. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 5. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16, respectively. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defmed in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. . 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. I. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 96-099/8-96 PAINTING 09900 - 2 . . C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Product name or title of material. Product description (generic classification or binder type). Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free offoreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. . 96-099/8-96 PAINTING 09900 - 3 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. . 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.785 L), as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. Porter Paints (porter). 2. Architect approved equal. 2.02 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. . B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. I. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. I. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 96-099/8-96 PAINTING 09900 - 4 . . 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of [mish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. I. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and pai?ting. I. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. I. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. . C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete masonry block, surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and bum, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. . 96-099/8-96 PAINTING 09900 - 5 c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. . 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. . 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for fmned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. S. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 96-099/8-96 PAINTING 09900 - 6 . . I. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. 2. 3. 4. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints ~d coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. . E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Motors and mechanical equipment. 7. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. 3. Panelboards. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. . 96-099/8-96 PAINTING 09900 - 7 Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or fmished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no bum through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 1. . 1. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 3.05 CLEANING 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. \. Accelerated yellowness. J. Recoating. k. Skinning. 1. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint~ the 2 coatings are incompatible. . 2. 3. A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 96-099/8-96 PAINTING 09900 - 8 . . 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted ftnishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. I. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specifted in PDCA P 1. 3.07 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. I. Flat, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry ftlm thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). . b. 1) Porter: #296 Glypetx Primer. 2) or Architect approved equal First and Second Coats: Flat, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry ftlm thickness of not less than 3.4 mils (0.086 mm). I) Porter: #519 Acrylic Exterior Flat Latex. 2) or Architect approved equal. 3.08 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete and Masonry (Other than Concrete Masonry Units): Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete and brick masonry surfaces: 1. Concrete Floor at Swim Area, provide the following finish systems: a. Surface Preparation: Brush-off blast or mechanically abrade. Large voids, bug-holes and other cavities should be filled with TNEMEC Series 63- 1500 Filler and Surfacer. b. Body Coat: Apply TNEMEC Series 222- Color Deco-Tread at a minimum of 1/8 inch. Requires two broadcast applications at 1/16 inch each. c. Finish Coat: Apply TNEMEC Series 284 Deco-Clear at a dry film thickness of 8.0-10.0 mils. One coat will leave a skid resistant finish. . 96-099/8-96 PAINTING 09900 - 9 d. Please review the Broadcast Flooring Installation and Application Guide prior to starting any work. Install a cant cove base at all walls and curbs per the procedure in this guide. . B. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following ftnish systems over interior concrete masonry block units: 1. Semi-gloss, Water-borne Epoxy Finish: 2 ftnish coats over a block ftller. a. Block Filler: High-performance, zinc/epoxy-based, block ftller applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry ftlm thickness of not less than 5.0 mils (0.13 mm). 1) Porter: #895 Interloc 2) or Architect approved equal. b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), water-borne epoxy interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm). 1) Porter: #345 Interguard 2) or Architect approved equal. C. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint fmish systems over new, interior wood surfaces: 1. Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 ftnish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based, interior wood primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). I) Porter: #1129 Blankit Primer 2) or Architect approved equal. b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm). I) Porter: #1119 Silken Touch Velvet 2) or Architect approved equal. . D. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following ftnish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Epoxy Finish: 2 ftnish coats over a primer. a. Primer (Shop applied): Zinc/epoxy-metal primer, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. I) Porter: #308 Interzinc 2) or Architect approved equal. b. First Coat (Shop applied): Zinc-epoxy paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry ftlm thickness of not less than 5.0 mils. 96-099/8-96 PAINTING 09900 - 10 . . . . 96-099/8-96 c. 1) Porter: #475 Interguard. 2) or Architect approved equal. . Second coat (Field applied): Epoxy paint applied at spearding rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. I) Porter: Interthane 990HS 2) or Architect approved equal. END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTING 09900 - II . . . SECTION 10165 SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Toilet Compartments B. Urinal Screens 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Wall backing required to secure mounting brackets. 1.03 REFERENCES (including but not limited to) A. NlItionlll FirA Protp.ction Associlltion 101 T.ifA Safety (;O(IA 1991 FIlition Chapters 5,6,8-30. B. ANSI A1l7- 1986 SpecifiC'~tions for MlIkine Rllilclings 11M fllcilitiAs AccessihlA to IIncllTsllhlA hy Physiclllly HlInclicll~ PMple C. ADA, ACCASSihility <1l1iclAliTlP.S for Rllilclings IINI FlIcilities, Federal Register Volume 56, Number 144, Rules and Regulations. D. Fair Housing Amendments Act of 1988, AC'.cASSihility <1niclAlinAs, Federal Register Volume 56, Number 44. E. Southern Building Code. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: 1. Model numbers for compartments manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. are listed to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, workmanship and appearance. Other manufacturers may be submitted for evaluation by the architect by following the conditions of the substitutions clause. Unless approval is obtained 10 days prior to the bid date, all bids shall be based on the standard of quality. The architect shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability of all products submitted for substitution. 2. Compartments shall be the products of a single manufacturer. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Section regarding submittals. B. Manufacturer's Data: 1. Provide required number copies of: a. Product data sheets. b. Installation instmctions. 96-099/8-96 SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165-1 c. Replacement parts information. C. Shop Drawings: . 1. Provide required number of copies of all shop drawings. 2. Show fabrication and erection of compartment assemblies, to extent not fully described by manufacturer's data sheets. 3. Show anchorage, accessory items and finishes. 4. Provide location drawings for bolt hole locations in supporting members for attachment of compartments. D. Samples: 1. Submit a sample of each item of hardware that differs from the specifications to be retained by the architect for comparison with the hardware furnished on the project. 2. Furnish sections showing stile anchoring and leveling devices, concealed threaded inserts, panel and stile construction and edge construction. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging. B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent physical damage, or wetting. C. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Furnish 10 year limited warranty for panels, doors and stiles against breakage, corrosion, delamination, and defects in factory workmanship. . B. Furnish one year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for stainless steel door hardware and mounting brackets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONFIGURATIONS A. National Fire Protection Association Class B 1. Toilet Compartments shall be: Overhead Braced (1082 Duraline Series) 2. Urinal Screens shall be: Floor Anchored (1081 Duraline Series) 2.02 COMPONENTS / MATERIALS A. Stiles, Panels, Doors and Screens: 1. Solid phenolic material with high pressure matte finish melamine surfaces fused to core. Edges shall be black. Brown edges shall not be acceptable. a. Color and pattern as selected by architect from Bobrick standard colors. . 96-099/8-96 SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165-2 . . . 2. For 1080 Duraline Series: solid phenolic material shall meet National Fire Protection Association Class B, Uniform Building Code Class II, ASTM E-84 Fire Resistance Standards: flame spread 69, smoke density 93. 3. Finish Thickness: a. Stiles and doors shall be 3/4" (19mm). b. Panels and benches shall be 112" (13mm). B. Hardware: 1. All hardware to be 18-8, type 304 stainless steel with satin finish. 2. All hardware shall be concealed jru;ide compartments with the exception of out-swinging doors. 3. To include vandal resistant one-way mounting screws throughout, specify Part no: 1-370. 4. Hardware of chrome plated "Zamac" is unacceptable. C. Latch: 1. Sliding door latch shall be 14-guage (2mm) and shall slide on nylon track. D. Hinges: 1. Three stainless steee1 hinges shall have self-lubricating Dupont uDelrin" cams. 2. Hinges shall be attached to door and stile by theft-resistant, one-way, stainless steel machine screws in threaded metal inserts. E. Mounting Brackets: 1. Stainless steel mounting brackets shall be mounted inside compartment. Brackets on exterior of compartments will not be acceptable. F. Leveling device: 3/8" x 1 "(lOmm x25mm) steel bar shall be chromate treated and double zinc plated; bolted to base of solid phenolic stile. G. Stile shoe: One piece, 4" (102mm) high, type 304, 22-gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel with satin finish. Top shall have 900 return to stile. H. Headrail (Overhead braced): Extruded anodized aluminum with satin finish. 1. Floor to ceiling post: 1-1/4" (32mm) square, 18-gauge (1.2mm), type 304 stainless steel, with satin finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Check areas scheduled to receive compartments for correct dimensions, plumbness of walls and soundness of surfaces that would affect installation of mounting brackets. B. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures to assure compatibility with installation of compartments. C. Do not begin installation of compartments until conditions are satisfactory. 96-099/8-96 SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165-3 3.02 ERECTION A. General: 1. Install compartments rigidly, straight, plumb, and level and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Installation methods shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations for backing and proper support. 3. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting, and fitting to room finish. 4. Maintain uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware for proper operation after installation. . B. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 15 degrees from closed position when unlatched. C. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to hold unlatched doors in closed position. D. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings. END OF SECTION 10165 96-099/8-96 SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165-4 . . .. . . . SECTION 10170 SOLID PHENOLIC SHOWER DIVIDERS P ART I - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Shower Dividers 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Wall backing required to secure mounting brackets. 1.03 REFERENCES (including but not limited to) A National Fire Protection Association 101 Life Safety Code 1991 Edition. Chapters 5, 6, 8-30. B. ANSI A117- 1986 Specifications for Making Buildings and facilities Accessible to and Usable by Phvsicallv Handicapped People. C. ADA, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. Federal Register Volume 56, Number 144, Rules and Regulations. D. Fair Housing Amendments Act of 1988, Accessibility Guidelines. Federal Register Volume 56, Number 44. E. Southern Building Code. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: 1. Model numbers for compartments manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. are listed to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, workmanship and appearance. Other manufacturers may be submitted for evaluation by the architect by following the conditions of the substitutions clause. Unless approval is obtained 10 days prior to the bid date, all bids shall be based on the standard of quality. The architect shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability of all products submitted for substitution. 2. Compartments shall be the products of a single manufacturer. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Section regarding submittals. B. Manufacturer's Data: \. Provide required number copies of: a. Product data sheets. b. Installation instructions. c. Replacement part::; information. SOLID PHENOLIC SHOWER DIVIDERS 10\70-1 96-n99/~-')c; C. Shop Drawings: 3. 4. Provide required number of copies of all shop drawings. Show fabrication and erection of compartment assemblies, to extent not fully described by manufacturer's data sheets. Show anchorage, accessory items and finishes. Provide location drawings for bolt hole locations in supporting members for attachment of compartments. . I. 2. D. Samples: I. Submit a sample of each item of hardware that differs from the specifications to be retained by the architect for comparison with the hardware furnished on the project. 2. Furnish sections showing stile anchoring and leveling devices, concealed threaded inserts, panel and stile construction and edge construction. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging. B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent physical damage, or wetting. C. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Furnish 10 year limited warranty for panels, doors and stiles against breakage, corrosion, delamination, and defects in factory workmanship. B. Furnish one year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for stainless steel door hardware and mounting brackets. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.0 1 CONFIGURATIONS A. National Fire Protection Association Class B I. Shower Compartments shall be: Overhead Braced (1082 Duraline Series) 2.02 COMPONENTS / MA TERlALS A. Stiles and Panels: I. Solid phenolic material with high pressure matte finish melamine surfaces fused to core. Edges shall be black. Brown edges shall not be acceptable. a. Color and pattern as selected by architect from Bobrick standard colors. 2. For 1080 Duraline Series: solid phenolic material shall meet National Fire Protection Association Class B. Uniform Building Code Class II, ASTM E-84 Fire Resistance Standards: flame spread 69, smoke density 93. SOLID PHENOLIC SHOWER DIVIDERS 10170-2 . 96-099/8-96 . . . 3. Finish Thickness: a. Stiles and doors shall be 3/4" (19mm). b. Panels and benches shall be Y2" (13mm). B. Hardware: 1. All hardware to be 18-8, type 304 stainless steel with satin finish. 2. All hardware shall be concealed inside compartments with the exception of out-swinging doors. 3. To include vandal resistant one-way mounting screws throughout, specify Part no: 1-370. 4. Hardware of chrome plated "Zamac" is unacceptable. E. Mounting Brackets: 1. Stainless steel mounting brackets shall be mounted inside compartment. Brackets on exterior of compartments will not be acceptable. F. Leveling device: 3/8" x 1"(1 Omm x25mm) steel bar shall be chromate treated and double zinc plated; bolted to base of solid phenolic stile. G. Stile shoe: One piece, 4" (l02mm) high, type 304, 22-gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel with satin finish. Top shall have 900 return to stile. H. Headrail (Overhead braced): Extruded anodized alwninum with satin finish, with shower curtain track and hooks in headrail. 1. Floor to ceiling post: 1-1/4" (32mm) square, 18-gauge (1.2mm), type 304 stainless steel, with satin finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Check areas scheduled to receive compartments for correct dimensions, plumbness of walls and soundness of surfaces that would affect installation of mounting brackets. B. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures to assure compatibility with installation of compartments. C. Do not begin installation of compartments until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 ERECTION A. General: I. Install compartments rigidly, straight, plumb, and level and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Installation methods shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations for backing and proper support. 3. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting, and fitting to room fmish. 4. Maintain uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware for proper operation after installation. 96-099/8-96 SOLID PHENOLIC SHOWER DIVIDERS 10 170-3 B. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 15 degrees from closed position when unlatched. C. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to hold unlatched doors in closed position. D. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings. 96-099/8-96 END OF SECTION 10 170 SOLID PHENOLIC SHOWER DIVIDERS 10170-4 . . . . SECTION 10420 SIGN AGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install custom braille and engraved signage plates. B. Furnish and install custom braille, graphic symbol and engraved signage plates. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. Color to be selected by Architect. Submit schedule of door signage for approval by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Seton Name Plate Co., P.O. Box HA-1331, New Haven, CT 06505. Telephone: 1-800- 243-6624, or approved equal, in the color and letter style (relief letters in contrasting color) as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors. Size as required for text. Mounting by Double-Sided Scotchmount. . B. Architect approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount custom braille and engraved signage plates at 60" above finished floor to the center of the sign, on wall at latch side of door. B. Verify with Architect for other doors and conditions. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. Custom Braille, Graphic Symbol and Engrave Signage Plates: Door No. Signage Text . Provide Two (2) 100 101 102 103 104 105 Provide Two(2) 107 SWIM AREA OFFICE POOL EQUIPMENT JANITOR MEN'S LOCKERS MEN'S SHOWER AREA LOBBY 96-099/8-96 SIGNAGE 10420-1 96-099/8-96 Door No. Signage Text 108 110 111 112 113 BASKET ROOM WOMEN'S SHOWER AREA WOMEN'S LOCKERS ELECTRICAL ROOM FILTER ROOM END OF SECTION 10420 . . SIGNAGE 10420-2 . . SECTION 10505 METAL LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCillAENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMN1ARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Athletic lockers, including the following: a. Double-tier. 2. Locker room benches. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data including materials, accessories, construction, fInishes, assembly, and installation instructions for lockers and benches. . C. Shop Drawings: Layout and dimensions of metal lockers and benches. Indicate relationship to adjoining surfaces. Show locker elevations and details, fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories. Include locker numbering sequence. Indicate installation and anchorage requirements. D. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing a full range of available colors. E. Maintenance Instructions: Instructions for cleaning lockers and for adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain locker units and accessories from one manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for locker installation. B. Protect lockers from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. . 96-099/8-96 METAL LOCKERS 10505 - I PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Lyon Metal Products Inc. 2. Medart, Inc. 3. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc. 4. or Architect approved equal. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Metal Locker Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), commercial-quality, stretcher-leveled, cold- rolled carbon steel sheet, stretcher leveled, free of buckling, scale, and surface imperfections. B. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel; slotless-type exposed bolt heads; self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. C. Equipment: Manufacturer's standard plated steel hooks or coat rods. 2.03 ATHLETIC LOCKERS A. Body: Form tops and bottoms ofO.0598-inch (l.5-mm) minimum steel sheet. . 1. Form backs of 0.04 78-inch (l.2-mm) minimum steel sheet. 2. Form sides and intermediate partitions of 0.0598-inch (l.5-mm) minimum perforated steel sheet. 3. Form sides and intermediate partitions ofO.070-inch (1.7-mm) minimum expanded metal welded to 0.1046-inch (2.6-mm) minimum steel angle or 0.0598-inch (1.5- mm) minimum steel channel frame. B. Frames: Form welded frames of 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum steel sheet channels or 0.1046-inch (2.6-mm) minimum steel angles. I. Cross Frames: Form intermediate channel cross frames for double- or triple-tier lockers ofO.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum steel sheet. C. Shelf: Form shelf for single-tier lockers ofO.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum perforated steel sheet. D. Door: 0.070-inch (1.7-mm) expanded metal welded to 0.1046-inch (2.6-mm) minimum steel angle frame with manufacturer's standard steel sheet lock panel welded to each side of door. 1. Reinforcing: Brace inner face of 24-inch- (61 O-mm-) wide, expanded-mesh, single- tier doors. 96-099/8-96 MET AL LOCKERS 10505 - 2 . . E. Hinges: Heavy-duty, 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick minimum steel, full-loop, 5- or 7 -knuckle, tight pin, 2 inches (51 mm) high minimum. Weld to inside of frame and secure to door with not less than 2 factory-installed fasteners that are completely concealed and tamperproof when door is closed. 1. Provide at least 3 hinges for each door 42 inches (1067 mm) and higher and at least 2 hinges for each door less than 42 inches (1067 mm) high. F. Provide perforated sides, intermediate partitions, and doors in manufacturer's standard configuration of the following shape: 1. Perforation Shape: Rectangular. G. Recessed Handle and Latch: Manufacturer's standard housing to form a recess for latch lifter and locking devices; nonprotruding latch lifter containing strike and eye for padlock; and automatic, prelocking, pry-resistant latch with latching action as follows: 1. Double- and Triple-Tier Lockers: Not less than 2-point latching. H. Double- Tier Locker Latching: Manufacturer's standard 3-point latch engaging frame at top, bottom, and jamb, with projecting turn handle having provisions for padlock. 2.04 LOCKER ACCESSORIES A. Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following items, unless otherwise shown: . 1. Double- Tier Units: I double-prong ceiling hook, and not fewer than 2 single-prong wall hooks. B. Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped, nonferrous-metal nwnber plates with numerals not less than 3/8 inch (9 mm) high. Number lockers in sequence indicated. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least 2 fasteners of same finish as number plate. C. Legs: Provide nominal 6-inch (152-mm) legs by extending vertical frame members or by attaching gusset-type legs made of not less than 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) steel sheet, with provision for fastening to floor. 1. Closed Base: 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum steel. D. Continuously Sloping Tops: Manufacturer's standard continuously sloped top, not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) steel sheet. Provide closures at ends and sloped corner fillers. E. Recess Trim: Manufacturer's standard 0.0478-inch (1.2-mm) minimum steel sheet trim with concealed fastening clips. F. Filler Panels: 0.0478-inch (1.2-mm) minimum steel sheet, factory fabricated. G. finished End Panels: Manufacturer's standard 0.0239-inch (0.61-mm) minimum steel sheet end-finishing panels to conceal exposed ends ofnonrecessed lockers. . 96-099/8-96 METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 3 2.05 LOCKER BENCHES A. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard I-piece units with laminated maple top approximately 9-1/2 inches (240 mm) wide by 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick. Round all corners, sand smooth, and apply manufacturer's standard transparent sealer coating. . B. Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard steel pedestal supports. Furnish all fastenings and anchorages. Apply manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish to pedestals. 1. Type: Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty pedestal with top flange and base, floor anchored. 2. Color: To match locker units. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. Weld frame members together to form a rigid, I-piece structure. 1. Form locker body panels, doors, shelves and accessories from I-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Preassemble lockers by welding all joints, seams, and connections. Grind exposed welds flush. 2.07 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. . B. Finish all steel surfaces and accessories, except prefinished stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces. C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.08 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces complying with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel complying with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (pickling), and phosphatize surfaces. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish consisting of a thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's instructions for application and baking to achieve a minimum dry film METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 4 . 96-099/8-96 . thickness of 1.1 mils (0.028 mm) on doors, frames, and legs, and 0.7 mil (0.018 mm) elsewhere. I. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for color and gloss. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install metal lockers complete with accessories according to manufacturer's recommendations. Install plumb, level, rigid, and flush. B. Assemble knock-down lockers with standard fasteners according to manufacturer's recommendations with no exposed fasteners on door faces and face frames. C. Connect together welded locker groups with standard fasteners according to manufacturer's recommendations, with no exposed fasteners on face frames. D. Anchor lockers to floors and walls at intervals recommended by manufacturer but no greater than 36 inches (910 mm). Install anchors through back-up reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion, using concealed fasteners. E. Install sloping top units to lockers using concealed fasteners. Provide hairline joints and concealed splice plates. . F. Install ftnished end panels to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed lockers. G. Install locker benches complying with manufacturer's instructions. I. Uniformly space pedestals not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) apart. Securely fasten to bench top and anchor to floor. 3.02 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices are operating properly. B. Clean interior and exposed exterior surfaces and polish stainless-steel and nonferrous metal surfaces. C. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit locker use during construction. D. Touch up marred ftnishes, or replace locker units that cannot be restored to factory-ftnished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer. . 96-099/8-96 MET AL LOCKERS 10505 - 5 PRODUCTDATASHEET1-METALLOCKERPRODUCT . A. Description: Metal Lockers. B. Locker Classification: Athletic. C. Locker Material: Steel sheet. D. Locker Fabrication: Knock-down. E. Locker Arrangement: Double-tier. F. Door Style: Louvered vents. G. Hinges: Standard hinge. H. SideslBacks: Solid. 1. Shelf: Solid. 1. Base: Legs without closed base. K. Handle/Latch: Projecting, with 4 turn handle for ADA accessibility. L. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. M. Available Products: . 1. Medart: Fortress 15"d x 12"w x 60"H (provide ADA accessible handles at 4 lower level lockers). 2. Lyon: Double-Tier Quiet Lockers Insustrial IS" x 12" x 30" (provide ADA accessible handles at 4 lower level lockers). 3. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc.: Double-Tier 12" x 15" x 30" (provide ADA accessible handles at 4 lower level lockers). END OF SECTION 10505 MET AL LOCKERS 10505 - 6 . 96-099/8-96 . SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher mounting brackets. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. . B. Product details showing mounting methods, bracket materials, and styles. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single manufacturer. B. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher. C. FM-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher with FM marking. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. A vailable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. J.L. Industries. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. Modern Metal Products by Muckle. Potter-Roemer, Inc. Samson Metal Products, Inc. 96-099/8-96 FIRE EXTINGUISHER, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - I . 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, that comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 5-B:C, 2-1/2-lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel container. 2.03 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Brackets: Designed to prevent accidentally dislodging extinguisher, of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated finish. 1. Provide brackets for all extinguishers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to verify mounting prior to cabinet installation. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION . A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. B. Install in locations and at mounting heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. 1. Fasten mounting brackets and cabinets to structure, square and plumb. END OF SECTION 10522 96-099/8-96 FIRE EXTINGUISHER, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 2 . . . . SECTION 10800 TOll..ET AND BATH ACCESSORIES P ART I - GENERAL 1.0 I SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet, bath, and washroom accessories. B. Attachment hardware. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Installation of concealed anchor devices. B. Installation of backing plate reinforcement. 1.03 RELATED SECTION A. In wall framing and plates and above ceiling framing for support of accessories. B. Section 08800, Glazing - Wall mirrors. \.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ANSI/ASTM AI23 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. C. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. D. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. E. ANSI/ ASTM B456 - Electro-deposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. F. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. G. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. H. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. \.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 96-099/8-96 TOILET AND SA TH ACCESSORIES 10800-1 A. All accessories shall be keyed alike. . \.06 KEYING 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ANSI AlI7.1. B. Operation of accessories shall comply with guidelines set forth by the American Disabilities Act, Title III. Documentation and samples to be provided to architect upon request. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Model numbers for toilet room accessories manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. are listed to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, workmanship and appearance. Others manufacturers may be submitted for evaluation by the architect by following the conditions of the substitutions clause. Unless approval is obtained 10 days prior to the bid date, all bids shall be based on the standard of quality. The architect shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability of all products submitted for substitution. B. Accessories shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Accessories with tumbler locks shall be keyed alike with the exception of coin boxes in vending equipment. . 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No.4 finish, 22 gauge minimum, unless otherwise indicated. B. Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A366, 20-gauge minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. C. Mirror Glass: See Section 08800, Glazing. D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same materials as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessory units are not permitted. Unobtrusive labels on surfaces not exposed to view are acceptable. Where locks are required for a particular type of toilet accessory, provide same keying throughout project. B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints. exposed edges rolled. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. 96-099/8-96 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-2 . . . . c. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Fabricate units of all welded construction with mitered corners. Hinge doors or access panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when unit is closed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instnicted by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, and as per ANSI I17.\. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing labels and protective coating. SCHEDULE MEN'S SHOWER #105, WOMEN'S SHOWER #110: EACH TO HAVE: 6EA 6EA 6EA 42EA lEA lEA lEA 6EA 6EA 96-099/8-96 B-211 B-6107 B-204-2 B-204-1 B-517I/8-5181 B-2740 B-6806 X 36 B-6806 X 42 B-973 ROBE HOOKS SHOWER CURTAIN ROD SHOWER CURTAIN CURTAIN HOOKS SHOWER SEAT (SEE PLANS) TISSUE DISPENSERS (4 EA # II 0 ONLY) GRAB BAR GRAB BARS SOAP DISHES TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-3 MEN'S LOCKER #104, WOMEN'S LOCKER #111: EACH TO HAVE: I EA B-6806 X 36 1 EA B-6806 X 42 1 EA B-2740 3 EA B-165 24 X 36 2 EA B-4112 1 EA B-3949 JANITOR'S ROOM #103: EACH TO HAVE: I EA B-223 X 36 96-099/8-96 GRAB BAR GRAB BAR TISSUE DISPENSER (2 EA IN # III) MIRRORS SOAP DISPENSERS WASTE RECEPTACLE MOP STRIP END OF SECTION 10800 TOILET AND SA TH ACCESSORIES 10800-4 . . . . SECTION 13122 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCillAENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMN1ARY A. This Section includes a single-story, single-span, rigid-frame-type pre-engineered metal building of the nominal length, width, eave height, and roof pitch indicated. I. Exterior walls are covered with field-assembled insulated wall panels attached to framing members using exposed fasteners. Endwalls are not expandable. 2. Roof System consists of the manufacturer's standard lap-seam insulated roof. 3. Manufacturer's standard building components and accessories may be used, provided components, accessories, and complete structure conform to design indicated and specified requirements. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: . 1. Concrete floor and foundations and installation of anchor bolts are specified in Division 3 Section "Concrete Work." Brick masonry exterior walls are specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry." Sealants and calking are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." Finish hardware and provisions for masterkeying are specified in Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware." 2. 3. 4. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Engineer, design, fabricate and erect the pre-engineered metal building system to withstand loads from winds, gravity, structural movement including movement thermally induced, and to resist in-service use conditions that the building will experience, including exposure to the weather, without failure. I. Design each member to withstand stresses resulting from combinations of loads that produce the maximum allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in MBMA's "Design Practices Manual." B. Design Loads: Basic design loads, as well as auxiliary and collateral loads, are indicated on manufacturer's drawings. I. Basic design loads include live load, wind load, and seismic load, in addition to the dead load. 2. Auxiliary loads include dynamic live loads such as those generated by cranes and material handling equipment. . 96-099/8-96 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122 - I 3. Collateral loads include additional dead loads over and above the weight of the metal building system such as sprinkler systems and roof-mounted mechanical systems. . C. Structural Framing and Roof and Siding Panels: Design primary and secondary structural members and exterior covering materials for applicable loads and combinations of loads in accordance with the Metal Building Manufacturers Association's (MBMA) "Design Practices Manual. " I. Structural Steel: Comply with the American Institute of Steel Construction's (AISC) "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" for design requirements and allowable stresses. 2. Light Gage Steel: Comply with the American Iron and Steel Institute's (AISI) "Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" and "Design of Light Gage Steel Diaphragms" for design requirements and allowable stresses. 3. Welded Connections: Comply with the American Welding Society's (AWS) "Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" for welding procedures. D. Building Accessories: Provide metal building system accessories that comply with the following criteria: 1. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with the Steel Door Institute's SDI-IOO for types, styles, and design requirements and with ANSI Al15 for hardware preparation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS . A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data consisting of metal building system manufacturer's product information for building components and accessories. C. Shop drawings for metal building structural framing system, roofmg and siding panels, and other metal building system components and accessories that are not fully detailed or dimensioned in manufacturer's product data. 1. Structural Framing: Furnish complete erection drawings prepared by or under the supervision of a professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Include details showing fabrication and assembly of the metal building system. Show anchor bolts settings and sidewall, endwall, and roof framing. Include transverse cross-sections. 2. Roofing and Siding Panels: Provide layouts of panels on walls and roofs, details of edge conditions, joints, corners, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Include transverse cross-sections. 3. Building Accessory Components: Provide details of metal building accessory components to clearly indicate methods of installation including the following: 96-099/8-96 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 122 - 2 . . a. Personnel doors: Provide elevations and details of each type of door and frame, including anchors and reinforcement; show location and installation requirements for fInish hardware. Provide schedule of doors and frames using the same reference numbers for details and openings as those indicated on the drawings; include complete hardware schedule. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide layouts at 1/4 inch per foot (1 :50) scale. Provide details of ventilators, louvers, gutters, downspouts, and other sheet metal accessories at not less than 1-1/2 inch per foot (1: 10) scale showing profIles, methods of joining, and anchorages. b. D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts or chips showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for metal roofmg and siding panels with factory-applied finishes. E. Installer certificates signed by metal building manufacturer written certification certifYing that the installer complies with requirements included under the "Quality Assurance" Article. F. Professional engineer's certificate prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer, legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located, verifying that the structural framing and covering panels meet indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer to erect the pre-engineered metal building who has specialized in the erection and installation of types of metal buildings systems similar to that required for this project and who is certified in writing by the metal building system manufacturer as qualified for erection of the manufacturer's products. . B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide pre-engineered metal buildings manufactured by a fIrm experienced in manufacturing metal buildings systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain the metal building system components, including structural framing, wall and roof covering, and accessory components, from one source from a single manufacturer. D. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate size, profIles, and dimensional requirements of the pre-engineered metal buildings and are based on the specific type and model indicated. Metal building systems having equal characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions and profIles are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver prefabricated components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package wall and roof panels for protection against transportation damage. . 96-099/8-96 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 122 - 3 B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall and roof covering panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. . C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal wall and roof panels so that water accumulations will drain freely. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Roofing and Siding Panel Finish Warranty: Furnish the roofing and siding panel manufacturer's written warranty, covering failure of the factory-applied exterior finish on metal wall and roof panels within the warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period for factory-applied exterior finishes on wall and roof panels is 20 years after the date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish at least 5 percent excess over required amount of nuts, bolts, screws, washers, and other required fasteners for each metal building. Pack in cartons labeled to identify the contents and store on the site where directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal building systems that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: . 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1. American Buildings Co. 2. Architect approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Shapes: Comply with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) or ASTM A 529 (ASTM A 529M). B. Steel Tubing or Pipe: Comply with ASTM A 500 Grade B, ASTM A 501, or ASTM A 53. C. Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: Provide 42,000 psi (290 MPa) minimum yield strength. Comply with ASTM A 529 (ASTM A 529M), ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M), or ASTM A 572 (ASTM A 572M). D. Steel Members Fabricated by Cold Forming: Comply with ASTM A 607 Grade 50. E. Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M). METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122-4 . 96-099/8-96 . F. Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M) or ASTM A 569. G. Structural Quality Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Comply with ASTM A 446 with G90 (ASTM A 446M with Z275) coating complying with ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M). Grade to suit manufacturer's standards. H. Commercial Quality Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Comply with ASTM A 526 with G60 (ASTM A 526M with Z180) coating complying with ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M). I. Bolts for Structural Framing: Comply with ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) as necessary for design loads and connection details. 1. Translucent Panels: Glass-tiber-reinforced polyester translucent plastic glazing panels complying with ASTM D 3841, Type CC2, general purpose, Grade 2, weather resistant, crinkle finish both sides, weighing not less than 8 oz. per sq. ft. (2.4 kg/sq. m). Match configuration of adjacent metal panels. I. Color: Blue. 2. Mastic: Nonstaining saturated vinyl polymer as recommended by panel manufacturer for sealing laps. K. Thermal Insulation: Glass fiber blanket insulation, complying with ASTM C 991, of 0.5 Ib per cu. ft. (8 kg/cu. m) density, thickness as indicated, with UL flame spread classification of 25 or less, and 2 inch (50 mm) wide continuous vapor-tight edge tabs. . 1. 2. Vapor Barrier: Vinyl film. Retainer Strips: 26 gage (0.55 mm) formed galvanized steel retainer clips colored to match the insulation facing. L. Paint and Coating Materials: See Section 09900 Painting for shop primer and field applied coats. 2.03 STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. Rigid Frames: Fabricate from hot-rolled structural steel shapes. Provide factory-welded, shop-painted., built-up "I-beam"-shape or open-web-type frames consisting of tapered or parallel flange beams and tapered columns. Furnish frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field.bolted assembly. I. Provide length of span and spacing of frames indicated. Slight variations in length of span and frame spacing may be acceptable if necessary to meet manufacturer's standard. 2. Provide rigid frames at endwalls where indicated. B. Primary Endwall Framing: Provide the following primary endwall framing members fabricated for field.bolted assembly: I. Endwall Columns: Manufacturer's standard shop-painted, built-up factory-welded "I"-shape or cold-formed "C" sections, fabricated from 14 gage (1.9 mm) steel. . 96-099/8-96 MET AI.. BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122 - 5 2. Endwall Beams: Manufacturer's standard shop-painted "C"-shape roll-formed sections fabricated from 16 gage (1.5 mm) steel. . C. Secondary Framing: Provide the following secondary framing members: 1. Roof Purlins, Sidewall and Endwall Girts: "C"-or "Z"-shaped sections fabricated from 16 gage (1.5 mm) shop-painted roll-formed steel. Purl in spacers shall be fabricated from 14 gage (2.0 mm) cold-formed galvanized steel sections. 2. Eave Struts: Unequal flange "C"-shaped sections formed to provide adequate backup for both wall and roof panels. Fabricate from 16 gage (1.5 mm) shop- painted roll-formed steel. 3. Flange and Sag Bracing: 1-5/8 x 1-5/8 inch (41 x 41 mm) angles fabricated from 16 gage (1.5 mm) shop-painted roll-formed steel. 4. Base or Sill Angles: Fabricate from 14 gage (1.9 mm) cold-formed galvanized steel sections. 5. Secondary endwall structural members, except columns and beams, shall be the manufacturer's standard sections fabricate~ from 14 gage (2.0 mm) cold-formed galvanized steel. D. Wind Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing using 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter threaded steel rods; comply with ASTM A 36/A36M or ASTM A 572/A572M, Grade D. Locate interior end bay bracing only where indicated. E. Bolts: Provide shop-painted bolts except when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofmg and siding panels. Provide zinc-plated or cadmiwn-plated bolts when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofmg and siding panels. F. Shop Painting: Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond. Follow procedures of SSPC-SP3 for power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP7 for brush-off blast cleaning, and SSPC-SPI for solvent cleaning. . 1. Prime structural steel primary and secondary framing members with the manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer. 2. Prime galvanized members, after phosphoric acid pretreatment, with manufacturer's standard zinc dust-zinc oxide primer. 2.04 ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS A. Face Sheets: Fabricate wall and roof panel face sheets to the profile or configuration indicated from 26 gage (0.55 mm), structural quality, Grade C, zinc-coated steel sheets. B. Lap-Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard factory-formed lap-seam roof panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to roof purlins using exposed fasteners and sealants. Form panels of26 gage (0.55 mm), Grade C, zinc-coated steel sheets. C. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. I. Provide metal-backed neoprene washers under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of panels. 96-099/8-96 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122 - 6 . . 2. Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners for exterior application and galvanized or cadmium-plated fasteners for interior applications. Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of roofmg or siding sheets by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 3. 4. D. Accessories: Provide the following sheet metal accessories factory-formed of the same material in the same frnish as roof and wall panels: I. Flashings. 2. Closers. 3. Fillers. 4. Metal expansion joints. 5. Ridge covers. 6. Fascias. E. Flexible Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded cellular rubber, self-extinguishing flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of roofmg and siding sheets. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. F. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive 100 percent solids grey polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. . G. Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone rubber sealant as recommended by the building manufacturer. H. Baked Enamel Finish: Provide the manufacturer's standard shop- applied baked enamel frnish to galvanized steel roof and wall panels, and related trim and accessory elements. For roofing and siding, apply finish coat on exterior facings and manufacturer's standard wash coat on reverse face. I. Clean galvanized steel with an alkaline compound, then treat with a zinc phosphate conversion coating, and seal with a chromic acid rinse. 2. Apply baked-on thermo-setting modified acrylic enamel to pretreated steel sheets, in one or more coats as standard with the manufacturer to achieve a minimum dry frlm thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). a. Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors. 2.05 SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide coated steel sheet metal accessories with coated steel roofrng and siding panels. B. Gutters: Form in 96 inch (2400 mm) long sections, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Size in accordance with SMACNA. Join sections with riveted and soldered or sealed joints. Provide expansion-type slip joint at center of runs. Furnish gutter supports spaced 36 inches (900 mm) on center, constructed of same metal as . 96-099/8-96 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122-7 gutters. Provide bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball strainers at outlets. finish to match rooffascia and rake. . C. Downspouts: form in 10 feet (3 m) long sections, complete with elbows and offsets. Join sections with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch (25 rom) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inch (1500 mm) on center in between. Finish to match wall panels. D. Roof Ventilators: Provide low-profile, ridge-type circular gravity roof ventilators, size and spacing indicated. Furnish with matching base, bird screen, hood, flashing, closures, and fittings. Finish to match roof panels. E. Wall Louvers: Provide louvers, size and design indicated, of 18 gage (\.2 mm) steel. Fold or bead blades at edges, set at an angle that excludes driving rains, and secure to frames by riveting or welding. Finish to match wall panels. 1. Provide vertical mullions for louvers 48 inches (1200 rom) and more in width, with one mullion for each 48 inches (1200 mrn) of width. 2. Provide flanges on interior face of frames where air intake or exhaust louvers are indicated to be connected with mechanically operated dampers or metal ductwork. 3. Provide 1/2 x 1/2 inch (13 x 13 rom) galvanized steel mesh bird screens in rewirable frames on exterior face of louvers. Secure with clips to ensure ease of removal for cleaning and rewiring. Fabricate screens and frames of same type metal as louvers. 2.06 FABRICATION A. General: Design prefabricated components and necessary field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly and disassembly. . 1. Fabricate components in such a manner that once assembled, they may be disassembled, repackaged, and reassembled with a minimum amount oflabor. 2. Clearly and legibly mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals. B. Structural Framing: Shop-fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with base plates, bearing plates, and other plates required for erection, welded in place. Provide holes for anchoring or connections shop-drilled or punched to template dimensions. 1. Shop Connections: Provide power riveted, bolted, or welded shop connections. 2. Field Connections: Provide bolted field connections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level base plates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use a nonshrinking grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than 7 days after placement. 96-099/8-96 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122 - 8 . . B. Purl ins and Girts: Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fascias. Locate and space wall girts to suit door and window arrangements and heights. Secure purlins and girts to structural framing and hold rigidly to a straight line by sag rods. C. Bracing: Provide diagonal rod or angle bracing in roof and sidewalls as indicated. 1. Movement-resisting frames may be used in lieu of sidewall rod bracing, to suit manufacturer's standards. 2. Where diaphragm strength of roof or wall covering is adequate to resist wind forces, rod or angle bracing will not be required. D. Framed Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to building structural frame. 3.02 ROOFING AND SIDING A. General: Arrange and nest sidelap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. Protect factory finishes from damage. 1. field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Provide weatherseal under ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather. . B. Roof Sheets: Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of ribbed or fluted roof sheets and between roof sheets and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to clean, dry surface of the weather side of fastenings on end laps, and on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, or fluted panels and elsewhere as needed to make roof sheets weatherproof to driving rams. C. Wall Sheets: Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete and elsewhere as necessary for waterproof mg. Handle and apply sealant and backup in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations. I. Align bottom of wall panels and fasten panels with blind rivets, bolts, or self- tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws. Fasten window and door frames with machine screws or bolts. When building height requires two rows of panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over wall panels at eave height. 2. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 3. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Install gutters, downspouts, ventilators, louvers, and other sheet metal accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting. Adjust operating mechanism for precise operation. . 96-099/8-96 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122 - 9 E. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames straight, plumb, and level. Securely anchor frames to building structure. Set units with 1/8 inch (3 rom) maximum clearance between door and frame at jambs and head and 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum between door and floor. Adjust hardware for proper operation. . F. Thermal Insulation: Install insulation concurrently with installation of roof panels in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths with both sets of tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor barrier. Locate insulation on underside of roof sheets, extending across the top flange of purl in members and held taut and snug to roofmg panels with retainer clips. Install retainer strips at each longitudinal joint, straight and taut, nesting with roof rib to hold insulation in place. G. Translucent Panels: Attach plastic panels to structural framing in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Provide end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) and side laps of not less than 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) corrugations for translucent roofing panels. 2. Align horizontal laps with adjacent roofmg and siding panels. 3. Seal intermediate end laps and side laps of translucent panels with translucent mastic. 4. Clean panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Cleaning and Touch-Up: Clean component surfaces of matter that could preclude paint bond. Touch up abrasions, marks, skips, or other defects to shop-primed surfaces with same type material as shop primer. END OF SECTION 13122 . 96-099/8-96 MET AL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13122 -10 . . SECTION 15100 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, VENTILATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE TO DIVISION 1: A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and all applicable requirements of Division 1 apply to all work herein. 1.02 SCOPE: A. The scope of the work included in this division of the Specifications shall include a complete mechanical system as shown On the drawings and as specified herein. This section shall establish minimum acceptable requirements unless specifically stated otherwise on the drawings. B. The Contractor shall provide all supervision, labor, equipment, machinery, material and any other items necessary for the installation and operation of a complete mechanical system. Small details not usually indicated on the drawings or specified, but which are necessary for the proper installation and operation of the mechanical system, shall be included in the work and in the Contractor's estimate the same as if specified herein or shown on the Drawings. While all items are specified in the singular, the Contractor shall furnish the proper number of items shown on the Drawings or required for a complete system. . c. The Contractor shall install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where the Drawings and Specifications conflict with manufacturer's recommendations, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to bring this to the attention of the Architect in a timely manner. 1.03 ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND CODES: A. The workmanship and materials covered in these Specifications shall conform to all ordinances and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to all applicable regulations of the City, County and State. B. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, connection and inspection fees as required for the complete installation of the mechanical system. He shall deliver to the Architect all certificates of inspections issued by the authority having jurisdiction. C. All work herein shall conform to all applicable laws, ordinances and regulations of the local utility companies. D. The work shall be in accordance with, but not limited to requirements of: I. National Fire Protection Association 2. National Safety Code 3. Standard Mechanical Code 1994 . 96-099/8-96 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, VENTILATION 15100-1 5. 6. 7. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers. (ASHRAE) Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association. (SMACNA) State Energy Code ASHRAE Standards 90.1-1989 . 4. 1.04 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: A. It shall be the Contractor's duty to examine and have thorough knowledge of the architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical and site work Drawings and Specifications. B. The commencement of work under this section, indicates that the Contractor has examined and has knowledge of the architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical and site work Drawings and Specifications. The failure of the Contractor to acquaint himself with all the available information shall not relieve him of any responsibility of performing the work properly. C. No additional compensation shall be allowed because of conditions that occur due to the Contractor's failure to become thoroughly familiar with all of the contract documents for this project, as described above, and with the job site.' D. It shall be the Contractor's duty to notify the Architect in a timely manner of any discrepancies, errors or omissions, ambiguities or conflicts which were known or discovered during the course of the preparation of the bid or the contract of work. E. Unless expressly stipulated, no additional allowance will be made in the Contractor's and/or manufacturer's favor by virtue of errors, ambiguities and/or omissions which were known to or which should have been known or discovered during the preparation of the bid estimate and directed to the Architect attention in a timely manner. . F. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement one another. Any material or labor called for in one but not the other, shall be furnished as if both were mentioned in the Specifications and shown on the drawings. Labor and material neither shown on the Drawings or mentioned in the Specifications, but are necessary for the completion and proper functioning of the systems, shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. G. The Drawings are diagrammatic and schematic and are intended to show the approximate location of equipment, piping and apparatus. Dimensions given, in figures, on the Drawings shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. All dimensions, whether scaled or in figures, shall be field verified. The Drawings are not to be used as the Contractor's fabrication drawings, and do not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to make his own fabrication and installation drawings. All equipment, duct, piping, etc. locations shall be coordinated with the other trades. 1.05 SPACE CONDITIONS: A. It shall be the Contractor's duty to verify that all apparatus, ductwork, piping, etc., shall fit into the available spaces in the building, and must be introduced into the building at such times and in such a manner as to not cause damage to the structure. 96-099/8-96 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING. VENTILATION 15100-2 . . B. Where minor deviations from the plans are required in order to conform to space limitations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner, and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. C. All equipment normally requiring service and maintenance shall be accessible. 1.06 COORDINA TION AND CONFLICTS: A. The Contractor shall co-ordinate his work so that it does not interfere with the work of the other trades. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that his work is installed in a timely manner. B. In the event that there is a discrepancy or conflict in the Plans and Specifications, it shall be the Contractor's duty to notify the Architect of this conflict or discrepancy prior to his acceptance of the project. 1.07 GUARANTEE: A. All equipment shall be started, tested, adjusted and placed satisfactory operating condition by the Contractor. All equipment shall be covered for the duration of the manufacturer's guarantee or warranty and the Contractor shall furnish the Owner with all manufacturer's guarantees and warranty information. B. Equipment furnished shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of acceptance. All compressors shall have a five year warranty from the manufacturer. . C. The Contractor shall furnish a letter addressed to the Owner outlining the guarantees and advising that the completed systems have been installed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications and that they are in proper operating condition. See the Products Section for any additional warranty requirements. D. 1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. The Contractor shall furnish at the time of request for final payment a brochure containing the following information as called for in the Specifications: 1. Letter of Guarantee 2. Manufacturer's parts data and service instructions on all items of equipment. 3. Manufacturer's guarantees and warranties. 1.09 SUBMITTALS: A. All substituted materials and equipment which the Contractor proposes to furnish shall be submitted for review within thirty days after the general contract has been let. Data shall be complete in all respects and shall be referenced, where applicable, to the unit identification shown on the Drawings. Substituted equipment is any item of equipment other than the first named item shown in the Specifications or on the Drawings. B. IF SUBMITTAL DATA ARE NOT RECEIVED WITHIN THE SPECIFIED TIME, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ALL EQUIPMENT EXACTLY AS SPECIFIED. . 96-099/8-96 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING. VENTILATION 15100-3 C. Where shop drawings are reviewed, said review does not in any way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility nor the necessity of furnishing material or performing work required by the contract Drawings and Specifications. . D. Submit for review complete data and drawings on the following items: I. Rooftop Air Conditioning Units 2. Exhaust Fans 3. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers w/NC and pressure drop data 4. Insulation 5. Spin-in Fittings 6. Insulated Flexible Round Duct 8. Duct Liner 9. Thermostats 10. Louvers 11. Gas Fired Unit Heaters 1.10 SUBMITTAL REVIEW: A. Submittal review is considered as general acceptance of the basic applicability of the substituted equipment. The Contractor is responsible for the installation of the substituted equipment within the given space. When the Contractor desires to use substituted equipment, he shall be responsible for producing his own coordinated working drawings, which depict the substituted equipment accommodated in the existing allocated space. Where the substituted equipment creates the need for alterations in any portion of the work depicted in the contract documents, it shall be the Contractor's duty to notify all the affected parties, and coordinate these items with all other trades. Further, it shall be the Contractor's duty to assume any additional cost to the contract created by the substituted equipment. . B. Substituted equipment is considered to be any equipment other than the first named item in the Specifications or on the Drawings. Each item of substitution shall be accompanied by a separate sheet listing the deviations from the Drawings and Specifications. C. The Contractor agrees that Shop Drawings Submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders, and that the purpose of the Shop Drawing Submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, and that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. D. The Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between Shop Drawings and Specifications are discovered either prior to or after Shop Drawings are processed by the Engineer, the design Drawings and Specifications shall control and shall be followed. 1.11 INSTRUCTIONS TO THE OWNER: A. The Contractor shall instruct the Owner or the Owner's representative in the proper operation of all equipment. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner all pamphlets and 96-099/8-96 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, VENTILATION 15 100-4 . . other literature furnished by the Manufacturer and explain the proper operating and maintenance procedures. 1.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION: A. It shall be the Contractor's duty to insure that all equipment shall operate quietly and be free from perceptible vibration. All equipment suspended from the structure shall have spring type vibration isolation. Small exhaust fans may have neoprene pad type isolators in place of springs. 1.13 FLASHING: A. All special flashing required for penetration of the roof surfaces by HV AC vents, pipes, roof caps, curbs, etc., shall be furnished by this Contractor for installation by the roofing Contractor. Flashing shall be in accordance with the Roofing Section of the Specifications unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1.14 MOTORS AND STARTERS: A. Motors shall be wound for the currents and voltage specified under the Electrical Plans and Specifications. Motor running currents shall not exceed the manufacturer's name plate full load amps. Motors other than hermetic type shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA Standards. All motors installed outdoors shall be enclosed, weatherproof type, unless installed within weatherproof equipment housing. . B. Furnish starters providing overload protection for each motor. The starters shall be installed under the Electrical Section of the Specifications. All overload elements shall be of the proper size to protect the motors. Starters are to include control transformers. The starters enclosures shall be NEMA I unless otherwise specified. 1.15 ELECTRICAL WORK: A. Motors, motor starters, controls, relays, contactors and switches required for proper control and operation of equipment covered under this section, except items specified to be furnished under the Electrical Section, shall be furnished by the Contractor under this Section of the Specifications. Devices which are a part of the power wiring circuit and which are not an integral part of the equipment shall be installed under the Electrical Section. B. Control wiring and all related devices for HV AC equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Mechanical Contractor. C. Power wiring, unless otherwise indicated, shall be furnished and installed under the Electrical Section. D. Devices, materials and installation shall conform to requirements of the Electrical Section, except as noted in This section. E. All motors, starters, and motor switches shall be for the voltage and phase shown on the Electrical Plans and Specifications. . 96-099/8-96 AIR CONDITIONING. HEATING. VENTILATION 15100-5 F. If a return air plenum is utilized by the HV AC system, all control wiring shall be in conduit unless the wiring is approved for installation in a return air plenum and is approved and accepted by the local authority having jurisdiction. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOFTOP HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNITS: A. Furnish and install a packaged combination, air cooled direct expansion mechanical cooling with gas heat, complete with automatic controls. B. The equipment shall be shipped completely factory assembled, pre-charged, piped and wired internally ready for field connections. In addition, the manufacturer shall test and operate the system at the factory prior to shipment. C. Roof Curb: Furnish and install a pre-fabricated, factory manufactured roof mounting curb. The curb is to be a full perimeter type, so that no portion of the base unit overhangs the curb. The curb shall fully mate with the rooftop unit to supply a watertight connection. The curb shall meet with all requirements of the National Roofing Contractor's Association. It shall be the Contractor's duty to furnish the required labor and materials to insure that the curb is level with respect to the finished floor, regardless if the roof is sloped or flat. The curb shall be flashed into the roof for a watertight seal. Where shown on the drawings, pad mounted rooftop units shall be furnished with side discharge curb. D. The compressors shall be hermetic or semi-hermetic, specifically designed for use in air cooled air conditioning systems. The compressors shall have factory supplied vibration isolators and crankcase heaters. In dual compressor units, each compressor shall have an independent refrigeration circuit. . E. The cooling system shall be protected by a fusible plug, high and low pressurestat, and a compressor motor overload device. F. The condenser coil shall consist of aluminum fms mechanically bonded to seamless copper or aluminum tubing. G. The heat exchanger shall be tubular in design and constructed of corrosion resistant aluminized steel. The heat exchanger shall carry a five year warranty. Burners shall be constructed of aluminized steel and be of the in-shot type. Heating controls shall consist of a redundant gas valve, intermittent pilot ignition system, limit switches, centrifugal switch and rollout switch. H. The evaporator fan shall be a forward curved, double inlet, centrifugal type, and shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. I. The condenser fanes) shall be direct drive, propeller type. The fan motors shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings and inherent current and thermal overload protection. All exposed portions of the fan and shaft shall be weatherproofed. 1. The unit frame shall be of welded construction. The unit casing shall consist of galvanized panels with baked-on outdoor acrylic finish. The entire bottom of the cabinet shall be provided with not less than I" thick fiberglass insulation. All internal unit components 96-099/8-96 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING. VENTILATION 15 100-6 . . wiring and unit inspection areas shall be completely accessible through weather proofed removable panels. K. Furnish enthalpy economizers with powered relief where indicated on the drawings. L. Units to be Carrier, Trane, York or Lennox. 2.02 EXHAUST FANS: A. Fumish and install exhaust fans in the location and of the size and capacity shown on the Drawings. All fans and duct shall be free from vibration and rattle. The motors shall be rubber mounted or the entire unit shall be isolated from the building with isolation pads. All dampers, fittings and accessories shall have no movement or objectionable noise under operating conditions. If any fan is noisy, in the opinion of the Architect, the Contractor shall take the necessary action, at no cost to the Owner, to reduce the noise to an acceptable level. B. All fans and ductwork installed on the roof shall be weatherproofed and water tight. C. In-line and ceiling mounted fans shall have an insulated housing. D. Roof mounted fans shall have a factory roof curb disconnect and bird screen. E. Approved manufacturers are Greenheck, Penn, Cook. . 2.03 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS: A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers and diffusers as scheduled on the Drawings. Co-ordinate the frame type with the ceiling type. B. Approved suppliers are Titus, Metalaire and Krueger. 2.04 AUTOMATIC FIRE DAMPERS: A. Dampers shall conform to the requirements of NFPA where called for in ducts and shall be constructed in accordance with NFPA 90A and bear the UL label. The fusible links shall be rated to release at 135 degrees F. Fire dampers located in diffusers and grille necks shall be of the type that do not restrict the inside duct area by more than 15%. All others shall be equal to Ruskin style B fire dampers and have the entire collapsed damper out of the air stream. Access panels shall be provided at each fire damper. The access panels shall have a rubber gasket, be air tight, and have a minimum size of 18" x 18" for duct work over 20" wide. B. Fire dampers shall have the same rating as the wall or floor/ceiling assembly that is penetrated. 2.05 MANUAL DAMPERS: A. Dampers shall be constructed of not less than 16 gauge metal. . 96-099/8-96 AIR CONDITIONING. HEATING, VENTILATION 15 100- 7 B. Volume dampers shall be equal to Ruskin CD 35 for rectangular duct and Ruskin CDR25 for round duct. . 2.06 INSULATION: A. All insulation including insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesives, shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings tested by the procedure recommended by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 or UL 723, and shall not exceed: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed 50 B. All accessories, including but not limited to adhesives, mastics, cements, and tapes, shall have the same component ratings as listed above. C. All products and their shipping cartons shall bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. D. Any treatment of jackets or facings to impart flame and smoke safety ratings shall be permanent. The use of water soluble treatment is prohibited. E. Insulation on all sheet metal supply and return air duct shall be 2" thick R = 5.6, Owens Coming Fiberglass all serviced, faced duct wrap with FRK vapor barrier, type 75. F. Duct shown on the drawings as being internally lined, shall be insulated with Owens Coming Fiberglass Aeroflex duct liner, 1" thick, type 100. G. Condensate pipe inside the building shall be insulated with 1/2" thick Armaflex. . 2.07 FIRESTATS: A. Fumish and install firestats in all recirculating air systems. The fixed temperature firestats shall be located in the return air stream prior to exhausting from the building or dilution by outside air, and have a setting of 136 degrees F. B. The reset of the thermostatic device shall be manual reset. C. The firestat shall be equal to Honeywell L4029E. 2.08 SMOKE DETECTORS: A. Electrical contractor shall furnish and wire all smoke detectors, and make connection to fire alarm panel. Mechanical Contractor shall install the detectors. Locate duct mounted smoke detectors in the supply air duct, prior to the first takeoff. On a detection of smoke, the detector shall stop the fan and send a signal to the fire alarm panel. All detectors shall have a remote status, test and trouble indicator light & remote reset. Location to be per Fire Marshall's Office. B. Detectors shall be furnished for all roof top units 2000 CFM and greater. 96-099/8-96 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, VENTILATION \5100-8 .. . 2.09 DUCTWORK: SHEET METAL A. All rectangular and rigid round ductwork shall be constructed of the best bloom galvanized sheet metal sheets, free from blisters and imperfections. The gauges, joints, bracing and supports shall be in strict accordance with SMACNA standards unless otherwise specified. B. Unless otherwise specified, ductwork shall be galvanized sheets of the following gauges: Greatest Dimension U.S. Gauge 0- 12 #26 13 - 30 #24 3 I - 54 #22 55 - 84 #20 85 and up #18 Plenums #18 Duct shall be Seal Class "C". C. Cross break flat sides of ducts. D. Duct hangers for horizontal duct shall not be over eight feet on center, # 16 gauge and one inch wide for ducts eighteen inches greatest dimension and smaller; #12 gauge and one and a half inches wide for larger ducts. Duct hangers shall extend to the bottom of the duct. . E. All flexible connectors shall be installed at points where fans connect to ductwork. The connector between the duct and the fan discharge shall be at least 4" wide, and be fabricated specifically for use as a flexible duct connector. All connections shall be made air tight and made so that the connector is undamaged when the joint is removed. F. Where ducts pass through floors or partitions, seal the openings on each exposed side with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x #20 gauge galvanized angles secured to the duct. G. Plenums and sheet metal partitions shall be # 18 gauge galvanized steel riveted or spot welded to 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" galvanized angles, spaced not over three feet on center. Seal all plenum joints air tight. 2.10 GAS FIRED UNIT HEATER: A. Heater shall have 80% thermal efficiency, power vented and have the following standard features: 1. Stainless steel type 409 heat exchanger and burners with 10 year warranty. 2. Single stage combination Gas Valve 3. Fan and Limit Safety Controls 4. Horizontal directional louvers 5. 24V control transformer B. Optional features shall include: . 96-099/8-96 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, VENTILATION 15100-9 I. 2. 3. Intermittent spark ignition 30 degree downturn nozzle Thermostat 24V . C. Approved manufacturers is Reznor, Hastings or Sterling. 2.11 LOUVERS: A. Furnish and install louvers where shown on plans or as described in schedules. Stationary blades shall be contained within a single 4" frame. Louver components (heads, jambs, sills, blades and mullions) shall be factory assembled by the louver manufacturer. Louver sizes too large for shipping shall be built up by the contractor from factory assembled louver sections to provide overall sizes required. B. Published louver performance data bearing the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Performance & Water Penetration must be submitted for approval prior to fabrication and must demonstrate pressure drop and water penetration equal to or less than the Ruskin model specified. C. Combination louvers shall have kynar finish. Color for combination louvers shall be selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart by the Architect. The color chart shall be submitted to the Architect for color selection prior to placing the order. D. Louvers shall be architectural style with continuous appearing stationary blades. Intermediate support mullions shall not interrupt blade appearance viewed from outside of louver. E. Combustion air louver blades shall be stamped 20 gauge galvanized steel. Frame shall be extruded aluminum. . F. Combination louver blades and frame shall be extruded aluminum. 2.12 CONTROLS: A. Equipment with multi stage capacity shall have thermostats with the same multi-stage capability. B. Thermostats shall be compatible with the RTU to be controlled. C. All thermostats shall be 24V. Furnish transformers as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DUCTWORK: A. Installation shall be rigid and the ductwork free from vibration and rattles when in operation. B. Ductwork shall be installed plumb with building lines unless otherwise noted. 96-099/8-96 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, VENTILATION 15 100-10 . . 3.02 SUPERVISION OF ELECTRICAL WORK: A. This Contractor shall be responsible for supervision of all wiring including control wiring of equipment included in this Section. 8. All equipment shall be furnished with the electrical characteristics shown on the Electrical Drawings. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with the Electrical Contractor prior to ordering the mechanical equipment. 3.03 EQUIPMENT: A. The work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and any relevant installation instructions from equipment manufacturers. B. All equipment shall be put into proper operating condition prior to turning the building over to the Owner. 3.04 PAINTING: A. Except as specified herein, all painting will be done by others. Leave work free from rust, dirt, grease and plaster. B. Equipment with a factory applied finish shall have scratches, chips, etc., primed and touched up with materials which will protect the surface and match adjacent areas. . 3.05 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENTS: A. Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall clean, oil, and grease all fan bearings, unless factory lubricated. B. All belts shall be tightened and made ready for testing. 3.06 TEST AND BALANCE: A. The work shall include testing, adjusting, measuring, and subsequent compliance for the values listed below and shown on the Drawings. B. Testing and balancing of the air distribution shall be performed by an independent test and balance contractor. C. Testing and balancing shall be performed in complete accordance with AABC National Standards, 1982, 4th edition for Total System Balance, as published by AABC. The systems shall be balanced to obtain to within 10%, the air quantities shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION 15100 . 96-099/8-96 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, VENTILATION 15100-11 . SECTION 15200 PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL \.01 REFERENCE TO DIVISION 1: A. Reference to overall project: The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and all applicable requirements of the overall project, except as otherwise amended apply to all work herein. 1.02 SCOPE: A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary labor and materjals for the complete installation of the plumbing system. B. Any appliances or materials obviously a part of the plumbing work and necessary for its proper operation, although not specifically mentioned herein, shall be furnished and installed as if called for in detail. C. Plumbing Contractor shall extend water pipe five feet from the building and connect to exterior piping brought to this point by exterior piping contractor. . D. The sanitary sewer pipe shall be extended from the building five feet and connected to exterior piping brought to this point by exterior piping contractor. 1.03 CODES: A. All materials and methods shall be in accordance with applicable codes, regulations and/or ordinances and meet approval of the local inspection authority having jurisdiction. Minimum code compliance shall be the 1994 Standard Plumbing Code. B. Obtain and pay for all permits required. C. Maintain a record set of drawings of all deviations. 1.04 DRA WINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: A. The submission of this bid indicates that the Contractor has examined and has a thorough knowledge of the architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and site work Drawings and Specifications. The failure of the Contractor to acquaint himself with all available information, shall not relieve him of any responsibility for performing his work properly. B. No additional compensation shall be allowed because of conditions that occur due to the Contractor's failure to become thoroughly familiar with all of the contract documents for this project, as described above, and with the job site. C. In the event that there is a discrepancy or conflict in the Plans and Specifications, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify the Architect of this conflict or discrepancy prior to his acceptance of the project. Unless expressly stipulated, no additional allowance . 96-099/8-96 PLUMBING 15200-1 will be made in the Contractor's and/or manufacturer's favor by virtues of errors, ambiguities and/or omissions which were known or which should have been known or discovered during the preparation of the bid estimate and directed to the Architect in a timely manner. . D. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement one another. Any materials or labor called for in one but not the other, shall be furnished as if both were mentioned in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. Labor and/or materials neither shown nor specified but necessary for the completion and proper functioning of the system, shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. E. The Drawings are diagrammatic and schematic and are intended to depict the approximate locations of equipment, piping, and apparatus. Dimensions given on the Drawings, in figures, shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. All dimensions, whether in figures or scaled, shall be verified in the field. 1.05 DEFINITIONS: A. Review: To give limited, conditional qualified permission to use materials, equipment or methods which are in strict compliance with the contract requirements. It does not mean unqualified acceptance or waiver of the original requirement. B. Approved Equal: To be equivalent, to possess the same performance qualities, capabilities and characteristics and to fulfill the intended function without any decrease in quality, durability, longevity or performance. C. Install: To place, fix in position, secure, anchor, in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise noted, including all necessary and proper appurtenances and labor so that the equipment or installation will function as specified and intended. . D. Furnish: To purchase and supply. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. The Contractor agrees that Shop Drawing Submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders; that the purpose of the Shop Drawing Submittal by the Contractor, is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept and that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which material and equipment he intends to furnish and install, and detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. B. The Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between Shop Drawings and Specifications are discovered either prior to or after Shop Drawing Submittals are processed by the Engineer, the design Drawings and Specifications shall be followed and shall control. C. Submit for review six copies of complete data and drawings for the following items: I. Plumbing Fixtures 2. Insulation 3. Type of Pipe for each service 96-099/8-96 PLUMBING 15200-2 . . 4. Cleanouts 5. Water Heaters 6. Valves Fixtures must be identified in the Shop Drawing Submittal with the same tag as shown on the Drawings. D. Submittal data will be reviewed by the Architect only after being reviewed in detail and. approved by the General Contractor. 1.07 GUARANTEE: A. All materials and workmanship shall be covered for defects for a period of one year, dating from official acceptance of the entire project by the owner. 1.08 AS-BUlL T DRAWINGS: A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish the Owner, upon completion of the work, a plumbing plan sepia showing all piping below grade as installed. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 WATER PIPING: A. All water piping shall be copper tube, ASTM B-88. Aboveground shall be type "L" hard drawn. Underground shall be type "L" soft annealed seamless copper tubing. Fittings shall be wrought with lead free solder joints. Outside buried piping shall be a minimum of twenty-four (24") inches. . B. Water pipe installed under paving and exterior to the building shall be type "K" copper with soldered joints. C. Water pipe in exterior walls or in attic space shall be installed on the warm side of the insulation. 2.02 SANITARY PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. Piping underground shall cast iron hub and spigot with lead or rubber joints. Piping aboveground may be no-hub with stainless steel clamps. B. Schedule 40 DWV PVC piping with solvent weld joints is acceptable for waste and vent piping if approved by the local inspection authority. C. Furnish appropriate connectors for connection of dissimilar piping materials. 2.03 FLASHING: A. Plumbing vents through the roof shall be flashed and counter flashed with sheet steel lead and made water tight. Plumbing contractor shall be responsible for flashing penetrations of plywood deck, shingled roof. . 96-099/8-96 PLUMBING 15200-3 2.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. Copper and Plastic - Grinnell CT-99-C . B. Cast Iron, steel Grinnell #260 2.05 VALVES: A. Gate valves for I" and smaller water pipe to be Watts B-6000 or equal. For pipe over I" Watts Series GV or equal. B. Approved Manufacturers Watts, Hammond, or Nibco. 2.06 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: A. Fixtures shall be complete with all faucets, traps, supplies and stops, trim etc. All fixtures shall have the manufacturer's Guarantee and be of first quality. 8. Fixtures are based on American Standard, unless otherwise noted. Other acceptable manufacturers are Kohler, and Eljer. 2.07 FIXTURES: A. Plumbing fixtures shall be as indicated on the drawings. 2.08 PIPE INSULATION: A. Insulation materials, including insulation, cloths, cements, jackets, facings, adhesives, mastics, tapes and any other accessories, shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, as tested by UL procedure UL 723, not exceeding flam.e spread rating of 25 and smoke developed rating of 50. Use of water soluble treatment to achieve these ratings is not acceptable. . B. Insulate domestic hot and cold water pipe with 1/2" thick fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jacket. Cellular foam insulation such as Rubatex or Armaflex is not acceptable for use on water pipe. 2.09 NA TURAL GAS SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PIPING: A. Arrange with local utility for gas service and meter. Pay all charges and fees with respect to service and connection. Meter locations shall be coordinated with the Local Gas Company. B. All piping shall be installed in accordance with the 1994 Standard Gas Code and all requirements of the local utility company and any local ordinances. Where there is a conflict between the Standard Code and local ordinances, the local ordinances shall prevail. C. Provide shut-off cocks and pipe unions at each piece of equipment. Piping shall be installed with drip pockets. 96-099/8-96 PLUMBING 15200-4 . . D. Gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel. Joints shall be made with malleable iron screwed fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATING: A. Perform all necessary excavating and backfilling for plumbing piping. B. Any existing pavement or landscaping that is disturbed by the new plumbing piping shall be repaired to the owner's satisfaction. 3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS: A. Make all water and air tests of the plumbing systems in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Architect or his designated representative. Conduct these tests at such places and times to permit work to proceed as uninterrupted as possible. All tests shall be performed prior to the piping being covered or concealed. B. Test water piping at a hydrostatic pressure of 125 psi and hold for twenty four hours. C. Test drainage and vent piping at ten feet of water column. 3.03 STERlLlZA TION: . A. The sterilization process shall comply with all governing regulations and with the sterilization procedures recommended by the American Water Association. The chlorination process may be simplified by first flushing the system thoroughly clean, then with water containing a minimum of 50 parts per million of chlorine, allowing this to stand for twenty four hours, then thoroughly flushing. After sterilization and final flushing, the local health authority is to be notified, and their approval obtained in writing. END OF SECTION 15200 . 96-099/8-96 PLUMBING 15200-5 . PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description: SECTION 16050 ELECTRICAL GENERAL 1. Provide all materials, tools, and labor for a complete electrical installation as shown on the contract documents and indicated in the specifications. 2. Procure all permits and licenses. 3. Coordinate the electrical installation with the following: a. Architect b. Contractors of other trades. c. Local Electrical and Building Inspectors, or the authority having jurisdiction. d. Local Utility companies serving the project. B. Related Documents: . 1.02 ABBREVIA TIONS Electrical, "E", drawings. All working drawings included in the contract documents. Specifications of the following divisions/sections: a. Division 1: General Requirements b. Division 3: Concrete c. Section 07270: Firestopping d. Division 11: Equipment e. Division 15: Mechanical I. 2. 3. A. The following abbreviations are used throughout Division 16 specifications: . 96-099/8-96 1. 2. AFF: ANSI: ASTM: HVAC: IEEE: IES: ITL: NEC: NECA: NEMA: NFPA: NIC: UL: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Above Finished Floor American National Standards Institute American Society for Testing and Materials Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society Independent Testing Laboratories National Electrical Code National Electrical Contractor Association National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Fire Protection Association Not in Contract Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. ELECTRICAL GENERAL 16050-1 A. "Provide" means to furnish and install. . 1.03 DEFINITIONS 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Comply with the following codes and published standards which are applicable to the electrical installation of this project: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, 1993 edition 2. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code, 1988 edition 3. Standard Building Code, 1991 edition 4. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical Construction Directory ( "green book" ) 5. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical General Information ( "white book" ) 6. NFPA 72 1.05 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Use materials that are new and, where UL or ITL has established standards, listed and/or labeled. B. Organize and execute work so that finished appearance is neat; mechanical, plumb when vertical and level when horizontal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.0 1 MATERIALS A. Provide equipment, products and materials shown on the drawings, as specified in the specifications or added by addendum. . 2.02 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Refer to Section 01630. 2.03 CONCRETE A. Refer to Division 3 specifications. 2.04 PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS A. 3/4"x size indicated on the drawings, AID grade, paint two coats gray enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 VISIT TO SITE A. Prior to submitting bid, visit site and become familiar with the existing conditions relating to Division 16 work. 96-099/8-96 ELECTRICAL GENERAL 16050-2 . . 3.02 PROTECTION OF MA TERlALS A. Cover fixtures', equipment and apparatus for protection against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage before and during construction. B. Keep all conduit and other openings protected against entry of foreign matter. C. Restore the original finish, including shop coat, of fixtures, apparatus or equipment that has been damaged prior to substantial completion. 3.03 COORDINA nON A. Prior to rough-in of any materials, coordinate with subcontractors the physical clearances for and sequencing of Division 16 work as it interfaces with and relates to architectural, structural, plumbing and HV AC systems. 3.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA SUBMITTALS A. Submit as prescribed in section 01300 shop drawings and/or product data for the electrical equipment and materials listed below. Check for compliance with contract documents and certify compliance by affixing Electrical Contractor's "Approved" stamp and signature. . 1. Shop drawings and product data: a. Switchgear, Distribution Panelboards, and Panel boards b. Life Safety System (fire alarm) 2. Product data only: a. Conduits, Couplings, Connectors, and Fittings b. Wiring Devices and Coverplates (receptacles, switches, wallbox dimmers) c. Fuses and Circuit Breakers d. Junction Boxes, Outlet Boxes, and Floor Boxes e. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps f. Disconnect Switches, Motor Starters, and Motor Switches g. Wire and Cable h. Time Clocks, Relays, Contactors, and Photocells Refer to respective sections for submittal instructions where instructions have been prescribed. B. C. Obtain shop drawing review by engineer before purchase of any equipment requiring shop drawing submittals. D. Include with the electrical distribution equipment submittal a plan view of each electrical room. Use 112" = l' scale and show the submitted equipment laid out in each room. Label each piece of equipment and indicate the required maintenance clearance by a dashed line. 3.05 CERTIFICATION AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit the following certifications and test reports to the Architect in the format and at the time prescribed in Section 01410: . I. Test Reports: 96-099/8-96 ELECTRICAL GENERAL 16050-3 a. b. Megger test for all feeders conductors. Life Safety System (fire alarm) . 3.06 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit the following maintenance manuals and operating instructions to the Architect as prescribed in Section 01700: I. Life Safety System (fire alarm) B. Use a separate three ring binder for each maintenance manual and include wmng diagrams, maintenance instructions, parts list, maintenance tools list, manufacturer's and nearest dealer's name, addresses and telephone numbers. Organize into sections with index thumb-tab markers. C. Use a three ring binder for operating instructions with a separate thumb-tab in each section for each system or major item. Include in the instructions start-up, operation sequence, control, shut-down, safety features and seasonal adjustments. 3.07 OPERATIONAL TEST A. At the time of the substantial completion job observation, perform a test of all light fixtures, electrical systems, equipment, machinery and appliances, in the presence of the Architect or his representative, which demonstrates that all of Division 16 systems are operational. A. During all job observations, provide an electrician with tools and volt/ammeter to accompany Architect and/or his representative. . 3.08 JOB OBSERVATION ASSISTANCE B. Remove any covers, trims or wiring devices and open all cabinets, disconnect switches or other equipment served electrically and designated by the Architect or his representative. C. Restore removed or opened equipment to its installed or closed position after the job observation. 3.09 OWNER INSTRUCTION AND ASSISTANCE A. At substantial job completion job observation, instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the operation, sequencing, maintenance and safety/emergency provisions of the electrical systems. 3.10 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. Record on one set of electrical drawings all changes, deviations and underground conduits. Transfer same to a reproducible sepia and deliver same to architect as per Section 01720. END OF SECTION 16050 96"099/8-96 ELECTRICAL GENERAL 16050-4 . . SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description: 1. Provide continuous conduit systems - beginning at the service panelboard, to all distribution equipment and to every outlet and piece of electrical equipment with conduits, couplers, supports, hangers, fittings, bushings and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General. 1.02 SUBMITI ALS A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID STEEL AND INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT . A. Conduit: 1. Rigid ferrous steel pipe, hot-dipped galvanized or sherardized with smooth interior. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Allied b. Triangle c. Wheatland B. Couplings and Connectors: 1. Couplings: a. Hot-dipped galvanized or sherardized ferrous steel, threaded. 2. Connectors: a. Steel or malleable iron, threaded with throat bushing, lock nuts and, where prescribed, grounding lugs. 3. Erickson: a. Malleable iron, concrete tight. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Appleton b. Crouse Hinds c. Steel City d. Thomas & Betts . 96-099/8-96 RACEWAYS 16 110-1 C: Joint Compound: 1. 2. Anti-seize lubricant with rust and corrosion inhibitors and colloidal copper. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Thomas & Betts . D. Expansion Fittings: 1. Steel with three cap nuts, phenolic bushing, packing ring, metallic copper grounding ring and copper bonding jumper. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Crouse Hinds "Xl" b. O.Z. Gedney" AX" or "DX" c. Appleton "Xl" 2.02 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING A. Conduit: 1. Thin wall ferrous steel tubing, hot-dipped galvanized, smooth interior, square and reamed ends. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Allied b. Wheatland c. Triangle B. Couplings and Connectors: . 1. Couplings: a. Steel, compression type, installed where exposed to moisture. b. Steel, setscrew type, when installed indoors. 2. Connectors: a. Steel, compression type with nylon insulated bushings, locknuts, and where prescribed, grounding lugs, installed where exposed to moisture. b. Steel, setscrew type with nylon insulated bushings, locknuts, and where prescribed, grounding lugs, installed indoors. C. Expansion Fittings: 1. Steel with three cap nuts, phenolic bushing, packing ring, metallic copper grounding ring and copper bonding jumper. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Crouse Hinds "Xl" b. O.Z. Gedney" AX" or "DX" c. Appleton "XJ" 2.03 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Conduit: 1. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) , resistant to crushing, moisture, low temperature, and corrosive agents in standard trade sizes. 96-099/8-96 RACEWAYS 16110-2 . . B. Couplings and Connectors: 1. Couplings: Schedule 40 PVC. 2. Connectors: Schedule 40 PVC with lock nuts. C. Expansion Fittings: 1. Schedule 40 PVC with grommeted inner cylinder and outer sleeve. D. Joint Cement: 1. PVC solvent. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carlon 2. Cantex 3. Wheatland 2.04 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT A. Conduit: 1. Galvanized steel single strip, interlocked, smooth inside and out, with liquid-tight flexible polyvinyl chloride outer jacket. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Carlon b. Wheatland c. Allied . 2. B. Fittings: 1. Threaded corrosion-resistant steel or malleable iron with insulated throat bushing, liquid tight, locknuts and external ground lugs. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Appleton b. O.Z. Gedney c. Thomas & Betts 2.05 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Conduit: 1. Galvanized steel single strip, interlocked, smooth inside and out. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. AFC b. Alflex c. General Cable . 96-099/8-96 RACEW A YS 16110-3 B. Fittings: 1. Threaded corrosion-resistant steel or malleable iron with insulated throat bushing and lock nuts. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Appleton b. O.Z. Gedney c. Thomas & Betts . 2.06 SEALS A. Fire Rated Seals: 1. Flanged three hour fire and smoke stop. 2. Acceptable Products: a. O.Z. Gedney "CFSF" B. Thruwall Seals: 1. Malleable iron, hot-dipped galvanized sleeve and sealing ring with pressure rings and sealing grommets. Acceptable Products: a. O.Z. Gedney "FSK" and "WSK" b. Spring City "WEP" or "WDP" c. Thunderline Link Seal 2. PART 3 - EXECUTION . 3.01 APPLICATIONS A. Provide Rigid Metal Conduit or Intermediate Metallic Conduit for service entrance, feeders, in slab on grade, areas where exposed to moisture (all exposed conduit in the pool area), exposed on exterior surfaces, and exposed interior from floor to 10'-0" or where exposed to physical abuse. B. Provide Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) for interior power circuits, branch circuits and system circuits in walls, elevated concrete slabs ( those not on grade), plenums, attics or exposed above 10'-0", where not exposed to moisture. C. Provide Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit for service ground, in slab on grade, in direct contact with earth, exposed in corrosive environments above 10'-0" above floor, or service entrance when encased in concrete. D. Provide Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit for final connecting link (minimum of 12", maximum of 36") to the following: 1. Plumbing equipment. 2. Kitchen equipment. 3. Exterior Mechanical equipment. 4. Connections to all equipment or light fixtures in the pool area. 96-099/8-96 RACEW A YS 16110-4 . . E. Provide Flexible Metal Conduit for: 1. Final connection link (minimum of 12", maximum of 36" ) to: a. Motors. b. Transformers. c. Mechanical equipment. 2. Connections between junction boxes and accessible recessed lighting fixtures. 3.02 CONDUIT SUPPORT A. Intervals: Maximum 10 feet on center and within 3 feet of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. B. Conduits 3/4" and smaller: . 1. Method a. When single conduit: Attach directly to building structure or suspend with 1/4" rod. b. When multiple parallel and adjacent conduits and: 1) When horizontal at structure: Attach directly to structure or to support framing attached to structure. 2) When horizontally suspended: Attach to support framing, suspended from building structure. 3) When vertical: Attach to support framing attached to building structure, wall structure or suspended from building structure. Conduit attachment: a. When direct to structure or single conduit suspended: Spring steel friction, spring steel latching or clamped with bolts or screws. b. When on support framing: Two section bolted conduit clamp. Structural steel attachment: a. When single conduit: Spring steel friction, clamp with bolt or bolted. b. When hanger rod: Clamp with bolt or bolted. Concrete attachment: Steel preformed conduit clamp. Attach clamp with expansion anchor installed in drilled hole or with power fastening anchor designed to meet concrete specification. In either case, maintain design support of 300% or greater of load. Wood attachment: Wood screws or bolted with design support of 300% or greater of load. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. For 1" or larger: . 96-099/8-96 1. Method: a. When single conduit: Attach directly to building structure or suspend with threaded rod. b. When multiple parallel and adjacent conduits: Attach to support framing attached to building structure, wall structure or suspended from building structure. Conduit attachment: a. When single conduit: Bolted clamp. b. When on support framing: Two section bolted conduit clamp. Structura1 steel attachment: Beam clamps with bolts or bolted directly to steel. 2. 3. RACEW A YS 16110-5 4. Concrete attachment: Provide preset insert prior to concrete pour or coordinate drill locations with Architect. When drilling provide expansion anchors. In either case, maintain design support of 300% or greater of load. Wood attachment: Wood screws or bolted with design support of 300% or greater of load. . 5. D. Framing: 1. Attachment, suspension and bearing members capable of supporting 300 % of load. 3.03 INST ALLA nON A. For conduit layout follow, generally, the diagrammatic layout shown on plans. Provide offsets and routing changes to avoid structural, architectural or equipment elements. B. Provide 1/2" minimum size conduit. C. Conceal all conduit except where shown to be exposed. Install conduit concealed above a lay-in ceiling with clearance to allow easy removal of ceiling panels. D. Install exposed conduit parallel with or perpendicular to building walls at greatest height possible. Paint exposed conduit with two coats of color directed by Architect. E. Extend homeruns from outlets shown to panel designated. Do not combine homeruns. F. Use benders designed for the size and type of conduit. Limit each bend to 90 degrees or less with a radius 10 times conduit diameter or greater for telephone system and 6 times conduit diameter or greater for all other systems. . G. Provide insulated bushings at each end of every conduit run. H. Provide joint compound on rigid steel conduit and intermediate metallic conduit joints. 1. Provide an Erickson type coupling where two segments of a conduit run must be joined and neither can be rotated. J. Close all conduit ends during construction with plastic conduit plugs. K. Install conduit no greater than 1" trade size in concrete slabs. Route conduit between top and bottom reinforcing steel and space parallel runs a minimum of 3" apart. 1. Install conduit above water and steam piping where possible. M. Maintain grounding of metallic raceways with clean and tight connections. Provide grounding conductor in plastic and flexible conduit. N. Provide ground lugs on all conduit connectors to service equipment enclosures. O. Provide grounding wedge lugs or locknuts designed to bite metal on conduit connectors to panel cabinet pull boxes. 96-099/8-96 RACEW A YS 16110-6 . . P. Seal all conduits which extend from the interior to the exterior of the building to prevent the circulation of air. Q. Provide a thruwall waterproof seal on each conduit that penetrates a wall at a below grade level. R. Provide an expansion fitting in each conduit crossing a building expansion joint and locate the fitting at the joint. Also provide expansion finings in building conduits exceeding 100 feet at intervals of 100 feet. S. Provide a fire rated seal on each conduit that penetrates any floor or fire rated partition. Match seal rating to floor or partition rating. T. Provide an explosion-proof seal in each conduit run where it enters and leaves a hazardous location. U. v. w. x. . Y. Where liquids are present, form drip loops in liquid-tight flexible conduit to prevent liquid from running into connections. Blowout and swab all conduit clear of trash and water prior to pulling wire. Provide a nylon pullcord in all empty conduits. In mechanical equipment rooms where a piece of equipment is located more than 2 feet away from walls or columns, serve equipment from under floor or provide a vertical conduit, minimum 1", attached to floor and ceiling with conductors entering and exiting conduit through conduit bodies. Coordinate conduit supports in precast or cast-in-place concrete prior to pour. 3.04 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION . 96-099/8-96 A. Where exterior of building bury conduit a minimum of 30" below finished grade. B. Encase conduit in 3" concrete envelope where it passes under driveways, roadways or entrances to parking lots. C. When under interior slab on grade seal vapor barrier around conduit penetration. END OF SECTION OF 16110 RACEW A YS 16110-7 . SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description: 1. Provide continuous color coded conductors beginning at service point to distribution equipment and to each outlet and each piece of electrical energy consuming equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 16420: Service Entrance 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.01 CONDUCTORS A. Copper Conductors: 1. Soft drawn annealed copper, 98 % conductivity, without weld, splice or joint throughout its length; uniform in cross section without flaws, scales, or other imperfections with THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Anaconda b. Phelps Dodge c. Pirelli Cable d. Senator e. Southwire f. Triangle B. Aluminum Conductors: 1. Soft drawn, compacted construction, XHHW insulation, 250 mcm and larger. 2. Acceptable Product: a. A1can 'STABILOY". b. Pirelli 'XLPE" c. Southwire . 96-099/8-96 CONDUCTORS 16120-1 C. Configuration: 1. No. 10 and smaller: 2. No.8 and larger: Solid Stranded . D. Insulation - 600 Volts: 1. 2. No.6 and smaller: No.4 and larger: THHN, THWN XHHW E. Jacket Color: 1. 2. No.8 and smaller: No.6 and larger: Uniform colored jacket Black F. Jacket Markings: 1. Voltage 2. Insulation type 3. Conductor Size 4. Conductor type 2.02 COLOR CODING TAPE A. Vinyl 3/4" wide with uniform color and adhesive backing. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: . 1. Brady 2. 3M 3. Plymouth 4. Thomas & Betts 2.03 SPLICE AND TAP MATERIALS A. No. 10 and smaller: 1. Crimp type: Cylindrically shaped conductor sleeve for crimping copper conductors. Insulated with nylon or plastic cover. 2. Twist on: Inner spiral spring or threads for holding and making electrical contact between copper conductors and with outer long skirted insulated cover of nylon or plastic. B. No.8 and Larger: 1. Set-screw or bolted type: Metal connectors for joining copper to copper, with bolts or set-screws to apply pressure to conductors. Insulate with nylon or plastic cover or with electrical tape. 2. Pressure type: Metal connectors for joining copper to copper, copper to aluminum, or aluminum to aluminum with power operated crimping tool. Insulate with nylon or plastic cover or with electrical tape. 96-099/8-96 CONDUCTORS 16120-2 . . C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AMP 2. Bumdy 3 . Ideal 4. Ilsco 5. Panduit 6. 3M 7. Thomas & Betts 2.04 CONDUCTOR TERMINALS A. Copper conductors: High conductivity copper terminal designed to hold conductor and make electrical contact by bolt, setscrew or power crimp and with spade to match equipment receiving conductor. B. Aluminum conductors: High conductivity terminal designed to hold aluminum conductor and make electrical contact by crimping and with spade to match equipment receiving conductor in physical shape, physical size and material. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Bumdy Ideal Ilsco Panduit Thomas & Betts 2.05 CONDUCTOR HARNESS A. Plastic or nylon self-locking straps (commonly referred to as zip-ties or tie-wraps). B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Panduit 2. Thomas & Betts 2.06 WIRE PULLING LUBRICANT A. Lubricating, insulating and chemically neutral to conductors, conductor insulation and conduits. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Greenlee 2. Ideal 3. Polywater . 96-099/8-96 CONDUCTORS 16120-3 2.07 ELECTRICAL TAPE A. Vinyl plastic; moisture tight, resistant to ultraviolet radiation, alkalies, acids and corrosion; chemically neutral to conductors and conductor insulation; fire retardant; and single thickness dielectric strength equal to or greater than 1O,000V. . B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Scotch/3M 2. Plymouth 2.08 ALUMINUM OXIDE INHIBITING COMPOUND A. Compound shall inhibit the formation of aluminum oxide on clean aluminum conductors without deteriorating the conductors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bumdy 2. Thomas & Betts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the number of copper conductors indicated with a minimum of two (2) power conductors and one ground conductor being installed in each conduit not prescribed to be emptY. Aluminum conductors may be used only where explicitly indicated. . B. Minimum Conductor Size: No. 12 C. Complete installation of raceway run prior to pulling conductors. D. Install insulated bushings in conduit fittings prior to pulling conductors. E. Use wire pulling lubricants to reduce stress on conductors. Pull all conductors of a run together. Use pulling methods which do not damage the raceway or conductors. F. Color Coding: 1. No.8 and smaller: Uniform colored jacket with respective color below. 2. No.6 and larger: Two wraps of tape applied within 6" of each conductor end with respective color below. 3. Conductor Color Code: Phase A Black Brown Black Phase B Red Orange Blue Phase C Blue Yellow Orange (208V) 208Y/120V 480Y /277V 240D/120V 96-099/8-96 CONDUCTORS 16120-4 . . Neutral White I Gray I White Ground Green Isolated Ground Green w/ White Stripe 4. For Different Voltages in Same Enclosure: Use a colored stripe (not green) on one neutral to differentiate between systems. Keep stripe color consistent throughout project. G. At outlets leave a minimum of 12" of conductor ends at each fixture outlet, device outlet and equipment outlet box. H. Conductor Terminals: 1. Single: Use terminals on conductors no. 8 and larger where equipment receiving conductors do not have conductor lugs with set-screw(s) 2. Multiple: Install terminals on conductors where more than one conductor is connected to a single lug. I. Route conductors in all switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers and terminal cabinets parallel to or at right angle to the enclosure's sides and tops. Group and harness conductors in those enclosures using conductor harness straps. J. Prior to energizing conductor, megger test conductors for continuity and shorts. Correct deficiencies prior to energizing. . K. Apply aluminum oxide inhibiting compound to the ends of all conductors prior to installing terminals or installing in mechanical lugs. 1. Tighten all bolted connections in and to mechanical lugs to torque rating specified per manufacturers recommendations. M. Tighten all conductors with mechanical connections, torqued in accordance with the conductor and/or connector manufacturers markings as well as the values referenced in the following publications: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical Construction Directory (Green Book). 2. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical General Information (White Book). END OF SECTION 16120 . 96-099/8-96 CONDUCTORS 16120-5 . SECTION 16130 BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description: 1. Provide electrical boxes or, where prescribed, conduit bodies for devices, outlets, splice connection points, raceway junction and conductor pulling points complete with supports, covers and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General. C. Standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories labeled and listed for application specified. 1.02 SUBMITTALS . A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR OUTLET BOXES AND EXTENSIONS A. Galvanized steel, UL listed for application with conduit knockouts and threaded holes for mounting devices and/or coverplates. B. Minimum Sizes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Single Device: Gang Device: Octagonal : Square: 3"H x 2"W x 2"D 3"H x 2"W (per gang) x 2"D 4"W x 1-1/2"D 4" Square x 1-l/2"D C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Appleton 2. Raco 3. Steel City 4. American Electric . 96-099/8-96 BOXES 16130-1 2.02 CONCRETE BOXES A. Galvanized steel for encasing in concrete with conduit knockouts and threaded holes for mounding devices and/or coverplates. . B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Appleton 2. Crouse Hinds 3. Raco 4. Steel City 2.03 MASONRY BOXES A. Galvanized steel for mounting in masonry walls with conduit knockouts and threaded holes for mounding devices and/or coverplates. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Appleton 2. Raco 3. Steel City 4. Crouse Hinds 2.04 CAST BOXES A. Cast malleable iron, cadmium/zinc plated fInish, NEMA 3R, threaded conduit entries, neoprene coverplates gasket and threaded holes for mounting devices and/or coverplates. . B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Appleton 2. Crouse Hinds 3. Raco 4. Steel City 2.05 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Dry Locations: Galvanized sheet steel, NEMA 1, welded seams and cover held by stainless steel screws or bolts. B. Damp or Wet Locations: Cast malleable iron with corrosion-resistant fmish, NEMA 3R, threaded conduit entries, neoprene coverplate gasket, and coverplate held by stainless steel bolts. . C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Appleton 2. Crouse Hinds 3. Hoffman 4. Kill ark 96-099/8-96 BOXES 16130-2 . . 2.06 FLOOR BOXES A. As specified on the drawings for particular application. 2.07 PLASTIC BOXES A. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl chloride B. Acceptable Manufacturers: PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Carlon 2. Queen City 3. Raco 3.01 DEVICE APPLICATIONS A. Boxes for switches, receptacles, dimmers (designed for device box mounting) and future devices: . 1. For dry Locations: a. When recessed: 1) For construction other than concrete or masonry, use interior outlet box. 2) For concrete: Concrete box 3) For masonry: Masonry box or square interior outlet box with masonry extension. b. When surface: Cast box For Damp or Wet Locations: (all exposed wiring boxes in the pool area) a. When recessed: 1) For concrete: Concrete box 2) For masonry: Masonry box or square interior outlet box with masonry extension. b. When surface: Cast box For hazardous Areas: Hazardous area boxes 2. 3. 3.02 GENERAL APPLICATIONS A. For lighting fixtures, equipment connections, pull boxes for conduit 1" and smaller, and junction boxes for conduits 1" and smaller. . 96-099/8-96 1. Recessed Interior Box: a. For construction other than concrete or masonry, use octagonal or square interior outlet box. b. For concrete: Concrete box c. For masonry: Concrete box or square interior box with masonry extension. Box Above an Accessible Ceiling: Octagonal or square interior outlet box. Exposed Interior Box: a. Above 7'-0": Octagonal or square interior outlet box or conduit body. 2. 3. BOXES 16130-3 4. b. 7' -0" and below: Cast box or conduit body.. Exterior Box: a. When recessed in vertical element or ceiling: 1) For concrete: Concrete box 2) For masonry: Concrete box or square interior box with masonry extension. 3) For construction other than concrete or masonry, provide square interior box. b. Flush mounted in ground: Cast junction box c. Exposed: Cast box or conduit body. . B. Hazardous Locations: Hazardous area box C. Integrally Mounted Boxes: Boxes which are an integral part of an equipment assembly from the manufacturer and are UL listed for the application may be used in lieu of the boxes prescribed above. 3.03 JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES (conduits larger than 1") A. Junction boxes or conduit bodies where junction is exposed. 3.04 SUPPORT A. General: Support each box from the building structure independently of conduit as follows, utilizing a support system capable of carrying 300% of load. 3.05 INSTALLATION 1. Surface: a. Structural Steel: Bolted directly to steel member or bolted to spring clip which is clipped to steel member. b. Concrete: Power driven fastener or bolt to expansion anchor set in drilled hole. c. Wood: Screw or bolt to wood. Suspended: Bolted to engineered spring clip which is clipped to suspended ceiling system. Recessed: a. Concrete: Set in concrete prior to pour. b. Masonry: Set or cut into masonry during masonry erection. Grout in around box. c. Drywall: Attach directly to stud or joist by screw or bolt; or directly to a galvanized steel support which is attached directly at each end to stud or joist by screw or bolt. d. Earth: Compact earth around box . 2. 3. A. Outlet locations indicated on the plans are approximate. Coordinate and determine the exact location at the building. The architect reserves the right to shift the exact location of any outlet 10 feet before it is permanently installed. B. Install boxes plumb when vertical, level when horizontal and flush adjacent surface when recessed. 96-099/8-96 BOXES 16130-4 . . c. Where an outlet occurs in an architectural feature, center the outlet in same. D. Where the mounting height of a wall outlet is not shown, mount at height directed by Architect. Mounting heights are from finished floor to box centerline. E. The contractor may, with Architect's approval, slightly vary an outlet's mounting height so that the box's top or bottom occurs at a masonry joint. F. Where outlets at different levels are shown adjacent, install them on the same vertical line. G. Space wall switch outlets with first gang box 4" from door trim on the installed strike side. H. Locate boxes and conduit bodies so that covers are accessible and removable. I. Limit masonry cuts from outlet boxes so that coverplate covers the cut. J. Provide plaster rings for all boxes set in plaster walls or ceilings. K. Match configuration to application. 1. Utilize box size (capacity) based upon NEC. . M. For devices, utilize boxes designed to support the device independently of coverplate and so install. N. Cover unused conduit openings with plastic covers for sheet steel boxes and threaded plugs for cast boxes. O. Prior to pulling conductors or installing devices, clean boxes of dirt, debris and water. P. Cover all boxes and secure with screws or bolts. Q. Install pullboxes to limit pulling distance and/or pulling bends. END OF SECTION 16130 . 96-099/8-96 BOXES 16130-5 . SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description: 1. Provide switches, receptacles, dimmers and other strap mounted wiring devices as shown on the drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. Section 16050: Section 16130: EIectrical General Boxes C. Standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories listed and labeled. 2. NEMA ( configurations as listed) 1.02 SUBMITTALS . A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturers of Switches, Receptacles, and Coverplates: 1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Hubbell Incorporated, Wiring Device Division; referred to as Hubbell. 2. Products of manufacturers listed below meeting indicated standards and specified manufacturer's product data characteristics, except as modified below, are acceptable for use, subject to prior approval of proposed product list. a. Arrow-Hart b. Bryant c. Leviton d. Pass and Seymour/Legrand e. Slater 3. Manufacturers product numbers listed below do not include color selection. Refer to Section 16140, 2.06 for device colors B. Acceptable Manufacturers of Wallbox Dimmer Switches: . 1. 2. Lutron, Nova Series. Lightolier, Neptune Momentium Series. 96-099/8-96 WIRING DEVICES 16140-1 2.02 RECEPTACLES A. Duplex _ 15A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, side/back wiring with ground screw, NEMA 5-15R. . 1. Hubbell # 5262. B. Duplex - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, side/back wiring with ground screw, NEMA 5-20R. 1. Hubbell # 5362. C. Single - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with ground screw, NEMA 5-20R. 1. Hubbell # 5361. D. Duplex Isolated Ground - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with insulated/isolated ground screw, NEMA 5-20R. 1. Hubbell # IG5362. E. Duplex Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, pigtail wiring, thru wiring to protect 4 receptacles downstream, test and reset buttons, NEMA 5-20R. 1. Hubbell # GF5362. . F. Duplex Twist Lock - 15A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with ground screw, NEMA L5-15R. 1. Hubbell # 4700. G. Duplex Isolated Ground Twist Lock - 15A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with insulated/isolated ground screw, NEMA LS-15R. 1. Hubbell # IG4700. H. Single Isolated Ground Twist Lock - 20A: 2-pole, 3-wire, 125 Volts, sidelback wiring with insulated/isolated ground screw, NEMA L5-20R. . 1. Hubbell # IG2301A. 2.03 SWITCHES A. Single Pole Single Throw Toggle: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC, maintained contacts, quiet operating toggle, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1221. 96-099/8-96 WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 . . B. Double Pole Single Throw Toggle: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC, maintained contacts, quiet operating toggle, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1222. C. Three Way Single Throw Toggle: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC, maintained contacts, quiet operating toggle, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1223. D. Four Way Single Throw Toggle: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC, maintained contacts, quiet operating toggle, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1224. E. Key Operated Single Pole Single Throw: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC , maintained contacts, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1221. F. Key Operated Double Pole Single Throw: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC , maintained contacts, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1222. . G. Key Operated Three Way Pole Single Throw: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC , maintained contacts, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1223. H. Key Operated Four Way Pole Single Throw: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt AC , maintained contacts, sidelback wiring and ground screw. 1. Hubbell # 1224. I. 120 Volt Pilot Light Switch: 20 Ampere, 120 Volt, maintained contacts, single pole single throw, sidelback wiring, red handle illuminated when circuit is energized. 1. Hubbell # 1221PL J. 277 Volt Pilot Light Switch: 20 Ampere, 277 Volt, maintained contacts, single pole single throw, sidelback wiring, red handle illuminated when circuit is energized. 1. Hubbell # 1221PL7. . 96-099/8-96 WIRING DEVICES 16140-3 2.04 COVERPLATES A. Stainless Steel Coverplates: . 1. Raised shoulder style stainless steel, brushed fInish, oversize ( 3-1/8' x 4- 7/8' , single gang), in configurations up to six (6) gang as indicated on the drawings, screws to match finish, and openings to match device. B. Plastic Coverplates: 1. Smooth finish nylon, oversize ( 3-1/8' x 4-7/8" , single gang), in configurations up to six (6) gang as indicated on the drawings, screws to match finish, and openings to match device. C. Surface Mounted: 1. Corrosion-resistant steel, rounded comers and edges, stainless steel screws, single or multiple gang as indicated on the drawings. Openings to match device(s) and construction to match box. D. Weatherproof: 1. Gasketed, hinged with spring loaded closers, secured with corrosion-resistant screws and UL listed for wet location. 2.06 DEVICE AND COVERPLATE COLOR/FINISH A. When the wiring device is flush mounted, the devices shall be gray with stainless steel coverplates. . B. Devices installed in floor boxes or surface mounted boxes shall be gray. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the type device indicated by symbol or legend at the location shown on the plans. B. Install devices after conductors are pulled and painting is completed. C. Install devices vertically, unless otherwise noted, with SPST switches having up as 'ON" and receptacles having ground pin at bottom. D. Where more than one device is indicated at a location, the devices shall be mounted in combined sectional gang boxes and covered with a single plate. E. Coordinate location of devices with other trades and architectural features. Do not locate devices on two different finishes such as half on wall title and half on painted surface. END OF SECTION 16140 96-099/8-96 WIRING DEVICES 16140-4 . . SECTION 16170 MOTOR AND EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description: 1. Provide power wiring to each motor, all mechanical equipment, all kitchen equipment, and all miscellaneous equipment included in the contract documents. Power wiring is the system of conductors from the energy source to the equipment that conducts the electrical energy which does work or provides heat. 2. Provide a disconnect switch, fused where prescribed, for each motor or piece of equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16440: Disconnect Switches 2. Section 16475: Overcurrent Protection 3. Section 16050: Electrical General PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.01 STARTERS A. Provided under other divisions except where specifically prescribed in Division 16 documents. 2.02 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT A. Motors, mechanical equipment, kitchen equipment, etc., provided under other divisions. 2.03 CONTROL AND INTERLOCK WIRING A. Control wiring, (i.e., HVAC controls, remote pushbutton stations, thermostats, etc.), is excluded except where specifically prescribed in Division 16 documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate all rough-in and final power wiring and equipment connection with other subcontractors. B. Install and connect individually mounted starters provided by other subcontractors. C. Label each disconnect switch and starter with name of equipment it serves. D. Coordinate overcurrent device rating with nameplate of motor or equipment which it protects. . END OF SECTION 16170 96-099/8-96 MOTOR AND EQUIPNfENT CONNECTIONS 16170-1 . SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description: 1. Identify the following electrical equipment with a nameplate or directory indicating load served or equipment name: a. Switchboard, Main and all Branches b. Transformers c. Panelboards, Main and Branch Breakers d. Disconnect Switches and Motor Starters e. Contactors, Time Switches, and Relays 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Sample of Nameplate PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES . A. 277 Volt and 480 Volt equipment - Bakelite Label, red face, white core. B. 120 Volt, 208 Volt, and 240 Volt - Bakelite Label, black face, white core. C. Lettering: 1. Main Service Disconnect - 1/2" high letters. 2. All others - 1/4" high letters. 2.02 PANELBOARD DIRECTORY A. Panelboard Manufacturers Directory in plastic sleeve on inside of panel cover door. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Securely mount each nameplate to its respective equipment with screws or epoxy type cement. Double sided foam core type tape is not acceptable. B. Type in the branch breaker load information onto the manufacturers panel directory. Mark all spares in pencil. Install in plastic sleeve on inside of panel cover door. C. Label all junction box covers with the circuit number installed in the box with a permanent marker. . END OF SECTION 16195 96-099/8-96 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-1 . SECTION 16420 SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description 1. Provide electrical service entrance as shown on the drawings and specifications. 2. Provide transient voltage source suppression for the service entrance. 3. Electrical service shall be 120/208 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire wye connected. B. Related Sections 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 16110: Raceways 3. Section 16120: Wire and Cables PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR A. Provide Transient Voltage Surge Suppression on Service Entrance conductors. . 1. Single stage parallel hybrid design transient voltage source suppressor. a. Line to ground protection b. U.L. Listed and tested to U.L. 1499, ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 c. Maximum surge current per phase (8 x 20us) 100,000 amps/phase d. Withstand 1,000 sequential category C, Bl-wave impulses e. Status alarm monitor Acceptable Products a. TYCOR International Corp. - PPY Series 250 or equal by LEA DYNATECH 2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide service entrance conductors and conduit duct bank as indicated on the drawings. B. Concrete encase duct bank per NFPA 70, Article 310. . 96-099/8-96 SERVICE ENTRANCE 16420-1 3.02 UTILITY COMPANY COORDINATION A. Obtain electrical service from local utility serving this area. . B. Provide metering as indicated on the drawings. Obtain and comply with utility company metering requirements. C. Obtain requirements for installation of utility company's transformers and primary cabling. Provide conduits, concrete pads, elbows, etc. as required by utility company. D. Coordinate connection requirements of service entrance conductors to utility company transformer. END OF SECTION 16420 . 96-099/8-96 SERVICE ENTRANCE 16420-2 . . SECTION 16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description 1. Provide disconnect switches in configurations as indicated on the drawings complete with enclosures and accessories. B. Related Sections 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 01300: Submittals 3. Section 16170: Motor and Equipment Connections 4. Section 16475: Overcurrent Protection 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers as Follows: 1. General Electric 2. SiemenslITE 3. Square D 4. Westinghouse/Cutler-Hammer 1.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A. Disconnect switches shall be heavy duty (NEMA Type HD) and Underwriters Laboratories Listed. B. All switches shall have blades which are fully visible in the "OFF" position when the switch door is open. All current carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. Switches shall have removable arc suppressors where necessary to permit easy access to line side lugs. Lugs shall be front removable and UL listed for 60 degrees C or 75 degrees C, aluminum or copper wires. . 96-099/8-96 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440-1 C. Switches shall be quick-make, quick-break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Provisions for padlocking the switch in the "OFF" position with at least three locks shall be provided. Switches shall have a dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door when the handle is in the "ON" position, and to prevent closing of the switch . mechanism with the door open. The handle position shall indicate whether the switch is "ON" or "OFF". . D. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless specified as NEMA 3R on the plans. Covers on NEMA 1 enclosures shall be attached with pin type hinges, NEMA 3R covers shall be securable in the open position. NEMA 3R enclosures for switches thru 200 amperes shall have provisions for interchangeable bolt- on hubs. Hubs shall be as indicated on the plans. NEMA 3R enclosures shall be manufactured from galvanized steel. Enclosures shall have a gray baked enamel fInish, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized steel. E. Switches shall be horsepower rated for ac and/or dc as indicated by the plans. All fusible switches rated 100 thru 600 amperes at 240 volts and 30 thru 600 amperes at 600 volts shall have a UL approved method of field conversion from standard Class H fuse spacing to Class J fuse spacing. The switch also must accept Class R fuses and have provisions for field installation of a UL listed rejection feature to reject all fuses except Class R. The UL listed short circuit rating of the switches shall be 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes when Class R or Class J fuses are used with the appropriate rejection scheme. The UL listed short circuit rating of the switch, when equipped with Class H fuses, shall be 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes. 800 and 1200 ampere switches shall have provisions for Class L fuses and shall have a UL listed short circuit rating of 200,000 rIDS symmetrical amperes. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 96-099/8-96 A. Install disconnect switch adjacent to equipment it serves or as located on the plans. B. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and/or structural surfaces. Coordinate mounting of disconnects to roof top mechanical equipment with supplier/installer. END OF SECTION 16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440-2 . . SECTION 16450 GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Description: 1. Provide a grounding system for the main building service and each separately derived system originating at the respective grounding electrode(s) and radiating to every electrical power controlling and consuming device in the system. 2. Provide a grounding system for the pool area and pool shell as shown on the drawings and which meets all requirements of NEe Article 680, paragraph 22. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 16110: Raceways 3. Section 16120: Conductors 1.02 SUBMITTALS: . A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DRIVEN GROUND RODS: A. Provide ten (10) feet long, 5/8 inch diameter copperclad steel ground rods. 2.02 EXOTHERMIC WELDS: A. Provide exothermic copper welds with materials and configuration to match application. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Cadweld 2.03 GROUND CLAMPS: A. Bronze, U.L. listed, with configuration to match application. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. Bumdy Ilsco Thomas & Betts O.Z. Gedney . 96-099/8-96 GROUNDING 16450-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE GROUNDING ELECTRODES: . A. Driven Ground Rods: Install two driven ground rods minimum 10 feet apart, located outside of building, and as close as possible to the service switchboard but a minimum of 36" from the building foundation. Locate in non-paved area where feasible. Install so as to maintain accessibility to top of rod. Provide each with box with removable cover for inspecting ground rod connection. Install box so that top is flush with finished grade. B. Building Steel: Select a connection point on the building steel as close as possible to the domestic water service entrance that will also remain exposed. C. Domestic Water Pipe: Select a connection point on the domestic water pipe as close as possible to the point it enters the building and that will also remain exposed. D. Sprinkler Water Pipe: Select a connection point on the sprinkler water pipe as close as possible to the point it enters the building and that will also remain exposed. 3.02 MAIN SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODES BONDING CONDUCTORS: A. Install a 3/0 bare stranded copper conductor between each grounding electrode and its closest grounding electrode neighbor so that all electrodes are bonded together. B. Exothermic weld each bonding connection both cable to cable and cable to grounding electrode. . 3.03 MAIN SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR: A. Install a 3/0 bare stranded copper conductor from the closest driven ground rod to the service panelboard ground bus. B. Exothermic weld the connection to the ground rod and ground bus. 3.04 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM GROUNDING ELECTRODE: A. Select a local grounding electrode described by the National Electrical Code and make connection to a point permanently visible. 3.05 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR: A. Install a stranded bare copper conductor sized according to NEC between the local grounding electrode and the separately derived system grounded conductor. B. Exothermic weld the grounding electrode conductor to the grounding electrode. 96-099/8-96 GROUNDING 16450-2 . . 3.06 ADDITIONAL BONDS: A. Roof Structure: Bond roof structure steel at its nearest accessible point to the building steel connection point with a 3/0 bare stranded copper conductor. Exothermic weld both connections. B. Domestic Water Meter: Install bond across water meter with 3/0 stranded bare copper conductors of sufficient length to accommodate removal of meter. Exothermic weld both connections to water pipe. C. Non-metallic Domestic Water Insulated Coupling: Install bond across insulated coupling with 3/0 stranded bare copper of sufficient length to accommodate removal of coupling. Exothermic weld both connections to water pipe. D. Telephone Service: Provide a No.6 bare stranded copper conductor bonded to the nearest exposed point on the grounding electrode system or the grounding electrode conductor to the telephone service backboard and leave six (6) feet slack at the backboard. 3.07 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR: A. General: Utilize metallic conduit and equipment enclosures for continuous equipment grounding conductor where available . Where non-metallic conduit or enclosures are used, install a separate insulated copper conductor, color coded green, from respective service panelboard or panelboard ground bus to controller and/or device. . B. All steel conduits entering the main switch shall have a threaded conduit insulated type "BLG" grounding busing bonded together and to the ground bus with a NO.4 bare stranded copper conductor. 3.08 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: A. Roof Top HV AC Units: Install an equipment grounding conductor from the respective switchboard or panelboard ground bus to the unit disconnect switch and from disconnect switch to equipment ground lug or to housing in absence of ground lug. B. Install a separate copper equipment grounding conductor between the respective ground buses of the following: 1. Service Panelboard and each Panel board 2. Panelboard and each Sub-panelboard C. Branch circuit and feeder conduits: Install a green insulated grounding conductor, as shown on the plans, in each branch circuit and feeder conduit. D. Wiring Devices: At both switches and receptacles, connect the grounding conductor to the grounding screw on the device. . 96-099/8-96 GROUNDING 16450-3 3.09 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ROUTING: A. Route equipment grounding conductor with respective feeder, power wiring and branch circuit conductors. . 3.10 CONDUITS: A. All grounding electrode conductors, equipment grounding conductors and bonds where not internal to equipment enclosures shall be installed in conduit to within 6" of terminating clamp or exothermic weld. END OF SECTION 16450 . GROUNDING 16450-4 . 96-099/8-96 . SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description: 1. Provide panelboards complete wit!l enclosure, circuit breakers, spaces, trims, covers, locks and accessories in configurations as indicated on the drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 16475: Overcurrent Protection C. Standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories #67 2. Underwriters Laboratories #489 3. Underwriters Laboratories #50 4. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) . 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets B. Shop Drawings 1. Dimensional Data a. Enclosure Size b. Gutter Space c. Cover and Trim 2. Bussing Size 3. Lug Configuration and Ratings 4. Branch Breakers 5. Main Breakers PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Square D Company referred to as Square D. . 96-099/8-96 PANELBOARDS 16470-1 2. 2.02 GENERAL Products of manufacturers listed below meeting indicated standards and specified manufacturer's product data characteristics, except as modified below, are acceptable for use, subject to prior approval of proposed product list. a. General Electric b. Siemens/ITE c. Westinghouse/Cutler-Hammer . A. Panelboards shall be of dead front construction, equipped with thermal magnetic molded case circuit breakers of frame size and trip ratings as shown on the schedule. 2.03 208Y/120 VOLT PANELBOARDS A. Circuit Breakers: 1. Circuit breakers shall be Square D type QOB (bolt-on) thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers. Breakers shall be 1, 2, or 3-pole with an integral crossbar to assure simultaneous opening of all poles in multipole circuit breakers. Breakers shall have an overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle indication. Handles shall have "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" positions. Circuit breakers shall be able to be installed in the panel board without requiring additional mounting hardware. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed in accordance with UL Standard 489 and shall be rated 240 volts ac maximum with continuous current ratings as noted on the plans. Interrupting ratings shall be as schedule with a maximum of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 volts ac. Single pole, 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers intended to switch fluorescent lighting loads on a regular basis shall carry the SWD marking. . 2. B. Bussing Assembly and Temperature Rise 1. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests, conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. Bus structure shall be insulated. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "distributed phase" or phase sequence type and shall accept either plug-on (NQO) or bolt-on (NQOB) circuit breakers. All current carrying parts of the bus structure shall be plated. 2. Panelboard bussing shall be copper or tin plated aluminum. 2.04 CABINETS AND FRONTS A. The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet, 20" wide and 5 3/4" deep. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 67 for panelboards. The box shall be fabricated from galvanized steel or equivalent rust resistant steel. Each front shall include a door and have a flush, cylinder tumbler-type lock with catch and spring-loaded stainless steel door pull. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trim clamps which shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed. Doors shall be mounted with 96-099/8-96 PANELBOARDS 16470-2 . . completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. 600A panelboard fronts shall have exposed trim clamps. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. 2.05 INTEGRATED EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT RATING A. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. This rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted in the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panel board structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of supplying the specified panelboard short circuit or greater. Testing of panelboard overcurrent devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. 2.06 UL LISTING A. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the UL label. When used as service entrance device, panelboards shall be listed for use as service equipment. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount panelboard flush or surface as prescribed with top 6'-6" A.F.F. B. Key all locks alike and give owner two key per panelboard. C. For flush mounted panelboards, provide a minimum of three spare 3/4" conduits stubbed out into ceiling space. D. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and/or structural surfaces. E. Where panelboards exceed 42 poles, provide multiple sections with equal size enclosures with 4" diameter openings with bushings between abutting enclosures. F. When panel boards are shown as feed-thru shall have an 8" bottom and side gutters. END OF SECTION 16470 . 96-099/8-96 PANELBOARDS 16470-3 . SECTION 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide fuses and circuit breakers of ampere rating and U.L. Classification as indicated on the drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General 2. Section 16440: Disconnect Switches 3. Section 16170: Motors and Equipment Connections 4. Section 16470: Panelboards 1.02 SUBMITI ALS A. Product Data 1. Manufacturers: Product Data Sheets 2. Time - Current Characteristic Curves (Average Melt) 3. Current Limitation Curves . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Fuses: 1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Cooper Industries, Bussmann Division, referred to as Bussmann. 2. Products of manufacturers listed below meeting indicated standards and specified manufacturer's product data characteristics, except as modified below, are acceptable for use, subject to prior approval of proposed product list. a. Gould Shawmut 3. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Circuit Breakers 1. Products specified as standard of quality are manufactured by Square D Company, referred to as Square D. 2. Products of manufacturers listed below meeting indicated standards and specified manufacturer's product data characteristics, except as modified below. are acceptable for use, subject to prior approval of proposed product list. a. General Electric b. Siemens/ITE c. . Westinghouse/Cutler-Hammer . 96-099/8-96 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 16475-1 3. Circuit breakers shall be of the same manufacturer as the pane1board or enclosure in which they are installed. . 2.02 FUSES A. Mains, Feeders and Branch Circuits: B. Spares: 1. Circuits 601 to 6000 amperes shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK time-delay fuses KRP-C(amp)SP. Fuses shall employ "0" rings as positive seals between the end bells and the glass melamine fuse barrel. Fuse links shall be pure silver (99.9% pure) to limit the short circuit current let- through values to low levels and comply with NEC Sections requiring component protection. The terminals shall be peened. Fuses shall be time-delay and shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds, clear 20 times rated current in .01 seconds or less and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. with an interrupting rating of 300,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class 1. Fuses shall be "LOW-PEAK YELLOW" in color. Circuits 0 to 600 amperes shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK dual-element fuses LPN-RK, LPS-RK, or LPJ. All dual-element fuses shall have separate overload and short-circuit elements. Fuses shall incorporate a spring activated thennal overload element having a 284 degree Fahrenheit melting point alloy and shall be independent of the short-circuit clearing chamber. The fuse shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds (30A, 250V Class RKl case size shall be a minimum of 8 seconds at 500% of rated current) and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, lnc with an interrupting rating of 300,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. The fuses shall be Time-Delay UL Class RKl or J to maintain the engineered protection of the system components. Fuses shall be "LOW-PEAK YELLOW" in color. . 2. 1. Upon completion of the building, the electrical contractor shall provide the Owner with spare fuses as shown below: a. 10% (minimum of 3) of each type and rating installed fuses shall be supplied as spares. 2. BUSSMANN spare fuse cabinet - Catalog No. SFC shall be provided to store the above spares. The spare fuse cabinet (SFC) shall include a supply of "LOW- PEAK YELLOW" NOTICE labels. 2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Description: 96-099/8-96 1. Circuit breakers shall be Square D FA, KA, LA, NH, PA and/or PC one, two or three pole molded case circuit breakers rated 15 through 2500 amperes, 120V.ac, 240V.ac, 277V.ac, 480V.ac, as specified on the drawings. Breakers shall have an interrupting rating to match the panel in which they are installed or as indicated on the drawings. All circuit breakers shall be UL and CSA listed, IEC 157-1 rated, meet NEMA Standard ABI-1975 and Federal Specification W -C-375B/GEN, when applicable. Breakers covered under this specification may be installed in panelboards, switchboards, individual OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 16475-2 . . enclosures, motor control centers, combination motor starters or I-LINE busway plug-in units. B. Construction: 1. Molded case circuit breakers shall have overcenter toggle-type mechanisms, providing quick-make, quick-break action. Breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Each circuit breaker shall have trip indication by handle position and shall be trip-free. Two and three pole breakers shall be common trip. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Circuit breakers with frame sizes greater than 100 amperes shall have variable magnetic trip elements which are set by a single adjustment (to assure uniform tripping characteristics in each pole). A push-to-trip button shall be provided on the cover for mechanically tripping the circuit breaker. the circuit breaker shall have reverse connection capability and be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. C. Terminations: 1. Circuit breakers shall have removable lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper and aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be UL listed for installation of mechanical type or compression type lugs. 2.04 CURRENT LIMITING CIRCUIT BREAKERS . A. Description: 1. Current limiting circuit breakers from Square D shall be I-LIMITER IF (20-100 amperes), IK (1l0-250 amperes) and shall be rated at (240V.ac) (480V.ac) with an interrupting rating of 100,000 rIDS symmetrical amperes. IL current limiting circuit breakers (300-400 amperes) shall be rated (240V.ac) (480V.ac) with an interrupting rating of 200,000 rIDS symmetrical amperes. All I-LIMITER circuit breakers shall meet UL requirements as current limiting circuit breakers, be CSA listed, IEC 157-1 rated, meet NEMA Standard ABI-1975 and Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN. B. Construction: 1. Current limiting circuit breakers shall be supplied in molded case construction. The circuit breaker section shall have an overcenter, trip-free toggle-type mechanism with quick-make, quick-break action. A push-to-trip button shall be provided on the cover for mechanically tripping the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker shall have permanent trip units containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. The thennal trip element shall be calibrated for 40 degrees C. ambient temperature. the breaker shall have reverse connection capability and be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. . 96-099/8-96 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 16475-3 C. Terminals: 1. The current limiting circuit breakers shall have removable lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper and aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be UL listed for installation of mechanical type or compression type lugs. . D. Current and Energy Limitation: 1. On high level fault currents, the I-LIMITER circuit breaker shall peak current and let thru energy and provide a voltage transient-free interruption at near unity power factor. On fault currents below the threshold of limitation, the 1- LIMITER circuit breaker shall provide conventional overload and short circuit protection. E. Series Connected Ratings: 1. Combinations for series connected interrupting ratings shall be recognized by Underwriters Laboratories and shall appear in the Recognized Component Directory under the "Circuit Breakers -Series Connected" product category DKSY2. Current limiting circuit breakers shall allow the use of branch circuit breakers with lower interrupting capacities on systems capable of delivering fault currents up to 200,000 rIDS symmetrical amperes at 480V.ac and 100,000 rIDS symmetrical amperes at 600V.ac. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION . A. Install fuses in all switches shown on the plans which require fuses. B. Fuses shall not be installed in the switch until equipment is ready to be energized. C. Install "LOW-PEAK YELLOW" NOTICE labels to alert the end user of the engineered level of protection of the electrical equipment. They shall be marked with the proper fuse rating, per the drawings, and placed in a conspicuous location on the enclosure. These labels are available with the spare fuse cabinet (SFC) and are also available upon request from Bussmann. 3.02 INSTALLATION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Install circuit breakers in panelboards, loadcenters, switchboards, distribution panelboards, and enclosures as shown on the drawings. B. Terminate wiring into circuit breaker lug. Tighten lug to torque level as marked on the lug. END OF SECTION 16475 96-099/8-96 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 16475-4 . . SECTION 16500 LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description: 1. Provide lighting fixtures as prescribed in the lighting fixture schedule complete with housing, junction boxes, ballasts, lamp sockets, lamps, lenses, baffles and trims installed with support from building structure. Verbal description of fixture in schedule will take precedence over manufacturer number. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050: Electrical General. C. Standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories labeled and listed. 2. CBM Approved 3. ANSI C82.2 4. 1992 National Energy Conservation Act. . 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers Product Data Sheets. B. Shop Drawings for Custom Fixtures. C. ITL certified photometric reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHT FIXTURES: As prescribed in lighting fixture schedule. 2.02 FLUORESCENT BALLAST A. Electronic: Solid state electronic, Class P, Class A sound rating, CBM certified ,90 degree Celsius, capable of operating one to four lamps. 1. Acceptable manufacturers as follows: a. Advance b. Motorola c. Magnatec . 96-099/8-96 LIGHTING 16500-1 2.03 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLAST A. Metal Halide Lamp: Core and coil or constant autotransformer lead-peaked, high power factor (90% minimum), starting current less than operating, 10% lamp power variation on 10% line potential variation, 180 degree Celsius Class H insulation, -20 degree Fahrenheit starting temperature. . B. Manufacturers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows: a. Advance b. General Electric c. Universal d. Jefferson PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Support: 1. Support each fixture from the building structure. 2. Support in a manner that ensures the fixture weight being equally distributed from each support and the fixture remaining in a level position. 3. Provide support systems capable of carrying 300% of load imposed. B. For pendant or suspended fixtures mounted to suspended ceilings provide 1/4" steel rods above the suspended ceiling from building structure to fixture. Provide a minimum of two supports for each chassis and spaced a maximum of 4 feet on center. . C. For recessed H.LD. and fluorescent fixtures recessed in a suspended ceiling, provide 2 #10 awg. wire supports from building structure to fixture. Provide a minimum of two supports for each chassis spaced a maximum of 4 feet on center and located on diagonal corners of the fixture. Provide tie down clips to secure fixture to the ceiling grid. D. For recessed single incandescent, provide #10 A WG steel hanging wire from building structure to fixture; minimum of 2 separate supports per fixture. E. For each recessed fixture, provide a trim to match the type ceiling (plaster, grid, exposed panel, etc.) in which it is being installed. F. Aim and adjust all fixtures with lamp position, tilt, shutters, rotation or other types of adjustment during installation. The Architect or his representative will determine the final aiming and adjustment of such fixtures during the substantial completion job visit. Fixtures serving areas where day lighting dominates will be adjusted after sunset. G. Provide electrician with equipment and tools to execute aiming and adjustment instruction. END OF SECTION 16500 96-099/8-96 LIGHTING 16500-2 . . SECTION 16740 TELEPHONE / COMPUTER / CATV RACEWAY SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description: I. Provide a complete raceway system including but not limited to conduits, wood backboard, outlet boxes, and pull strings, beginning with the service entrance conduit and terminating at each system outlet. B. Work Excluded: System cable, switches, coverplates and instruments. C. Related Sections: l. 2. 3. 4. Section 16050: Section 16110: Section 16130: Section 16450: Electrical General Raceways Boxes Grounding. D. Cable television and computer outlets, when indicated shall be the same as telephone outlets. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS Refer to individual related sections for information on products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate telephone service entrance with telephone company. B. Coordinate cable television service entrance (when applicable) with local cable television company. C. Provide conduit as indicated on the drawings, stubbed up above an accessible ceiling. D. Telephone and cable television system conduit shall be 3/4" conduit from single outlet and 1" conduit where homerun serves two outlets with 3/4" between outlet. E. Computer system conduit shall be 1" conduit from single outlet and 1 1/4" conduit where homerun serves two outlets with 1" between outlet. F. Provide a pull-cord in each conduit for the entire length. See notes on the plans for the routing and sizing. . G. Mount telephone backboard with bottom 1 "-0" A.F.F. 96-099/8-96 TELEPHONE / COMPUTER / CATV RACEWAY SYSTEM 16740-1 H. Mount wall outlets vertical and if shown adjacent to a receptacle, mount with 1" separation between coverplates. . I. Boxes shall be a 4" square recessed outlet box with a reducing flange to a single gang front when installed in a sheet rock wall and a single gang box when installed in a concrete block wall or a poured concrete wall. J. Provide coverplates as specified in the device section of the specifications to match the configuration necessary for the system served. All unused outlets shall have a blank coverplate provided and installed. END OF SECTION 16740 . 96-099/8-96 TELEPHONE / COMPUTER / CATV RACEWAY SYSTEM 16740-2 . . SECTION 16748 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide a microprocessor based addressable fire alarm system. The system and components shall be supplied by one manufacturer. . 1. The system shall include all required hardware, raceways, interconnecting wiring and software to accomplish the requirements of this specification and the contract drawings, whether itemized or not. 2. All equipment furnished shall be new and products of a single manufacturer. 3. In the interest of job coordination, the contractor shall contract with a single source for supplying job materials, services and programming, including final inspection/test services. 4. All references to model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish the standards of performance, quality and appearance and is based upon equipment designed and manufactured by Edwards System Technology (EST). A supplier for this equipment is Major Electronics @ 770- 509-3820 - (Michael Monroe). Notifier AFP-400 System, subject to full compliance with the plans and specifications, shall be acceptable. Other manufacturers of similar equipment must submit for review and acceptance 10 days prior to bid and be listed in a prebid addendum. 1.02 MATERIALS AND SERVICES A. The system shall include, but not be limited to the following elements: 1. Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP). 2. Power supplies, batteries and battery chargers. 3. Equipment enclosures. 4. Addressable manual stations, heat detectors and smoke detectors. 5. Audible and synchronized visual evacuation signals. 6. Remote Alphanumeric Annunciators. 7. Software and firmware as required to provide a complete functioning system. 8. Wiring and raceway. 9. Installation, testing and certification, and education labor. 1.03 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Actuation of any fIre alarm initiating device shall immediately cause the following actions to be initiated: 1. Identify the type of alarm, specific device and location on the backlit LCD display at the fire alarm control panel and at the remote annunciators. Cause the system alarm LED to flash at the fire alarm control panel. Cause audible alarm signals to sound. Cause all synchronized visual alarm signals to flash. 2. 3. 4. . 96-099/8-96 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-1 5. 6. Activate signals to the mechanical control system to cause shut down designated air handling units. Activate the digital communicator to report the type of alarm and location to a remote monitoring station (required telephone line and charges for central station monitoring shall be the responsibility of the building owner). . B. Operation of the alarm acknowledge switch at the fire alarm control panel or at the remote annunciator shall permit the silencing of the alarm signals during the alarm condition. The silencing of the alarm signals shall not prevent the resounding of the alarm devices should a subsequent alarm condition occur. 1.04 CODES AND REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. The latest version of each listed publication shall be used as a guide unless the authority having jurisdiction has adopted an earlier version. 1. Factory Mutual (FM) a. FM AG Approval Guide National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. b. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code. c. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) a. Appropriate UL Standards. Local, State and National Building Codes as adopted by the authorities having jurisdiction. . 2. 3. 4. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS OF THE INSTALLER A. The contractor must have successfully installed fire alarm systems of the same type and design as specified, or have a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having the required manufacturers' training and experience. 1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings: The contractor shall include the following information in the equipment submittal : 96-099/8-96 1. Complete manufacturer's catalog data including supervisory power usage, alarm power usage, physical dimensions, finish and mounting requirements. Submit panel configuration and interconnection of modules and all other data as required to make an informed judgement regarding product suitability. At a minimum, data shall be submitted on the following: a. Fire alarm control panels and annunciators. b. Power supplies, batteries and battery chargers. c. Equipment enclosures. d. Manual stations, heat detectors, smoke detectors, and other alarm initiating devices. e. Addressable interface and control modules. LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-2 . . 2. f. Wire and cable. Power calculations. a. Battery capacity calculations. b. Supervisory power requirements for all equipment. c. Alarm power requirements for all equipment. Data describing more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to indicate the type the contractor intends to provide for a given application. Complete drawings covering the following shall be submitted by the contractor for the proposed system: a. floor plans showing all initiating, end of line, supervisory, indicating appliances, and output control devices. Raceways shall be shown, marked for size, conductor count with type and size. b. Wiring diagrams showing points of connection and terminals used for all electrical connections to the system devices and panels. 3. 4. B. Maintenance Manuals: A complete operation and maintenance manual with two sets of installation drawings shall be submitted prior to the final inspection. . 1. The following information shall be inscribed on the cover: a. "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL" b. Building location. c. The name, address and phone number of the contractor, system manufacturer and system subcontractor. d. The name and phone number of the fire department required to respond to alarms at the project location. The manual shall be legible and easily read with large drawings folded and contained in pockets. Included in the manual shall be circuit drawings, wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment and a control sequence describing start up instructions. Included shall be installation instructions, maintenance instructions, safety precautions, test procedures, performance data, and software documentation. A copy of the system certification and final tests results, as called out in Part 3 of this section of specifications shall be included in this manual. 2. 3. 1.07 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be the best suite for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer of if provided by different manufacturers, recognized as compatible by both manufacturers. B. System installation and operations shall be verified by the manufacturer's representative and a verification certificate presented upon completion. The manufacturer's representative shall be responsible for an on-site demonstration of the operation of the system and initial staff training as required by the Architect and Consulting Engineer. . 96-099/8-96 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.01 Fire Alarm Control Panel A. B. 96-099/8-96 C. The fire alarm control panel shall be Edwards Systems Technology (EST) type EST2 series or ESTI Series and shall incorporate all control electronics, relays, and necessary modules and components in a surface or semi-flush mounted cabinet. The operating controls and zone/supervisory indicators shall be located behind a locked door with viewing window. All control modules shall be labeled, and all zone locations shall be identified. The cabinet shall be steel, with a gray finish. The assembly shall contain a base panel, system power supply and battery charger with optional modules suitable to meet the requirements of these specifications. The system shall be supervised, site programmable, and of modular design with expansion modules to serve up to 96 detectors (expandable to 192) and 94 remote modules (expandable to 188), and two (2) notification appliance circuits (NACs) convertible to power risers to serve remote multiple NAC modules. The system shall store all basic system functionality and job specific data in non-volatile memory. The system shall survive a complete power failure intact. The system shall have built-in automatic system programming to automatically address and map all system devices and provide a minimum default single stage alarm system operation with support of alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, lamp test, and reset common controls. The system shall allow down loading of a job specific custom program created by system application software. It shall support programming of any input point to any output point. The system shall support the use of Bar Code readers to assist custom programming functions. It shall allow authorized customization of fundamental system operations using initiating events to start actions, timers, sequences and logical algorithms . The system shall support distributed processor intelligent detectors with the following operational attributes; integral multiple differential sensors, automatic device mapping, electronic addressing, environmental compensation, pre-alarm, dirty detector identification, automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment, dual normal/alarm LEDs, relay bases, and isolator bases. The system shall use full digital communications to supervise all addressable loop devices for placement. correct location, and operation. It shall allow swapping of "same type" devices without the need of addressing and impose the "location" parameters on replacement device. It shall initiate and maintain a trouble if a device is added to a loop and clear the trouble when the new device is mapped and defined into the system. The system shall have a U.L. Listed Detector Sensitivity test feature, which will be a function of the smoke detectors and performed automatically every 4 hours. The system shall support 100% of all remote devices in alarm and provide support for a 100% compliment of detector isolator bases. All panel modules shall be supervised for placement and return trouble if damaged or removed. The system shall have a CPU watchdog circuit to initiate trouble should the CPU fail. The system program shall meet the requirements of this project, current codes and standards, and satisfy the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Passwords shall protect any changes to system operations. . D. E. F. G. H. 1. J. K. LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-4 . . . 1. The power supply shall be a high efficiency switch mode type with line monitoring to automatically switch to batteries for power failure or brown out conditions. The automatic battery charger shall have low battery discharge protection. The power supply shall provide internal power and 24 Vdc at 4A continuous for notification appliance circuits. Auxiliary power supplylbattery charger units shall be as required to power all system alarm signal devices with a minimum of 50% reserve capacity. All outputs shall be power limited. The batteries shall be sized to support the system for twenty-four (24) hours of supervisory and trouble signal current plus general alarm for ten (10) minutes. The LCD Display Module shall be of membrane style construction with a four line by twenty character Liquid Crystal Display. The LCD shall use supertwist technology and backlighting for high contrast visual clarity. In the normal mode display the time, the total number of events and the total number of disable points. In the alarm mode display the total number of events and the type of event on display. Reserve forty (40) characters of display space for user custom messages. The module shall have visual indicators for the following common control functions; AC Power, alarm supervisory, monitor, trouble, disable, ground fault, CPU fail, and test. There shall be common control keys and visual indicators for; reset, alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, and one custom programmable key/indicator. Provide four pairs of display control keys for selection of event display by type (alarm, supervisory, monitor and trouble) and forward / backward scrolling through event listings. The operation of these keys shall be integrated with the related common control indicators to flash the indicators when undisplayed events are available for display and turn on steady when all events have been displayed. Allow the first event of the highest priority to capture the LCD for display so that arriving fire fighters can view the first alarm event "hands free". Provide system function keys; status, reports, enable, disable, activate, restore, program, and test. The module shall have a numeric keypad, zero through nine with delete and enter keys. The Main Controller Module (MCM) shall control and monitor all local or remote peripherals. It shall support the LCD Display Module, power supply, remote LCD and zone display annunciators, strip and carriage printers, and support communication interface standard protocol (CSI) devices such as color computer annunciators and color graphic displays. The RS-485 port shall be capable of supporting up to 32 remote annunciators. The MCM shall provide one loop controller circuit, two notification appliance circuits, and common form "C" contacts for alarm, supervisory, and trouble. Contact ratings shall be 24 Vdc at lA. Provide sealed maintenance free lead acid batteries to provide backup power. System batteries shall be mounted in the equipment enclosures or in a separate battery enclosure. M. N. o. 2.02 Manual Stations: . 96-099/8-96 A. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans type SIGA-270 Addressable Manual Stations. Manual Stations shall be constructed of die-cast zinc and finished with red epoxy powder coat paint complemented by aluminum colored stripes and markings. The integral microprocessor built into each station shall provide self-diagnostics and history log, automatic device mapping, stand-alone operation and fast, stable communication. Stations shall mount on 2.5" deep single gang box, 4" square box with single gang ring or type 27193-1 Surface Box. LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-5 2.03 Smoke Detectors: B. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans Intelligent Dual Sensor Detectors with Bases. Each detector shall integrate two sensing technologies (photoelectric and heat) within one device. Each detector shall process and analyze information from each of its sensors separately using dynamic filters and apply a sophisticate algorithm of optimum detection accuracy. Each detector shall incorporate non-volatile memory, automatic device mapping, electronic addressing environmental compensation and integral microprocessor. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans for duct mounted locations type SIGA- DH Duct Housings with type SIGA-PS Photoelectric Sensors, type SIGA-SB Mounting Bases, type SIGA-LED Alarm Indicators, type 6261-010 Sampling Tubes and type SIGA- CR Addressable Control Relays. Intelligent Sensors shall be suitable for air velocities up to 5,000 feet per minute. . A. 2.04 Heat Detectors: A. Provide type SIGA-HFS Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Heat Detectors and type SIGA- HRS Intelligent Fixed-Temperature/Rate-of-Rise Heat Detectors with type SIGA-SB4 Bases as shown on the plans or noted herein. Each Intelligent Heat Detector shall gather analog information from its fixed temperature and/or rate-of-rise heat sensing element and convert it into digital signals. Each detector's on-board microprocessor shall measure and analyzes the signals. The information shall be compared to historical readings and time patterns to make an alarm decision. Digital filters shall be utilized to remove signal patterns that are not typical of fires. B. The microprocessor in each detector shall also provide self-diagnostics and history log, automatic device mapping, stand-alone operation, and fast, stable communication. . 2.05 Remote Relays: A. Provide type SIGA-CR Intelligent Micro-Processor Based Control Relay Modules as required to provide all auxiliary output control. Each SIGA-CR Module shall provide one form "C" dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24VDC to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. 2.06 Sprinkler Flow and Valve Supervisory Switches: A. Not Used 2.07 Alarm Signals: A. All appliances shall be U.L. Listed for Fire Protective Service. All Strobe appliances or combination appliances with strobes shall be capable of providing the "Equivalent Facilitation" which is allowed under the Americans with Disabilities Act Access Abilities Guidelines (ADA(AG)), and shall be UL 1971, and ULC S526 Listed. 96-099/8-96 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-6 .. . B. Furnish and install where shown on the plans: 1. Self-Synchronized Strobes a. Strobes shall be manufactured by EST, Cat. No. 202 Series. In-Out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. The Strobes shall be a red plastic face plate. Strobes shall provide 15/75cd and 110cd (as noted on the plans) synchronized flash outputs. Strobes shall mount in a I-gang box with lens markings oriented for wall mounting. 2. Electronic Horn Strobes a. Horns/Strobes shall be manufactured by EST, Cat. No. 757 Series. In- Out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. The Horn/Strobes shall have a red plastic housing. The Strobe shall provide 15/75cd and llOcd (as noted on the plans) synchronized flash outputs. Strobes shall have lens markings oriented for wall mounting. Horns shall provide a 100 dBA Peak sound output. Horn/Strobes shall mount in a 4" electrical box with extension ring. 2.08 Remote Communicator: A. Provide a type D2071AC Dual Line Fire Alarm Communicator (or equal EST Digital Communicator) with Power Supply/Battery Charger and Battery. Installing contractor shall provide central station monitoring for one year by a UL listed central station. Required phone lines and phone jacks shall be furnished and installed by the building owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION . 3.01 INST ALLA TION A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit and outlet boxes, and shall furnish and install all equipment and wiring in accordance with applicable local, state, and national codes, the manufacturer's recommendations, these plans and specifications. The contractor may contract with a manufacturers authorized equipment installer for any portion of the installation, but is ultimately responsible for the complete installation. 3.02 TEST A. The contractor must contract with a manufacturers authorized agent or installation firm to test and certify the system meets all provisions of the specifications and that the system is fully functional. A service technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall supervise and participate during all of the following checks, adjustments, and tests of the system. 1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. 2. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 3. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 4. Open and short Notification Appliance Circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. 5. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals. 6. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices. . 96-099/8-96 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-7 9. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all addressable smoke detectors using the Walk Test. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the F ACP and the correct activation of the control points. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying the controls performance by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar. . 7. 8. B. The supervising agent of the manufacturer shall provide a completed test results form for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. 3.03 FINAL INSPECTION A. At the final inspection, a trained representative shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. 3.04 INSTRUCTION A. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" to the Owner for inclusion in the maintenance manuals. B. Provide one four hour session of on-site instructions, with a complete and functioning system, for the designated owner representatives from the system manufacturer's authorized agent. This agent shall have a full working knowledge of this installed system and be fully prepared to present this information to the Owner to their satisfaction. "Hands-on" demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided. . 3.05 PERMITS AND APPROVALS A. Permits necessary for installation of the work shall be obtained prior to the commencement of work. B. Prior to commencement and after completion of work, notify authorities having jurisdiction. C. All applicable portions of the National Electrical Code shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to material type and quality, circuitry extensions from and connections to outlet and junction boxes, panel boards and similar appurtenances. 3.06 WARRANTY A. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment to the Owner for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-8 . 96-099/8-96 . B. The contractor shall guarantee all wlnng and raceways to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from the date of fmal acceptance of the system. C. Copies of these warranties, along with phone numbers and addresses of the manufacturer, contractor, and supervising agent shall be included. END OF SECTION 16748 . . 96-099/8-96 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 16748-9